Producer - SAP Help Portal

Producer - SAP Help Portal
Manual
1704
Document Version: 1.0 – 2017-04-15
SAP Enable Now
Producer (Cloud Edition)
CUSTOMER
Typographic Conventions
Type Style
Description
Example
Words or characters quoted from the screen. These include field names, screen titles,
pushbuttons labels, menu names, menu paths, and menu options.
Textual cross-references to other documents.
Example
Emphasized words or expressions.
EXAMPLE
Technical names of system objects. These include report names, program names,
transaction codes, table names, and key concepts of a programming language when they
are surrounded by body text, for example, SELECT and INCLUDE.
Example
Output on the screen. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages,
names of variables and parameters, source text, and names of installation, upgrade and
database tools.
Example
Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they
appear in the documentation.
<Example>
Variable user entry. Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters
with appropriate entries to make entries in the system.
EXAMPLE
2
Keys on the keyboard, for example, F 2 or E N T E R .
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Typographic Conventions
Table of Contents
1
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................. 16
2
Settings and System Requirements .......................................................................................................... 17
2.1
System Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2
Authoring Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 18
2.3
2.2.1
Required System Settings .................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.2
Settings for Recording ......................................................................................................................... 22
2.2.3
Settings for Editing ................................................................................................................................25
2.2.4
Playback Settings ................................................................................................................................. 26
Learner Settings.................................................................................................................................................... 26
2.3.1
Browser Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 27
2.3.2
Settings for Internet Explorer............................................................................................................... 27
2.3.3
Settings for Mozilla Firefox .................................................................................................................. 34
2.3.4
Settings for Google Chrome ................................................................................................................ 35
2.3.5
Settings for Safari ................................................................................................................................ 36
2.3.6
Settings on iPad.................................................................................................................................... 36
2.3.7
Settings on Android Devices ................................................................................................................37
2.3.8
Settings for e-Mails ...............................................................................................................................37
3
Simulations - Recording ............................................................................................................................. 38
3.1
Recording Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 38
3.2
Recording a Simulation ........................................................................................................................................ 38
3.3
3.4
3.2.1
Creating a Simulation Project ............................................................................................................. 39
3.2.2
Starting the Recording ......................................................................................................................... 40
3.2.3
Executing Quick Recording .................................................................................................................. 41
3.2.4
Executing Recording with Profile ........................................................................................................ 42
3.2.5
Recording Scenarios ............................................................................................................................ 44
3.2.6
Recording Bar for Recording ............................................................................................................... 46
3.2.7
Systray Controls ................................................................................................................................... 49
Rerecording a Simulation ..................................................................................................................................... 49
3.3.1
Project Changes ................................................................................................................................... 50
3.3.2
Rerecording Functionality ....................................................................................................................52
3.3.3
Preparations for Rerecording.............................................................................................................. 53
3.3.4
Starting the Rerecording ..................................................................................................................... 54
3.3.5
Executing the Rerecording ................................................................................................................... 57
3.3.6
Recording Bar for Rerecording ........................................................................................................... 62
Recording an eCATT File ...................................................................................................................................... 64
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
3
4
Simulations - Editing .................................................................................................................................. 66
4.1
Simulation Modes ..................................................................................................................................................66
4.1.1
Playing a Mode ......................................................................................................................................68
4.1.2
Mouse Simulation .................................................................................................................................68
4.2
Designing Simulation Pages .................................................................................................................................69
4.3
Editing Highlights and Bubbles.............................................................................................................................69
4.3.1
Properties of Highlights ........................................................................................................................ 70
4.3.2
Positioning Highlights and Bubbles ..................................................................................................... 71
4.3.3
Editing Bubble Text ............................................................................................................................... 72
4.4
Intro and End Pages .............................................................................................................................................. 72
4.5
Audio in Simulations .............................................................................................................................................. 73
4.6
4.7
4.5.1
Importing Audio .................................................................................................................................... 74
4.5.2
Recording Audio .................................................................................................................................... 74
4.5.3
Using Text to Speech ............................................................................................................................ 75
4.5.4
Editing Audio ......................................................................................................................................... 77
Form Structure ...................................................................................................................................................... 78
4.6.1
Creating a Form Structure ................................................................................................................... 79
4.6.2
Bubbles in Form Structure ................................................................................................................... 79
4.6.3
Removing a Form Structure ................................................................................................................ 80
Branches ............................................................................................................................................................... 80
4.7.1
Creating a Branch ................................................................................................................................. 81
4.7.2
Editing a Branch .................................................................................................................................... 81
4.7.3
Removing a Branch ............................................................................................................................... 82
4.7.4
Branches in Documentation ................................................................................................................ 82
4.8
Using Page Macros ................................................................................................................................................ 82
4.9
Anonymize Screen Area........................................................................................................................................84
4.10
Link Actions for trainer and book reader .............................................................................................................84
4.11
Creating iPad Simulations .................................................................................................................................... 85
4.11.1
4.12
4.13
4
Creating Object Image and Object Name ...........................................................................................86
Macro Parameters for Simulation Macros .......................................................................................................... 87
4.12.1
General Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 87
4.12.2
Subcategory: Bubble ............................................................................................................................88
4.12.3
Subcategory: Simulation ......................................................................................................................89
4.12.4
Subcategory: Documentation ..............................................................................................................89
4.12.5
Subcategory: Rerecord ....................................................................................................................... 90
4.12.6
Subcategory: Control ........................................................................................................................... 91
4.12.7
Subcategory: Advanced ....................................................................................................................... 91
Simulation Macros................................................................................................................................................. 91
4.13.1
Special Macros ...................................................................................................................................... 92
4.13.2
Interactions............................................................................................................................................ 97
4.13.3
Page Macros ........................................................................................................................................ 102
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
5
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing ............................................................................................. 111
5.1
General ................................................................................................................................................................... 111
5.2
Prerequisites for Target Applications ................................................................................................................ 112
5.3
Desktop Assistant ................................................................................................................................................ 113
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.3.1
Desktop Assistant Components ........................................................................................................ 114
5.3.2
Creating a Desktop Assistant ............................................................................................................. 116
5.3.3
Editing the Desktop Assistant ............................................................................................................ 119
Context Help ......................................................................................................................................................... 129
5.4.1
Context Types...................................................................................................................................... 129
5.4.2
Creating a Context Help......................................................................................................................130
5.4.3
Form for a Screen ................................................................................................................................ 136
Guided Tour .......................................................................................................................................................... 137
5.5.1
Creating a Guided Tour ....................................................................................................................... 137
5.5.2
Subcategory: Next Guided Tour Step ............................................................................................... 142
5.5.3
Branches in a Guided Tour ................................................................................................................. 142
5.5.4
Form in a Guided Tour ........................................................................................................................ 143
Object Bubble ....................................................................................................................................................... 144
5.6.1
Central Settings for Object Bubbles .................................................................................................. 145
5.6.2
Variants of the Object Bubble ............................................................................................................ 145
5.6.3
Subcategory: Object Bubble .............................................................................................................. 146
5.6.4
Hiding an Object Bubble ..................................................................................................................... 146
5.6.5
Desktop Assistent Mini Icons ............................................................................................................. 147
Creation Using Existing Simulations .................................................................................................................. 148
5.7.1
Converting the Simulation .................................................................................................................. 148
5.7.2
Post Processing after Converting ...................................................................................................... 149
Editing Content .................................................................................................................................................... 150
5.8.1
Inserting an Explanation ..................................................................................................................... 150
5.8.2
Editing Bubbles .................................................................................................................................... 151
5.8.3
Recording a Page Specifier ................................................................................................................ 152
5.8.4
Customizing Page Information .......................................................................................................... 153
5.8.5
Conditions for Input Fields ................................................................................................................. 164
5.8.6
Updating Content ................................................................................................................................ 165
5.8.7
Merging Projects ................................................................................................................................. 166
Playing Back Content .......................................................................................................................................... 167
5.9.1
Desktop Assistant Preview ................................................................................................................. 167
5.9.2
Desktop Assistant Project Playback.................................................................................................. 168
5.9.3
Using the DNT File ............................................................................................................................... 169
5.9.4
Desktop Assistant Cache.................................................................................................................... 170
5.9.5
Playback from the Manager ................................................................................................................171
5.9.6
Displaying the Guided Tour .................................................................................................................171
Desktop Assistant Macros .................................................................................................................................. 173
5.10.1
Context Help Style............................................................................................................................... 174
5.10.2
Guided Tour Style ................................................................................................................................ 175
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
5
5.10.3
Application Context ............................................................................................................................ 176
5.10.4
Screen Context.................................................................................................................................... 177
5.10.5
Guided Tour Step ................................................................................................................................ 178
5.10.6
Explanation .......................................................................................................................................... 178
5.10.7
Properties of the Interaction Macros ................................................................................................ 179
6
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing ................................................................................................... 181
6.1
Content Types for Web Assistant ....................................................................................................................... 181
6.2
Editing Web Assistant Projects ........................................................................................................................... 181
6.3
Localizing Web Assistant Content ..................................................................................................................... 182
6.4
Web Assistant Macros ........................................................................................................................................ 182
6.4.1
Settings ................................................................................................................................................ 183
6.4.2
Screen .................................................................................................................................................. 183
6.4.3
Tile ........................................................................................................................................................ 184
6.4.4
Link Tile ................................................................................................................................................ 185
6.4.5
Guided Tour Step ................................................................................................................................ 186
6.5
Context Properties of Content Objects ............................................................................................................. 186
6.6
Editing Content on the Application .................................................................................................................... 187
6.6.1
Help Topic ............................................................................................................................................ 187
6.6.2
Guided Tour ......................................................................................................................................... 190
6.6.3
Controls of the Edit Mode ................................................................................................................... 192
6.6.4
Context Information............................................................................................................................ 193
7
Quizzes ........................................................................................................................................................ 194
7.1
Quizzes in Projects .............................................................................................................................................. 194
7.2
7.3
6
7.1.1
Central Settings for Quizzes .............................................................................................................. 194
7.1.2
Creating a Quiz .................................................................................................................................... 196
7.1.3
Quiz Templates .................................................................................................................................. 200
7.1.4
Editing the Quiz Items........................................................................................................................ 205
7.1.5
Quiz Playback ..................................................................................................................................... 207
7.1.6
Quiz Documentation .......................................................................................................................... 208
Quizzes on Book Pages ...................................................................................................................................... 208
7.2.1
Creating a Quiz ................................................................................................................................... 209
7.2.2
Configuring the Feedback .................................................................................................................. 210
7.2.3
Actions and Behaviors of Quiz Items ................................................................................................ 212
Quiz Items ............................................................................................................................................................ 213
7.3.1
Multiple Choice .................................................................................................................................... 214
7.3.2
Fill in the Fields .................................................................................................................................... 215
7.3.3
Fill in the Blanks................................................................................................................................... 216
7.3.4
Matching .............................................................................................................................................. 218
7.3.5
Connection .......................................................................................................................................... 219
7.3.6
Sorting................................................................................................................................................. 220
7.3.7
Slide Control ........................................................................................................................................ 221
7.3.8
Grid ....................................................................................................................................................... 221
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
7.3.9
Puzzle .................................................................................................................................................. 222
7.3.10
Hotspot................................................................................................................................................ 224
8
Books and Book Pages ............................................................................................................................. 226
8.1
General ................................................................................................................................................................. 226
8.2
Creating a Book ................................................................................................................................................... 227
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.2.1
Defining a Book Page as Content Page ............................................................................................ 227
8.2.2
Subcategory book reader .................................................................................................................. 228
8.2.3
Alternative Navigations on Book Pages ........................................................................................... 228
Creating a Book Page ......................................................................................................................................... 229
8.3.1
Defining the Design ............................................................................................................................ 230
8.3.2
Inserting Objects ................................................................................................................................. 231
8.3.3
Table of Contents for Book Pages .................................................................................................... 232
8.3.4
Hiding a Book Page in Table of Contents ......................................................................................... 233
8.3.5
Further Properties of a Book Page ................................................................................................... 233
8.3.6
Merging Book Pages .......................................................................................................................... 233
8.3.7
Page Sound ......................................................................................................................................... 234
8.3.8
Templates for Book Pages ................................................................................................................ 237
Book Page Objects .............................................................................................................................................. 239
8.4.1
Arrow .................................................................................................................................................... 241
8.4.2
Shape................................................................................................................................................... 242
8.4.3
Shapes Overview ................................................................................................................................ 243
8.4.4
Bubble ................................................................................................................................................. 245
8.4.5
Image ................................................................................................................................................... 246
8.4.6
Text Box .............................................................................................................................................. 247
8.4.7
Placeholder ......................................................................................................................................... 247
8.4.8
Active Area .......................................................................................................................................... 248
8.4.9
Text Pop-Up ........................................................................................................................................ 249
8.4.10
Linking Content from the Workarea ................................................................................................. 250
8.4.11
Flash Animation .................................................................................................................................. 250
8.4.12
Video Object........................................................................................................................................ 252
8.4.13
Audio Object ....................................................................................................................................... 253
8.4.14
HTML Document ................................................................................................................................ 254
8.4.15
QR Code .............................................................................................................................................. 254
Object Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 254
8.5.1
Editing Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 255
8.5.2
Size and Position ................................................................................................................................ 256
8.5.3
Object Shadow.................................................................................................................................... 257
8.5.4
Link Parameters ................................................................................................................................. 257
8.5.5
Show in Documentation .................................................................................................................... 258
8.5.6
Status Bar of Control Objects ........................................................................................................... 259
Editing Objects .................................................................................................................................................... 259
8.6.1
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
Inserting an Image .............................................................................................................................. 259
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
7
8.7
8.6.2
Grouping Objects ............................................................................................................................... 260
8.6.3
Duplicating an Object......................................................................................................................... 260
8.6.4
Using Guides ........................................................................................................................................ 261
8.6.5
Aligning Objects .................................................................................................................................. 261
8.6.6
Resizing Objects .................................................................................................................................. 261
8.6.7
Arranging Objects .............................................................................................................................. 262
8.6.8
Changing the Level of Objects .......................................................................................................... 263
8.6.9
Creating a Flash Button ..................................................................................................................... 263
Actions and Effects on Book Pages .................................................................................................................. 263
8.7.1
Object Actions .................................................................................................................................... 264
8.7.2
Animation Objects ............................................................................................................................. 269
8.8
Templates for Text Units and Projects ..............................................................................................................279
8.9
Modeling Business Processes ........................................................................................................................... 280
8.9.1
Creating Processes ............................................................................................................................. 281
8.9.2
Connecting Objects ........................................................................................................................... 282
8.10
Global Settings for Book Pages ......................................................................................................................... 283
8.11
Books and Book Page View ............................................................................................................................... 283
8.11.1
8.12
Preview in the Book Page Editor ....................................................................................................... 284
Supported File Formats on Book Pages ........................................................................................................... 284
8.12.1
Requirements for Video Formats ......................................................................................................285
9
Text Units ................................................................................................................................................... 286
9.1
Structure .............................................................................................................................................................. 287
9.2
Content-Based Separation Through Typification ........................................................................................... 289
9.3
Sample Applications............................................................................................................................................ 291
10
Documentation .......................................................................................................................................... 294
10.1
Requirements for Documentation .................................................................................................................... 294
10.2
Documentation Settings .................................................................................................................................... 295
10.3
8
10.2.1
Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 295
10.2.2
Fragments........................................................................................................................................... 296
10.2.3
Settings of the Subcategories ...........................................................................................................297
10.2.4
Subcategory: Quiz.............................................................................................................................. 298
10.2.5
Subcategory: Action Table ................................................................................................................ 298
10.2.6
Compound Document Settings ........................................................................................................ 299
10.2.7
Customizing Documentation Naming ............................................................................................... 301
10.2.8
Documentation for Right-to-Left Languages .................................................................................. 302
Editing Single Documents .................................................................................................................................. 303
10.3.1
Subcategory: Documentation ........................................................................................................... 303
10.3.2
Cropping Screenshots ....................................................................................................................... 304
10.3.3
Documentation Macros ..................................................................................................................... 305
10.3.4
Process Flow........................................................................................................................................ 315
10.3.5
Heading Levels .................................................................................................................................... 317
10.3.6
Process Documents............................................................................................................................ 319
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
10.4
Generating Single Documents ........................................................................................................................... 322
10.4.1
10.5
Compound Document ........................................................................................................................................ 325
10.5.1
10.6
10.7
Types of Single Documents ............................................................................................................... 323
Generating the Compound Document ............................................................................................. 325
Master Document ............................................................................................................................................... 326
10.6.1
Generating the Master Document .................................................................................................... 326
10.6.2
Settings for the Master Document ................................................................................................... 327
10.6.3
Displaying the Master Document in Word ....................................................................................... 328
Documentation Templates ................................................................................................................................ 329
10.7.1
Managing Templates.......................................................................................................................... 329
10.7.2
Editing a Microsoft Word Template .................................................................................................. 330
10.7.3
Editing a Microsoft PowerPoint Template ........................................................................................ 331
10.7.4
Explanation Icons ............................................................................................................................... 332
11
Content Languages and Translation ....................................................................................................... 334
11.1
Content Languages and Dictionaries ................................................................................................................ 334
11.1.1
Generating Texts in Projects ............................................................................................................. 335
11.1.2
Content Languages Overview ........................................................................................................... 335
11.2
Translating Learning Contents .......................................................................................................................... 338
11.3
Translating Using Translation Templates......................................................................................................... 338
11.4
11.3.1
Exporting a Translation File ............................................................................................................... 339
11.3.2
Importing a Translation File............................................................................................................... 340
Dictionary Editor .................................................................................................................................................. 341
11.4.1
Structure and Functions ..................................................................................................................... 341
11.4.2
Setting up a Dictionary ...................................................................................................................... 342
11.4.3
Editing an Entry .................................................................................................................................. 343
11.4.4
Creating a New Entry ......................................................................................................................... 343
11.4.5
Creating a New Language .................................................................................................................. 344
11.4.6
Activating a Dictionary ....................................................................................................................... 344
11.5
Spell Checker ...................................................................................................................................................... 345
12
Publication ................................................................................................................................................. 346
12.1
Publication Types ............................................................................................................................................... 346
12.2
Publishing a Workarea ........................................................................................................................................ 347
12.2.1
Incremental Publishing in Standard Format .................................................................................... 348
12.3
Publishing Individual Objects ............................................................................................................................. 349
12.4
Preparations for the Publishing ......................................................................................................................... 350
12.5
12.4.1
Tree Structure for Publishing ............................................................................................................ 350
12.4.2
Defining a Start Link ........................................................................................................................... 350
Publishing Rules ................................................................................................................................................... 351
12.5.1
Creating Publishing Rules .................................................................................................................. 352
12.5.2
Publishing Settings ............................................................................................................................ 352
12.5.3
Publishing Desktop Assistant Content ............................................................................................. 353
12.5.4
Publishing Documents ....................................................................................................................... 354
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
9
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
12.5.5
Multifile for Optimized Playback ....................................................................................................... 354
12.5.6
Publishing Rules Resource ................................................................................................................ 356
12.5.7
Publishing by Using Command Line .................................................................................................. 357
Publishing SCORM/AICC................................................................................................................................... 358
12.6.1
Preparation ......................................................................................................................................... 359
12.6.2
Central Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 359
12.6.3
Publishing Rules for SCORM/AICC .................................................................................................. 363
12.6.4
Using SAVE 1.0 ....................................................................................................................................367
Generating a Simulation Video .......................................................................................................................... 368
12.7.1
Generate Video Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 369
12.7.2
Crop Size and Video Size.................................................................................................................... 371
Creating a Context-Sensitive Help File .............................................................................................................. 373
12.8.1
Context Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 373
12.8.2
Exporting a Context File .....................................................................................................................374
12.8.3
Testing a Context File ......................................................................................................................... 375
Use Cases for Publishing .................................................................................................................................... 375
12.9.1
Publication on a Server ....................................................................................................................... 375
12.9.2
Publication on an Intranet Share ....................................................................................................... 377
12.9.3
Publishing for Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................378
12.9.4
Publication on SAP Mobile Documents ............................................................................................378
13
Workarea and Administration.................................................................................................................. 380
13.1
Workarea ............................................................................................................................................................. 380
13.2
13.1.1
Structure and Objects ....................................................................................................................... 380
13.1.2
Resources ........................................................................................................................................... 384
13.1.3
Content ............................................................................................................................................... 390
13.1.4
Using the Local Trash .........................................................................................................................397
Manager Workarea ............................................................................................................................................. 398
13.2.1
13.3
Menus and Functions of the Manager Workarea ............................................................................ 399
Synchronization of a Manager Workarea ......................................................................................................... 400
13.3.1
Synchronization Behavior of an Object............................................................................................ 400
13.3.2
Setting the Synchronization Behavior .............................................................................................. 401
13.3.3
Additional Synchronization Settings ................................................................................................ 402
13.3.4
Synchronizing a Workarea ................................................................................................................ 403
13.3.5
Samples for Using Synchronization ................................................................................................. 404
13.3.6
Managing Manager Workarea without Synchronization ................................................................ 405
13.4
Refreshing Workarea and Objects .................................................................................................................... 405
13.5
Adapting the Workarea Structure Externally ................................................................................................... 405
13.6
10
13.5.1
Editing a Structure ............................................................................................................................. 406
13.5.2
Structure of the CSV File ................................................................................................................... 407
Filters in the Workarea ....................................................................................................................................... 409
13.6.1
Master Tags and Tags ....................................................................................................................... 409
13.6.2
Creating Filters ..................................................................................................................................... 411
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
13.6.3
Filter Resource..................................................................................................................................... 413
13.7
Searching in the Tree Structure ......................................................................................................................... 414
13.8
Glossary of Terms ................................................................................................................................................ 415
13.9
13.8.1
Creating a Glossary ............................................................................................................................. 416
13.8.2
Removing a Glossary .......................................................................................................................... 417
13.8.3
Importing a Glossary ........................................................................................................................... 417
13.8.4
Using the Glossary .............................................................................................................................. 418
13.8.5
Glossary Styles .................................................................................................................................... 419
BPM Import .......................................................................................................................................................... 419
13.9.1
Importing a BPM Structure ............................................................................................................... 420
13.9.2
Settings for Aris Import ...................................................................................................................... 421
13.9.3
Updating a BPM Structure ................................................................................................................. 421
13.9.4
Exporting Symbio Links ...................................................................................................................... 421
13.10
Inserting a File ..................................................................................................................................................... 422
13.11
Reference Counter.............................................................................................................................................. 423
13.11.1
Dependencies Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 423
13.12
Reducing the File Size of the Content ............................................................................................................... 425
14
Interface and Components ...................................................................................................................... 428
14.1
Explorer................................................................................................................................................................ 428
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.1.1
Tree Structure .................................................................................................................................... 429
14.1.2
Object Editor ....................................................................................................................................... 430
Project Editor ...................................................................................................................................................... 430
14.2.1
Thumbnail View .................................................................................................................................. 432
14.2.2
Steps of a Project ............................................................................................................................... 432
14.2.3
Step View ............................................................................................................................................ 433
14.2.4
Documentation View .......................................................................................................................... 434
14.2.5
Macro Editor ....................................................................................................................................... 434
14.2.6
History ................................................................................................................................................. 435
Book Editor .......................................................................................................................................................... 435
14.3.1
Object List ........................................................................................................................................... 437
14.3.2
Book Explorer ..................................................................................................................................... 437
14.3.3
Add Audio Dialog Box......................................................................................................................... 438
HTML Editor ........................................................................................................................................................ 438
14.4.1
Functions of the HTML Editor ........................................................................................................... 439
14.4.2
Inserting a Link .................................................................................................................................... 441
14.4.3
Inserting a Placeholder ...................................................................................................................... 442
14.4.4
Inserting an Image .............................................................................................................................. 443
14.4.5
Inserting a Screenshot ....................................................................................................................... 443
14.4.6
Pasting Texts and Images ................................................................................................................. 444
14.4.7
Searching for Text Strings ................................................................................................................. 444
14.4.8
Overview of Supported HTML Tags .................................................................................................. 445
Audio Editor ......................................................................................................................................................... 446
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
11
14.6
14.5.1
Text to Speech Dialog Box .................................................................................................................447
14.5.2
Recording Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 448
14.5.3
Dynamic Editor ................................................................................................................................... 448
Insert Link Dialog Box......................................................................................................................................... 450
14.6.1
14.7
14.8
14.9
New Window Options .......................................................................................................................... 451
Style Editor ...........................................................................................................................................................452
14.7.1
Structure and Functions.................................................................................................................... 453
14.7.2
Creating a New Style.......................................................................................................................... 453
14.7.3
Style Attributes .................................................................................................................................. 454
14.7.4
trainer Style (including library and book reader) .............................................................................455
14.7.5
Desktop Assistant Style .................................................................................................................... 458
14.7.6
Book Page Style ................................................................................................................................. 460
14.7.7
Bubble Styles ....................................................................................................................................... 461
14.7.8
Border Styles ...................................................................................................................................... 464
14.7.9
Manager Style .....................................................................................................................................467
14.7.10
Desktop Assistant: Mini Icons ........................................................................................................... 469
14.7.11
Avatars ................................................................................................................................................. 471
Text Style Editor ..................................................................................................................................................473
14.8.1
Structure and Functions..................................................................................................................... 475
14.8.2
Text Style Categories ......................................................................................................................... 475
14.8.3
Creating a Text Style ..........................................................................................................................476
14.8.4
Editing a Text Style .............................................................................................................................476
Using Colors ......................................................................................................................................................... 477
14.9.1
Custom Color Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 477
14.9.2
Color Palette ........................................................................................................................................478
14.9.3
Color Selection Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 480
14.10
Using an External Editor for Images ................................................................................................................. 480
14.11
Toolbars and Tabs ............................................................................................................................................... 481
15
Menu Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 482
15.1
Workarea Menu................................................................................................................................................... 482
12
15.1.1
Export Archive… ................................................................................................................................. 482
15.1.2
Import Archive… ................................................................................................................................. 483
15.1.3
Administration .................................................................................................................................... 483
15.1.4
Publish................................................................................................................................................. 484
15.1.5
New Group .......................................................................................................................................... 484
15.1.6
New Project ........................................................................................................................................ 485
15.1.7
New Book ............................................................................................................................................ 486
15.1.8
New Book Page ...................................................................................................................................487
15.1.9
New Text Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 488
15.1.10
Preview library .................................................................................................................................... 489
15.1.11
Generate All Content... ...................................................................................................................... 489
15.1.12
Exit ....................................................................................................................................................... 490
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
Manager Workarea Menu ................................................................................................................................... 490
15.2.1
Check Out Objects... .......................................................................................................................... 490
15.2.2
Check Out Assigned Objects ............................................................................................................. 490
15.2.3
Synchronize Workarea... .................................................................................................................... 491
15.2.4
Save to Server ..................................................................................................................................... 491
15.2.5
Update from Server (without Synchronization) ............................................................................... 491
15.2.6
Revert Object... .................................................................................................................................... 491
15.2.7
Start Editing ......................................................................................................................................... 491
15.2.8
Finish Editing....................................................................................................................................... 492
15.2.9
Change Workflow... ............................................................................................................................ 492
15.2.10
Save All Objects to Server... .............................................................................................................. 492
15.2.11
Update All Objects from Server... (without Synchronization)........................................................ 492
15.2.12
Start Editing All Objects... .................................................................................................................. 492
15.2.13
Finish Editing All Objects... ................................................................................................................ 493
15.2.14
Change Workflow for All Objects... ................................................................................................... 493
15.2.15
Manage ................................................................................................................................................ 493
15.2.16
Manage Tasks... .................................................................................................................................. 494
15.2.17
Work Offline ........................................................................................................................................ 494
15.2.18
Open Manager .................................................................................................................................... 495
Project Menu (Project Editor) ............................................................................................................................ 495
15.3.1
Save ..................................................................................................................................................... 495
15.3.2
Export Archive... ................................................................................................................................. 495
15.3.3
Publish... .............................................................................................................................................. 495
15.3.4
Open Project Directory ...................................................................................................................... 495
15.3.5
Convert to Audio Project (Simulation) ............................................................................................. 496
15.3.6
Close .................................................................................................................................................... 496
Book Page Menu (Book Page Editor) ................................................................................................................ 496
15.4.1
New Book Page ................................................................................................................................... 496
15.4.2
Add Audio... ......................................................................................................................................... 497
15.4.3
Save Book Page .................................................................................................................................. 497
15.4.4
Duplicate... .......................................................................................................................................... 498
15.4.5
Export Archive... ................................................................................................................................. 498
15.4.6
Publish... .............................................................................................................................................. 498
15.4.7
Open Folder ........................................................................................................................................ 498
15.4.8
Close .................................................................................................................................................... 499
Edit Menu ............................................................................................................................................................. 499
15.5.1
Select Macros by Type... (Project Editor) ........................................................................................ 500
15.5.2
Search & Replace Bubble Content... (Project Editor) ..................................................................... 500
Audio Menu (Simulation) .................................................................................................................................... 501
15.6.1
Play Audio ............................................................................................................................................ 501
15.6.2
Stop Audio ........................................................................................................................................... 501
15.6.3
Record Audio ....................................................................................................................................... 501
15.6.4
Pause Audio ......................................................................................................................................... 501
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
13
15.7
15.8
15.9
15.10
15.6.5
Repeat Audio ....................................................................................................................................... 501
15.6.6
Import Audio File... .............................................................................................................................. 501
15.6.7
Import Audio Again ............................................................................................................................ 502
15.6.8
Export all Audio Files.......................................................................................................................... 502
15.6.9
Delete Audio ....................................................................................................................................... 502
15.6.10
Change Audio Format... ..................................................................................................................... 502
15.6.11
Convert Text to Speech ..................................................................................................................... 503
Recording Menu (Simulation) ........................................................................................................................... 503
15.7.1
Record Application............................................................................................................................. 503
15.7.2
Rerecord Application... ...................................................................................................................... 503
Insert Menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 504
15.8.1
Insert Special Macro .......................................................................................................................... 504
15.8.2
Insert Interactions .............................................................................................................................. 504
15.8.3
Insert Page Makro .............................................................................................................................. 504
15.8.4
Insert Quiz Item .................................................................................................................................. 504
15.8.5
Insert Documentation Macro ............................................................................................................ 505
15.8.6
Adding a Step ..................................................................................................................................... 505
Documentation Menu......................................................................................................................................... 505
15.9.1
Generate Master Document ............................................................................................................. 506
15.9.2
Generate Word Document ................................................................................................................ 506
15.9.3
Generate PDF Document .................................................................................................................. 506
15.9.4
Generate HTML Document ............................................................................................................... 507
15.9.5
Generate PowerPoint Document ...................................................................................................... 507
View Menu ........................................................................................................................................................... 507
15.10.1
JavaScript Console ............................................................................................................................ 508
15.10.2
Layouts ............................................................................................................................................... 508
15.10.3
Components ....................................................................................................................................... 508
15.10.4
Floating Windows ............................................................................................................................... 509
15.10.5
Zoom ................................................................................................................................................... 509
15.10.6
Set Preview Mode ............................................................................................................................... 510
15.10.7
Show Unknown References ............................................................................................................... 510
15.10.8
Show UIDs............................................................................................................................................ 510
15.10.9
Show Language ................................................................................................................................... 510
15.10.10 Show Language Icons ......................................................................................................................... 510
15.10.11 Show Reference Counter .................................................................................................................... 511
15.11
14
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 511
15.11.1
Settings... .............................................................................................................................................. 511
15.11.2
Keyboard Settings... ............................................................................................................................ 511
15.11.3
Localization.......................................................................................................................................... 512
15.11.4
Customization ..................................................................................................................................... 514
15.11.5
Edit Master Tags... .............................................................................................................................. 515
15.11.6
Bulk Changes ....................................................................................................................................... 515
15.11.7
Update Dependency Cache ............................................................................................................... 517
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
15.11.8
Import ................................................................................................................................................... 517
15.11.9
Workarea Structure ........................................................................................................................... 522
15.11.10 Replace Bubble Styles... .................................................................................................................... 523
15.11.11
Context Administration ..................................................................................................................... 524
16
Central Configuration Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 526
16.1
Initialization and Fallback Default Parameters ................................................................................................ 526
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.1.1
Use in the Macro Settings.................................................................................................................. 527
16.1.2
Application Example .......................................................................................................................... 527
Producer .............................................................................................................................................................. 528
16.2.1
General ................................................................................................................................................ 529
16.2.2
Manager Workarea ............................................................................................................................. 530
16.2.3
Directories........................................................................................................................................... 530
16.2.4
Save ..................................................................................................................................................... 530
16.2.5
Templates ............................................................................................................................................ 531
16.2.6
Expert Features .................................................................................................................................. 532
Authoring Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 532
16.3.1
Recording - General ........................................................................................................................... 533
16.3.2
ReRecording ....................................................................................................................................... 535
16.3.3
Audio.................................................................................................................................................... 536
16.3.4
Macro Initialization ............................................................................................................................. 536
16.3.5
Book Page Editor ................................................................................................................................ 537
16.3.6
Book Page Initialization ..................................................................................................................... 538
Playback Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 538
16.4.1
General ................................................................................................................................................ 539
16.4.2
Macro Fallback Defaults .................................................................................................................... 540
16.4.3
Book Page Fallback Defaults ............................................................................................................. 540
16.4.4
Settings of trainer, book reader, library and Modes ........................................................................ 541
Desktop Assistant: Authoring Settings ............................................................................................................. 543
16.5.1
16.6
Macro Initialization ............................................................................................................................. 543
Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings .............................................................................................................. 544
16.6.1
Macro Fallback Defaults .................................................................................................................... 544
16.6.2
Desktop Assistant - Style and Windows ........................................................................................... 544
16.6.3
Desktop Assistant - Sidebar .............................................................................................................. 545
16.6.4
Desktop Assistant - Content and Behavior ...................................................................................... 546
16.7
Documentation Settings .................................................................................................................................... 546
17
Technical Support ..................................................................................................................................... 548
SAP Enable Now
Table of Contents
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
15
1
Introduction
Welcome to Producer, the SAP Enable Now tool that enables you the creation of web-based learning content
that will take the user step by step through the contents of your web or Windows application.
16
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Introduction
2
Settings and System Requirements
The following chapters handle the required settings for recording and editing contents within the Producer as
well as for playing back contents using the trainer, library and book reader functionalities.
2.1 System Requirements
In order to successfully install and use Producer, your computer must fulfill the following requirements:
Type
Operating system
Specifications

Microsoft Windows 7

Microsoft Windows 8 (without tile view)

Microsoft Windows 10 (without tile view)
64 & 32 bit version
Processor
Pentium IV, at least 1 GHz
Memory
A minimum of 4 GB
Hard drive
200 MB of free space
Microsoft Internet Explorer 11
Browser
Microsoft Edge 25
Soundcard
Microphone
Any soundcard
For production of audio projects and book pages
Any microphone
For recording of audio
Scenario
Requirement
SAP Business Suite
SAP GUI Scripting activated
Java Applications
Java Access Bridge installed
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
17
Scenario
Requirement
Microsoft Office (Word and PowerPoint) 2007 - 2016
Documentation Generation
Microsoft Office 365 (Word and PowerPoint desktop
only)
Microsoft Office 2007 and Plug-In Microsoft Save as
PDF
PDF Generation
Microsoft Office 2010 - 2016
Microsoft Office 365 (desktop components only)
Google Chrome extension installed
Google Chrome
(desktop assistant playback)
2.2 Authoring Settings
Recording, editing and previewing contents with the SAP Enable Now may need some preparations to your
authoring environment. Read the following chapters according to your operating system and recording scenario
to make your setup running perfectly.
2.2.1 Required System Settings
A few system settings are necessary for Windows operating systems to allow the recording function to
flawlessly identify Windows application objects.
If an existing setting does not match the required settings for the application profile, a dialog box will appear to
warn you when you start the recording. Facing this warning you should cancel the recording and configure the
required settings.
The following chapters describe how to configure the required system settings for each Windows operating
system. Also note the system requirements for Producer.
18
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
2.2.1.1
Windows 7
Define the correct settings for the Windows 7 operating system within the Appearance and Personalization
dialog.
You can access this dialog by opening the Control Panel. Consider to change the View by: option in upper right
corner to Category. Click Appearance and Personalization.
Set parameters as specified in table below:
Section/Parameter
Set to
Personalization
Change the theme
Adjust screen resolution
Select Windows 7 Basic.
1.
Click Advanced settings.
2.
Select Tab Monitor.
3.
In the Colors dropdown select True Color (32bit).
Display
Make text and other items larger or smaller
Set text to value Smaller - 100% (default).
Fonts
1.
Uncheck the option Turn on ClearType.
2.
Click Next.
3.
Select Yes, I want to tune all monitors now.
4.
Verify the native resolution for your monitor and
click on Next.
Adjust ClearType text
5.
The following four pages will provide you with
examples of the font display. Select the best
version to meet your needs and click on Next.
6.
Repeat steps for each of your monitors.
7.
In the last dialog box, click on Finish to confirm
the changes.
Disabling font smoothing system-wide
In some cases, deactivating the ClearType may not be sufficient for achieving error-free graphic object
recognition. If this happens, you can disable the smoothing option for screen fonts system-wide. First consult
your customer advisor before deactivating this option on your own.
The option to disable is Smooth edges of screen fonts which is found under Control panel -> System and Security
-> System -> Advanced System Settings -> Settings (Performance).
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
19
2.2.1.2 Windows 8 - Desktop View
Define the correct settings for the Windows 8 operating system within the Appearance and Personalization
dialog.
You can access this dialog in the desktop view by opening Settings -> Control Panel. Consider to change the View
by: option in upper right corner to Category. Click Appearance and Personalization.
Set parameters as specified in table below:
Section/Parameter
Set to
Personalization
Change the theme
Adjust screen resolution
Select Windows as Default Theme.
1.
Click Advanced settings.
2.
Select Tab Monitor.
3.
In the Colors dropdown select True Color (32bit).
Display
Make text and other items larger or smaller
Set text to value Smaller - 100% (default).
Fonts
1.
Uncheck the option Turn on ClearType.
2.
Click Next.
3.
Select Yes, I want to tune all monitors now.
4.
Verify the native resolution for your monitor and
click on Next.
Adjust ClearType text
5.
The following four pages will provide you with
examples of the font display. Select the best
version to meet your needs and click on Next.
6.
Repeat steps for each of your monitors.
7.
In the last dialog box, click on Finish to confirm
the changes.
Disabling font smoothing system-wide
In some cases, deactivating the ClearType may not be sufficient for achieving error-free graphic object
recognition. If this happens, you can disable the smoothing option for screen fonts system-wide. First consult
your customer advisor before deactivating this option on your own.
20
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
The option to disable is Smooth edges of screen fonts which is found under Control panel -> System and Security > System -> Advanced System Settings -> Settings (Performance).
2.2.1.3 Windows 10 - Desktop View
Define the correct settings for the Windows 10 operating system within the Appearance and Personalization
dialog.
You can access this dialog in the desktop view by opening Settings -> Control Panel. Consider to change the View
by: option in upper right corner to Category. Click Appearance and Personalization.
Set parameters as specified in table below:
Section/Parameter
Set to
Personalization
Change the theme
Select Windows as Default Theme.
Display
Make text and other items larger or smaller -> use these
Set Change the size of text, apps and other items to
display settings
value 100% (Recommended).
Fonts
1.
Uncheck the option Turn on ClearType.
2.
Click Next.
3.
Select Yes, I want to tune all monitors now.
4.
Verify the native resolution for your monitor and
click on Next.
Adjust ClearType text
5.
The following four pages will provide you with
examples of the font display. Select the best
version to meet your needs and click on Next.
6.
Repeat steps for each of your monitors.
7.
In the last dialog box, click on Finish to confirm
the changes.
Disabling font smoothing system-wide
In some cases, deactivating the ClearType may not be sufficient for achieving error-free graphic object
recognition. If this happens, you can disable the smoothing option for screen fonts system-wide. First consult
your customer advisor before deactivating this option on your own.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
21
The option to disable is Smooth edges of screen fonts which is found under Control panel -> System and Security > System -> Advanced System Settings -> Settings (Performance).
Screen resolution
For the recording of simulations, it is recommended to use a screen resolution, that can be used consistently by
all authors. If the content should also be used on mobile devices, select a screen resolution that fits with your
screen and your used tablet type. See also Browser Requirements.
The screen resolution can be changed in the Display Settings -> Advanced Display Settings. Select your required
resolution from the Resolution dropdown list. By default, the recommended resolution of the operating system
should be used.
2.2.2 Settings for Recording
According to your operating system, certain preparations and practices for recording have to be considered.
2.2.2.1 Recording under Windows
Windows allows you to run an application as a user or administrator. This is done via the command Launch as
administrator in an application link's shortcut menu.
To allow applications to be recorded free from errors, you should ensure that the Producer and application to be
recorded are called with matching rights.
2.2.2.2 Settings for the SAP Client
If projects are to be recorded using a SAP GUI for Windows client, certain settings need to be applied if the
recording is to proceed without a hitch.
2.2.2.2.1 SAP GUI Scripting
The SAP GUI Scripting is necessary for the recording that the objects in the SAP GUI window can be properly
recognized via the scripting interface from SAP. The SAP GUI Scripting should be activated on the server side so
that the object information can be extracted.
In some cases is an activation on client side necessary (see scenario). If the scripting is activated on both sides,
a red/white symbol will appear in the bottom right-hand corner.
22
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
The table gives you an overview of the recording scenarios and the necessary SAP GUI Scripting setting:
Scenario
Set to (Client)
Set to (Server)
Profound Recognition (Standard)
Deactivated
Activated
Simple Recognition
Activated
Activated
Note
NWBC with embedded SAP GUI: For the recording with profound recognition activate the SAP GUI
Scripting also on client side.
The SAP GUI Scripting on Client side can be set under the Customize Local Layout -> Options menu:
Area / Setting
Scenario Activated
Scenario Deactivated
Activate
Deactivate
Off
Disabled
Off
Disabled
Accessibility & Scripting ->
Scripting
Enable Scripting
Notify when a script attaches to a
Running GUI
Notify when a script opens a
connection
Note
Note that graphical object recognition is not possible when scripting is active. For graphical object
recognition, additional requirements are necessary which are not standard. Contact your SAP consultant
if you have any questions regarding this.
2.2.2.2.2 Settings for SAP GUI
The following settings can be defined from the option Customize Local Layout.
Area / Setting
Set to
Theme
Active theme
Select a theme for the corresponding application
profile, such as SAP signature, tradeshow…
Visual Design
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
23
Area / Setting
Set to
Font settings
Default settings
Interaction Design > Vizualisation & Interaction
Cursor Width for Input Fields on Screens
Narrow cursor
Interaction Design > Notifications
Tooltip Delay
No Tooltip
Local data
History
Off
2.2.2.2.3 Settings for Modal Dialogs
The option Dialog (modal) is to be activated for optimal recognition of objects on modal dialogs. The setting is
located on the F4 Help tab of the settings dialog, which can be launched from the Help -> Settings menu.
2.2.2.2.4 Font Settings
Position-based objects such as explanation bubbles, interactive surfaces and highlights are dependent on the
predefined font properties in SAP; having differing settings can change the layout of the interface. It is important
that the settings are the same when recording as well as when playing back the simulations (on users’ PCs) in
order to ensure that the objects are displayed properly at all times.
In order to adjust the font in your SAP system, go to the font settings in your SAP GUI:

Font settings
You can adjust the settings under Visual Design -> Font Settings.
2.2.2.2.5 Page Titles in Page Keys for SAP GUI
In the recording of SAP GUI for Windows it may be possible that advanced system information will be included in
the page key (e.g.: WA1(1)/000 SAP Easy Access instead of SAP Easy Access). By performing a rerecording or
24
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
playback a desktop assistant content this can result in an incorrect page recognition. To avoid additional
information in the page key, the following adjustment in the registry of the operating system should be done:
1.
Open the registry editor with the command regedit about the Run… dialog.
2.
Select the entry HKEY_CURRENT_USER -> SOFTWARE -> SAP -> SAPGUI Front -> SAP Frontend Server ->
Administration in the editor.
3.
Create a new DWORD value about Edit -> New:
Value name: ShowAdditionalTitleInfo
Value data: 1
4.
Restart your SAP system so that the registry entry can take effect.
5.
Change the value in the registry to 0.Thus you can deactivate the display of the title information.
Note
Changes in the registry of the operating system should only be done by administrators.
2.2.2.3 Settings for Microsoft Excel
The following setting is necessary for optimal object recognition for Excel recordings:

Disable the setting Window in the menu Freeze panes. This prevents incorrect recognition of cell positions.
2.2.2.4 Java Applications
In case the target application is a Java application, it is necessary to install Java Access Bridge on your system.
2.2.3 Settings for Editing
According to your operating system, certain preparations for editing projects have to be considered.
2.2.3.1 Editing Highlights
In certain cases, it may possible that highlights for controls are not properly displayed during the recording or
the rerecording and therefore cannot be edited. In such instances, it is recommended to activate the option
Show windows content while dragging, which is found under System Properties -> Advanced -> Performance.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
25
2.2.4 Playback Settings
Previewing local authored contents will call Internet Explorer in every case. To preview your contents created on
your local machine you have to enable Internet Explorer's ability to run local active contents. No more settings
are needed in this case.
If you edit and preview contents on a network share or on the Manager check necessary settings for your
browser as given within the chapter Learner Settings.
Enable playback of local contents as follows:
1.
Open Internet Explorer and navigate to the Internet Options command in the Tools menu.
2.
Click on the Tab Advanced and scroll to the section Security.
3.
Enable setting Allow active content to run in files on My Computer*.
2.3 Learner Settings
A few changes are required to the settings of your browser to work perfectly with SAP Enable Now
functionalities.
Independent from your preferred browser the playback functionalities require following settings:
Requirement
Enabled JavaScript
Why?
All functionalities are based on the use of JavaScript.
You must enable it.
No matter which Pop-up blocker you use, you must
disable the blocking of Pop-ups for the location you are
Deactivated Pop-up blocker
loading your contents from. Read browser-specific
chapters to get instructions how to disable built-in
Pop-up blocker functionalities.
The attributes and settings for displaying and
executing library, trainer and book reader are stored in
Activated cookies
cookies. You should therefore activate cookies in your
browser to ensure that these functionalities run
accurately.
Recommendation
Possibly it may happen that Flash contents are displayed incorrect. In this case uninstall and reinstall the
Flash plugin (do not do update only).
26
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
2.3.1 Browser Requirements
The following requirements are to be considered to ensure an error-free use of the trainer, library and book
reader functionalities, thus ensuring that contents are played back successfully.
Browser
Version
Microsoft Internet Explorer
11
Operating system
Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows 10
Microsoft Edge
25
Mozilla Firefox
48 – 51
Windows 10
Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows 10 or Mac OS X 10.5.x
Windows 7, Windows 8,
Google Chrome
50 – 57
Windows 10
Supported mobile platforms
Content playback has been tested for the system built-in browsers of the following mobile device platforms.
Keep in mind, that playback on mobile devices usually requires an online connection to published contents
(Manager or shared network storage).
Note
The playback on mobile devices is supported for tablets.
Platform
OS Version
Browser
Apple iOS
7, 8
Safari Mobile
Google Android
4.1.2
Stock Browser (AOSP)
(with deactivated Desktop View)
Windows Mobile
8
Internet Explorer 11
2.3.2 Settings for Internet Explorer
To enjoy a flawless experience of the trainer, library and book reader functions, you may have to enable
additional security settings in Internet Explorer.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
27
Note that your configuration requirements are highly dependent on the location you are playing your contents
from. This is due to the zone model in Internet Explorer (see the next chapter for more details). However, all
functions will run almost perfectly using the Internet Explorer default settings.
2.3.2.1 Basic Setup
Note
The settings configuration as handled in this chapter is based on the assumption that you use Internet
Explorer's default settings and default security levels. If you use a custom security level, read the
chapter Custom Setup to ensure your settings match the requirements.
Playback of contents located on the Internet/intranet
1.
To apply Internet Explorer Security Settings, open Internet Explorer and navigate to the Internet Options
command in the Tools menu.
2.
3.
Click on the Tab Security and select:
1.
Local Intranet, if your content is located in your corporate network
2.
Trusted Sites, if your content is located in the internet.
Click on Custom level... to open the Security Settings dialog. Enable the settings shown below and click OK
to save your changes.
4.
If your content is in the internet, click now on SItes and add the domain your content is located at to the
list.
Caution
To avoid browser security issues, we highly recommend to modify these settings in security zone Trusted
Sites and not in security zone Internet.
Contents located on your intranet (Default security level: Medium-low)
Section/Setting
Set to
Why?
ActiveX controls and plug-ins
Playback videos and animations
Display video and animation on a
webpage that does not use external
embedded in book pages and
Enable
media player
quizzes directly with the browser,
without loading an installed media
player.
28
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Contents located on the Internet (Default security level: Medium-high)
Section/Setting
Set to
Why?
ActiveX controls and plug-ins
Playback videos and animations
Display video and animation on a
webpage that does not use external
embedded in book pages and
Enable
quizzes directly with the browser,
media player
without loading an installed media
player.
Miscellaneous
Display simulation modes in trainer
Allow script-initiated windows
without size or position constraints
and book pages in book reader with
Enable
correctly positioned control
elements.
Allow websites to open windows
without address or status bars
Display the frameless top-most-
Enable
window of the Concurrent Mode.
Playback of local contents
If your contents are stored on a local hard drive or if your contents were delivered on a CD/DVD, you have to
allow active contents to be run locally.
1.
Open Internet Explorer and navigate to the Internet Options command in the Tools menu.
2.
Click on the Advanced tab and scroll to the Security section. Enable the settings as described in the
following table.
Section/Setting
Why?
Playback contents from your local hard drive(s). This is
Allow active content to run in files on My Computer*
especially important if you want to preview your
authored contents from Producer or Instant Producer.
Allow active content from CDs to run on My Computer*
Playback published contents on CD/DVD.
Advanced settings
Please ensure to have the following settings specified additionally.
1.
Open Internet Explorer and navigate to the Internet Options command in the Tools menu.
2.
Click on the Advanced tab and enable the settings as described in the following table.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
29
Section/Setting
Why?
Security
Enable native XMLHTTP support
Ensures flawless video playback.
Common settings

Configure Internet Explorer's pop-up blocker
The pop-up blocker needs to be deactivated to display simulations in the trainer. This option can be
accessed using the Tools -> Pop-up blocker menu.
Alternatively, you can input the corresponding URL in the pages that are enabled for pop-ups, in the Pop-up
blocker settings.

Print the stop page
To print the stop page of the trainer correctly you have to allow background elements to be printed.
Press the key ALT to display the menu bar. Select File > Page Setup and activate the setting Print
background colors and images.
2.3.2.2 Custom Setup
Using a custom configuration hat has been modified by you or your company’s network policy might result in
problems when playing back contents.Check that your security settings match the settings in the following table
and check that the additional settings (listed below the table) are configured correctly.
Recommendation

Note the dependencies given to different content types and the necessary settings.

Ensure that you configure these settings for the correct zone (where your contents are located).
How to apply settings
1.
To apply Internet Explorer Security Settings, open Internet Explorer and navigate to the Internet Options
command in the Tools menu.
2.
Click on the according tab and apply settings as given in the table below.
For security settings
1.
30
Click on the Tab Security and select:
1.
Local Intranet, if your content is located in your corporate network
2.
Trusted Sites, if your content is located in the internet.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
2.
Click on Custom level... to open the Security Settings dialog. Enable the settings shown below and click OK
to save your changes.
3.
If your content is in the internet, click now on Sites and add the domain your content is located at to the
list.
Caution
To avoid browser security issues, we highly recommend to modify these settings in security zone Trusted
Sites and not in security zone Internet.
Settings overview
To avoid display errors, column headers are displayed with a numeric icon that represents one of the following
functions/content types:
(1) - library
(2) - demo, test and practice mode
(3) - concurrent mode
(4) - book pages
(5) - quizzes
Tab
Section/Se
Set to
tting
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
General
Tab ->
Settings
Always open
pop-ups in a
new window
(When a
pop-up is
encountered
)
Security
ActiveX
controls
and plugins
Binary and
Enable
script
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
31
Section/Se
Set to
tting
Tab
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
behavior
Display
video and
animation
on a
webpage
that does
Enable
not use
external
media
player
Miscellaneo
us
Allow scriptinitiated
windows
without size
Enable
or position
constraints
Allow
websites to
open
windows
Enable
without
address or
status bars
Submit nonencrypted
Enable
form data
Scripting
Active
scripting
Enable
Advanced
32
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Section/Se
Set to
tting
Tab
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Multimedia
Play sounds
in webpages
Enable
Enable
native
XMLHTTP
Enable
support
2.3.2.3 Internet Explorer’s Zone Model
Security settings are divided into specific zones in Internet Explorer. Internet Explorer distinguishes between
four zones: Internet, Local Intranet, Trusted sites and Restricted sites. It is possible to configure the settings in
detail for the permitted actions within each zone. In corporate networks, it is generally the administrator who
configures these settings in accordance with the company policy. Otherwise, users may also define the settings
themselves.
A document is assigned to a specific zone based on two characteristics:

Path / URL for documents:
The paths/URLs for documents can be configured in Internet Explorer for each of the four zones (Internet,
Local Intranet, Trusted sites and Restricted sites). All other paths/URLs are automatically allocated to the
zone Internet.

The file's source (when downloading via the Windows file system):
When a document is downloaded from an external source, the zone that the file was in upon downloading is
automatically allocated to the file. In this case, Internet Explorer’s security settings for the zone (ZoneID)
detected in the file will apply.
Caution
To ensure that everything runs smoothly, it is recommended that you verify that the security zone
settings for the server as well as for the published contents and the trainer on the end user's side allow
the contents to be played back without any problems.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
33
2.3.3 Settings for Mozilla Firefox
The following settings are required for a flawless playback experience in Mozilla Firefox.
Changes in the settings dialog
Select the Settings item in the Tools menu in the open browser. Now go to the Content item in the settings dialog
to see the required options.
Setting
Set to
Block pop-up windows
Deactivate
Activate JavaScript
Activate
Click on the Advanced button to open Advanced
JavaScript settings. Activate the following options:
Advanced JavaScript settings
1.
Position window before or after other windows
2.
Hide status bar
3.
Change status bar text
Settings using about:config
Additional browser configuration settings are available to you in Firefox. You can access these settings by
entering about:config in the address bar and confirming with Enter.
Enter setting name into Search field. A setting can be activated by double-clicking on it. It is then displayed in
bold text and the value true is set.
The following settings are to be set to the value true:
Setting
What does it do?
dom.allow_scripts_to_close_windows
This setting allows the browser windows to be closed.
signed.applets.codebase_principal_support
dom.disable_window_open_feature.resizable
This setting displays browser windows in fullscreen
mode.
This setting prevents the size of an open browser
window from being changed.
security.fileuri.strict_origin_policy
34
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
This setting allows links to be executed if an HTML
page is launched from a local drive.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Printing the stop page
To print the stop page of the trainer correctly you have to allow the print of background elements. Activate the
setting Print background (Colors and Images) which is to be find within the page setup dialog under File -> Page
setup.
Note

Caused by the settings that have been activated, you will face a security message when starting the library
or a content in the trainer. Confirm this message with Allow.
Activate the option Remember this decision so that the security message will not be displayed each time
the library starts.

The default bubble audio effects in simulations and in the book reader actions are in WAV format. A
Windows Media Player plugin is required in order to be able to play back the files in Firefox.
You will find further information on the subject at: https://addons.mozilla.org/enUS/firefox/browse/type:7
2.3.4 Settings for Google Chrome
The following settings are required for a flawless playback experience in Google Chrome.
Note
The security model of Google Chrome prevents the playback of content from a file system. Content can
only be played back from a Web server.
Changing the settings
Choose the Customize and control Google Chrome button in the open browser. Choose the Settings menu
entry. Scroll to the bottom of the screen, choose Show advanced settings... and in the Privacy category, choose
the Content settings... button.
Setting
Set to
Cookies
Allow local data to be set
JavaScript
Allow all sites to run JavaScript
Pop-ups
Allow all sites to show pop-ups
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
35
2.3.5 Settings for Safari
The following settings are required for a flawless playback experience in Safari.
Playback settings
Open the browser's settings dialog using the Edit -> Preferences menu. In this menu, select the Security area and
apply the following settings:
Section/Setting
Set to
Security
Activate JavaScript
Activate
Block pop-up windows
Deactivate
Privacy
Block cookies
From third parties and advertisers
Printing the stop page (OS X only)
To print the stop page of the trainer correctly you have to allow the print of background elements. Activate the
option Print background in print dialog.
2.3.6 Settings on iPad
Specific browser settings are required for trouble-free display on an iPad. Tap Settings > Safari to change
settings:
Section/Setting
Set to
Privacy
Accept Cookies
Always or From visited
Security
Block Pop-ups
Disable
Note

To use the trainer, library and book reader functions on an iPad, you need an active Internet connection
with access to a central server hosting the published content.
36
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements

Playback performance relies on connection speed. If the connection is too slow, images might not be
loaded in time.

The iPad does not support Adobe Flash and therefore book elements containing flash animations are not
displayed.
2.3.7 Settings on Android Devices
Specific settings are required for trouble-free display on an Android device.
Section/Setting
Set to
Keyboard Settings
Predictive text
(Name depends on device)
Disable
Avoids an automatic input of text in a text field.
2.3.8 Settings for e-Mails
When using the Send Content function of the library it is required that the e-Mail program uses UTF-8 character
encoding. This avoids an incorrect display of the e-Mail text in a specific language.
Microsoft Outlook
For Microsoft Outlook UTF-8 can be activated in the Outlook Options:
Section / Setting
Set to
Advanced -> International options
Allow UTF-8 support for the mailto: protocol
SAP Enable Now
Settings and System Requirements
Activate
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
37
3
Simulations - Recording
In the Producer you are able to record the processes of your applications. In the following chapters,
the procedures of the recording and rerecording of simulations are explained.
3.1 Recording Settings
In the settings dialog box under the category Authoring Settings -> Recording - General you can specify settings
for the recording. The configurations can be opened in the Tools -> Settings...
menu.
Recommendation
Adapt the recording settings before starting with the recording to specify default settings for all
recordings.
In the recording settings you can specify the following, for example:

Recording area and size

Profile change for application changes

Recognition method

Recording mode
For more information, see the chapter Recording - General.
3.2 Recording a Simulation
The following section describes the procedure for recording simulations with the Producer.
Note
For recordings in the browser, use Microsoft Internet Explorer as the recording application profiles are
intended for this browser.
Recording modes
The Producer offers different recording types:
38
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Type
Definition
This recording mode allows you to make a fast
Quick Recording
recording of an application. No information is read
from objects.
This recording mode allows you to make a complex
recording of an application, and read information from
Recording
objects. The recordings can be used for rerecording
and for converting desktop assistant projects.
Default recording mode
You can configure the default recording mode in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
). In the category Authoring Settings -> Recording - General, choose the mode in the Recording Mode
setting. See also the chapter Recording - General.
3.2.1 Creating a Simulation Project
Create a project so that you can then record your simulation content in it. Proceed as follows:
1.
In the Explorer click on New Project
. See also the chapter New Project.
A dialog box with the following settings is opened:
1.
Name:
Enter a project name.
2.
Project Type:
Select the type Standard - Simulation from the drop-down list.
3.
Language:
Select the language for the project. The automatically created bubble texts are generated in the
language corresponding to your selection.
4.
Use Audio:
The option allows you to record a project with audio.
2.
Click on OK to create the project.
The project opens in the project editor and has the icon:
Now, you can record your content. Read the following chapters on this subject.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
39
3.2.2 Starting the Recording
To start the recording, proceed as follows:
Note
The available settings depend on the active recording mode. Not all settings are displayed in the dialog
boxes.
1. Starting the recording
1.
Open the application to be recorded.
Choose the application page where you want to start recording and prepare the application as required.
2.
Click on the Recording
button in the project editor.
The Select Window and Profile dialog box opens.
2. Choosing the window and profile
1.
Choose Window:
Select the application window that you want to record from the list. The selected window appears in the
foreground.
2.
Choose Profile:
This setting selects the application profile for recording the application automatically. If you want to use
another profile, you can change it using the drop-down box.
If both recording modes are activated, you can select Quick Recording instead of a profile.
3.
Associate with Selected Window:
Activate this setting, if you always want to use the profile for the selected application window.
4.
Record Audio:
Activate this setting, if you want to record an audio during the recording of the simulation.
See also the chapter Recording Audio.
The setting is displayed, if the project was created with the option Use Audio.
5.
Click on Continue
.
The Define Recording Area dialog box opens.
Note
If a suitable application profile could not be identified, then the default profile is used. Note that in this
case, the recognition accuracy of the interactions and controls in the application window might be limited,
depending on the application.
3. Choosing the recording area
1.
Select Region or Active Window:
Specify, if you want to record a region with a predefined size or the exact application window.
2.
40
Region settings
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording

Choose Size:
In the drop-down box you can select a predefined size for the region.

Define Width and Height:
Displays the current size.
You can specify a size for the region. The drop-down box changes to the entry Custom.

Fit Application Window:
Activate the setting, to automatically change the window size to the specified region.
3.
Start the recording using the Record
button.
Click on the Cancel button, if you want to cancel the recording.
Now the recording starts. The recording bar is displayed or the systray icon, depending on the recording mode.
Diagnosis for profile
Any problems with the recording settings are displayed in the diagnosis box. Depending on the exact problem
identified, recording may not be possible or object recognition may be restricted.

Click Cancel to resolve the problems. Then restart the recording.

Click Continue
to proceed with the recording.
3.2.3 Executing Quick Recording
To record an application using quick recording, proceed as follows:
1.
Navigate through the application screens required for the simulation. Your actions will be recorded
automatically.
2.
Pausing the recording
The recording can be interrupted using the Pause
button in the systray icon. If you are recording an
audio, then the audio recording is also paused.
3.
Resume the recording by using the Record
button. The recording is continued from the exact point at
which it was paused.
4.
Changing the application
You can change the application during recording if required.
Click on the new application in order to select the application. Continue with the recording.
5.
Stopping the recording
Click on the Stop
button in the systray icon to end the quick recording.
Afterwards, the project editor is displayed.
Recommendation
When recording audio, speak your text before selecting the corresponding control.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
41
3.2.4 Executing Recording with Profile
To record with an application, proceed as follows:
1.
Navigate through the application as needed for the simulation. Your actions will be recorded automatically.
Execute the actions slowly so that the Producer can correctly record the individual actions.
The basis of recording is the recognition of objects and controls. Algorithms are used to try to recognize
each object that you click on in an application. When an object is recognized, a corresponding macro (e.g.
Input Text
2.
or Mouse Action
) is generated.
Pausing the recording
The recording can be interrupted using the Pause
button in the recording bar. If you record an audio,
also the audio recording is paused.
3.
Recording can be resumed using the Record
button. The recording is picked up at the exact point at
which it was interrupted.
4.
Changing the application
You can change the application during recording if required by your process cycle.
Click on the new application in order to select the application. Continue with the recording.
5.
Undo an action
If an error has been made during the recording, it is now possible to undo this action. By clicking on Undo
, the macro created for the action is deleted, then you can simply proceed with your recording as
desired. Note that the Undo function will only work with the last action made. You cannot delete multiple
actions.
6.
In some instances it may be necessary to manually reset the data entered in the application or change
back to a previous application. To do so, simply pause the recording, make the necessary changes and
then proceed with the recording.
7.
Stopping the recording
To end the recording of a project, click on the Stop
button in the recording bar.
The recording bar will be closed.
3.2.4.1 Inserting Additional Macros
You can influence the design of your simulations even while recording is in progress. You have the opportunity
to insert an additional screenshot in the form of a Screen macro or an Explanation
macro.
To do this, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the menu Insert of the recording bar.
2.
Click the Insert Explanation or the Insert Screenshot button to insert the corresponding macro.
○
Inserting an explanation
Selecting the Insert Explanation function inserts an Explanation macro for the current step.
42
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
An explanation can draw attention to a specific situation. Insertion while recording is in progress
makes it easier for you to take immediate account of specific content and not have to look it up at a
later date.
Inserting a screenshot
○
The Insert Screenshot (Ctrl+Shift+b) function allows you, while recording is in progress, manually
to set up an additional screenshot for the application page currently being displayed without having
to take any action in the application. This sets up a step with a Screen macro.
You can use this screenshot for additional information between actions or else separately to draw
attention to particular functions on the application page.
3.
Continue as usual with your recording.
4.
Upon completion of the recording you can continue editing the macros as appropriate.
These functions can also be used in combination by you inserting a screenshot and then, superimposed on it, an
explanation in order to clarify a particular fact.
If you have minimized the recording bar, you can invoke these functions via the icon's context menu in the
taskbar.
3.2.4.2 Recording a Hotspot
It may happen during recording that one control cannot clearly be recognized. In this eventuality a Hotspot is
recorded.
Recording the Hotspot defines an area for a control in respect of an unrecognized control at the point that has
been clicked. The Producer creates a Mouse Action macro or where text entry is involved a Input Text macro and
populates the relevant macro's parameters with standard values. This does not involve any object information
being read out of the application.
Recognition of the Hotspot allows the recording to proceed without interruption and post-editing can then be
carried out in the macro editor and in the step view.
There is no visible difference between a recorded Hotspot macro and a regular control. A Hotspot can be
recognized from the macro type that can be read out of the macro editor in the Rerecord subcategory. A Mouse
Action macro has the value WINHotspotArea and a Input Text macro has the value WINHotspotEdit.
Note
Note that recorded Hotspots will affect a possible rerecording of a project. As the Producer does not save
any object information for the control, the Hotspot itself is rerecorded during rerecording even if there is
no control at this point.
In this regard consult the section on Interactive ReRecording.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
43
Note
Before creating a Hotspot the Producer first performs a graphical object recognition. It is therefore
possible that the size used will not be the one defined for the Hotspot but the size of an object area
identified during recognition.
3.2.5 Recording Scenarios
There are different settings and requirements for your recording scenario. See the following chapters for more
information.
3.2.5.1 Recording in Browser Window
Recording in a browser allows you to distinguish whether the displayed browser content or the browser content
and browser interface are to be recorded.
Note
For the recording with Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox, the Quick Recording mode is recommended.
Selecting the recording area
When starting recording, select the following in the Define Recording Area window:

Recording the browser content
You can record the browser content, for example, a web page or an application. The browser's user
interface is not recorded and is therefore not visible in the screenshot.

1.
Select the Region option.
2.
Select Browser Client Area in the Choose Size setting.
Recording the browser content and browser user interface
You can record the browser content and the browser user interface. This allows you to record menus and
browser dialogs as well.
○
Select the Active Window option.
Note
Make sure, that the Zoom setting of the browser is set to 100%. Other zoom levels can lead to errors
during recording.
Recommendation
The Region or Active Window option can be predefined in the Settings
under Authoring Settings ->
Recording - General. Activate the required option in the Area setting.
44
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
3.2.5.2 Recording of Microsoft Excel
For the recording of Microsoft Excel there are several recommendations to support a correct object recognition:
Preparations
Open only one workbook in Excel.
Recording an Excel cell
To record a cell entry, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a cell with a left mouse click.
2.
Enter the values.
3.
Confirm with Enter or Tab key.
4.
Click in the next cell or on a control.
Repeat these steps for each needed cell entry.
Excel shortcuts
The following shortcuts can be used during recording:
Shortcut
Enter
Shift + Enter
Description
Completes a cell entry from the cell or the Formula Bar,
and selects the cell below (by default).
Completes a cell entry and selects the cell above. This
is recorded as Enter.
Moves one cell to the right in a worksheet.
Tab
Shift + Tab
Moves to the previous cell in a worksheet or the
previous option in a dialog box. This is recorded as Tab.
Rerecording Excel
For the rerecording of Excel use the ReRecording Types. This allows you to access at any situation and to
execute the actions manually.
If at any point during interactive Rerecording the application is not in the desired state for the next step, proceed
as follows:
1.
Click on Show Control.
2.
Navigate to the next step while holding the Ctrl key.
3.
Record the correct step without holding Ctrl.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
45
No Rerecording will take place while Ctrl is pressed. This is useful when menus disappear after a click to show
the control in the previous step.
3.2.5.3 Recording for Mobile Devices
For the recording of content for playback on mobile devices, the following settings are recommended:

Screen size
For the playback of simulations on mobile devices a screen size of 1024 x 724 is recommended.
Define the size for recording in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
):
Authoring Settings -> Recording - General -> Size.

Screen resolution
For an optimized recording in combination with the defined screen size, change the screen resolution of
your workstation.

Content texts
Adapt the texts of the Recording Dictionary to create a mobile dictionary. For example, change the wording
Click... to Touch...
See also the chapter Dictionary Editor.
To create simulations for mobile applications, see the chapter Creating iPad Simulations.
3.2.6 Recording Bar for Recording
After starting the recording, the recording bar appears. The rerecording bar includes the following sections and
controls:
Buttons and menus
The buttons allow you to control the recording.
Button
Explanation
The Level Meter is displayed when recording a
Level Meter
simulation with audio. The control indicates the
recording of the audio.
The Profile list box contains the list of applications for
which an automatic application profile exists. If the
Profile
application is automatically detected, the correct
application profile is automatically selected and shown
in the list. This box can also be used to switch between
46
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Button
Explanation
application profiles manually.
Click on Record to begin recording the process.
Afterwards, it will pause itself.
Record
Clicking on the Pause button will pause the recording,
which is useful, e.g., when switching applications. It will
Pause
then resume recording (status Record).
Clicking on the button Stop will end the recording and
the macro Simulation End will be inserted into the last
Stop
step.
The Undo button allows you to reset the previous
action made in a project. Note that the Undo function
will only work with the last change made to your
Undo
project. You cannot delete multiple actions.
Menu Insert
For Insert Explanation button see chapter Inserting
Additional Macros.
Insert Explanation
For Insert Screenshot button see chapter Inserting
Additional Macros.
Insert Screenshot
Menu Tools
The button Execute Mouse Actions defines whether a
control is to be recorded and executed in the
application or whether this is to be recorded without an
action.
Execute Mouse Action
Recording controls without executing actions may
make sense, for example, if a number of controls on a
page are to be recorded and explained without quitting
the application page. This requires the button to be
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
47
Button
Explanation
deactivated.
The Choose Application button allows you to reselect
an application for recording or else switch application.
After selecting the button click on the application to
Choose Application
define the application profile.
By clicking on Settings, you are taken directly to the
Recording - General tab, which is normally accessed by
Settings
clicking on the Producer Tools -> Settings... menu.
Clicking on the button Minimize will minimize the
recording bar and an icon will appear in the Systray
instead. Controlling the recording can be carried out
Minimize
over the context menu. By clicking on the icon, the
recording bar will return to its original size.
Clicking on the button Close will stop the recording.
The program will exit recording standby mode and the
recording bar will be hidden.
Close
Status section
The status section shows you, if an action is required or if the Producer is working on a recording in the
background. In addition, supporting icons and text messages are displayed.
Status
Explanation
If an application is being recorded and the user is
required to perform an action, this section is green.
After an action has been performed (e.g. clicking on a
menu), the recording bar also shows what kind of
Record
macro was detected with the action, as well as the text
that is automatically allocated to it in the bubbles in the
project (Name, Type, Value and Subtype).
If Producer is busy with an action in the background,
the status area is red and displays the message: busy.
When this is displayed, no actions should be taken in
Busy
48
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Status
Explanation
the application being recorded.
If the recording has been paused, the status section is
yellow.
Pause
3.2.7 Systray Controls
The systray bar for the quick recording contains the following controls:
Button
Explanation
Click Pause button to pause the recording.
With the Pause key recording can be paused.
Pause
Click Record to continue recording the process.
With the Pause key recording can be continued.
Record
Click Stop button to end the recording.
With the End key recording can be stopped.
Stop
Recommendation
It is recommended to use the key functions to avoid the recording of the context menu.
3.3 Rerecording a Simulation
When using various applications, companies often encounter a variety of problems when creating the
corresponding training material.
The applications are often used across locations in different countries and language regions and therefore
consist of multiple language versions. However, the processes and operations when using the applications in the
various language versions are more or less identical.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
49
Therefore, it is necessary that companies have consistent training material explaining a particular process
available in the relevant languages in which the task is to be carried out.
Another problem lies in the new versions of an application and the changes to its interface that come part and
parcel with these newer versions. This requires a fast and simple update of the existing training material in order
to be able to describe processes according to the current version of the relevant application.
Problem definition
The following problems arise:

Localization: The goal is to create a language variant for the corresponding project based on a target
application in a different language.

Program update: The goal is to update the project based on a new version of the target application.
Troubleshooting in the Producer
The Producer offers the possibility of ReRecording. With this method it is possible to rerecord a project in a
different language as well as update the screenshots so that they correspond to new versions of the application.
This process is executed automatically by the Producer and has the advantage that a project does not have to
be manually recorded once again by the author.
ReRecording thus greatly simplifies coherent creation and updating of training material, thereby drastically
reducing the amount of effort needed when making a revised version.
3.3.1 Project Changes
The following is some but not all of the information saved in the macros after a project has been recorded:
1. Automatically generated instruction text
2. Object Name / Identifier
3. Object Image / Graphic
50
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
4. Screenshot application page
This information has to be customized to update or localize a project. The corresponding changes can be
automated to a large extent using ReRecording:
Area
Example
Description
The instructions generated while
Automatically generated
instruction texts
recording have to be customized
Click ...
according to the target application, e.g.
translated into a different language.
Identifier of the recognized
objects / Object Name
ReRecording automatically modifies
Save
the recognized objects’ identifiers.
ReRecording automatically customizes
Generated graphics / Object
the graphics of the objects contained in
Image
the bubble texts.
ReRecording automatically localizes
the application page screenshots into a
Generated screenshots
different language or a new version of
the target application.
Manually edited texts cannot
automatically be translated with
Manually edited instruction texts
This function applies your inputs
ReRecording. These texts will be
to the system.
exported in translation templates in
XLIFF or Word format, translated
externally and then re-imported.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
51
3.3.2 Rerecording Functionality
During the original automated recording of an application, the Producer creates a macro for each executed
action. This way, a project contains a sequence of macros, which when put together describe the process.
When ReRecording takes place, the Producer repeats in this process in the recorded application. Here a project
is gone through macro by macro and each action is executed and recorded once again in the corresponding
application.
This process is usually automatic and, depending on the settings actions, can also be executed manually. This
way the user can select a control during the ReRecording process and thus has the option of changing the
recording process. To recognize and execute the recorded control of an action during ReRecording, the
Producer compares the object parameters such as position, identifier and size.
Manual intervention by the author is necessary in some cases, if for example there is too much of a difference
between a control and the originally recorded object following a program update or if there are process changes
as a result of new or remote process steps. An action can also be executed manually if it was previously defined
for a control. This allows the user during ReRecording to select a control and optionally influence the
ReRecording process.
Translating a project
When the language of a project is changed using ReRecording, the project will be translated into one of the
project languages available in the Producer. Here, the automatically generated bubble texts of the macros are
replaced by text segments in the previously specified new project language. The original screenshots are
updated with screenshots from the other language version of the application.
However, projects also usually contain individually inserted texts. With the help of translation templates the text
segments can be customized before ReRecording.
Note
If only the texts of the bubbles are to be translated into a different language, without ReRecording the
project, this can be done by using the Automated Translation function.
Automatic translation makes sense if an application is only available in one language, but is needed in a
number of different languages.
Updating a project
When updating a project as a result of the production of a new version of an application, the corresponding
screenshots of the interface and buttons are rerecorded. The relevant bubble texts can be kept or updated as
required.
52
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
3.3.3 Preparations for Rerecording
Before being able to start ReRecording, a number of preparations must be made.
Note
ReRecording the projects with branches is not possible. A project will go through the ReRecording
process macro by macro in a linear fashion. However, branches provide multiple options for the path of a
project which the Producer cannot automatically follow. Branches should therefore only be integrated
into a project after ReRecording.
To be able to rerecord projects with branches, consult the ReRecording the Projects with Branches
section.
ReRecording Settings
In the central configuration dialog box under the category Authoring Settings -> ReRecording you can define
specific settings for the rerecording. The configurations can be opened about the Tools -> Settings...
menu.
For further information, see the chapter ReRecording.
3.3.3.1 Preparing the Application for Rerecording
Before starting the ReRecording some preparations are necessary in the application to be rerecorded so that
the ReRecording can be carried out in accordance with the originally recorded project:

To localize a project select the application in the desired language.

Open the application page containing the first step and ensure that the same status as in the original
recording is available (e.g. same tree structure).

Make sure that the dates and entries correspond to the system of the original recording. It might be
advisable to log off and log on to the system in order to reset existing values. If a project needs to be
localized the entries for the recording should be adjusted to the particular language.

When using dynamic pages, make sure that the state is according to the original recording. If so required
the application should be closed and reopened to remove all changes.

When localizing a project, make sure that the design of the application (e.g. SAP GUI) is the same as in the
recording.

To be able to rerecord a process, this should be repeated multiple times in the application, e.g. creating bill
of materials or routings in SAP. Creating alternative recordings usually results in a divergent process. If
necessary the created macro must be deleted or the material copied in order to enable a new recording.
Note
Macros may be deleted when working in the test system only.

When ReRecording SAP applications ensure that you are only logged on to one SAP system. If applicable,
first close all the sessions that are not required for the ReRecording.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
53
3.3.3.2 Interactive Selecting the Control
During the ReRecording process, a control can be selected interactive instead of automatically by the Producer.
This can be useful if the control is located at a different position in the application or a different control is to be
chosen for ReRecording.
This option should be applied to controls which were often not recognized during previous ReRecording
attempts. This way, the Producer does not have to look for them first.
To be able to interactive select a control when ReRecording, activate the Interactive setting in the corresponding
macro for the control. This can be done in the subcategory Rerecord of the macro editor.
During ReRecording the Producer stops at the corresponding macro. You can now select the matching control.
Consult the Executing ReRecording section as well.
It is also possible to use the Interactive setting when switching between applications during ReRecording. This
way a recording can be stopped in order to select the application.
Activate the Interactive setting for the first executable macro of the new application.
Note
An application change must be carried out during the ReRecording process as the Producer cannot
automatically select an application.
3.3.4 Starting the Rerecording
Rerecording can start once the necessary preparation is complete. To start rerecording, proceed as follows:
1. Starting the rerecording
1.
Open the application to be rerecorded. Modify the application as necessary as described in the preparation
for rerecording.
2.
Open the project to be rerecorded in the project editor of the Producer.
3.
Click on the Rerecord Application
button in the project editor.
The Rerecord Project dialog box opens.
2. Defining the project
1.
Name:
Specifies the name of the project. This is recommended if you duplicate the project.
54
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
2.
Language:
Specifies a new language for the project. All of the project languages available in Producer can be selected
from a drop-down menu.
3.
Duplicate Project:
Selecting this option duplicates the project before rerecording begins. The rerecording is performed in the
duplicated project.
The project needs to be duplicated because the rerecording is based on the original project that is
overwritten during rerecording.
4.
Click on Continue
.
The Select Window and Profile dialog box opens.
3. Choosing the window and profile
1.
Choose Window:
The recorded window and profile is selected automatically.
If not, select the application that should be rerecorded from the list. The selected application appears in
the foreground.
2.
Choose Profile:
This setting selects the application profile for recording the application automatically. If you want to use
another profile, you can change it using the drop-down box.
If you want to use another profile, you can change it using the dropdown box.
3.
Associate with Selected Window:
Activate this setting, if you always want to use the profile for the selected window.
4.
Revise Input Values:
If you select this option, you can modify the text box inputs or selections you have made in drop-down lists
after you have applied settings in a dialog. This allows you, for example, to modify inputs for your selected
language or application version. The dialog is displayed after the relevant rerecording type has started.
5.
Interactive Mode:
The option defines how you can intervene for unrecognized controls.
For further information, refer to the chapter ReRecording Types.
Now the rerecording bar opens and appears at the upper edge of the screen.
Diagnosis for profile
Any problems with the recording settings are displayed in the diagnosis box. Due to the problems specified,
recording may not be possible or object recognition may be restricted.

Click Cancel to resolve the problems. Then restart the recording.

Click Continue
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
to proceed with the recording.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
55
3.3.4.1 ReRecording Types
In the start dialog you have two buttons available you can use to start an appropriate type for the ReRecording.
The types define what to do when dealing with unrecognized controls.

Automatic
This button starts the Automatic ReRecording. With this recording method, an unrecognized control is
recorded as a Hotspot.
It is also possible to define how the method will deal with a recorded Hotspot. That means that this
recorded Hotspot can be edited with an editor or else use the wizard for the ReRecording.

Interactive
This button starts the Interactive ReRecording. This recording method can be used to edit unrecognized
controls as a Hotspot directly on the application. This involves opening an Editor which makes it possible to
position and edit the range of the object area and the bubble.
During Interactive ReRecording each control found is to be confirmed by pressing the Enter key in order
to resume ReRecording.
The interactive ReRecording still serves as a fallback method in a situation where a conflict occurs during
automatic rerecording. In a conflict situation the mode is changed to interactive mode and after the
conflict situation was resolved it is changed to automatic mode again.
3.3.4.2 Partial Rerecording
In addition to the normal ReRecording you can also launch ReRecording from a specific step or for specific,
selected steps. This allows projects to be partially recorded and it is thus not necessary to rerecord the entire
project.

Rerecord Selected Steps
This selection allows you to rerecord several related project steps. This is useful, for example, if a partial
update of associated projects is required as a result of changes within an application.
Before starting to rerecord, highlight the desired steps in the thumbnail view. Then select the option
Rerecord Selected Steps.

Rerecord from Current Step
This selection allows you to start ReRecording from a specific step. This setting is useful if you are only
supposed to rerecord from a particular section of a project. The step must be selected in the Producer
thumbnail view prior to ReRecording. Then select the option Rerecord from Current Step.
56
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
3.3.5 Executing the Rerecording
Once the ReRecording has been started the Producer executes it automatically:
1.
When ReRecording a project, the Producer goes through the macros from the original recording step by
step. The actions of the individual macros are executed in the application and recorded.
While this is happening, the recording bar is displayed in red, showing the recording and thereby the
recognition and execution of the controls.
2.
According to the type selected in the start dialog box the ReRecording is accomplished as described in the
respective chapters:
○
Automatic ReRecording
○
Interactive ReRecording Now record the project as described in the particular subchapters.
Note
If an action was incorrectly executed during ReRecording it is advisable to terminate the
ReRecording and use the selection Rerecord from current step to resume ReRecording the
remainder of the project from this step.
3.
If ReRecording was executed successfully, a dialog will appear. Confirm it with OK.
The recording bar will be closed.
3.3.5.1 Automatic Rerecording
When rerecording in automatic mode every step is recorded automatically by Producer. An intervention by the
user is only necessary if a conflict situation occurs. In this event the rerecording changes into interactive mode
and after the conflict situation was resolved it changes back to automatic mode.
If a conflict situation occurs during rerecording you are informed by means of an explanation bubble. Such a
conflict can be:

A control device does not match the originally recorded control device

A control device could not be identified

The Interactive option was activated for a macro
In addition to the occurring conflict situation the bubble text informs you how to resolve it.
Conflict approach
If one of these cases occurs, the automatic mode changes into interactive mode. By selecting the Show Control
function in the recording bar the designated control device can be recorded interactively. Click on it in order
to do so.
If a control device matches the originally recorded one you can also confirm it under Accept Control
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
57
Control device was set interactive
If the macro setting Interactive is applied in the subcategory Rerecord before the rerecording takes place, the
Producer stops at this point and changes to interactive mode. Now the object can be edited. After confirming
Accept control device in the recording bar the rerecording is resumed.
This procedure is also executed if the interactive rerecording was activated in order to rerecord Hotspots. The
particular Hotspot handling setting can be defined in the area Authoring Settings -> ReRecording in the central
configuration dialog box.
3.3.5.2 Interactive Rerecording
The interactive ReRecording allows checking the control devices which need to be rerecorded and to influence
them directly during the recording process. Furthermore, steps can be rerecorded, deleted or skipped.
Using the interactive ReRecording makes sense when many modifications need to be made, several objects
were recorded as Hotspot or major alterations were introduced to the application with regard to the original
tutorial.
Accomplishing interactive ReRecording
Interactive ReRecording stops at every object and displays it including its mark and bubble during the process.
Now you can edit the object or, if it is correct, resume rerecording directly. Confirm the object via the Accept
Control
button in the recording bar. As a result the rerecording is resumed.
Conflict approach
If a conflict situation occurs during ReRecording you are informed by means of an explanation bubble. Such a
conflict can be:

A control device does not match the originally recorded control device

A control device could not be identified

The Interactive option was activated for a macro
In addition to the occurring conflict situation the bubble text informs you how to resolve it.
By selecting the Show Control
function in the recording bar the designated control device can be recorded
interactively. Click on it in order to do this.
If a control device matches the originally recorded one you can also confirm it under Accept Control
58
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
3.3.5.3 Editing in Interactive Mode
If an object is rerecorded interactively it appears within a selection frame and with the corresponding bubble.
The selection frame can be moved within the application, adjusted in size via the handles and positioned above
the control. The bubble can also be moved to the designated position; a click in the bubble allows editing the
particular bubble text.
It is possible to navigate in the target application during interactive ReRecording in order to select a certain page
or to make required adjustments in the application.
Confirm the designated adjustments when completed under Accept Control

Show Control
in order to resume rerecording.
:
If a control is not displayed correctly you can directly rerecord it via the Show Control function. Select the
function and click on the control.

Step Preview
:
The Step Preview displays the originally recorded step so that it can be reproduced and the object adjusted
accordingly.
Further functions
The Tools and Insert menus allow you to select further functions for editing the tutorial during ReRecording:

Insert Explanation (Insert)
:
This button allows you to add an Explanation macro during ReRecording. After clicking the button select
the position for the bubble, then define the explanation text and confirm it with Ok.

Delete Control (Tools)
:
This function offers the opportunity to delete the currently selected object. Then the ReRecording is
resumed using the following object in the tutorial.

Skip Control (Tools)
:
This function allows skipping a recorded control if it does not need to be taken into account for the
ReRecording and thus remains unmodified.
Note
The bubble displayed in interactive mode corresponds to the setting in the central configuration dialog
box. It can be either the Demo or the Practice bubble.
3.3.5.4 Recording Additional Steps
While ReRecording is in progress you can use automated recording to record additional steps and add them to
your project. This comes in useful, for example, for creating additional inputs in a form.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
59
To record additional steps you need to run ReRecording interactive. Subsequently, ReRecording comes to a halt
at each step to be rerecorded with the control that has been found requiring confirmation. This enables you to
edit the control that has been found as well as access the recording bar functions and launch automated
recording.
Newly recorded steps are inserted in front of the current step to be rerecorded at which automated recording
was started. This is necessary so that once inputs have been committed ReRecording means that they are
displayed on their respective screenshots in subsequent steps.
This is how you record additional steps:
1.
If you arrive at a step before which you would like to insert other steps, start the recording at this stop. In
order to do so select the Record Control
button at the menu Insert in the recording bar.
Note
Do not confirm the step in front of which you would like to record additional steps by pressing on
the Enter key. Start recording directly as otherwise ReRecording will continue.
2.
Record the designated control devices in the same way as during regular recording. Refer to the chapter on
Executing the Recording with Profile.
3.
If you would like to resume rerecording afterwards press the ESC key. The rerecording is resumed at the
step where you started the recording.
3.3.5.5 Changing the Application
If a change of application takes place in a project a particular procedure is required in order to accomplish the
change during ReRecording. This procedure applies to the automatic mode as well as to the interactive mode.
At the point of the application change the ReRecording displays a note window to inform you that the application
does not match. Now proceed as follows to accomplish the change of application:
1.
Click on Choose in the note window.
The Choose Application dialog is opened.
2.
Select the required application from the Running Applications list.
3.
Click on Choose.
Afterwards, the rerecording continues with the required application.
3.3.5.6 ReRecording of Projects with Branches
ReRecording the projects with branches is not possible. A project will go through the ReRecording process
macro by macro in a linear fashion. However, branches do provide a number of options for progression, which is
60
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
why some controls of a branch cannot be found during ReRecording.
As a general rule, branches should therefore only be integrated into the corresponding project after
ReRecording.
If a project with branches exists, it is necessary to partially execute the ReRecording of a project. This entails the
corresponding project being split up in order to be able to rerecord steps that run linear to one another. Here,
only the corresponding step with the branch will need to be edited. See also the chapter Partial ReRecording.
When working with branches, it is necessary to remove them after ReRecording so that they can be reattached.
3.3.5.7 Key Functions for Rerecording
During ReRecording different actions can be performed using key functions. They depend on the particular type:
Automatic mode
Keys
Definition
Pause
With the Pause key ReRecording can be paused.
Esc
With the Esc key ReRecording can be cancelled.
Interactive mode
Keys
Enter
Definition
With this key you can confirm a displayed control
device and continue ReRecording.
With this key you can confirm a displayed control
Ctrl + Enter
device and continue ReRecording if the bubble is
displayed in edit view.
With a pressed Ctrl key you can navigate freely in the
Ctrl
application without an action being recorded.
This is useful for instance for selecting lists, in order to
open them and record the selection.
Esc
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Terminates recording if further steps are inserted via
the recording function.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
61
3.3.6 Recording Bar for Rerecording
After starting the rerecording, the rerecording bar appears. The rerecording bar includes the following sections
and controls:
Buttons and menus
The buttons allow you to control the recording.
Button
Explanation
The button Accept Control allows you to confirm a
control during rerecording in interactive mode and to
Accept Control
rerecord it.
If a control is not displayed correctly you can directly
rerecord it via the Show Control function. Select the
Show Control
function and click on the control.
This button opens the Step Preview. The step preview
displays the originally recorded step, allowing it to be
Step Preview
replicated and the object customized accordingly
The Rerecord button starts the rerecording process.
Rerecord
Clicking on the Pause button will pause the rerecording
session, which can useful, e.g., when switching
applications. It will then resume recording (status
Pause
ReRecord).
Menu Insert
The Record Control button starts automated recording.
This allows additional steps to be automatically
recorded during ReRecording. These are inserted in
front of the current step. The ESC key terminates the
Record Control
recording mode and rerecording continues. This
function is available during interactive ReRecording.
62
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Button
Explanation
The button Insert Explanation allows you to insert an
Explanation macro during the ReRecording session.
Insert Explanation
Menu Tools
The Delete Control button offers the opportunity to
delete the currently selected object. Then the
ReRecording is resumed using the following object in
Delete Control
the tutorial.
The Skip Control button allows skipping a recorded
control if it does not need to be taken into account for
Skip Control
the ReRecording and thus remains unmodified.
The Choose Application button allows you to reselect
an application for ReRecording or else switch
application. After selecting the button click on the
Choose Application
application to define the application profile.
By clicking on Settings, you are taken directly to the
Recording -General tab, which is normally accessed by
Settings
clicking on the Producer Tools -> Settings... menu.
Clicking on the button Minimize will minimize the
recording bar and an icon will appear in the Systray
instead. Controlling the recording can be carried out
Minimize
over the context menu. By clicking on the icon, the
recording bar will return to its original size.
Clicking on Close will stop the rerecording. The
program will exit rerecording standby mode and the
Close
recording bar will be hidden.
Status section
The status section shows you, if an action is required or if the Producer is working on a recording in the
background. In addition, supporting icons and text messages are displayed.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
63
Status
Explanation
If is busy with an action in the background, the status
area is red and displays the message: busy. When this
is displayed, no actions should be taken in the
Busy
application being recorded.
If an application is being recorded and the user is
required to perform an action, this section is green.
After an action has been performed (e.g. clicking on a
menu), the recording bar also shows what kind of
Preview Mode
macro was detected with the action, as well as the text
that is automatically allocated to it in the bubbles in the
project (Name, Type, Value and Subtype).
If the rerecording has been paused, the status section
is yellow.
Pause
3.4 Recording an eCATT File
When recording a simulation, you can create an eCATT file (eCATT.xml). eCATT (extended Computer Aided Test
Tool) files are used for importing data into test automation software.
An eCATT file can be created when recording an SAP system with SAP GUI. This file allows you to use a recorded
process for an automated test with eCATT in the live system.
For further information on using eCATT, read the specific eCATT documentation.
Prerequisites
The recording of eCATT is supported for SAP GUI for Windows. Make sure to record SAP GUI as stand-alone and
not as embedded (e.g. SAP NWBC) application.
Activating eCATT generation
eCATT files are generated in addition to the simulation modes. To generate the files, you have to activate the
eCATT setting in the central configuration dialog box (Tools -> Settings...
) under Producer -> Save ->
Standard.
64
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Recording an eCATT file
To record an eCATT file, use the project type Simulation. The information required for the eCATT file is collected
during recording. The eCATT file is generated when the project is saved.
If a project is rerecorded, the eCATT file information is updated.
When a workarea is published, eCATT files are not exported because the files are not required for content
playback.
Handling an eCATT file
Once the project has been saved, the eCATT file is generated and stored in the project folder. eCATT objects are
displayed in in the object structure of the Explorer.
The eCATT file is stored in the project folder. Open the project folder by using the Open Folder menu entry in the
context menu of the project.
You can import the eCATT.xml into your eCATT system and test the recorded process.
Note
eCATT files use always the file name eCATT.xml. If you want to use and store multiple files in a folder,
rename the files using different names.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Recording
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
65
4
Simulations - Editing
Once a simulation has been recorded in the Producer it can be edited in numerous ways. For example, so as to
enhance the didactic benefit of the projects and promote a more diverse presentation of the content. As before,
translation templates can be used to render the content into any desired language.
In addition to deleting and adding content in the form of steps or recording macros, and completing
documentation macros, the content of macros themselves can be changed and parameterized.
Take care at all times when editing that the changes you make do not compromise the consistency of the
project in relation to teaching material that has yet to be added.
4.1 Simulation Modes
The following modes can be generated for simulation projects:
Mode Name / Icon
Description
The demo mode plays the recorded process as
demonstration and displays explanations for the
executed actions.
Demo mode
User action: no action required.
Example use case: teaching a new process
The practice mode expects the user to act within the
simulated environment in the same way as with the live
application. The mode will only move to the next step
after the user has followed the instructions in the
Practice mode
correct order shown in the bubbles.
User action: executes actions displayed in instructions
Example use case: execute a process with support
The test mode does not display any instructions in the
bubbles. Users have to find their own way through the
application without any help.
Test mode
User action: executes actions unaided
Based on: practice mode
66
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Mode Name / Icon
Description
Example use case: test of users' knowledge of a
process
The concurrent mode is based on the demo mode and
is played back with an additional smaller browser
window next to to the live application. This supports
the user by offering help during the live process.
User action: executes process in live application and
Concurrent mode
clicks to continue to next step
Based on: demo mode
Example use case: supporting daily work
The guided presentation mode plays the recorded
process like a simulation and executes the actions
automatically. Each action has to be confirmed by
the user.
No bubbles are displayed and the control bar is hidden.
Guided Presentation mode
User action: confirms executed action
Based on: demo mode
Example use case: presentation of a process to an
audience
The free presentation mode expects the presenter to
act in the simulated environment in the same way as in
the live application. Input fields are filled out
automatically.
No bubbles are displayed and the control bar is hidden.
Free Presentation mode
User action: executes actions unaided
Based on: demo mode
Example use case: presentation of a process to an
audience
Activating the modes
You can specify the modes that you want to generate for your projects in the central configuration dialog box
(menu Tools -> Settings...
). The mode settings are available under Producer -> Save.
By default the guided presentation mode and the free presentation mode are deactivated. You can define the
modes globally or on a project-specific basis.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
67
Mode configuration
Each mode can be configured for playback individually. The settings are available in the Playback Settings of the
central configuration dialog box. See also the chapter Settings of trainer, book reader, library and Modes.
Note
The top-most window of the concurrent mode is only supported in Microsoft Internet Explorer. In another
browser, the mode uses a simple window view.
4.1.1
Playing a Mode
You can play a simulation mode to preview the content of your project. The simulation is played back in trainer.

Project editor
Select Play Mode in the toolbar to play the active editing mode.
Recommendation
If you start the playback of a simulation in the Producer to check it, you can follow the progress of the
playback within trainer by looking at Producer thumbnail view. This simplifies the localization of errors
since it provides direct, visual identification of the corresponding macro and thus facilitates the user's
orientation within the project.

Explorer
Select a mode of your project and select Play
in object editor.
4.1.2 Mouse Simulation
You have the facility available in the Producer to simulate mouse movements and actions while playing back
simulations in the trainer. This enables a greater emphasis to be given to actions, for displaying single and
double clicks visually, for example. You will see the mouse simulation displayed in demo mode and concurrent
mode.
Activating mouse simulation
The mouse simulation is activated in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
) from the
Show Mouse option. You will find this in the Playback Settings -> General area.
Changing the mouse pointer
In the Visual properties area of the Playback Settings -> trainer settings you can apply the Big mouse pointers
setting for defining the mouse pointer. This option defines, that the big mouse pointers will be shown for the
visualization of a simulation.
68
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
4.2 Designing Simulation Pages
You can design the pages in your simulations any way you want. This can be useful if the screenshots of the
recording do not take up the entire screen area or if you are using imported pages.
The pages are designed on the basis of the book page design so that the book page styles available in the
workarea can be used. You can find the respective settings under Playback Settings -> General -> Page Style in
the central configuration dialog (menu Tools -> Settings...
).
You can create the design as the default design for your workarea or for a specific project. A specific project can
be defined as template for other projects.
Settings

Style:
The setting defines the page design. A book style that uses the macro can be selected for this from the
drop-down list.
The setting also affects the book page objects inserted in a simulation.

Centered Background Image:
This setting centers the background image or the simulation screenshot. If the option is deactivated, it is
positioned in the upper left-hand corner.

Page Color:
Determines the color of the page. The Choose Color...
function can be used to define an appropriate
value. This can be specified using the RGB or HSV color space or as a hexadecimal value. If no background
color is to be displayed, click the Transparent

button.
Background Color:
Determines the color of the background. The Choose Color...
function can be used to define an
appropriate value. This can be specified using the RGB or HSV color space or as a hexadecimal value. If no
background color is to be displayed, click the Transparent

button.
Border:
Defines the thickness of the border in pixels. If no border is to be displayed, the value is to be set to 0.

Border Color:
Defines the color of an object's border. The Choose Color...
function can be used to define an
appropriate value. This can be specified using the RGB or HSV color space or as a hexadecimal value.

Border Style:
Determines the style of the border that you can select from the drop-down list.
4.3 Editing Highlights and Bubbles
You can enhance interaction macros with highlights and bubbles. The highlights outline the recording control
and the bubbles display text with instructions, tips, etc.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
69
The highlights and bubbles can be edited from the Step view. For example, you can choose a macro from the
thumbnail view, such as Mouse Action. Then in the step view, the highlights and bubbles for the recorded control
will be displayed on the screenshot for the macro Screen.
There are options on the toolbar that allow you to switch between demo and concurrent modes to display the
bubbles. This allows the bubbles to be viewed and edited for the respective mode.
4.3.1 Properties of Highlights
Main differentiations for the use of highlights are:

Standard Highlight
The highlight is generally used for the visualization of actions and explanations.

Help Highlight
The highlight is used in case that the user asks for help during playback of a test mode.
In accordance to the use the settings can be set individually.
Settings in central configurations
The settings can be set globally or project specific in the central configuration dialog in the area Playback
Settings -> General -> Highlights.

Border:
This parameter defines the thickness of the project highlight frame in pixels. Pixel widths available are from
1 to 10.

Color:
This defines the color of the highlight border. The color may be entered directly as an RGB value in HEX
format or selected from out of the Color Picker dialog box.

Help Color:
This highlight color will be used in practice or test mode in case that the user is asking for help. The
highlight will be used to show areas of correct action.

Form Structure Color for Correct Answer:
This highlight color will be used in practice or test mode in case that the user is asking for help. The
highlight will be used to show areas of correct actions in a form structure.

Type:
This option defines the form of the highlights used in the simulation.
70
○
Rectangle
○
Ellipse
○
Underline
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Note
The highlight types Ellipse and Underline are only displayed during playback. In step view and in
documentation the highlights are always use the type Rectangle.

Effect / Help Effect:
This option defines the kind of effect used for highlights.
○
Show
○
Animate
○
Pulsate
○
Frame Flashing
○
Focus Zoom
4.3.2 Positioning Highlights and Bubbles
In the step view you can change the size and positioning of the bubbles and highlights as follows:
Changing the position
1.
Select an object in the step view.
2.
A red line will appear around the object. Click on the object again, this time holding the mouse button
down.
3.
With the mouse button still pressed, drag the object to the desired position.
4.
Release the mouse button and the object is now positioned.
Changing the size
1.
Select an object in the step view.
2.
Dots appear around the object so that you can change its size. Click on one of the dots and hold the mouse
button down.
3.
With the mouse button still pressed, drag the dot inwards or outwards to the desired size.
4.
Release the mouse button to set the new size.
Changing the bubble alignment
1.
Select an object in the step view.
2.
A square will appear at the spike of the bubble, which you can use to turn the object. With bubbles that do
not have a spike, the square will appear in the middle of the bubble. Click on the dot and hold the mouse
button down.
3.
With the mouse button still pressed, pull the dot away from the bubble and until you have reached the
desired position. Pull the dot towards the middle of the bubble if you wish to hide the tip.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
71
4.
Release the mouse button to set the new position.
4.3.3 Editing Bubble Text
Bubble text for the macros for each mode can be directly edited in the bubble or in the macro editor.

Editing in the step view
Double-click on a bubble and an HTML editor will appear with various options for editing the content. For
more information on the HTML editor, refer to the HTML Editor section of the document. Edit your text as
desired and click on OK to confirm your changes.

Editing in the macro editor
Changes can be made in the macro editor using the two options Demo Text and Practice Text. Click on the
respective text field and the HTML editor will appear. You can now edit the text.
Note
Note that when changes are made to the text, this text can no longer be automatically translated into
another language (Automated Translation and ReRecording). All customized text must be manually
translated or exported into a translation template to be translated externally.
4.4 Intro and End Pages
The intro page shows an introduction to the learner at the beginning of a simulation. It is also possible to start
the simulation at a specific step and to guide the learners through this chosen step. At the end of a simulation,
the end page shows a texts or a summary for the test mode result.
The intro and end pages can be used for the demo, practice and test mode as alternatives to the general start
and stop pages for simulations.
Intro Page macros
Several macros are available to define an intro page. The macros can be inserted via the Insert -> Insert Special
Macro menu. More information can be found in the macro overview chapter. The following macros have to be
inserted in this structure:

Intro Page

Intro Page Start Link
Parameters of the End Page
To define the behavior of the end page, use the associated parameters in the Simulation End
macro. For
more information, refer to the Simulation End chapter.
72
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Hide the start and stop pages
To use only the intro and end pages for a simulation, the start and stop pages should be deactivated in Playback
Settings -> trainer of the central configuration dialog. Disable the Show start page and Show stop page settings in
the Visual properties subcategory.
4.5 Audio in Simulations
The Producer supports several ways to integrate audio into simulations and to enrich the information. This
allows information to be presented using visual and audio material, thus stimulating more of the learner's
senses. This facilitates a heightened awareness and superior assimilation of the content.
Note
Audio files in simulations are only played back for the demo mode.
Prerequisite
A special audio project is required to use audio in simulations. You can either define this when setting up the
project by selecting the parameter Use Audio, or you can convert the project later on from the menu Project ->
Convert to Audio Project
.
Creating audio
Audio files for simulations can be created in the following ways:

Importing of audio files

Recording of spoken texts

Conversion of Text to Speech
The audio editor (in the project editor of the Producer) allows you to create and edit audio files.
Refer to the section on Audio Editor.
If an audio file is available in a step, you will see an audio icon in the step's thumbnail view.
Functions in the menus
In the Audio menu, there are several functions for editing audio. Refer to the relevant sections for further
information. The menu is only available for an audio project.
Supported file formats
The following audio file formats are supported:

Import of audio files
○
Sound file - wav
○
AVI sound file - avi
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
73
○

MP3 Sound file - mp3
Editing of audio in project
○
Sound file - wav
4.5.1 Importing Audio
Importing audio files allows you to easily integrate audio files into a simulation.
Note
By importing an audio file, the existing audio of a step will be overwritten.
Proceed as follows to import an audio file:
Note
During import the audio files are converted into the editing format WAV with the default audio format.
1.
Select the step for which you want to import an audio file.
2.
In Audio Editor, click the button Import Audio File...
The Choose File dialog box opens.
Alternatively you can use the Audio menu.
3.
Select the file.
4.
Click Open to insert the file.
4.5.2 Recording Audio
Audio recording allows you to narrate your own texts with the microphone. The texts can be played back as
explanations for the relevant steps.
There are two ways to record an audio:

during the recording of a simulation

during the editing of a simulation
Requirement
For audio recording, a microphone is necessary. Connect this first before starting to record.
Audio recording during recording of a simulation
During the recording of a simulation you are able to record an audio directly. When starting the recording of a
simulation the Select Application dialog includes a setting Record Audio. Activate the setting, to execute the
74
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
recording.
See also the chapter Starting the Recording.
The recording of audio is only possible during the recording and not for the rerecording of a simulation.
Audio recording during editing of a simulation
Proceed as follows to execute the recording:
1.
Click on the Record Audio...
button. The recording dialog opens.
Alternatively you can use the Audio menu.
2.
Click on Start Recording
3.
Read out your text.
.
During the recording, a sound level meter shows the volume. You also see the spoken text as an audio
track.
4.
Click on End Recording
. The recording dialog box closes.
For more information, refer to the Recording Dialog Box chapter.
Note
During the recording of an audio file, the existing audio of a step will be overwritten.
Read out the full text for your recording because it is not possible to record the text in sections. Any unwanted
parts can be cut out afterwards. If you are not satisfied with the outcome, record the text again.
Recommendation
If the recording contains background noise, then it is recommended that you edit the audio file with the
dynamic editor to improve the sound.
4.5.3 Using Text to Speech
The Text-to-Speech functionality converts written text into digitized speech. This makes it possible to play back
a simulation's bubble texts in spoken form. During the conversion process, the simulation macros bubble text is
converted into an audio file. The actual bubble continues to be displayed when playing the simulation back in the
trainer so that the two formats provide mutual support.
The default quality for text-to-speech is: 16kHz, 16bit, Mono.
4.5.3.1 Changing the Voice
The Producer supports voices for Microsoft Speech API (SAPI) and Microsoft Server Speech.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
75
The voices can be changed in:

Text to Speech dialog box

Central configuration dialog box -> Authoring Settings -> Audio

Macro Text to Speech Options
Default Windows system voice
The Producer uses the Text-To-Speech voice available on your operating system. If you want to use a different
voice, this must be changed in the Text-To-Speech settings in your operating system.
Microsoft Server Speech
Voices of the Microsoft Server Speech require a Runtime (Link) and a Runtime Language (MSSpeech_TTS Link) of the Microsoft Speech Platform. You are able to download these from the Microsoft web site.
4.5.3.2 Generating Text to Speech
We recommend that you convert text to speech after a project has been edited. Steps should be converted
individually. If a step contains several macros (for example, several steps are connected), then the texts will be
read out one after the other in the order in which the macros are arranged.
If the bubble texts of a simulation are already converted into text to speech, they are available when you open
the editor.
Proceed as follows to create a text to speech:
1.
Open the text to speech editor using the Edit Text to Speech...
button in the audio editor or Audio menu.
Refer to the chapter Text to Speech Dialog Box.
2.
Insert a text in the text field or edit the available text.
3.
Define the duration of the silence to be inserted at the beginning of the audio file.
4.
Confirm the input with OK. The dialog box is closed and the audio file generated.
Note
If a step contains several macros, the individual actions and associated spoken texts will run
asynchronously in relation to one another. This is because the texts are converted into an audio file and
are not linked to the actions. It is therefore advisable to only use one macro per step.
76
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
4.5.4 Editing Audio
The audio track can be edited in various ways to optimize the output. There are different functions available in
the audio editor.
For more information, refer to the Audio Editor chapter.
4.5.4.1 Inserting a Silence
This function inserts a silence with a defined length into a specific part of your audio.
The silence will be inserted at the position of the red marker. If an area is marked, it will be overwritten with
silence completely.
1.
Select the point of the audio track with the marker for the beginning of the silence.
2.
Click the Insert Silence...
3.
Define a value in milliseconds in the editing dialog. Only positive integer values can be used.
4.
Confirm the dialog with OK.
button.
If an area should be converted into silence, mark the relevant area on the audio track. Click the Insert Silence...
button and silence will be included immediately.
4.5.4.2 Normalizing Audio
The function Normalize allows you to equalize the volume of all audio files and thereby make audio files with
different properties consistent. The amplitude of an audio track will be increased consistently.
Recommendation
If the amplitude has big differences in the highs and lows due to normalization, it is recommended that
you edit the dynamic of the audio with the dynamic editor.
Normalization can be applied to the entire audio track or a particular area.
1.
Select an audio track and go to the audio editor.
2.
Highlight the area you want to normalize.
3.
Click the Normalize...
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
button.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
77
4.5.4.3 Trimming Audio
The Trim Audio function allows you to cut an audio track down to a specific part. Unnecessary parts can be
deleted to reduce the playback time and the size of the audio file.
To trim an audio track, proceed as follows:
1.
Mark the area of the audio track that you want to keep.
2.
Click the Trim
button in the toolbar.
The parts left and right of the highlight will be removed.
4.5.4.4 Fading Audio
Using the functions Fade In and Fade Out, you can fade a part of the audio track from mute to full volume or the
other way around. This makes the audio track much more effective and ensures smooth transitions.
In general, it is recommended that you use fading at the beginning and at the end of an audio track.
To use fading for an audio track, proceed as follows:
1.
Mark an area of the audio track, to define the position and length.
2.
Click the Fade In
or Fade Out
button in the toolbar.
4.6 Form Structure
The Form Structure function allows you to display forms realistically in practice mode or test mode. While a
simulation is in progress, the user can fill in the interactions contained within the form structure in an
individually chosen sequence and then confirm the inputs as a whole. This does not display a confirmation
immediately after an action has been inputted but only once all actions have been performed.
A Form Structure is made up as follows:

It is positioned under a Screen macro.

It has a start and end macro.

The associated interactions are to be found between the two Form Structure macros.

A Mouse Action
can be used as confirmation action.
At least two interactions should generally be available for a Form Structure.
Example Structure
Screen
Form Begin
78
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Input Text
Select Single
Radio / Checkbox
...
Mouse Action - used for confirmation
Form End
4.6.1 Creating a Form Structure
After recording a project, you can create a Form Structure in it:
1.
For the Form Structure the Screen macros are to be combined in a step with the associated actions
contained in the form. This is required as the Form Structure cannot be created in a way that spans steps.
1.
Select the Screen macros belonging to the steps whose interactions are to be used for the Form
Structure.
2.
Now click on the function Merge Selected Screens in the menu Tools -> Bulk Changes.
The first macro Screen is retained and the others that are highlighted are deleted. The previous steps'
macros are arranged in the merged step. Now create the Form Structure.
Note
A Mouse Action
macro is required as the last macro of a form structure in order to be able to
complete the form correctly. For example, this can be an OK or dialog box Save button enabling the
form inputs to be confirmed.
2.
Select the Screen macro of the merged step.
3.
In the toolbar, click on the Create Form Structure
button (menu Insert -> Insert Special Macro).
In the thumbnail view, you will now see that all of the step macros are incorporated within the Form Structure
macros.
Documentation macros contained within a step are also integrated into the form structure. But these do not
affect the sequence of the simulation and the function of the form structure as they are only used for creating
documentation.
4.6.2 Bubbles in Form Structure
The bubble texts are presented in summary form in the Form Structure for the practice mode. This provides you
with an overview that illustrates how to fill out a form and the linkages between the inputs.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
79
In demo mode and concurrent mode, the bubbles are displayed side by side as the processes are played back as
a simulation meaning that there are no inputs by the user.
The appearance of the bubbles can be edited in the Form End
macro. The individual texts accompanying the
actions can be changed within the respective macros, as before.
4.6.3 Removing a Form Structure
If a Form Structure is no longer required in a project, it can be removed. Only the start and end macros of the
Form Structure are deleted in the process; the remaining macros in the step are retained.
Note
Do not remove the macros for the Form Structure using the Delete command to avoid errors in the
project. Always remove the Form Structure using the corresponding functionality.
This is how to remove the form structure:
1.
Select the Form Begin
or Form End
2.
Click on Remove Form Structure button.
macro.
4.7 Branches
Using branches will allow the user to digress from the sequential path within a simulation. This gives the user
much more flexibility and portrays a more realistic process workflow. Two or more branches can be added to a
simulation so that the user has a choice of where to go to next.
A branch consists of several macros:

A branch is positioned under the Screen macro.

It needs a start and an end macro.

Between the start and end macro, there are two macros that contain actions leading to different
workflows.
Example Structure
Screen
Branch Begin
Mouse Action
Mouse Action
Branch End
80
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Note
Projects with branches cannot be rerecorded. During rerecording a project will run through in a linear
manner but branches can operate in a number of different ways that cannot automatically be followed.
It is recommended to duplicate a project as backup, before creating the branch. The duplicate can be
used for rerecording.
4.7.1
Creating a Branch
Once a project has been recorded, you can create a branch for it. To do so, proceed as follows:
1.
Screen macros are combined into one step in which their corresponding actions should serve as buttons
for the branches. This is important so that the buttons can be displayed properly on the page.
1.
Select the Screen macros for the step for which the macros should be used for the branch. When
doing so, make sure that these actions are located on the same application page.
2.
Then select Tools -> Bulk Changes -> Merge Selected Screens.
The first macro Screen will remain and all the other highlighted macros will be deleted. The macros
for the existing step will then be merged into the step accordingly.
2.
Select the macro Screen for the merged step.
3.
From the macro editor, click on the button Create Branch
4.
A dialog box will appear in which you can defined specific steps for individual macros. The order of the
(or Insert -> Insert Special Macro menu).
selection list corresponds with the order of the macros in the project.
Confirm by clicking on Ok.
From the thumbnail view, you can see that all the macros for the step are integrated into the macros for the
branch.
All macros that have been assigned a branch target will have an arrow
. When the mouse moves over the
arrow, the corresponding step will be highlighted in orange in the thumbnail view and the name of the step will
be displayed in a tool tip.
4.7.2 Editing a Branch
Editing a branch target
If you would like to change the target of your branch at a later time, you can open the editing dialog box by
clicking on the button Edit Branch in the macro editor. Change the target for the respective actions and confirm
the changes by clicking on OK.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
81
Bubbles in a branch
At the end of a mode, a summary of all the bubble text is displayed in one bubble within a branch. This serves as
an overview of all the possible target steps. The individual text blocks are separated with an `or` to make it
easier to differentiate between the different targets.
The bubble's appearance can be edited in the macro Branch End
. To do so, from the macro editor, set the
Layout Selection to Advanced layout. The individual text blocks for the actions can be changed in the respective
macro.
4.7.3 Removing a Branch
If a branch is no longer needed in a project, it can be removed. Only the starting and ending macros of the
branch are deleted. The other macros will remain in the step.
Note
Do not remove the macros for the branch by using the Delete command - this could cause errors in the
project itself. Always remove a branch in accordance with its functionality.
To remove a branch, proceed as follows:
1.
Select either the macro Branch Begin
2.
Click on Remove Branch button.
or Branch End
.
4.7.4 Branches in Documentation
Branches will also be displayed as such in the documentation. A subheading will be inserted to indicate that
there is a branch. Underneath the subheadings, there are additional actions which have been allocated links for
the respective steps.
Branches appear in Word, PDF and HTML generated formats. Branches are displayed in the following types of
documentation: standard documentation and work documents.
4.8 Using Page Macros
Page macros can be inserted into simulations, which will allow you to create simulations with greater flexibility.
These can be positioned directly on screenshots, images, PowerPoint slides and book pages and can be
activated for being displayed in a specific mode. In this way, simulations can be easily enriched with additional
information, reference material and visual aids.
82
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Inserting page macros
Page macros can be inserted from the toolbar or from the menu: Insert -> Insert Page Macro.
The following macros are available:
Icon
Name
Arrow
Shape
Highlight
Text Pop-Up
Image
Icon Link
Text Link
Book Page
For a detailed description of each of the macros, refer to the sections linked in this document.
Note
Note that page macros cannot be used for documentation and can only be used for playing simulations.
The only macro that can be used in combination with documentation is Book Page Link, which appears as
a graphic image.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
83
4.9 Anonymize Screen Area
If a simulation screenshot contains information which should not be displayed to the users (e.g. passwords, file
paths, datas) you are able to anonymize the areas with a color field. This can be done for a single screenshot or
for a number of screenshots in a project.
Note
The covering with a color will be done on the screenshot file and cannot be changed, after saving and
closing the project.
To anonymize screenshot areas of a simulation, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a Screen macro.
or
Select all Screen macros, which should be changed with the same area.
2.
Click on the menu entry Tools -> Bulk Changes -> Anonymize Screen Area...
A dialog opens, displaying the screenshot or the first screenshot of the selection.
3.
Position the selection border on the control or area, which should be anonymized.
4.
Click on Confirm Selection
Click on Selection Invalid
.
, if the changes should be discarded.
The dialog closes and the areas of the screenshots are covered with a color. If an area contains different colors,
the most frequent color is used.
4.10Link Actions for trainer and book reader
To control the trainer or book reader instead of the control bar via objects or bubbles, actions can be defined as
link targets. These are universally valid and make it possible, for example, to jump between book pages and
chapters independently of their name. They are selected in the link dialog.
If you want to use these types of navigations for book pages, we recommend inserting the objects in a template
for book pages. These are available by default for an entire book.
Defining a link action
1.
You can define the link target in accordance with your objects as follows:
○
Via the HTML Editor
Mark the text to be linked and open the Link dialog by clicking Insert Object
○
-> Insert Link...
For book page objects
Select Edit link...
in the Link to setting to open the Link dialog.
For some objects, this setting is found in the Link area.
2.
Click the Actions button in the Link dialog.
3.
You can then define the link action using the drop-down list.
84
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
4.
Click Ok to confirm the dialog.
Overview of actions

Exit

Show help

Play simulation

Pause simulation

Next step

Previous step

Next book page

Previous book page

Next chapter

Previous chapter

First book page

Last book page

Show index

Show search

Activate audio

Deactivate audio

Play/stop audio

Stop complete audio – (if several audio objects are contained)

Mute complete audio – (if several audio objects are contained)

Unmute complete audio – (if several audio objects are contained)

Mute

Unmute
The other actions offered correspond to those mentioned but have an outdated form and are thus offered to be
downward compatible.
4.11 Creating iPad Simulations
With the Producer it is possible to create simple simulations of iPad apps. For that create screenshots on your
iPad, import them into the Producer and edit the simulation project.
To create an iPad simulation, proceed as follows:
1.
Open your iPad app.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
85
2.
Press the On/Off button and the Home button of your iPad at once to create a screenshot.
Repeat this for each process step.
3.
The screenshots are saved in the Photos folder of the device.
4.
Save the images on your PC to import them into the Producer.
Do not import the images from the iPad directly.
5.
Open the Producer.
6.
Create a project using the New Project
toolbar button.
The empty project opens in the project editor.
7.
Select Tools -> Import -> Import Images...
The import dialog box will appear.
8.
Select the images. Then click on Open.
9.
You can now edit your image if desired. See also the chapter Import images.
The important options of this dialog are:
○
Import as Screen:
Activate this option, to insert the images as Screen macros.
○
Insert Mouse Action Macro:
With this option, a Mouse Action macro will be inserted in the step additionally.
10. Confirm the changes by clicking on OK.
Afterwards the images will be imported.
The images will be inserted in the order as sorted in the folder. Each image will be inserted as Screen macro in a
step with a Mouse Action macro.
Afterwards position the highlight about the control on the screenshot and insert a text into the bubble.
Inserting additional macros
Further macros can be inserted about the Insert Interaction toolbar. The macros also contain text modules of the
Recording Dictionary.
4.11.1 Creating Object Image and Object Name
The object name and object image of an app control can be created manually and inserted into a bubble text.
This allows you to add this information to a text.
For the object name insert a text into the Object Name parameter.
To create an object image from the screenshot, proceed as follows:
1.
Position the highlight of a Mouse Action macro about the control on the screenshot.
2.
Click the Update Object Image
button in the macro editor.
A dialog for the editing of the object image opens.
3.
86
Adapt the object image position, if needed.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
4.
Click on Confirm Selection
, to create the object image.
The dialog closes and the object image is inserted into the Object Image parameter.
Now you can insert the object image and object name into a bubble as placeholder:
1.
Click in a text field of a bubble.
The HTML editor opens.
2.
Click on Insert Object
.
3.
In the menu click on the entry Insert Placeholder...
A dialog with placeholders opens.
4.
5.
Select one of the placeholders:
○
Macro: Object Image
○
Macro: Object Name
Click on Insert.
4.12 Macro Parameters for Simulation Macros
Each macro contains parameters, which define the design and the behavior for different use case like
rerecording, playback and documentation. You are able to adapt these parameters for a selected macro in the
macro editor.
The following section gives you an overview about the available parameters. Further information about a macro
and specific macro parameters is available in the macro descriptions.
Note
The available settings are specific for each macro.
4.12.1 General Parameters
In the macros, there are the following general parameters:

Comment:
You can enter a general comment to assist the editing in the Comment field. This is displayed in the
thumbnail view in place of the macro text.
You can amend the displayed comment as follows:
○
Comment preceded by '+': Comment is appended to the macro text in brackets
○
Comment preceded by '*': Comment is inserted in brackets in front of the macro text
○
Comment preceded by '/': The comment is not displayed, only the macro text
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
87

Use Text from (Interaction macro):
Specifies the used text type. This allows you to use different texts for demo mode and practice mode or to
use the same text for both modes.

○
Both Modes
○
Demo Mode
○
Practice Mode
Demo Text / Practice Text (Interaction macro):
Contains the text for the macro to be displayed for a specific mode.

Text:
Contains the text for the macro to be displayed during playback. For some macros the parameter is modespecific.

Object Name (Interaction macro):
Contains the name of the recorded control.
The parameter is used in all interaction macros and will be shown in the bubble text.

Object Image (Interaction macro):
Contains the icon or an image of the recorded control.
The parameter is used in all interaction macros and will be shown in the bubble text.
Editing object name and object image
It may be necessary to edit the name or the image of the parameters. For example:

If a control in an application has changed but it is not worth rerecording a project.

If changes have been made to the highlights on a screenshot.
Any change to the parameters are automatically incorporated in the bubble texts.

Editing an object name
Change the name by entering a new name.

Editing an object image
Select the function Update Object Image
in the macro editor. An editing window appears in which you
can make the necessary changes to the icon. Drag the highlight to the desired position and confirm with
Confirm
.
You can also use the function Replace Image...
function to insert an image. The button opens an option
menu with functions for creating or inserting an icon. Select the appropriate method.
4.12.2 Subcategory: Bubble
All parameters are listed in the Demo Bubble and Practice Bubble subcategory, which are used for the display of
bubbles created by macros that are not displayed in the upper main area level.
The settings provide the possibility to define different appearances for the bubble in the different modes.
88
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing

Style:
Here you can choose which bubble style you would like to use. The bubble styles are saved in the
Resources

.
Orientation:
Here you can specify in which direction the tip of your bubble should be pointing. If you choose the option
Center – the bubble will have no point and it will be positions in the middle of the chosen area.

Translate Manually:
The option Translate Manually option ensures that customized bubble content is not replaced by text
automatically generated by Automated Translation or a rerecording. The options are activated as soon as
the contents of a bubble is edited manually. In this case the contents can be exported by using Export
Translatable (menu Tools -> Localization) in order to be translated manually by a translator.

Width/Height:
Specifies the size of the bubble in pixels.

Display Duration:
Specifies, how long a bubble is visible during playback. The setting is defined in seconds.
4.12.3 Subcategory: Simulation
The subcategory Simulation contains parameters that specify the display of content during playback:

Highlight in Demo / Practice:
Specifies, that the highlight for the control is displayed during playback. The setting is available for demo
mode and practice mode.

Bubble in Demo / Practice:
Specifies, that the bubble with the explanation is displayed during playback. The setting is available for
demo mode and practice mode.

In Mode:
Specifies, for which of the modes the object should be displayed during playback.
4.12.4 Subcategory: Documentation
The macro parameters required for documentation creation are found in the subcategory Documentation.

Show In Documentation:
Defines, whether this macro is to be taken into consideration during the creation of documentation.
Disabling this parameter makes it possible to hide certain, specific actions described by macros in the
documentation.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
89
Screen macro
For the Screen macro there are the following parameters:

Show in Process:
Specifies to show the step in the process flow of a documentation.

As Heading in Documentation:
Specifies to use the Screen Title as heading in the documentation.

Image Size:
Defines the size of the screenshot in percentage.

Screenshot Position / Size:
Shows the position and size of the screenshot.

Border Width:
Puts a border at your defined pixel width around the screenshot. The standard color is white and can be
changed in Documentation Settings.
Interaction macros
For the interaction macros there are the following parameters:

Highlight Position / Size:
Shows the position and size of the highlight.
Recommendation
Use the Document Highlight function to change the marker position.

Marker Orientation:
Specifies the orientation of the marker on the screenshot. It is recommended to adapt the markers, if the
screenshot displays more than one marker.
4.12.5 Subcategory: Rerecord
The subcategory Rerecord contains parameters that are required for a rerecording.

Interactive:
The option Interactive means that when a recording is being repeated, the rerecording will stop at this
macro and manual recording of the macro will resume. Automatic rerecording will continue thereafter. This
option is particularly important at those points in the project where it is known that the desired object for
the action to be recorded is to be found in another position or a different object for the recording must be
selected.
Note
Do not change the parameters of the Object Type, Click Position, Recognition Method and Object Key
manually to allow a correct rerecording.
90
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
4.12.6 Subcategory: Control
The parameters describing how a control is displayed and executed in the project can be defined in the Control
subcategory.

Position and Size:
The parameter defines how a control is orientated in the screen view in relation to the upper left-hand
corner as well as the width and height of the control. For editing the parameters select the Edit button to
open an editing dialog box.
Various individual parameters are available for the different interactions:

Macro Text Input:
The color and text design of the Text input macro can be defined. It can also be defined whether the text
entry is to be portrayed as a password.
○
All Values:
If for an application a drop-down box is included, all of the drop-down box's options are saved in the
parameter All Values. The chosen entry is flagged with an asterisk {*}. While the project is being
edited, the value can be changed by assigning the flag to the corresponding entry.

Macro Mouse Action:
For the Mouse Action macro it is possible to define both the cursor type and the state of the button when it
is clicked.

Macro Checkbox:
For the Checkbox macro it is possible to define both the cursor type and the type of checkbox, whether the
latter is to be used as a radio button.
4.12.7 Subcategory: Advanced
The subcategory Advanced contains the parameter:

Jump Target:
Displays the selected jump target after the creation of a branch. You can select another target from the
drop-down list.
4.13 Simulation Macros
For simulation projects, there are the following macro types:

Special Macros

Interactions

Page Macros
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
91

Quiz Items - see Quiz chapter

Documentation Macros - see Documentation chapter
The macros can be inserted by using the toolbar of the project editor.
4.13.1 Special Macros
The following section describes special macros, which can be inserted into simulations.
Icon
Name
Simulation Start
Simulation End
Intro Page
Intro Page Start Link
Imported Page
Form Structure
Branches
Jump to Step
Mode Change Start
Mode Change End
92
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Icon
Name
Text-to-Speech Override
In the following chapters, you will find further information about the special macros.
4.13.1.1 Simulation Start
This macro is required for the initialization of the simulation in the trainer. It is located at the beginning of a
project. When using the recording, this macro is inserted automatically.
Score
In the event that the user is to be rewarded with points, the parameters Maximum Score and Required Score may
be entered. The values are calculated from the number of single actions (always 3 points) and the percentages
that have been entered in the Explorer for the project. The command Update is applied for automatic calculation
and actualization.
Task description
A task may be displayed in a separate browser popup window in practice mode and test mode. This can be
created in the Task Description subcategory and activated for the mode in question.
The Generate Values for Task Description option is used to insert the values from the Input Text
Single
and Select
macros into the task. This is of use, for example, so as to have the necessary data available when
creating a user or logging in.
The position of the task description window on the screen is set by the parameter Orientation. In addition a
background color for the window can be selected via Background.
4.13.1.2 Simulation End
This macro is used by the trainer to end the simulation correctly. It is located at the end of a project. When using
the recording, this macro is inserted automatically.

Pause (seconds):
The parameter defines the display duration of the last step during the playback of the simulation.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
93
Settings of the End Page
Once a simulation is completed, an end page with a summary appears as well as the button to restart the
simulation.
The end page uses the preset that is defined in the Intro Page macro.
The following parameters can be defined:

Show End Page:
The parameter defines that the end page will be shown during playback.

Title End:
The title will be shown for the relevant mode.
Modes: demo mode, practice mode, test mode

Description End:
The description will be shown for the relevant mode.
Modes: demo mode, practice mode, test mode passed, test mode failed
For further information, refer also to the chapter Intro and End Pages.
4.13.1.3 Intro Page
The macro specifies that an intro page is shown in the simulation. It has to be included in the first step after the
Simulation Start and the Intro Page Start Link macro.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Title:
The parameter defines the title for the relevant mode.
Modes: demo mode, practice mode, test mode

Description:
The parameter defines the description for the relevant mode.
Modes: demo mode, practice mode, test mode

Preset:
The parameter defines the design of the start and end page. The available presets are part of the
Configuration/Style resources.

Page Size (Advanced Layout):
The parameter defines the page width and height in pixels.
For further information, refer also to the chapter Intro and End Pages.
94
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
4.13.1.4 Intro Page Start Link
The macro defines a start link for the intro page. This makes it possible to jump to different steps in a complex
simulation and to guide the learners. The link has to be included in the first step after the Simulation Start macro
and before the Intro Page Start Link macro. To create several links, insert an Intro Page Start Link macro for each
link.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Description:
The parameter defines a description for the start link.

Link Text:
The parameter defines a text for the start link.

Target Step:
The parameter defines a target for the start link. A step can be chosen from the drop-down-box.
For further information, refer also to the chapter Intro and End Pages.
4.13.1.5 Jump to Step
This macro allows you to jump to a specific step in the simulation. The macro can be used to create alternative
paths in a simulation.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Jump Target:
Specifies the step for the jump. Select a step from the drop-down list.
4.13.1.6 Mode Change
The change of mode makes it possible, at a specific step, to switch to another mode while a mode is being
played back. If the step in question was completed it switches back to the original mode. For example, while a
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
95
demo mode is in progress, a step can be displayed as a test mode. This allows users to take an active part while
viewing the simulation.
Macros of a mode change
There are two macros for the mode change available:
Mode Change Start
This macro forces a mode change when playing back the simulation in a certain mode.
Mode Change End
This macro terminates the mode change and changes back to the initial mode.
Note
A mode change can only be used within a step. Ensure that the Mode Change Start and Mode Change End
macros are within the same step.
Creating a mode change
To create a mode change, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the Screen macro for the step with the mode change.
2.
Insert the Mode Change Start macro using the Insert Special Macro toolbar.
3.
Select the Mode Change Start macro.
4.
Specify the target mode in the macro editor.
5.
Select the last macro of the step.
6.
Insert the Mode Change End macro using the Insert Special Macro toolbar.
Removing a mode change
To remove a mode change for a step, delete the Mode Change Start macro and the Mode Change End macro.
4.13.1.7 Text-to-Speech Override
You can use the Text-to-Speech Override macro to replace the prescribed spoken text for a step with a text of
your own.
96
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Insert the Text-to-Speech Override macro in a step once you have converted the associated spoken text. This
preallocates the bubble text as the spoken text. You can now change the text in accordance with your own ideas.
Would you like to restore the original bubble text in the text box, then you can use the control Insert Text from
Bubble to overwrite the current text with that.
4.13.2 Interactions
Interactions are used for the recording, display and control of the simulation contents. They portray all the usual
actions that a user can carry out in an application.
Icon
Name
Screen
Explanation
Mouse Action
Key Stroke
Input Text
Select Single
Radio / Checkbox
In the following chapters, you will find further information about the interactions.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
97
4.13.2.1 Screen
The Screen macro contains the recorded screenshot of the application. The macro always marks the beginning
of each step, followed by the recorded actions. When using the recording, this macro is created together with
every new step as soon as an action is executed.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Screen Title:
Contains the recorded screen title of the application.

Page:
Contains the recorded screenshot image of the application.
Recommendation
If you want to edit the screenshot for the Screen macro, it is possible to open it in an external image
editor. To do this, click on Page -> Replace Image
-> External Editor...
4.13.2.2 Explanation
The Explanation macro allows you to add further information to your project content.
The macro can be inserted during recording or rerecording or from the toolbar in project editor.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Use Demo Bubble for Practice:
In order to reduce editing time, activate the option to use the same text and settings of the demo mode for
the bubble in practice mode.

Show Control (Simulation):
Use the parameter to show navigation controls within a bubble. When activated, the simulation pauses and
resumes when the Next button of the bubble is selected.
The setting is recommended, if the bubble contains a long text to allow the user to read the text
completely.
98
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Type icon
A Type (Icon) can be assigned to the bubble, which can be selected from four different types. Each type is
represented by an icon:
Type
Icon
Info
Remark
Tip
Warning
The icons are also added to the documentation generated for a project. The images of the icons are located in
the resources trainer Style and Documentation Style. You can replace these with your own images.
4.13.2.3 Mouse Action
The Mouse Action macro simulates a mouse action on a button or a link.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Hotkey:
If the action can also be activated by a keyboard shortcut, then the corresponding key combination may be
entered in Hotkey. The key names are separated by spaces, for example: ctrl k.

Action:
Specifies, what type of action is to be carried out with the mouse. The action is set during recording.

Ctrl, Alt, Shift:
Specifies a key used for performing the action. The parameter is set during recording.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
99
4.13.2.4 Key Stroke
The Key Stroke macro simulates a keystroke or a keyboard combination. The macro can require the user to
press a key or combination of keys to continue the simulation.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Hotkey:
Specifies the keyboard shortcut. The key names are separated by spaces, for example: ctrl k.
Defining a hotkey
To define a hotkey, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the Hotkey parameter.
2.
Click on the Edit button.
A dialog opens.
3.
Press the key or the keyboard combination, which should be inserted.
The text field is filled automatically.
4.
Confirm the dialog with OK.
The key or keyboard combination is entered in Hotkey.
4.13.2.5 Input Text
The Input Text macro simulates text being entered into a specific text field.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Input Text:
Contains the value entered during the recording.

End Value:
Supports the inputting of text in multiline text boxes. Whereas only single line texts can be entered using
the Input Text parameter, the End Value parameter generates wordwraps, thus displaying the complete
text in the text input box.
100
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing

Confirm with:
Specifies the manner in which the entry is to be confirmed. Three options are available: Confirm with Tab,
Confirm with Enter and Confirm with Button. More than one option may be selected.
If the option Confirm with Button has been selected, then it also needs to be assigned an object position. It
is also possible to select an entry without confirming it Enter, Tab, Button. In this case, the three
confirmation options must be disabled.
Note
If the Confirmation parameter for inputting a text is altered or an input is read out without being
confirmed, then the instruction in the practice bubble for confirming the input is to be aligned manually.

Set Focus (Simulation):
Specifies whether the focus is automatically set on the corresponding input field within the simulation
page during playback, or if the user should define this him- or herself, which actually corresponds to the
behavior of a live application.
Using a regular expression
A Regular Expression is an exactly defined search pattern for which a match is sought (pattern matching). When
using a regular expression with an input field, the value entered during a simulation does not need to match
exactly the value that was originally recorded. The value needs instead to correspond to a value described by the
regular expression and is thus valid. The regular expression must be JavaScript compliant. Examples:
any input: /.*/
not case-sensitive input: /input/i
valid alternatives: /^kg$|^kilogram$|^kilogramme$/
five-digit number: /^[0-9]{5} $/
four-digit number with 2 decimal places: /^[0-9]{4}[,\.]{1}[0-9]{2} $/
date: /^[0-9]{1,2}(-|/|\.)[0-9]{1,2}(-|/|\.)([0-9]{4} $|[0-9]{2} $)/
currency: /^-?[0-9]+$|^(-?[0-9]+)?[,\.]{1}[-0-9]{1,2} $/
e-mail address: /[email protected]\[?[a-zA-Z0-9-\.]+\.([a-zA-Z]{2,4}|[0-9]{1,3})\]?/
4.13.2.6 Select Single
The Select Single macro simulates the selection of a list box or a selection list.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Selected Index:
Contains the index number of the selected value.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
101

Selected Value:
Contains the value selected during the recording.
4.13.2.7 Radio / Checkbox
The Radio / Checkbox macro simulates the activation of a radio button or a checkbox.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Selected Value:
Contains the value selected during the recording.
4.13.3 Page Macros
The following section describes page macros, which can be inserted into simulations.
Icon
Name
Arrow
Shape
Highlight
Text Pop-Up
Image
Icon Link
102
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Icon
Name
Text Link
Book Page
In the following chapters, you will find further information about the page macros.
4.13.3.1 Arrow
The Arrow object is customizable. It creates a path for which you can choose from a variety of arrow heads. The
arrow's length, position and direction can be modified as desired.
Positioning a path point
There are path points at the beginning and end of an arrow that allow you to adjust its length and direction. Click
on one of the points and drag and drop it to the desired position on the book page.
Defining an arrow
An arrow object can be customized as follows:

Color:
This value defines the arrow's color. The Choose Color...
option can be used to define an appropriate
value.

Thickness:
This value allows you to define the arrow's thickness. The value is given in pixels.

Arrow Head 1 & 2:
This value defines the arrow head for each side of the arrow.
There are several types:
Design
Name
None
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
103
Design
Name
Standard
Triangle - Hollow
Triangle - Filled
Diamond – Hollow
Diamond – Filled
Circle - Hollow
Circle - Filled

Advanced (Advanced Layout):
Defines the width and the length of the arrow heads in relation to the arrow’s thickness. Enter a value
between 2 and 20.
The value defines how many times the length of the thickness should be expanded (e.g., value 3 = 3x the
arrow’s thickness).
104
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
4.13.3.2 Shape
The Shape object displays a variety of shapes to choose from for the purpose of enhancing the visualization of
learning content, process flows and sequences. Shape objects can be used in a variety of ways and can contain
text.
To select and insert a shape, click on Insert Shape.
Type and orientation
A drop-down list will appear in which you can select what kind of shape you would like to insert. For some
shapes, you can also define its orientation. For more information, refer to the section on Shapes Overview.
Design

Shape Color:
Here you can select a color for the shape. If you would like to define a value, click on Choose Color…

Shape Value:
This setting defines the shape's character. Values between 0 and 100 can be entered here. The outcome
will vary depending on the type of shape selected. For example, you can change the width of an arrow or
smooth the corners of a square.
Note that this setting is not available for all shapes. For more information, refer to the section on Shapes
Overview.
You will find descriptions on additional settings under the section on Editing Parameters.
Effects
Under Effects, there is a variety of settings that allow you to define the behavior and design of a shape.



Gradient
○
Shape Color (Gradient)
○
Border Color (Gradient)
Design Roll-Over
○
Shape color
○
Shape Color (Gradient)
○
Border color
○
Border Color (Gradient)
Design Click
○
Shape color
○
Shape Color (Gradient)
○
Border color
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
105
○
Border Color (Gradient)
4.13.3.3 Highlight
This macro makes it possible to locate an additional highlight on a screenshot. The highlight is independent of a
bubble and can be used to support an explanation. As only one highlight can ever be used for a macro, whereas
it may be necessary for a number of highlight frames to describe a situation, this macro can be used in addition
to the already existing highlight frame.
Inserting and positing a highlight
1.
From the Thumbnail View, highlight the macro Page to which you would like to add your highlight.
2.
Then click on Insert -> Insert Page Macro -> Highlight.
The default position for the highlight macro is directly under the macro Screen to ensure that it is displayed
throughout the entire duration of the step's recording. If the highlight should be displayed with a particular
macro, you can simply drag the highlight in front of the desired macro.
3.
From the step view, you can now position (drag & drop) the highlight on the screenshot. To adjust the size
of the highlight, click on one of the frame's points and with the mouse held down, drag the frame to the
desired size. Release the mouse button to confirm the changes.
Macro options

Display in Mode:
You can use the various options to define the mode in which the highlight is to be displayed.

Hide Highlight:
Activate this parameter if you want to hide the highlight in the simulation.
This setting has no impact on the highlight being displayed in the documentation if the parameter Show in
Documentation is activated.

Object Name:
You can use this parameter to specify a name for the object. If you have two Highlight macros in a step, you
will need to change the name. In the event of highlight sharing the same name, only the second one in the
sequence will be displayed.

Show in Documentation:
If you activate this parameter, the highlight you have created will be displayed in the documentation.

Highlight Color:
Defines the color of the highlight border.

Highlight Position (Documentation):
Defines the position (left, top) and the size (width, height) of the highlight on the screenshot in pixel.
106
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
4.13.3.4 Text Pop-Up
This function inserts a text pop-up which can be opened by a button. You can insert any text you like in this box
as well as an image.
The text pop-up can be formatted using the Text Pop-Up Position subcategory to adjust its size and position.
Defining type and title

Type:
Different types, differentiated by a corresponding icon, can be defined for displaying the textbox. Using
different types enables you to highlight the text box content and present it more clearly to the user.
The following types are available and can be selected using the parameter Type:

○
Standard
○
More Info
○
Tip
Title:
You can use the parameter Title to specify a title for the text box. If you do not want to display a title, you
should leave the field blank. The default setting for the Standard type is no title whereas placeholders are
displayed for the other types.
Further options

Show on Roll-Over:
This option allows you to define whether a text pop-up should appear when the mouse cursor rolls over the
icon. When the mouse cursor rolls out of the icon, the text pop-up will hide again. The text pop-up behaves
in the same way as a tooltip.

Fade In/Out:
This parameter defines whether the text pop-up is displayed or hidden with a fading in effect when being
opened or closed. Deactivate the setting if you wish to avoid this effect.

Hide Text Pop-Up in Editor:
The default setting is for the text pop-up to be displayed in the book page editor. Activate the parameter to
hide it for editing. If you would like to reinstate the text pop-up in the view, deactivate the setting.
4.13.3.5 Image
This object allows you to insert an image file to your book page.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
107
Inserting an image
To insert an image, proceed as follows:
1.
Select Insert Image in toolbar.
The Insert Image from Workarea dialog box opens.
2.
Select an image in your workarea structure.
or
Use Insert File... to import an image.
3.
Select Ok.
You can use Replace Image
to change the image file.
See the chapter Supported File Formats on Book Pages for supported file formats.
Parameters of the object
The following parameters are available:

Image Roll-Over:
You can use the Image Roll-Over option to insert an image that is shown when the mouse is moved over it.

Image Click:
You can use the Image Click option to insert an image that is shown when the image is clicked on.

Keep Aspect Ratio:
If this parameter is activated, the aspect ratio is retained when scaling an image. Deactivate this parameter
if you want to be free to change the size of an image.

Zoom:
The Zoom option allows you to zoom in and out of images on the book page. An icon will be inserted onto
the image. By clicking on the icon, the image will be shown in its original size. This allows you to insert an
image into the book page and save space when scaling it.
4.13.3.6 Icon Link
The Icon Link allows you to link content found in the work area or to create a link to an external source, such as a
website. An icon will then be inserted, to which a link can then be assigned. The icon is customizable. You can
insert an image as well as a tooltip for the target link.
The design of the icon is based on the Style selected for the simulation that can be defined in the central
configuration dialog in Authoring Settings -> General-> Page style.
108
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Defining an icon
The look of the icon will depend on what book style has been chosen, which can be defined in the Style settings.
For your defined target link, from the option Type, you can choose what kind of icon you would like to use:

Demo Mode

Practice Mode

Test Mode

Concurrent Mode

Quiz

Book page

Book

Document
Alternatively, your own icon can be inserted using the option Image. It is recommended that you use your own
icon when linking to an external source or when the icon should not have the same look as the book style itself.
4.13.3.7 Text Link
Text Link is a text field to which you can add texts and links. The entire surface area is actually a button that can
be easily linked to an external Internet page or an object from the workarea. This allows you to display additional
information if desired.
1.
To create a link, go to the Insert link...
function.
2.
A dialog will then open in which you can specify a link or select an object from the workarea.
A link to a web page or similar is to be entered in the text field under Available. This should be in the format
http:// www...
3.
Confirm your entry by clicking on OK.
When launched, the linked page is automatically opened in a new browser window. If you would like to open the
page in the same window, you need to deactivate the setting Open in a new window.
If the linked page or object from the Workarea is opened in a new window, you can define properties for
displaying the browser window that has been opened.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
109
4.13.3.8 Book Page
An existing book page can be inserted into a simulation with a link using the Book Page macro. Changes made to
the book page also affect the link in the simulation.
Insert a book page as follows:
1.
Use the toolbar to insert the Book Page macro into the project. You can select this macro from the dropdown list for the book page objects.
When the macro is inserted, a new step is automatically created.
2.
You can then link the book page you want using the Book Page parameter. Click Edit Link...
to open the
link dialog where you can select the book page.
3.
You can activate the book page for the mode you want under Simulation.
Keep in mind that the objects available on the book page cannot be edited. It is only possible to add additional
objects within the project editor or to edit the book page directly in the book page editor.
110
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Simulations - Editing
5
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
The desktop assistant is an EPSS solution which is available at the end of the learning process to provide your
users direct support in your enterprise application. If previously learned processes or process steps are no
longer sufficiently front of mind, the user can request support as and when required and have himself prompted
within the live application or obtain explanations on areas of the application user interface that are relevant to
the process or especially prone to error. This optional assistance boosts your users confidence in using the
application and gradually ensures optimal performance in handling the process. It also enables your users to
execute seldom used processes with the greatest possible accuracy, for example when having to stand in for
someone without notice.
The desktop assistant runs discreetly in the background in your application and indicates by means of an icon in
the information area whether there is information available on the application page in question. Should he need
to, the user can use this icon to launch the support and return it to the standby state when the need no longer
exists.
The degree of support available here is very variable. The content can accompany the user in detail through
established processes, explain entire application interfaces specific to a particular process and object and
prevent departures from predefined processes. If there are process-related simulations available, these too are
offered to the user to give him the opportunity to have knowledge of process routines or steps demonstrated to
him in the simulation environment or to work through them without affecting the live application.
5.1 General
Desktop assistant types
The following desktop assistant types can be created:
Type
Icon
Description
Desktop Assistant
Displays a content library to provide
(Group)
users context-specific content.
Context Help
Displays control-specific
information to explain the use of
(Project)
controls.
Guided Tour
Displays process-specific
information to explain a process
(Project)
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
step by step.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
111
Note
Available projects used for creation and playback of desktop assistant content are supported from
version 9.1 onwards.
Variants of creating desktop assistant projects
Desktop assistant projects (context help and guided tour) can be created in two ways:

Using existing simulations
You can convert projects by using prerecorded simulations.
Using this method can reduce the effort of creating a project, because application pages and their
corresponding objects do not have to be manually rerecorded.
During a conversion, only Screen macros, associated interactions and Explanation
macros will be
converted. Manually inserted PowerPoint slides, quiz items and documentation macros etc. will be
disregarded during the conversion process as well as branches integrated into simulations.

Manual creation
Creating projects manually offers you the opportunity of providing an application with EPSS support
individually and independently of pre-existing simulations. You can identify the objects required for your
processes on each application page and assign them help texts.
Producer and Desktop Assistant
The SAP Enable Now components Producer and Desktop Assistant are involved in creating and using desktop
assistant content:

Producer - used for the creation and the editing

Desktop Assistant - used for the playback
5.2 Prerequisites for Target Applications
The Producer ensures the creation and the playback of desktop assistent content for specific applications.
Detailed information is available in the Product Availability Matrix (PAM) of the SAP Enable Now.
Desktop assistant content under SAP
The following recommendations are necessary for the recording and playback under SAP:

Consider for the recording and the playback the Settings for the SAP Client.

When recording SAP applications ensure that you are only opened one SAP session. First close all the
sessions that are not required for the recording.

The playback of content requires the corresponding GUI Theme (e.g. SAP Tradeshow) used for the
recording.
112
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
The support of additional applications has to be verified previous according to the technical feasibility. Support
for additional applications should be checked in advance for technical feasibility. Contact your SAP
account manager for the necessary support.
Caution
Desktop assistant content do not support multi monitor environments. Therefore ensure when creating
the content that the Producer and your target application are situated on the screen registered on the
system as the main monitor.
Note
SAP NetWeaver - Update
When updating SAP NetWeaver (including SAP_Basis), note that the release versions can include
different page key information for specific objects. This can result in a partial mismatch of your content
during playback.
Once the SAP NetWeaver update is finished, play back your content and check your content matching.
Update the missing objects or replace the page key attributes with regular expressions, if required.
5.3 Desktop Assistant
The desktop assistant is a specific mode that allows context-based content delivery. The desktop
assistant combines different content types and can be understood as a content library for a group or a complete
workarea.
The required contexts of the application pages are saved automatically when a project is recorded and the
desktop assistant uses them to assign content during playback.
Content types
The desktop assistant can include the following content types:

Simulation
demo, test, practice and concurrent mode

Desktop assistant
guided tour, context help

Documentation
all types and formats (DOC, PDF, HTML, PPT)

Other Content
books, book pages, text units, groups
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
113
5.3.1 Desktop Assistant Components
The desktop assistant has the following main components that are used during playback:

Sidebar
The sidebar is a navigation bar and is used to start the main functions of the desktop assistant.

Main window
The main window shows the available contents for a specific page context.
During playback of a guided tour, the window shows the step list.

Book window
The book window shows the book (used with book reader), which was opened from the content window.
During playback of the book, the main window and content window are hidden.
Unless there is no content available for a context, the list is empty and a hint is shown. If the user changes from
a page with an available context to a page without an available context, the desktop assistant shows the content
of the page with the last available context.
Activating components and functions
The components and functions of the desktop assistant can be displayed or hidden by using the settings (menu
Tools -> Settings...
5.3.1.1
) under the Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings -> Desktop Assistant.
Sidebar
The sidebar of the desktop assistant contains the following controls:

Content:
Indicates if content is available. Allows the user to open the main window.

Search:
Allows the user to open the search in the main window or in the library.

External Search:
Allows the user to search on an external URL.

Request Content:
Allows the user to open an e-mail window for requesting content.

Add Sticky Note:
Allows the user to insert a sticky note for an application and to enter individual information.

Instant Help:
Allows the user to activate the available contents of the context help for the current context. The control is
enabled by default.

Start Recording:
Allows the user to record a process in the current application.
114
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing

Exit Desktop Assistant:
Finishes the playback and closes the Desktop Assistant.
5.3.1.2 Main Window
The main window displays the available content for a context and allows the user to select and start content.
The main window contains the following tabs and functions:
Content
The Content tab displays the available content for the current context.
When selecting a content entry the available modes and documentation for the selected content as well as the
description text will be displayed. You can start or open a content object. A Back control allows you to go back to
the content list.
Search
The Search tab allows users to search specific content for a description and short description.
Info
The Info tab allows you to provide general information about the desktop assistant for the user. The information
is always available and is not context-specific.
The tab uses the text of the desktop assistant’s root group.
User Area
The User Area tab contains the recorded processes as documents. The documents can be opened, shared or
deleted. Further processes can be recorded.
With mouse over within a document, the following controls are displayed:

Rename Document:
Allows the user to rename the selected document.

Open Document:
Allows the user to open the selected document.
The footer of the tab contains the following controls:

Record Document:
Allows the user to record a new document.

Share Documents:
Allows the user to share the selected documents by sending an e-mail.

Delete Documents:
Allows the user to delete the selected documents
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
115
Settings
The Settings tab displays settings for specifying the displayed content.
The Settings tab includes the following entries:

Show Hidden Help:
Allows the user to reset hidden help elements which were set to hidden during playback.

Roles
Contains settings for displaying role-specific content.
○
Select All:
The user is only allowed to display content for his or her own role.
○
Show Content Without Roles:
Allows the user to display content with no role assigned.
○
Change Role:
Allows the user to specify the roles for which content is shown.
Further functions
Further functions of the main window:

Share Content:
Allows the user to share specific content with other users. A menu opens to copy the link or the share the
link via e-mail.

Help:
Allows the user to open a help window with information about the Desktop Assistant.

Close:
Allows the user to close the main window. The main window can be reopened by using the sidebar.
5.3.2 Creating a Desktop Assistant
To create a desktop assistant, you first need to perform various preparation steps before configuring and
generating the mode.
Preparation
The following preparation is recommended:
1.
Create a group in the content tree of the Explorer. It is also possible to use the root group of the complete
tree with different sub groups.
2.
Include the required content in the group. The order of the content is not relevant for the display in the
desktop assistant, as the content is displayed according to context. Additional groups allow you to
structure the content in the tree.
If you do not want to show a specific content object, hide the object in the tree.
116
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
3.
Set the relevant settings for the desktop assistant playback in the central configuration dialog box. See
also the chapter Desktop Assistant Settings.
Generation of the desktop assistant
To generate a desktop assistant, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the group
with the content.
2.
Click on the Generate Desktop Assistant
3.
The desktop assistant configuration dialog box opens. The dialog box shows the available content types of
button in the macro editor.
the group.
Select the desired contents.
The context help will be shown only during the playback, if the setting Show Instant Help is activated by the
user in the main window. See also the chapter Desktop Assistant Components.
4.
Confirm the dialog box with the Ok button.
A generated desktop assistant group shows a special icon and has the subtype Desktop Assistant.
5.3.2.1 Desktop Assistant Group
The group object of a generated desktop assistant has the following characteristics:
Type
Description
Subtype
Desktop Assistant
Icon
Individual files
Contains the DNT file for playback.

Context: Desktop Assistant:
Includes the page key used for context
Individual parameters
recognition.

Start Link: Desktop Assistant:
Generates a link the DNT file for starting the
content.
Controls of the object editor:
Individual functions
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing

Generate Desktop Assistant

Play /

Record Context
Stop Desktop Assistant
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
117
5.3.2.2 Publishing a Prefill Package
A prefill package contains the resources of the desktop assistant contents and is used to optimize playback. The
prefill package can be created when generating a desktop assistant. The package is saved as a ZIP file and must
be stored on each user's workstation.
To use a prefill package, you need to activate the Desktop Assistant cache functionality for your workarea. See
also the chapter Desktop Assistant Cache.
Publishing the prefill package
To publish a prefill package, proceed as follows (see also the chapter Creating a Desktop Assistant):
1.
Select the group
with the content.
2.
Click on the Generate Desktop Assistant
3.
The desktop assistant configuration dialog box opens. The dialog box shows the available content types of
button in the object editor.
the group.
Select the required contents.
4.
Select the option Export Prefill Package.
5.
Click OK, to generate the desktop assistant.
The Publish Object dialog box opens.
6.
Now you can edit the publishing parameters. See also the chapter Publishing settings.
○
Start from:
Defines the starting point in the content tree structure from which you want to publish content. This
enables you to publish a specific group or the whole content.
Use the Edit link...
to change the root object. A dialog box opens where you can specify an object in
the tree structure. Confirm this by clicking OK.
○
Use Filter:
This option menu allows you to select an existing filter to be applied to the publication.
See the chapter Filter and search in the workarea.
○
Include Dependent Objects:
Publishes all dependent content and resource objects.
○
Target Folder:
Specifies the storage location where you want the package to be published. Use the Search for
folder
○
button to select a folder as the storage location.
Include Content:
Specifies if content is exported or only the resources.
7.
Show Objects for Publishing:
Shows all dependent content and resource objects. After you click the button, all objects are listed in the
box above.
8.
118
Click OK to execute publishing.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Publishing is executed. Afterwards, the prefill package can be made available to the learners. Publish the
content and store it centrally.
Storing the prefill package
The prefill package has to be stored on the user's workstation in the folder:
%appdata%/Roaming/Desktop AssistantCache
The Desktop AssistantCache folder is generated automatically when starting the playback. If this folder does
not exist, create the Desktop AssistantCache manually. See also the chapter Desktop Assistant Cache.
5.3.3 Editing the Desktop Assistant
There are different settings and functions available in the desktop assistant for editing and optimizing content
for your uses cases.
5.3.3.1 Recording a Context
Beside projects you can also add other objects to a desktop assistant. Objects in a desktop assistant must have
context information. The context information for projects is added during recording and for other objects, each
context has to be recorded individually. The context can be an application with the current application page and
is stored in the Context parameter.
A context can be recorded for the following objects:
Groups
Books
Book Pages
Text Units
Recording a context
To record a context, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the application at your required application page.
2.
Select an object in the content tree of the Producer.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
119
3.
Click on Record Context
4.
The Select Window and Profile dialog box opens. You can define the following parameters:
○
in the object editor.
Choose Window:
Select the target application window for the recording.
○
Choose Profile:
Shows the application profile for the target application window.
○
Associate with Selected Window:
Specifies, that the profile is always used for the target application window.
5.
Click on Record
.
The context of the selected window is recorded and the context information is inserted into the Context: Desktop
Assistant parameter of the object.
5.3.3.1.1 Editing a Context
You can use more than one context information for an object. This gives you more flexibility in using content for
different application windows or applications.
Editing a Context
To edit a context, proceed as follows:
1.
Select an object in the content tree with an available context.
2.
Select Record Context
3.
Afterwards, a dialog box is displayed.
in the object editor.
Select one of the options and confirm with Ok:

Add Context:
Select this option to add the context to an available context.
The Select Window and Profile dialog box is displayed to start the recording.

Update Context:
Select this option to update a recorded context with a new version.
The Update Context dialog box is displayed, with all available contexts. Select a context to record.

Replace All Contexts:
Select this option to remove all available contexts and to insert the a new context.

Delete Context:
Select this option to remove an available context.
The Delete Context dialog box is displayed, with all available contexts. Select a context to delete.
120
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Update / Delete Context dialog box
When updating or deleting a context, a dialog box is opened. The dialog box displays all available contexts of an
object.

Select Profile:
The drop-down contains all profiles, which are used for recording the contexts. Select a profile to display
the correspondent contexts.

Available Contexts:
The field displays the available contexts for a selected profile. Select a context to display the detailed
information.

Context Details:
The field displays the details of a selected context.

Update or Delete:
Select the control to update or to delete a selected context.
When updating a context, the Select Window and Profile dialog box is displayed to start the recording.
5.3.3.2 Excluding Project Pages
The desktop assistant uses all included content objects to match them with a context. In some cases, it is
necessary to hide a project for a specific context. In projects, you can exclude a page key from the context
recognition of the desktop assistant.
To do this, activate the option Exclude from Desktop Assistant of the Screen macros:

In desktop assistant projects, the option is located in the subcategory Key.

In simulation projects, the option is located in the subcategory Rerecord.
5.3.3.3 Desktop Assistant Settings
The desktop assistant settings are part of the Desktop Assistant settings. They include settings for the
appearance of the desktop assistant during playback.
The settings can be changed in the Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings of the central configuration dialog box
(menu Tools -> Settings...
).
There are two subcategories:

Desktop Assistant - Style and Windows

Desktop Assistant - Controls and Behavior
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
121
5.3.3.4 Requesting Content
When using the desktop assistant, users require specific content. A function is available that allows users to
send a message to the author to specify their needs.
Content can be requested using the Request Content button in the sidebar. If no content is found, the link for
requesting content is displayed in the main window.
Settings
The following settings are available in Settings
under Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings -> Desktop
Assistant -> Desktop Assistant - Sidebar:

Request Content Type:
Specify a type for requesting content:
○
E-Mail:
Allows you to send a request with an e-mail.
○
URL:
Allows you to open an contact form to enter a request.

E-Mail:
Insert a recipient e-mail address.

URL:
Insert a URL, for example to open a contact form.

URL Parameters:
You can specify the application name and the executable as parameters for the URL. The default is
application=&executable=.

Position: 'Request Content' Control:
Specify the position of the Request Content button in the sidebar.
Texts
The e-mail contains a standard text, which is located in the Playback Dictionary
of the Desktop Assistant. You
can change the text as required by using the dictionary editor.
The texts have the IDs MAIL_SUBJECT, MAIL_HEADER, MAIL_FOOTER, MAIL_DATA and MAIL_TOOLTIP.
5.3.3.5 Searching Content
The user can search for additional content that is not available in the content list. There are two search types:

Search in published content of the desktop assistant

Search by using an external URL
122
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Search settings
The following settings are available in Settings
under Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings -> Desktop
Assistant -> Desktop Assistant - Sidebar:

Search Type:
Specify a search type:
library:
○
Opens the library for searching in the library content.
Desktop Assistant Group:
○
Shows the Search tab in the main window for searching in the desktop assistant content.

Search Group:
Specify a group of your workarea.

Position: 'Search' Control:
Specify the position of the Search button in the sidebar.
External search settings
The following settings are available in the central configuration dialog box under Desktop Assistant: Playback
Settings -> Desktop Assistant -> Desktop Assistant - Sidebar:

Position: 'External Search' Control:
Activate the external search and specify the position of the External Search button in the sidebar.

URL:
Allows you to specify a URL for the external search. Enter the URL in the following structure:
https://www.google.com/#q=
https://www.bing.com/search?q=
https://search.yahoo.com/search?p=
https://www.wolframalpha.com/input/?i=
Note
Do not delete or change = of the URL parameter.

Provide Context Information:
Provides additional context information of the user with the search URL during search. The context
information is used for search. Activate the setting if your specified search can use the context
information.
The provided context information is specified in the Context Information parameter.

Context Information:
Specifies the context information if the setting Provide Context Information has been activated. The
following context information can be provided:
○
EXE of the current application: &executable=
○
Page key of the current application page: &pagekey=
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
123
Note
Do not change the structure of the context information string.
5.3.3.6 Recording Documents
A desktop assistant user can record his or her own process during playback of the desktop assistant. The
process is saved as a Microsoft Word document. The document can be used to share information about a
process with other users via e-mail.
The document is saved in the local cache of the user. The recording is executed as a quick recording.
Activating recording
The recording can be activated with the setting Position: 'Recording' Control. You can also specify the position of
the control in the sidebar.
The setting is available in Settings...
under Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings -> Desktop Assistant in the
subcategory Desktop Assistant - Sidebar.
Recording a document
A process can be recorded using the Start Recording button in the sidebar or the User Area of the main window.
1.
The Recording Area dialog box is opened:

Select Region or Full Screen:
Specify if you want to record a region with a predefined size or the exact application window.

Choose Size (Region):
In the dropdown box, you can select a predefined size for the region.
2.
Start the recording using the Record
button.
Select Cancel if you want to cancel the recording.
3.
Now the recording starts.
Navigate through the application screens required for the process.
4.
Pausing the recording
The recording can be interrupted using the Pause
button in the systray icon. If you are recording an
audio, then the audio recording is also paused.
Resume the recording by using the Record
button. The recording is continued from the exact point at
which it was paused.
5.
Stopping the recording
Select Stop
6.
in the systray icon to end the recording.
The Generate Document dialog box is opened:

Name:
Enter a project name.
124
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
7.
Select OK to generate the document.
Afterwards, the generated document is available in the User Area view.
5.3.3.7 Using Roles
You can manage and display your content for your users by using specific roles. These roles are used to filter the
content that is available to users.
Defining roles
Each object has a parameter Roles. The parameter is available in the object editor of the Explorer.
To define a role, proceed as follows:
1.
Select an object.
2.
Go to the Roles parameter of the object editor (in Advanced layout).
3.
Insert a role name into the multi-line edit field.
4.
You can add further roles separated by a comma.
Activating roles
Roles can be activated with the setting Consider Roles. The setting is available in the central configuration dialog
box (menu Tools -> Settings...
) under Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings -> Desktop Assistant in the
subcategory Desktop Assistant - Controls and Behavior.
Now, the main window of the desktop assistant includes a tab entry for roles in the settings tab.
5.3.3.8 Using Sticky Notes
Sticky notes allow the user to insert additional notes for an application and to enter individual information. A
sticky note is only displayed for the user who inserted it and not for other users. The text of the sticky note is
saved in the local cache of the user.
The sidebar of the desktop assistant includes a control for adding sticky notes. When inserting a sticky note, the
bubble with an editing toolbar is displayed. The user can enter and edit the text or can delete an available sticky
note.
Note
It is only possible to insert one sticky note for a screen.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
125
Activating sticky notes
Sticky notes can be activated with the setting Position: 'Add Sticky Note' Control. The setting is available in
Settings
under Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings -> Desktop Assistant in the subcategory Desktop
Assistant - Sidebar.
Sticky note bubble
The sticky note uses the bubble style Sticky Note. The bubble style is available in the Bubble Style
resource.
5.3.3.9 Updating Profile Information
When the Producer is updated to a higher version, the application profile resources are also updated. Desktop
assistant content contain profile information from the application profiles, which can be outdated and can
influence whether objects are correctly recognized.
It is recommended to update the profile information of a project. A dialog box shows a hint, if the profile
information is outdated.
The dialog box contains the following buttons:

Click on Continue to update the project.

Click on Cancel to discard the update.
Recommendation
Archive the project before updating, in order to keep the original status.
Alternatively, create a new project by using the current application profile and keep the older project.
5.3.3.10 Using Content Categories
You can use content categories to sort your content in the main window of the desktop assistant. You can assign
content categories to your content objects. During playback of the desktop assistant, the content will be
structured in dropdown lists with the corresponding content categories.
There are default content categories which are translated in multiple languages. You can use the defaults or you
can create your own content categories.
Activating content categories
Content categories can be activated with the setting Consider Content Categories. The setting is available in the
Settings...
under Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings -> Desktop Assistant in the subcategory Desktop
Assistant - Controls and Behavior.
Now, the content in the main window is structured by using the assigned content categories.
126
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
5.3.3.10.1 Managing Content Categories
Content categories are managed in the Content Categories dialog box. Choose Tools -> Edit Content Categories...
in the menu to open this dialog box.
Creating and editing content categories
In the Content Categories dialog box, you can create, rename and delete content categories.
To create a content category, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the Add button.
A dialog box opens.
2.
Enter the name of the content category.
3.
Confirm with OK.
Recommendation
The entered content category name is used in all languages during playback. To translate the name, see
the chapter Translating Content Category Names.
To rename a content category, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the Rename button.
A dialog box opens.
2.
Change the name of the content category.
3.
Confirm with OK.
To remove a content category, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the content category in the list.
2.
Click on the Delete button.
Once you have edited your content categories, close the dialog box by using OK.
Content categories resource
Content categories are saved as Content Categories
resource in the Adaptable Resources
tree. This resource includes all content categories. Choose the Edit Content Categories...
of the resource
button in the object
editor to open the editing dialog box.
The resource allows you to use the content categories consistently in different workareas and you can also
handle the resource in an authoring environment with a Manager workarea.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
127
5.3.3.10.2 Translating Content Category Names
The default content categories are translated into multiple languages. In the Explorer and Content Categories
dialog box, only the text keys of the categories are shown. During playback of the desktop assistant the
categories are displayed in the current content language.
You can translate your created content categories in your required languages. Proceed as follows:
Note
The entered content category name will be used as text key in the translation files of the text files content
categories resource. Make sure that the text key of the content category is entered as one string without
spaces. You can use an underscore or a hyphen to connect words.
See also the text files of the resource for examples.
1.
Select the Content Categories
resource in the Explorer.
2.
Use the right mouse button to open the context menu.
3.
Select the menu entry Open Folder
4.
The resource folder contains translation files for each language.
.
Open the translation file of your required language in a text editing program.
An overview of the languages and language codes is available in the chapter Content Languages Overview.
5.
Enter the text key and the translated name of the content category. Separate the text key and the name
with a tab.
For example: business_process Business Processes
6.
Save and close the file.
7.
Restart the Producer.
When playing back the desktop assistant the content category is displayed with the translation.
5.3.3.10.3 Assigning Content Categories
You can assign your created content categories to the objects within your tree structure:
1.
Select an object in the tree structure.
2.
Select the button Edit...
next to the parameter Content Categories in the object editor.
A dialog box opens.
3.
You can assign one or more content categories to the object. To do so, activate the corresponding
checkbox.
4.
128
Select OK to close the dialog box.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
5.4 Context Help
The context help helps users to work with an application by offering help descriptions of issues and functionality
independently of process. The information can be presented in relation to different contexts, thus providing
specific information the user can access individually.
The context help thereby enables the user to orientate himself quickly in complex application interfaces and use
the explanations to refresh and apply what he has learnt.
Furthermore, presenting context-related information makes it possible to highlight frequently occurring
problems, explain changes in the application or emphasize information that is important for the process.
Use cases
A context help lends itself for example to the following use cases:

For information about system changes on an object or an application page, for example during
maintenance work.

For fading in additional problem-related explanations for individual objects, for example in order to prevent
incorrect inputs by providing notes and explanations for the objects in question.
Context help in desktop assistant
Context help projects can be used in a desktop assistant and are displayed as Instant Help.
5.4.1 Context Types
The context help recognizes three context types. These can be used in combination but can also be used
individually in a project. This allows all sorts of information to be presented in different circumstances, thus
providing users with the necessary specific information.
A context refers to a specific issue in an application so as to describe it and support the user with the
appropriate context-related information.
Application Context
This context offers general information about the application as well as more in-depth information or links.
The application context underpins the context help and serves to recognize the displayed application and call
corresponding learning content.
This context can also be used on its own.
The macros for the application context are held in the second step of a project.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
129
Screen Context
Describes an application page in greater detail. This can be for example: describe its use in general terms, draw
attention to problem areas or else highlight changes in the event of a new version.
Object Context
Defines a specific object. This can be a Mouse Action
macro for example or a Input Text
macro. This
enables the function of the object to be described, points out things worthy of note or else elucidate
relationships with other objects.
5.4.2 Creating a Context Help
Creating a context help manually enables you to assign context information to an application individually and
independently of pre-existing simulations. You can record the macros required for your processes on each
application page and create the help texts.
In a project the different context types build on one another, i.e. the application is defined first, then the page
and finally the object, thus proceeding from the general to the specific. The recording of the respective contexts
behaves accordingly. An object requires all three macros of context information whereas an application context
can also stand in its own right.
5.4.2.1 Creating a Project
Create a project so that you can then record your content in it. Proceed as follows:
1.
In the Explorer click on New Project
.
A dialog box with the following settings is opened:
1.
Name:
Enter a name.
2.
Project Type:
Select the type Desktop Assistant - Context Help from the drop-down list.
3.
Language:
Select the language for the project. The automatically created bubble texts are generated in the
language corresponding to your selection.
2.
130
Click on OK to create the project.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
The project opens in the project editor and has the icon:
Now, you can record your content. Read the following chapters on this subject.
5.4.2.2 Recording an Application Context
Recording the application context determines the application and the interface to be used for reading the object
information. This is the basis of a context help to assign the help content that is available for an application. This
also provides general information about an application.
The application context for an application can only be set up once in a project as it must only be defined once.
But a number of corresponding application contexts can be created for multiple applications that are recorded.
Record an application context as follows:
1.
Select the Record Application
2.
The Choose Application dialog box appears:
3.
function in the toolbar.
1.
Select the target application window for the recording.
2.
Click Choose.
A dialog box appears that displays the EXE name for the program.

Display Name:
You can define a name for the display during playback.
4.
Click OK to confirm and finish recording.
Click Next to confirm and record another application.
The application context recording is now available in the second step in the project editor.
Recommendation
If you want to create an explanation for a specific context, use the Insert Explanation
function. For
more information, see the section on Inserting an Explanation.
5.4.2.3 Recording a Screen Context
A screen context can be recorded several times in a project and spread over several steps. This may be useful,
for example, if you want to record and sort numerous objects on a screen. If you record a screen context you will
also automatically record an associated application context, if one does not already exist.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
131
Record a screen context as follows:
1.
Select the Record Screen
function in the toolbar.
2.
A settings dialog box appears where you can select an application.
In the dialog box you can define the following:
○
Choose Window:
Here you can select the target application windows for the recording.
○
Profiles:
Shows the application profile for the target application window.
○
Associate with Selected Window:
Specifies that the profile is always used for the target application window. Click Choose.
3.
Afterwards, a dialog box appears where you can change the Screen Title for the screen context.
4.
Confirm the dialog box and complete the recording by clicking OK.
The screen context recording is now available in a new step in the project editor.
5.4.2.4 Recording an Object Context
If you record an object context, you also automatically record an associated application and screen context, if
they do not already exist. Record an object context as follows:
1. Starting the recording
1.
Select the Record Object
function in the toolbar.
The Select Window and Profile dialog box opens.
2. Choosing the window and profile
1.
Choose Window:
Select the application window that you want to record from the list. The selected window appears in the
foreground.
2.
Choose Profile:
This setting selects the application profile for recording the application automatically. If you want to use
another profile, you can change it using the drop-down box.
3.
Associate with Selected Window:
Activate this setting, if you always want to use the profile for the selected application window.
4.
Start the recording using the Record
button.
Click on the Cancel button, if you want to cancel the recording.
132
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Note
If a suitable application profile could not be identified, then the default profile is used. Note that in this
case, the recognition accuracy of the interactions and controls in the application window might be limited,
depending on the application.
3. Recording the object
The recording starts and the recording bar is displayed.
1.
A dialog box appears for selecting a screen context. You have the following options:
○
The New Screen option creates a new screen context in a new step.
○
You can select a prerecorded screen context, which you can add the object context to after
recording.
2.
Confirm your selection by clicking on OK.
3.
Click on an object to record the control.
or
Click on Insert Explanation
4.
in the recording bar.
After an object is selected an object bubble and an editor toolbar appears.
You can edit the text and the bubble position.
5.
Confirm the editor toolbar by clicking Apply.
or
Click Cancel to discard the object.
6.
Record another object or insert an explanation.
7.
To end the recording, click on the Stop
button in the recording bar.
The recording bar closes and the recorded process is now available in the project editor.
5.4.2.5 Recording Bar
With start of recording, a recording bar appears at the top of the screen. The recording bar includes the
following sections and controls:
Buttons
The buttons allow you to control the recording.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
133
Button
Explanation
The Profile list box contains a list of available
application profiles. If the application is automatically
detected, the correct application profile is
Profile
automatically selected and shown in the list. This box
can also be used to switch between application profiles
manually.
Click on Record to begin recording the process.
Afterwards, the button changes to Pause.
Record
Clicking on the Pause button will pause the recording,
which is useful, e.g., when switching applications. It will
then resume recording (status Record).
Pause
Clicking on the button Stop will end the recording and
the macro Simulation End will be inserted into the last
step.
Stop
The Undo button allows you to reset the previous
action made in a project. Note that the Undo function
will only work with the last change made to your
Undo
project. You cannot delete multiple actions.
Click on Insert Explanation to record an explanation
instead of a control.
Insert Explanation
The button Execute Mouse Actions defines whether a
control is to be recorded and executed in the
application or whether this is to be recorded without an
action.
Recording controls without executing actions may
Execute Mouse Action
make sense, for example, if a number of controls on a
page are to be recorded and explained without quitting
the application page. This requires the button to be
deactivated.
134
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Button
Explanation
The Choose Application button allows you to reselect
an application for recording or else switch application.
After selecting the button click on the application to
Choose Application
define the application profile.
Clicking on the button Minimize will minimize the
recording bar and an icon will appear in the Systray
instead. Controlling the recording can be carried out
Minimize
over the context menu. By clicking on the icon, the
recording bar will return to its original size.
Clicking on Close will stop the recording. The program
will exit recording standby mode and the recording bar
Close
will be hidden.
Status section
The status section shows you, if an action is required or if the Producer is working on a recording in the
background. In addition, supporting icons and text messages are displayed.
Status
Explanation
If an application is being recorded and the user is
required to perform an action, this section is green.
After an action has been performed (e.g. clicking on a
menu), the recording bar also shows what kind of
Record
macro was detected with the action, as well as the text
that is automatically allocated to it in the bubbles in the
project (Name, Type, Value and Subtype).
If Producer is busy with an action in the background,
the status area is red and displays the message: busy.
When this is displayed, no actions should be taken in
Busy
the application being recorded.
If the recording has been paused, the status section is
yellow.
Pause
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
135
5.4.2.6 Key Functions for Recording
During recording different actions can be performed using key functions:
Keys
Definition
With a pressed Ctrl key you can navigate freely in the
application without an action being recorded.
Ctrl
This is useful for instance for selecting lists, in order to
open them and record the selection.
With the Esc key recording can be cancelled.
Esc
5.4.3 Form for a Screen
The form allows you to display all form actions in one bubble and not a bubble for each action.
A form is located in a project step and is structured as follows:

Screen

Action macro 1

Action macro 2

Action macro 3
macro
5.4.3.1 Creating a Form
To create a form, proceed as follows:
1.
Combine the macros of the form in one step. This is necessary because the form cannot be created in a
way that spans multiple steps.
○
Move all interaction macros into the step with the first action of the form. Arrange the actions in the
required order in the relevant structure.
○
2.
136
Delete the unused steps and screens.
For the form screen, select the setting Form Mode in the subcategory Advanced (Advanced Layout).
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Form structure settings
There are general settings available for defining the display of the form bubble. The following settings are
available in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...) under Desktop Assistant: Playback
Settings -> General -> Form Bubble:

Style

Alignment

Position

Width

Height
5.5 Guided Tour
The guided tour offers user support in carrying out predefined processes in an application. Users are guided
through the process step-by-step with instructions, making it possible for them to carry out the displayed
actions properly right in the live application. The instructions are collocated with the objects to be used.
Sample applications
A guided tour is suited, for example, to be used as follows:

To train new employees (beginners) to learn the required processes on existing systems.

To introduce a new system for users or to learn new business processes.

To learn about or reference business processes that have been in use for a long time or are rarely used.

The changes in the process when the system is changed.
Structure of a guided tour
A guided tour has the following project structure:

The subcategory Tour End, which is found in the macro Guided Tour Style
, specifies the information that
should be displayed at the end of the process.

Every step contains a macro Guided Tour Step

Every action macro contains a subcategory Next Guided Tour Step that specifies the course of the process.
that defines each individual step.
5.5.1 Creating a Guided Tour
You can record your process or update an existing process independent of existing simulations by manually
creating a guided tour.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
137
The recording is similar to the recording of simulations. You follow the process step-by-step and thus record the
entire sequence.
5.5.1.1
Creating a Project
Create a project so that you can then record your content in it. Proceed as follows:
1.
In the Explorer click on New Project
.
A dialog box with the following settings is opened:
1.
Name:
Enter a name.
2.
Project Type:
Select the type Desktop Assistant - Guided Tour from the drop-down list.
3.
Language:
Select the language for the project. The automatically created bubble texts are generated in the
language corresponding to your selection.
2.
Click on OK to create the project.
The project opens in the project editor and has the icon:
Now, you can record your content. Read the following chapters on this subject.
5.5.1.2 Recording a Guided Tour
To record a guided tour, proceed as follows:
1. Starting the recording
1.
Open the application to be recorded.
Choose the application page where you want to start recording and prepare the application as required.
2.
Click on the Record Guided Tour Step
button in the project editor.
The Select Window and Profile dialog box opens.
2. Choosing the window and profile
1.
Choose Window:
Select the application window that you want to record from the list. The selected window appears in the
foreground.
138
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
2.
Choose Profile:
This setting selects the application profile for recording the application automatically. If you want to use
another profile, you can change it using the drop-down box.
3.
Associate with Selected Window:
Activate this setting, if you always want to use the profile for the selected application window.
4.
Start the recording using the Record
button.
Click on the Cancel button, if you want to cancel the recording..
Note
If a suitable application profile could not be identified, the Producer uses the default profile. Note that in
this case, the recognition accuracy of the interactions and controls in the application window might be
limited, depending on the application.
3. Recording the process
The recording starts and the recording bar is displayed.
1.
Click on an object to record the control.
or
Click on Insert Explanation
2.
in the recording bar.
After an object is selected, an object bubble and an editor toolbar appears.
You can edit the text and the bubble position.
3.
Confirm the editor toolbar by clicking Apply.
or
Click Cancel to discard the object.
4.
Record another object or insert an explanation.
5.
To end the recording, click on the Stop
button in the recording bar.
The recording bar closes and the recorded process is now available in the project editor.
5.5.1.3 Recording Bar
With start of recording, a recording bar appears at the top of the screen. The recording bar includes the
following sections and controls:
Buttons
The buttons allow you to control the recording.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
139
Button
Explanation
The Profile list box contains a list of available
application profiles. If the application is automatically
detected, the correct application profile is
Profile
automatically selected and shown in the list. This box
can also be used to switch between application profiles
manually.
Click on Record to begin recording the process.
Afterwards, the button changes to Pause.
Record
Clicking on the Pause button will pause the recording,
which is useful, e.g., when switching applications. It will
then resume recording (status Record).
Pause
Clicking on the button Stop will end the recording and
the macro Simulation End will be inserted into the last
step.
Stop
The Undo button allows you to reset the previous
action made in a project. Note that the Undo function
will only work with the last change made to your
Undo
project. You cannot delete multiple actions.
Click on Insert Explanation to record an explanation
instead of a control.
Insert Explanation
The button Execute Mouse Actions defines whether a
control is to be recorded and executed in the
application or whether this is to be recorded without an
action.
Recording controls without executing actions may
Execute Mouse Action
make sense, for example, if a number of controls on a
page are to be recorded and explained without quitting
the application page. This requires the button to be
deactivated.
140
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Button
Explanation
The Choose Application button allows you to reselect
an application for recording or else switch application.
After selecting the button click on the application to
Choose Application
define the application profile.
Clicking on the button Minimize will minimize the
recording bar and an icon will appear in the Systray
instead. Controlling the recording can be carried out
Minimize
over the context menu. By clicking on the icon, the
recording bar will return to its original size.
Clicking on Close will stop the recording. The program
will exit recording standby mode and the recording bar
Close
will be hidden.
Status section
The status section shows you, if an action is required or if the Producer is working on a recording in the
background. In addition, supporting icons and text messages are displayed.
Status
Explanation
If an application is being recorded and the user is
required to perform an action, this section is green.
After an action has been performed (e.g. clicking on a
menu), the recording bar also shows what kind of
Record
macro was detected with the action, as well as the text
that is automatically allocated to it in the bubbles in the
project (Name, Type, Value and Subtype).
If Producer is busy with an action in the background,
the status area is red and displays the message: busy.
When this is displayed, no actions should be taken in
Busy
the application being recorded.
If the recording has been paused, the status section is
yellow.
Pause
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
141
5.5.1.4 Key Functions for Recording
During recording different actions can be performed using key functions:
Keys
Definition
With a pressed Ctrl key you can navigate freely in the
application without an action being recorded.
Ctrl
This is useful for instance for selecting lists, in order to
open them and record the selection.
With the Esc key recording can be cancelled.
Esc
5.5.2 Subcategory: Next Guided Tour Step
The subcategory Next Guided Tour Step is located in the interaction macros and defines the process flow based
on the process steps. The subcategory contains the following settings:

Action:
Specifies the action that triggers a jump to the next guided tour step.

Next Step:
Specifies the step that the guided tour jumps to.

Alternative Step 1-3:
Defines alternative guided tour steps for the tour sequence.
If the guided tour cannot jump to a defined guided tour step because the application page is not available,
then the guided tour jumps to the specified alternative steps - one after the other. If no application page is
found, the guided tour terminates.
5.5.3 Branches in a Guided Tour
Branches allow the user to digress from the sequential path within a guided tour. This gives the user much more
flexibility and portrays a more realistic process workflow, which means that the user has a choice of where to go
to next.
During playback, the branch actions of the step are displayed as sub steps with radio buttons in the step list.
Once you have selected an action, the sub-steps of the branch process are displayed.
A branch is located in a step of a guided tour and is structured as follows:
142
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing

Guided Tour Step

Screen

Action macro 1 with individual Next Step

Action macro 2 with individual Next Step

Action macro 3... or further objects
macro
macro
Note
Branches are only recommended for use in a guided tour because they support a process. They do not
explain a single object, unlike in the context help.
5.5.3.1 Creating a Branch
Combine the macros of the branch in one step. This is necessary because the branch cannot be created in a way
that spans multiple steps.
To create a branch, proceed as follows:
1.
Move all required action macros into one step with the same screen.
2.
Delete the unused steps, guided tour steps and screens.
3.
For every branch action, set the Next Step with the required next step of the guided tour branch. As a
result, the steps are displayed in the guided tour window after you select a branch action.
4.
Correct the numbering in the last steps of the guided tour to match the new order.
5.5.4 Form in a Guided Tour
The form allows the user to fill in an on-screen form in an individually chosen sequence and then confirm all data
entries. During playback, the form step is displayed as a standard step in the step list. Once the step is selected,
a bubble is displayed that includes all the form actions.
A form is located in a guided tour step and is structured as follows:

Guided Tour Step

Screen

Action macro 1 with individual Next Step

Action macro 2 with individual Next Step

Action macro 3... or further objects
macro
macro
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
143
5.5.4.1 Creating a Form
To create a form, proceed as follows:
1.
Combine the macros of the form in one step. This is necessary because the form cannot be created in a
way that spans multiple steps.
○
Move all interaction macros into the step with the first action of the form. Arrange the actions in the
required order in the relevant guided tour structure.
○
Delete the unused steps and screens.
○
For the last action of the form, set the Next Step setting in the process. As a result, the steps of the
project are displayed in the guided tour window.
For the other actions of the form, deactivate the setting Next Step (green Button
).
2.
For the form screen, select the setting Form Mode in the subcategory Advanced (Advanced Layout).
3.
Correct the numbering in the last steps of the guided tour to match the new order.
Form structure settings
There are general settings available for defining the display of the form bubble. The following settings are
available in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...) under Desktop Assistant: Playback
Settings -> General -> Form Bubble:

Style

Alignment

Position

Width

Height
5.6 Object Bubble
The object bubble displays specific information about an object in a dedicated bubble. This bubble is used for
both the context help and guided tour.
Depending on the setting the bubbles are displayed in miniature with a question mark (see also Desktop
Assistant: Mini Icons) and open as soon as they are clicked. In this way the bubbles do not obscure the
application interface. Furthermore, the button in the header area can be used to minimize the bubbles again
after they have been called.
144
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
But the object bubble is also used as a bubble for an inserted Explanation
macro. This bubble is displayed on
the application depending on its position and settings and offers alternative page or object related information.
When used inside the guided tour, the object bubble also contains an OK button to confirm actions and go to the
next tour step.
Design and position
The object bubble design is predefined in the central settings. This is where changes to the way information is
displayed can be made. The bubble position is specified by the position of the object and the orientation setting.
These can be changed in the respective object's macro editor in the Object Bubble subcategory or in the
Advanced subcategory for an Explanation macro.
5.6.1 Central Settings for Object Bubbles
In the central settings, you can configure the appearance and functionality of object bubbles. The settings are
available in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
) under Desktop Assistant: Playback
Settings -> General -> Object Bubble. These settings are either project-specific or generic, depending on the
selection.
5.6.2 Variants of the Object Bubble
Used for desktop assistant type: context help
There are different display variants, which can be used for the object bubble. The variants can be defined in the
Display Variant setting of the Context Help Style

macro or for an interaction macro.
Icon:
Displays an icon on the control. The user can open the bubble with a click or via a mouseover on the icon.

Tooltip:
No icon or bubble is displayed. The user can open the bubble via mouseover on the control.

Bubble:
Displays the opened bubble on the control.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
145
5.6.3 Subcategory: Object Bubble
Each action macro has a subcategory Object Bubble in the macro editor. The settings in the subcategroy define
the style and behavior of the object bubble for the macro.
For an Explanation
macro the settings are located in the Advanced subcategory.
The following settings are available:

Style:
Defines the bubble style resource for displaying the object bubble.

Mini Icon Type (Context Help):
Defines a type for the mini icon of the object. The mini icons are a resource type of the Adaptable
Resources.

Width / Height:
Defines the width and height of the object bubble in pixels.
If the amount of text exceeds the available space, the height is scaled automatically.

Orientation:
Defines the orientation of the object bubble relative to the referenced object.

Offset:
Defines the offset in pixels in which the object bubble is displayed to the object.

Minimized (Context Help):
Defines if the object bubble is displayed minimized when the page is loaded.

Minimizable:
Specifies whether the bubble can be minimized during playback. If this option is activated, a Minimize
button is displayed in the bubble header.

Hide Option (Context Help):
Specifies whether the bubble can be deactivated by the users. If this options is activated, a setting will
appear in the object bubble which allows the users to hide information that they no longer need.

Show 'Next' Button (Guided Tour):
Defines, that the Go to Next Step button is shown in the object bubble.
5.6.4 Hiding an Object Bubble
Used for desktop assistant type: context help
For object bubbles, you can display an option for hiding bubbles and their highlights. This allows users to hide
any information they do not need.
146
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Displaying the Hide Option in a bubble
In order to make this option visible to the user in the object bubble, click on Hide Option. You can specify this
individually for a macro or for the entire project:

For an Object Bubble:
To specify the settings for a specific macro, choose Object Context and then go to the Object Bubble area in
the macro editor. Activate the setting Hide Option.

For all Object Bubbles:
To specify the setting for all macros, open the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools ->
Settings...
) under Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings -> General -> Object Bubble. Activate the setting
Hide Option.
Allowing the user to display bubbles
If a user hides one or more object bubbles during playback and then wants to display the information again,
there is the option Show Hidden Help. The option is available in the context menu from the taskbar in the
Desktop Assistant and in Settings of the desktop assistant.
5.6.5 Desktop Assistent Mini Icons
Used for desktop assistant type: context help
When the object bubble is minimized, a small bubble with a question mark is displayed. You can change the mini
bubble by using a content-specific icon. This allows you to display specific information.
Recommendation
Use Icon or Tooltip as Display Variant to show the icon instead of the bubble.
Mini Icon Style
The default mini icons are stored as Desktop Assistant: Mini Icon resource in the Adaptable Resources. The
resource contains 12 different icons.
The icons can be adapted in the Style Editor (menu Tools -> Customization -> Edit Styles Resources...
).
You can change the colors and symbols of the icons. See also Desktop Assistant Mini Icons.
Mini Icon Settings
A mini bubble can be defined for each action macro and Explanation macro with the setting Mini Icon Type. The
setting is located in the subcategory Object Bubble of the macro editor and for an Explanation in the subcategory
Advanced.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
147
5.7 Creation Using Existing Simulations
When simulations are converted to desktop assistant projects, they are converted to a selected type and the
projects adjusted to correspond to the necessary properties:
Conversion in the context help
When converting a simulation into a context help, the application, page and object contexts are automatically
created as a function of the information saved during the recording. In the process, the objects are arranged
based on their page affiliation. The objects are merged and arranged based on their page affiliation here.
The advantage of converting simulations into a context help is that it is possible to use controls that have
already been recorded and which are familiar to the user from the simulations as object contexts. An additional
benefit is that no objects that are required for a process are lost in a manual recording as they already exist in a
simulation.
Conversion in the guided tour
The guided tour is created on the basis of existing process simulations.
The object bubbles are always displayed for a step when the guided tour is running. To convert a simulation, it is
therefore recommended using projects where the Screen macros were not merged, i.e. for every action there is
a separate step. The bubbles are thus displayed one after another for every action in the tour sequence.
5.7.1
Converting the Simulation
To convert a simulation into a desktop assistant project, proceed as follows:
1.
Open a simulation project in the project editor.
2.
Click the Generate Desktop Assistant Project
3.
Afterwards, a dialog box opens where you can make the following settings:

button in the toolbar.
Project Title:
Enter a name for the project.

Convert Hotspot to Explanation:
Defines, whether recorded hotspots are to be converted to Explanation
. If the option is
deactivated, the objects recorded as Hotspots are removed.
Note
Explanations
depend purely on position and do not use any object information to
recognize a control within the application. That is why it is advisable only to use Explanations
for static objects in an application. With dynamic objects, the Explanation does not change
dynamically either.
148
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing

Guided Tour:
Defines, that a guided tour is to be generated. With deactivated option, a context help is generated.
4.
Click on Ok to confirm the dialog box.
The simulation is then converted into the project.
After the project has been created and is opened in the project editor. Now, you can edit the project.
Branches of a simulation
For a guided tour the branches of a simulation will be converted into the required structure. When converting a
context help the branches will be ignored.
5.7.2 Post Processing after Converting
To customize and design a project according to the specific requirements, manual editing is possible after
automatic conversion of a simulation.
Necessary customization
The following post editing will be required as a result of the technical specifics of the recorded application:

If page keys were recorded with a regular expression, these page key attributes have to be customized as
otherwise the Desktop Assistant cannot display the associated application pages. The Replace Key Page
Attribute function is available for this purpose. Selecting this option, displays a dialog allowing you to select
all the page key attributes. Now select the attribute with a regular expression and click Next. With the
option Regular Expression enabled, the selected page key attribute will be converted accordingly, so that
the Desktop Assistant will be able to interpret it. Click on Replace to customize the regular expression.

For an application with dynamic page keys the page key has to be edited manually, so that the recording’s
page key is not used in the project. For this purpose the page key can be rerecorded using the function
Update Screen

.
Context helps are strongly dependent on the differentiation of the application pages’ page keys. In
applications such as Word or Outlook 2007, this differentiation may not be sufficiently clear because the
application only has one view and and a process does not therefore take place on several application
pages. To be able to differentiate the pages exactly, other controls have to be added to the context help
using the Record Page Specifier
function. To do this, select the Screen Context
macro on which the
desired control is displayed. Now click on the function Record Page Specifier, select the desired control and
confirm with Ok.
Further customization
The following post processing can be performed:

Additional application page objects can be recorded manually for a context help to explain objects of an
application page in further detail.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
149

To provide users with additional information general notes can be created that will be faded in while
a project is in progress. This is accomplished using the Record Explanation
selected in the macro editor after selecting the Screen Context

function, which can be
macro.
As regards visual presentation layout changes and position changes can be applied to the highlights and
bubbles. As the bubbles are inserted directly at the clicked position, it is recommended standard practice
to review them to ensure an optimal view.

As the text modules are adopted directly from the simulations, they should be reviewed for use in
the project and modified if so required. For example, this is necessary in process orientated descriptions
such as Click on Next, to obtain generic information in a context help.
5.8 Editing Content
Various functions for configuring how your content is displayed, its functionality and design are available to you
in the project editor. These can be called when selecting a macro by using the macro editor or the context menu.
5.8.1 Inserting an Explanation
You can insert additional information into your content and use it in a variety of different ways with the
Explanation
macro. This information can relate, for example, to an application or page. System-wide
explanations can also be used for generally valid information.
System-wide explanations are applicable to all applications and processes. They make it possible to
communicate general information quickly and directly to users, for example, information about upcoming work
on a server.
Displaying explanations
An explanation is displayed as follows depending on the desktop assistant type and the position in the project:

Explanations in the first step can be used system-wide

Explanations under the application context are displayed for the respective application

Context help: explanations in the step of a context help are displayed for an entire page

Guided tour: explanations in the first step of a guided tour are displayed as start bubble - a confirmation
button for the start of the process is displayed

Guided tour: explanations in the step of a guided tour are displayed for a process step
Inserting an explanation
The explanation is to be inserted as follows for the application context and the Style
150
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
macro:
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
1.
Select the macro for which the explanation is to be inserted.
2.
Then click the Insert Explanation
3.
The explanation bubble is inserted in the step and you can now enter a text and position the bubble.
function in the header of the macro editor.
Note
When using an explanation within the application context of a context help, the bubble is always visible in
the desktop assistant for a displayed Inline Help. The explanation has to be minimized or hidden by the
user.
Adding an explanation for screen context
The explanation is to be added as follows for the page context:
1.
Select a Screen Context
for which the explanation is to be displayed.
2.
Then click on the Record Explanation
3.
Now define where the explanation is to be located by clicking in the application. You will be prompted by a
function in the header line of the macro editor.
note on the cursor.
4.
A dialog will then appear in which you can enter the explanatory text. Then confirm this by clicking on OK.
The recorded Explanation
macro can then be further edited in the macro editor to customize the macro's
appearance and functionality if so required.
5.8.2 Editing Bubbles
Bubbles are edited in the step view. You can change the bubble text and the size and position of the bubble here.
There are two buttons on the toolbar that can be used to switch between the view of the bubble for the current
macro and the bubbles for all macros in the step.
Note
The highlights of the actions cannot be changed because they are linked to the recorded control. Changes
can produce errors in the display for the playback.
5.8.2.1 Editing Bubble Texts
Bubble texts for the desktop assistant macros can be edited right on the bubble or in the macro editor in the
respective mode.

Editing in the step view
Double-click on a bubble and an HTML editor will appear with various options for editing the content. For
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
151
more information on the HTML editor, refer to the HTML Editor section of the document. Edit your text as
desired and click on OK to confirm your changes.

Editing in the macro editor
Texts can be edited in the macro editor in the Text parameter. Click on the respective text field and the
HTML editor will appear. You can now edit the text.
5.8.2.2 Positioning Bubbles
You can change the size and position of bubbles in the step view as follows:
Positioning the bubbles
1.
Click on the object you would like to edit.
2.
A red line will appear around the object. Click on the object again, this time holding the mouse button down
3.
With the mouse button still pressed, drag the object to the desired position.
4.
Release the mouse button and the object is now positioned.
Changing bubble alignments
1.
Click on the object you would like to edit.
2.
A square will appear at the tip of the bubble, which you can use to turn the object. With bubbles that do not
have a tip, the square will appear in the middle of the bubble. Click on the dot and hold the mouse button
down.
3.
With the mouse button still pressed, pull the dot away from the bubble and until you have reached the
desired position. Pull the dot towards the middle of the bubble if you wish to hide the tip.
4.
Release the mouse button to set the new position.
5.8.3 Recording a Page Specifier
Page Specifiers are used to define additional information for a page. This is useful if there is only a small
difference between two pages. For example, with the macro you can specify a special control, which is only
visible on one of the pages.
The macro contains no content information.
Note
Page specifiers are supported for context help projects. Do not use page specifiers for guided tour
projects.
152
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
To create a Page Specifier proceed as follows:
1.
Select a Screen Context
where you want to add the Page Specifier.
2.
Click on the Record Page Specifier
function in the header line of the macro editor.
The Choose Application dialog box opens.
3.
Select the application from the list and click Choose.
4.
Click on the object, which you want to use as an additional specifier. You will be prompted by a note on the
cursor.
5.
A dialog box appears in which you can define the parameters of the page specifier.
Object-specific parameters are:
6.

Object Name

Object Image

Input Text

Selected Value
Confirm the dialog box by clicking on OK, if you would like to complete the recording.
Click on Next to record another object.
Excluding or including a screen
For the recorded Page Specifier you can specify, whether the content for the recognized application page should
be displayer or excluded. Activate the setting Exclude Screen, if the content should be hidden. In the thumbnail
view a minus for excluding the screen or a plus for displaying the screen is displayed.
Recommendation
When having two similar screens in a project, then it is recommended, to add one page specifier for
excluding the screen and another page specifier for displaying the screen.
5.8.4 Customizing Page Information
When an application is being recorded, page information is sometimes generated that is not universally
applicable. That means that the page information only exists during the recording, but is no longer up-to-date
when the recording is played back by a user. For example, material numbers or information associated with user
roles. During playback of a desktop assistant, the content with a specific key cannot be displayed as it does not
match with the current application page.
To make a content generically available for all users, you need to replace the information in the page keys with a
static text or a regular expression. Regular expressions allow you to replace static texts of page keys with
variable attributes.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
153
Replacing page key attributes
The Replace Page Key Attribute function allows you to customize the page information of your content. To
replace a page key attribute, proceed as follows:
Note
When adapting several projects with the same page key, remember that the page keys should be equal.
This is especially important for displaying all the available content during the playback of a desktop
assistant.
1.
Select an object or group in the Explorer.
or
Open a project in the project editor.
2.
Click on Replace Page Key Attributes... in the Tools -> Context Administration menu.
3.
A dialog box opens with the following settings. Change the settings as required:
○
Parameter:
The dropdown contains all attributes parameters of the page keys.
Select a parameter.
○
Search Value:
Select the attribute of the page key parameter to be replaced. The drop-down list displays all the
available attributes of the selected parameter.
You can enter an attribute in the field.
○
Search as Regular Expression:
Activate this option to use regular expressions.
○
Replace Value:
Insert the attribute to be used in the page key.
You can enter an attribute in the field.
○
Replace with Regular Expression:
Activate this option to use regular expressions.
○
Preview:
Select Preview to display the found attributes and the replace version.
All found attributes are listed in the preview field. If a regular expression is used for the replacement,
an icon is also displayed.
4.
Click on Replace to replace the defined attributes wherever they occur.
You can replace further attributes or you can close the dialog box.
Restoring page key attributes
When changing a page key the original attribute will be saved. This allows you to undo changes by using the
Restore button.
154
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Further Information

General Regular Expression Examples

Examples of Customizing Page Key Values
5.8.4.1 General Regular Expression Examples
Examples of regular expressions:
Regular Expression
Description
.
any character except newline
.+
at least one character
.{5}
at least 5 characters
.*
0 or any number of characters
\w \d \s
word, digit, whitespace
\W \D \S
not word, digit, whitespace
[abc]
either of a, b, or c
[^abc]
not a, b, or c
[a-g]
character between a and g
Anchors
^abc$
start / end of the string
\b
word boundary
Escaped characters
\. \* \\
escaped special characters
\t \n \r
tab, linefeed, carriage return
\u00A9
unicode escaped ©
Groups & Lookaround
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
155
Regular Expression
Description
(abc)
capture group
\1
reference to group #1
(?:abc)
non-capturing group
(?=abc)
positive lookahead
(?!abc)
negative lookahead
Quantifiers & Alternation
a* a+ a?
0 or more, 1 or more, 0 or 1
a{5} a{2,}
exactly five, two or more
a{1,3}
between one and three
a+? a{2,}?
match as few as possible
ab|cd
match ab or cd
5.8.4.2 Examples of Customizing Page Key Values
1) Replace a string with another string
Sample page key values
ERD(1)/110 Business Workplace of PU RC 00 Auth Test User
ERD(1)/110 Business Workplace of PU RC 10 Auth Test User
ERD(1)/110 Create Purchase Requisition
ERD(1)/110 Decision Step in Workflow
Expected Search Result
All page key values containing
"ERD(1)/110" will be listed.
Expected Replace Result
156
Search Value
Regular Expression
ERD(1)/110
No
Replace Value
Regular Expression
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
ERD(2)/220
No
During playback, any page key value that
contains "ERD(2)/220" will be treated as
correct. The rest of the page key value
(for example, "Create Purchase
Requisition") still has to match exactly.
Example of a replaced page key value
ERD(2)/220 Create Purchase Requisition
2) Neutralize any string following a specific string
Sample page key values
Goods Receipt Purchase Order - John Smith
Expected Search Result
All page key values equal to "Goods
Receipt Purchase Order - John Smith" will
be listed.
Expected Replace Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
Goods Receipt Purchase
Order - John Smith
Replace Value
No
Regular Expression
During playback, any string containing at
least one character following the string
"Goods Receipt Purchase Order -" will be
treated as correct. Please be aware that
absolutely everything (not just "John
Smith") will be treated as correct. Thus,
Goods Receipt Purchase
Order -.+)
Yes
the regular expression ".+" should be
used carefully. Otherwise, the matching
result might become too fuzzy.
Example for a replaced page key value
Goods Receipt Purchase Order - .+
3) Neutralize any string preceding a specific string
Sample page key values
Document1 – Microsoft Word
Document2 – Microsoft Word
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
157
Replace Page Key Values – Microsoft Word
SAP Enable Now – Microsoft Word
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
.+ – Microsoft Word
Yes
Replace Value
Regular Expression
.+ – Microsoft Word
Yes
All page key values containing at least
one character preceding the string "–
Microsoft Word" will be listed.
Expected Replace Result
During playback, any string containing at
least one character preceding the string
"– Microsoft Word" will be treated as
correct.
Example of a replaced page key value
.+ – Microsoft Word
4) Neutralize any number preceding a specific string.
Sample page key values
Acct Assignment Cat. 1 Entry
BOM Usage 9 Entries
Commodity codes 32 Entries
Condition Type 20 Entries
Cost Center 500 Entries
Distribution Channel 6 Entries
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
\d+ (Entry|Entries)
Yes
Replace Value
Regular Expression
\d+ (Entry|Entries)
Yes
All page key values containing a number
with at least 1 digit will be listed. The
number must precede the string "Entry"
or "Entries".
Expected Replace Result
During playback, any number containing
at least 1 digit will be treated as correct.
The number must precede the string
"Entry" or "Entries". The rest of the page
key value (for example, "Acct Assignment
Cat.") still has to match exactly.
158
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Example of a replaced page key value
Acct Assignment Cat. \d+ (Entry|Entries)
5) Neutralize any number following a specific string
Sample page key values
Goods Receipt Purchase Order 4500000515 - Change
Goods Receipt Purchase Order 4500000535 - Display
Goods Receipt Purchase Order 4500000685 - Change
Goods Receipt Purchase Order 4500000752 - Display
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
All page key values containing a number
with at least 1 digit will be listed. The
Goods Receipt Purchase
number must follow the string "Goods
Order \d+
Yes
Receipt Purchase Order".
Expected Replace Result
Replace Value
Regular Expression
During playback, any number containing
at least 1 digit will be treated as correct.
The number must follow the string
"Goods Receipt Purchase Order". The
rest of the page key value (for example
Goods Receipt Purchase
Order \d+
Yes
"Change" or "Display") still has to match
exactly.
Example of a replaced page key value
Goods Receipt Purchase Order \d+ - Change
6) Neutralize any number between two specific strings
Sample page key values
Hit List 1 Entry
Hit List 2 Entries
Hit List 56 Entries
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
All page key values containing a number
Hit List \d+
with at least 1 digit will be listed. The
(Entry|Entries)
Yes
number must follow the string "Hit List"
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
159
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
Replace Value
Regular Expression
and it must precede the string "Entry" or
"Entries".
Expected Replace Result
During playback, any number containing
at least 1 digit will be treated as correct.
The number must follow the string "Hit
List" and it must precede the string
Hit List \d+
(Entry|Entries)
Yes
"Entry" or "Entries".
Example of a replaced page key value
Hit List \d+ (Entry|Entries)
7) Neutralize any number that contains at least 5 digits
Sample page key values
Change Long text on task: 00002000103980002 Language EN
Change Long text on task: 00002000103980004 Language EN
Goods Receipt Outbound Delivery 70101178 - John Smith
Goods Receipt Outbound Delivery 70101180 - John Smith
Goods Receipt Purchase Order 4500000515 - John Smith
Goods Receipt Purchase Order 4500000535 - John Smith
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
\d{5,}
Yes
Replace Value
Regular Expression
\d+
Yes
All page key values containing a number
with at least 5 digits will be listed. The
position of the number within the value
does not matter.
Expected Replace Result
During playback, any number will be
treated as correct. The rest of the page
key value (for example "Goods Receipt
Outbound Delivery") still has to match
exactly.
Example of a replaced page key value
Goods Receipt Purchase Order \d+ - John Smith
160
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
8) Neutralize any number in brackets following a specific string
Sample page key values
Account Number of Vendor or Creditor (1)
Account Number of Vendor or Creditor (2)
Account Number of Vendor or Creditor (5)
Account Number of Vendor or Creditor (12)
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
All page key values containing a number
in brackets with at least 1 digit will be
Account Number of Vendor
listed. The number must follow the string
or Creditor \(\d+\)
Yes
"Account Number of Vendor or Creditor".
Expected Replace Result
Replace Value
Regular Expression
During playback, any number in brackets
will be treated as correct. The rest of the
page key value ("Account Number of
Vendor or Creditor") still has to match
Account Number of Vendor
or Creditor \(\d+\)
Yes
exactly.
Example of a replaced page key value
Account Number of Vendor or Creditor \(\d+\)
9) Neutralize a specific number only
Sample page key values
Create Purchase Requisition: Item 00010
Goods Receipt Outbound Delivery: Item 00010
Stock/Requirements List: Item 00010
Do not search for:
Change Long text on task: 00002000103980002 Language EN
Change Long text on task: 00002000103980004 Language EN
Purchase Order 4500000010 - John Smith
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
\b00010\b
Yes
All page key values containing the exact
number sequence "00010" will be listed
(for example "Create Purchase
Requisition: Item 00010"). Any other
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
161
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
Replace Value
Regular Expression
\d+
Yes
numbers where "00010" is just a part of
the entire number will not be listed (for
example, "Change Long text on task:
00002000103980002 Language EN").
Expected Replace Result
During playback, any number will be
treated as correct. The rest of the page
key value (for example, "Create Purchase
Requisition: Item") still has to match
exactly.
Example of a replaced page key value
Create Purchase Requisition: Item \d+
10) Neutralize the time
Sample page key values
Stock/Requirements List as of 11:05 hrs
Stock/Requirements List as of 11:55 hrs
Stock/Requirements List as of 17:41 hrs
Stock/Requirements List as of 14:53 hrs
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
\d+:\d+
Yes
Replace Value
Regular Expression
\d+:\d+
Yes
All page key values containing exactly one
specified time with the format [any
number]:[any number] (for
example, 11:05) will be listed.
Expected Replace Result
During playback, any time with the format
[any number]:[any number] (for
example, 11:05) will be treated as correct.
The rest of the page key value (for
example, "Stock/Requirements List as
of") still has to match exactly.
162
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Example of a replaced page key value
Stock/Requirements List as of \d+:\d+ hrs
11) Neutralize the date
Sample page key values
Purchase Orders for Period 05.02.2015 to 10.03.2015
Purchase Orders for Period 15.04.2015 to 16.04.2015
Purchase Orders for Period 01.10.2015 to 22.10.2015
Purchase Orders for Period 23.12.2015 to 26.12.2015
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
\d{2}\.\d{2}\.\d{4}
Yes
Replace Value
Regular Expression
\d{2}\.\d{2}\.\d{4}
Yes
All page key values containing exactly one
date with the format [exactly 2 digits].[
exactly 2 digits].[ exactly 4 digits] (for
example, 05.02.2015) will be listed.
Expected Replace Result
During playback, any date with the format
[exactly 2 digits].[ exactly 2 digits].[
exactly 4 digits (for example, 17.03.2020)
will be treated as correct.
Example of a replaced page key value
Purchase Orders for Period \d{2}\.\d{2}\.\d{4} to \d{2}\.\d{2}\.\d{4}
12) Neutralize any number and any string following a specific string
Sample page key values
Purchase Order 70101178 - John Smith
Purchase Order 70101180 - John Smith
Purchase Order 70101182 - John Smith
Purchase Order 4500000357 - John Doe
Purchase Order 4500000515 - John Doe
Purchase Order 4500000535 - John Doe
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
Purchase Order \d+ - .*
Yes
All page key values containing a number
with at least 1 digit and any string
following “-“ will be listed. The number
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
163
Expected Search Result
Search Value
Regular Expression
Replace Value
Regular Expression
Purchase Order \d+ - .*
Yes
must follow the string “Purchase Order”.
Expected Replace Result
During playback, any number containing
at least 1 digit and any string following "-"
will be treated as correct. The number
must follow the string "Purchase Order".
Example of a replaced page key value
Purchase Order \d+ - .*
5.8.5 Conditions for Input Fields
Conditions allow you to display not only context-specific information but also information when a specific text is
entered in a text field. If the condition does not match, a bubble with information is shown. You can also jump to
a specific step.
A condition can be defined for an Input Text
macro. Each macro can have one condition.
5.8.5.1 Creating a Condition
To create a condition, proceed as follows:
1.
Select an Input Text
2.
Open the settings subcategory Condition in macro editor.
3.
Edit the condition parameters:
1.
macro.
Condition Pattern:
Select a condition pattern from the dropdown list.
Activate the parameter by selecting the green control
2.
.
Condition Value:
Enter a text or a number based on the selected pattern.
3.
Condition Text:
Enter a text. The text is shown, if the condition does not match.
You can enter further information for the user about the expected input value.
When a macro contains a condition an icon
is displayed in thumbnail view. The condition control shows the
specified parameters.
164
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
To remove an available condition deactivate the green control
of the Condition Pattern parameter.
Condition pattern
The Condition Pattern parameter contains the following entries:

Is equal to

Is not equal to

Is greater than

Is greater than or equal to

Is less than

Is less than or equal to

Minimum number of characters

Maximum number of characters

Number of characters equal to

Regular expression
Further parameters
The Condition subcategory contains the following additional parameters:

Jump Target (use for guided tour, visible in advanced layout):
Select a step from the dropdown list. The playback jumps to the specified step if the condition matches.

Case Sensitive:
Activate this setting to make the condition case-sensitive.

Ignore on Page Load (use for context help):
Specifies that the condition is not checked on page load. The condition is checked when using a
corresponding control. This avoids the need to display the condition bubble directly.

Bubble Style:
Specifies which bubble style resource is to be used for displaying the condition text.

Highlight Color:
Specifies which highlight color is to be used for highlighting the control.
5.8.6 Updating Content
For possible process changes and extensions in the desktop assistant projects automatic updating of the
content is available during playback in the Desktop Assistant. This presupposes that the projects are held
centrally on a server or file-share.
The parameter Update Frequency is available to you in the section Desktop Assistent: Playback Settings ->
General -> Advanced of the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
). This is located in the
Advanced subcategory visible when selecting the option Show More. The value is specified in minutes
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
165
Save the projects to your relevant storage location for update purposes. The content will be updated
automatically with the specified frequency during playback. Once it has been automatically updated, the
projects will restart.
The update frequency should not be set at too high a value, so as to avoid unnecessary server queries. An
optimal value is between 3-6 hours or every 24 hours. This depends on the anticipated changes.
In a desktop assistant added objects are displayed with a star ( ) in the content list.
Note
Bear in mind with automatic updating of a guided tour that if it happens to be running when it is updated,
the guided tour will then start again from the beginning. Guided tour updates should therefore be
undertaken in the evening or at weekends, when low usage levels can be expected.
5.8.7 Merging Projects
Several desktop assistant projects can be integrated into a single project so that you can use content from
various projects.
The advantage of this is that content can be accessed quickly and directly and additional projects do not need to
be loaded as the Desktop Assistant can only ever play back one project. Already existing objects also do not
have to be recorded twice. It is not apparent to the user when playing back the project whether he is dealing with
multiple projects.
Integrate projects using the following procedure:
1.
Create a new project to add the different projects to with the New Project
function.
You can also open an existing project from within the project editor.
2.
In the Edit menu select the Include Desktop Assistant Projects function.
3.
You can now select the project to be inserted from within the open dialog box. Do so by clicking on the
Edit
button. This will open a dialog box displaying all the projects within the workarea using the Desktop
Assistant type. Select the desired project and click on Ok.
4.
Then confirm the dialog by clicking on OK if you would like to insert the project or click on Next to insert the
project and select another project.
The projects themselves are linked by the act of inserting them. A macro displaying the link will appear in the
first step. Linking the projects means that changes made in the original project are also incorporated in the link
and thus also displayed in the project.
166
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
The way in which the content is displayed reflects the project from which the projects are being called as the
Style
macro is located by default within the first step. Any customization should therefore also be applied in
this macro. If you have created a new project then the act of inserting the project automatically creates the
Style macro.
When playing back the content the Desktop Assistant reads out the context information, starting with the first
step. With multiple occurrences of content of one context type, such as for example the same screen contexts,
the Desktop Assistant displays the first context to be read out. If one context that is the same is not to be
preferred over another, the macro with the currently used context is to be relegated to a stepfurther back in the
content.
5.9 Playing Back Content
The basic prerequisite for playing back desktop assistant content is that the Desktop Assistant must be
installed on the operating system. Read the information on the next pages to find out how to start desktop
assistant content with and without an existing Producer installation.
Playback in Google Chrome
You are able to playback the desktop assistant in Google Chrome which has been recorded in Microsoft internet
Explorer. To support a correct page recognition you have to install a Google Chrome extension.
During installation of the Desktop Assistant, activate the option Install Google Chrome Extension. The extension
can be uninstalled from the extension settings of Google Chrome.
5.9.1 Desktop Assistant Preview
At any time during the creation process, you can preview content playback and thus check for errors or
necessary improvements. Proceed as follows:
Note
The preview is controlled by the Producer. Therefore the Desktop Assistant and its control functions are
thus not available in the preview.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
167
Preview in the project editor - desktop assistant project
For playback proceed as follows:
1.
Open a desktop assistant project
/
in the project editor.
2.
Click on Play
3.
Start or maximize the target application and go to the required application page. If the help objects have
in the toolbar to start the project.
been correctly created and linked, they are now displayed in the application page.
4.
Click on Stop
in the toolbar to exit the preview.
Preview in the explorer - desktop assistant project
For playback proceed as follows:
Note
A Desktop Assistant installation is required for playback of a project mode from the Explorer.
1.
Select a desktop assistant project
/
in the Explorer.
2.
Expand the project entry to display the generated project mode.
3.
Double click on the mode icon
4.
The Desktop Assistant icon
5.
Open the corresponding target application. The Desktop Assistant will now display help content at the
.
will now appear in the task bar info area.
relevant points defined in the application.
Preview of the desktop assistant
For playback proceed as follows:
1.
Select the group with Desktop Assistant
in the tree of the Explorer.
2.
Click the Play Desktop Assistant
3.
Click in the target application. The available content will be shown and can be used.
4.
To stop the desktop assistant, go to the Producer.
5.
Click on the Stop Desktop Assistant
button in the object editor.
button in the object editor.
5.9.2 Desktop Assistant Project Playback
Desktop assistant projects can be started from the library or the desktop assistant.
Note
For the playback it is required to publish the workarea. See also the chapter Publishing Desktop Assistant
Content.
168
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Playback from library
To start a project using the library, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the library.
2.
Select a desktop assistant project
3.
You can launch the content by clicking on the corresponding button
4.
The browser dialog box for downloading files and shows you a file with the file extension *.dnt.
5.
Click on Open.
6.
The Desktop Assistant icon
7.
Open the corresponding target application. The Desktop Assistant will now display help objects at the
/
in the tree structure.
in the header area of the overview.
will now appear in the task bar info area.
relevant points defined in the application.
Playback from desktop assistant
To start a project using the desktop assistant, proceed as follows:
1.
Start the desktop assistant.
2.
The Desktop Assistant icon
3.
Open the corresponding target application. The Desktop Assistant will now display supporting help objects
will now appear in the task bar info area.
at the relevant points defined in the application.
4.
5.
Guided tour
1.
Select a guided tour
in the tree structure of the main window.
2.
Click the mode button in the content window.
Context help
1.
Activate the option Show Instant Help in the main window.
2.
Select a mini bubble on the screen.
5.9.3 Using the DNT File
For general use, a desktop assistant can be executed using the DNT file of the object folder. It is recommended
that you store the published workarea on a Web server and link to the DNT file from an intranet page. The user
can start the desktop assistant by clicking the link.
Desktop assistant projects
A desktop assistant project (context help, guided tour) can be played back using the DNT file (*.dnt) of
the desktop assistant project
/
.
The path for launching a DNT file from a server should be provided as follows:
http://<server>/[...]/workarea/project/project_id/project.dnt
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
169

Start Link:
The property is available for a project mode
in the Explorer and contains the link of the DNT file.
You can generate a start link for a URL or folder of the publication. See also the chapter Defining a Start
Link.
Desktop assistant
The desktop assistant can be played back using the DNT file (*.dnt) of the Desktop Assistant
group. Note that
for playback you need to generate the desktop assistant.
The path for launching a DNT file from a server should be provided as follows:
http://<server>/[...]/workarea/group/group_id/group.dnt
For further information, see the chapter Publishing Desktop Assistent Content.

Start Link: Desktop Assistant:
The property is available for a desktop assistant group in the Explorer and contains the link of the DNT file.
You can generate a start link for a URL or folder of the publication. See also the chapter Defining a Start
Link.
5.9.4 Desktop Assistant Cache
The Desktop Assistant offers a cache functionality to store resources and content locally for desktop assistant
playback. This avoids a load latency when starting content and allows content to be played back without
network connection.
Cache folder
When the Desktop Assistant cache is used, a folder with a generated ID as the name is created and is stored in
the following folder:
%appdata%/Roaming/Desktop AssistantCache
The cache folder stores the resources and the used desktop assistant content. The folder content is updated
automatically everytime content is stored or changed.
Cache settings
The settings for the Desktop Assistant cache are available in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools ->
Settings...

) under Desktop Assistent: Playback Settings -> Desktop Assistant in the subcategory Cache.
Use Caching:
Activates the Desktop Assistant cache functionality.

Folder Location:
Allows you to define an individual folder for the Desktop Assistant cache.
If the field is empty or if the defined folder is not available, the default folder is used.
170
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Using the prefill package
A prefill package of the resource can be generated for a desktop assistant. This allows general resources to be
saved locally. See also the chapter Publishing a Prefill Package.
5.9.5 Playback from the Manager
Manager can be used to save desktop assistant content to a web server, allowing them to be edited and
published centrally. Once the author has published the content in Manager or Producer users can start the
content from the learner view or launch them from the library. The learner view is a component of the Manager
in which learning content is made available to learners.
Desktop assistant on the Manager
For the playback of desktop assistant content from a Manager the following requirements are necessary:

SSO
An activated single sign on (SSO) is necessary for the playback of assigned content. Import the active
directory of the user and activate SSO afterwards.

Anonymous
Without the login the Manager allows the playback of content for anonymous user. Activate the
Anonymous user in your Manager and assign the content to the user.
5.9.6 Displaying the Guided Tour
The guided tour is displayed as a list of steps with all steps listed in a window. When the tour is running, the tour
steps that have already been completed are indicated by a check mark. This allows the user to keep an overview
of the tour at all times and see all of the actions that have already been completed. If a tour step could not be
found, this is indicated by a question mark. Here, we recommend selecting the application page again so that
page identification is reinitiated or switching to the correct application page.
The object contexts are displayed as object bubbles next to the object to be carried out. The objects are also
emphasized with highlighting.
The sequence of a guided tour is as follows:
1.
First open the application with the application page where you want the process to start. Make any
necessary settings ahead of time.
2.
Then start the guided tour to be carried out.
3.
Click inside the application so that the guided tour can recognize it.
4.
The main bubble containing the overview of the tour steps appears. The object context is displayed for the
first action to be performed.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
171
5.
Carry out the process in the application as shown by the guided tour. Completed actions are indicated by a
check mark in the step list.
○
6.
If text is entered, it must be confirmed via the object bubble by clicking OK to complete the entry.
After the process is complete, you can end the guided tour by clicking Close in the step list.
The process can be performed again by clicking the Restart button. The check marks are reset and you can
navigate to the beginning of your process in the application. The object bubble is then displayed for the
first action step.
Recommendation
To make effective use of a guided tour, you should always play it back from the beginning and not start in
the middle of the process.
Icons of the step list
Icon
Description
Step
Optional step
Current step
Step completed
Branch step
Step not found
Explanation
172
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
5.9.6.1 Dealing with Non-Standard Behavior
When a guided tour is played back, situations can sometimes occur which prevent a process from being carried
out. In this case, the Desktop Assistant provides information about the problem and how it can be solved. These
situations are:

The necessary application is not open

The application is on the wrong page

The necessary control is not available
You can then switch to the necessary application page and continue with the process or skip the step. The
guided tour can also be terminated.
5.10 Desktop Assistant Macros
Fundamentally, there are the following macros for the desktop assistant projects:
Icon
Name
Context Help Style
Guided Tour Style
Application Context
Screen Context
Guided Tour Step
Mouse Action
Input Text
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
173
Icon
Name
Select Single
Radio / Checkbox
Explanation
Page Specifier
See Recording a Page Specifier
Include Desktop Assistant Project
See Merging Projects
5.10.1 Context Help Style
Used for type: context help
The Context Help Style defines how the context help is displayed during playback. The macro is located in the
first step of a project.
The following settings are available:

Display Variant:
The setting defines the variants for the object bubble. See also Variants of the Object Bubble.
The following variants are available in the drop-down list:

○
Icon
○
Tooltip
○
Bubble
Mini Icons Style:
Specifies a style resource for the mini bubbles of the object bubbles.

Highlights:
Specifies whether highlights are displayed for the objects.
174
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
5.10.2 Guided Tour Style
Used for type: guided tour
The Guided Tour Style defines how the guided tour is displayed during playback. The macro is located in the first
step of a project.
The following settings are available:

Bubble Style:
Specifies the bubble style for displaying the object bubble. All available bubbles of the workarea are
displayed in the dropdown list.

Mini Icons Style:
Specifies a style resource for the mini bubbles of the object bubbles.

Highlights:
Specifies whether highlights are displayed for the objects.

Start from Arbitrary Step:
Specifies, that the guided tour will be started from an arbitrary step and not from the beginning.

Focus Layer:
Displays a gray layer to highlight the required control of the current step.

Restricted Mode:
Specifies, that only the current action can be executed. The other controls of the application page will be
blocked.
The setting can be used if Focus Layer has been activated.

Interactive Mode:
Specifies, that the user has to navigate in the object bubble to the next step. No page recognition is done
during playback.
Guided Tour Window
The style and positioning of the window used for the guided tour can be customized in this area.
This area contains the following settings:

Style:
Specifies the style for displaying the window.

Alignment:
Specifies the alignment of the window of the screen. Activate the Free option, to specify a Position.

Position:
Specifies the position of the window on the screen. The values are specified in pixels and relate to the
upper left-hand corner of the screen.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
175

Size:
Specifies the width and height of the window in pixels. If the amount of text to be displayed exceeds the
area available in the window, a scrollbar appears automatically.
Tour End
The subcategory Tour End contains the information that is displayed at the end of a completed guided tour.

End Window:
Specifies, that a window is shown at the end of the guided tour. The window allows the user to close the
guided tour manually. If this option is deactivated, the window is not shown and the guided tour closes
automatically.

Text:
You can enter the text to be displayed in the bubble in the text box. The text box is preset with a default
text.

Next Project:
You can select a project that is started after the completion of the current tour. The new tour starts
immediately and no end bubble is displayed.
Advanced

Source:
If a project was converted from a simulation, the parameter indicates the UID of the original project.
5.10.3 Application Context
The Application Context macro defines the application recorded for the desktop assistant project. The macro is
always placed in the second step.
Macro parameters
The macro contains the following parameters:

Display Name:
Defines the title which will be displayed during playback.

Program:
Contains the name of the program as used by the operating system. The parameter can contain multiple
entries separated by a semicolon.
Further functions
At the top of the macro editor, you will find the following functions for macros:
176
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing

Record Compatible Application:
This function allows you to record an additional application. The exe name will be saved in the Program
parameter.

Insert Explanation:
This function allows you to insert an Explanation macro with information about the application.
5.10.4 Screen Context
The Screen Context macro defines the application page.
Macro parameters
The macro contains the following parameters:

Screen Title:
Contains the name of the application window.

Screenshot (Screen):
Contains the screenshot of the recorded screen.

Exclude from Desktop Assistant (Key):
Specifies that the page key will not be considered for the context recognition process in the desktop
assistant.

Activate Form:
Specifies that the step is a form. All actions of the step are displayed in one bubble during playback.
Further functions
At the top of the macro editor, you will find the following functions for macros:

Update Screen:
This function allows you to update the recorded screen.

Record Page Specifier:
This function allows you to record a page specifier for the screen. See also the chapter Recording a Page
Specifier.

Record Object:
This function allows you to record an object for the screen.

Insert Explanation:
This function allows you to insert an Explanation macro with information about the application.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
177
5.10.5 Guided Tour Step
Used for type: guided tour
The Guided Tour Step macro defines the individual steps for the guided tour. This macro can be used to define
the tour sequence. This macro is found at the beginning of a step.
The name of the guided tour step is defined in the Name field. This can be selected in the Next Step macro.
5.10.6 Explanation
The Explanation macro allows you to add further information to your project content.
The macro can be inserted during recording or from the macro editor. See also the chapter Inserting an
Explanation.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Text:
Contains the bubble text.

Type (Icon):
A Type (Icon) can be assigned to the bubble, which can be selected from four different types. Each type is
represented by an icon:
Type
Icon
Info
Remark
Tip
178
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Type
Icon
Warning

Force Display (Context help):
Specifies, that the macro content is always displayed as instant help, even if instant help is disabled during
playback of the desktop assistant.

Focus Layer (Guided tour):
Displays a gray layer to highlight the explanation.
5.10.7 Properties of the Interaction Macros
The macros for interactions are:
Mouse Action
Input Text
Select Single
Radio / Checkbox
The interaction macros contain the following properties, which are used for the playback of a desktop assistant
project:
General

Object Name:
Contains the recorded name of the object. You can change the text in the parameter.

Object Image:
Contains the recorded icon of the object. You can change the image by clicking on Replace Image

.
Input Text:
Contains the input value of a text field. You can change the value in the parameter.

Text:
Contains the bubble text of the object. The bubble text is a text module from the dictionaries and can
contain the object name, object image and input text.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
179
Guided Tour

Optional:
This option specifies whether the step is optional for the user in a guided tour.
During playback a different icon will be shown in the step list. If the control is not visible on the page or if
the page is wrong the step will be skipped.

Focus Layer:
Displays a gray layer to highlight the required control of the current step.
Context Help

Display Variant (Advanced Layout):
The setting defines the variants for the object bubble. See also Context Help Style.
The following variants are available in the drop-down list:
○
Global:
Uses the setting from Context Help Style
○
Icon
○
Tooltip
○
Bubble
macro.
Subcategories

Object Bubble:
Contains settings for the style and the behavior of the object bubble.
See also Subcategory: Object Bubble.

Highlights:
Contains settings for the style of the highlight.
Recommendation
The highlights of the macros are deactivated by default. To activate the highlights use the setting Show
Highlight.

Next Step (Guided Tour):
Contains settings for jumping to the next guided tour step.
See also Subcategory: Next Guided Tour Step.
Further functions
At the top of the macro editor, you will find the following functions for macros:

Update Object
:
This function allows you to update the object.
180
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Desktop Assistant - Recording and Editing
6
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
The web assistant is a cloud-based service that can be integrated into SAP S/4HANA / SAP Fiori apps. It is an
integrated help system and provides context-sensitive user assistance.
You can create content for the web assistant by using web assistant projects. The content will be stored on a
Manager workarea.
6.1 Content Types for Web Assistant
For the web assistant there are the following content types:
Context Help
The context help is a content type of the web assistant. The context help supports your users by working with an
application by offering help descriptions of issues and functionality independently of process. The context help
thereby enables the user to orientate himself quickly in complex application interfaces and use the explanations
to refresh and apply what he has learnt.
Furthermore, presenting context-related information makes it possible to highlight frequently occurring
problems, explain changes in the application or emphasize information that is important for using an
application.
Guided Tour
The guided tour is a content type of the web assistant. With the guided tour, you can help your users to carry out
predefined processes in an application. Users are guided through the process step-by-step with instructions,
making it possible for them to carry out the displayed actions properly in the live application. The instructions
are collocated with the objects to be used.
6.2 Editing Web Assistant Projects
The content of the web assistant can be edited in project editor. You are able to change the text of the tiles and
bubbles and you can specify the macro parameters in the macro editor.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
181
Note
For further editing, for example to assign a hotspot, use the editor of the web assistant on the application.
Editing content in project editor
To edit a Web Assistant project, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a Web Assistant project in Explorer.
2.
Open the project in project editor.
3.
Select a macro in the thumbnail view.
The parameters of the macro are displayed in the macro editor.
4.
Edit the macro parameters.
5.
Save the project.
6.
Publish the project to see the changes in Web Assistant.
Further information about the macros and the macro parameters are available in the Web Assistant Macros
chapter.
6.3 Localizing Web Assistant Content
You can use your created web assistant content in different languages. The content is displayed in the language,
which is set as the UI language of your application. If no content is available for a particular language, then the
English content will be shown by default.
Each object or structure with a specific language is managed as an individual object. To translate your content,
you have to duplicate your source. As result, you get an identical content structure in each language.
Recorded hotspots are language-independent. The content for the hotspot is displayed based on the UI
language.
6.4 Web Assistant Macros
For web assistant projects, the following macros are available:
Icon
Name
Settings
Screen
182
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
Icon
Name
Tile
Link Tile
Guided Tour Step
6.4.1 Settings
The Settings macro is required for the initialization of the content and defines the project type. It is located at
the beginning of a project. When using the recording, this macro is inserted automatically.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Type:
Specifies the content type of the project.
○
Context Help
○
Guided Tour
6.4.2 Screen
The Screen macro defines the application page.
Macro parameters
The macro contains the following parameters:

Title:
Contains the name of the screen. The name of the application window is inserted during the recording.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
183

Screenshot:
Contains the screenshot of the recorded screen.
Further functions
At the top of the macro editor, the following functions are available for the macro:

Update Screen:
This function allows you to update the recorded screen.

Add Tile (Context Help):
This function allows you to add a Tile for the Screen. The tile is added below the screen.
See also Tile.

Add Tile with Link (Context Help):
This function allows you to add a Link Tile macro.
See also Link Tile.
6.4.3 Tile
The Tile macro allows you to add help information to be displayed in a tile. You can edit the title and the text of
the tile in the carousel and the text of the bubble.
The macro can be inserted using the macro editor's toolbar when a Screen macro is selected.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Tile Title:
Contains the title of the bubble and the carousel tile.

Tile Text:
Contains the text for the macro to be displayed in a tile of the carousel.

Bubble Text:
Contains the text of the bubble.

Hotspot Size:
Defines the size of the hotspot. Select a size from the drop-down list.

Bubble Size:
Defines the size of the bubble. Select a size from the drop-down list.
184
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
6.4.4 Link Tile
The Link Tile macro allows you to add a link for further content in the tile. The content can be an external web
page or document. Alternatively you can display content in a lightbox as an overlay on the screen.
The macro can be inserted using the macro editor's toolbar when a Screen macro is selected.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Tile Title:
Contains the title of the bubble and the carousel tile.

Tile Text:
Contains the text for the macro to be displayed in a tile of the carousel.

Link to:
Specifies the link target. Select Edit Link...

to open the Edit Link dialog box.
Show in Lightbox:
Specifies that the linked object will show up in an overlay on top of the application. Otherwise, it will open in
a new browser window or tab.

Lightbox Size:
Specifies the size of the lightbox. There are the following options:
○
Full Screen
○
Client Area
○
User-Defined
○
User-Defined (Overlay):
The option allows you to specify a lightbox with a custom size, which will be displayed as an overlay of
the application and the carousel.

Width, Height:
Specifies the width and the height of the lightbox. The parameter is displayed for the option User-Defined.

Show as Splash Screen:
Specifies that the linked object will be shown the first time in each session when the corresponding
application is opened. Only the first tile with splash screen will be shown.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
185
6.4.5 Guided Tour Step
The Guided Tour Step macro defines a step of the guided tour for a recorded control of the application.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Bubble Title:
Contains the title of the bubble.

Bubble Text:
Contains the text of the bubble.

Show Arrow:
Specifies that the bubble is shown with an arrow.

Center Bubble:
Specifies that the bubble is shown in the center of the screen. If the setting is deactivated, the bubble is
shown on the object.

Object Image (Advanced Layout):
Contains the icon or an image of the recorded control. The object image will be shown in the bubble text.
6.5 Context Properties of Content Objects
All content objects, except of group, have specific context properties for the web assistant. In the Explorer open
the Web Assistant Context section.
There are the following properties:

Product Name:
Contains the internal product name of the app.

Product Version:
Contains the version number of the app.

System:
Contains the name of the system.
186
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
6.6 Editing Content on the Application
Web Assistant content can be edited directly on an application. The user interface of the Web Assistant provides
functions for editing tiles of a context help as well as steps of a guided tour. The changes are saved to the
connected Manager workarea.
Starting the edit mode
To create and edit content from the web assistant it is required, to start the edit mode. Select the Enter / Leave
Edit Mode control in the carousel.
The edit mode is not available by default, to hide the control for the end user. To configure the edit mode, add
the edithelp parameter to the URL of your application. This can be done as follows:
Example
https
://<YourServer>/sap/bc/ui5_ui5/ui2/ushell/shells/abap/FioriLaunchpad.html?&sapushell-config-url=cfg/sap/Help4.json&edithelp=true
https ://<YourServer>/ui5/index.html?edithelp=true
6.6.1 Help Topic
You are able to add new help topics and to edit available help topics.
6.6.1.1
Adding a Help Topic
To add a help topic to a context help, proceed as follows:
1.
Select Add Help Topic.
2.
Select one of the menu entries:
3.

Add Help Tile

Add Link Tile
The Edit Content dialog box is opened.
Enter the text and configure the content.
Note
A new project is created if no project is available in the Manager workarea.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
187
6.6.1.2 Editing a Help Topic
To edit a help topic of a context help, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a tile in the carousel.
2.
A menu with the following entries is displayed.
Select a menu entry.

Assign Hotspot:
Allows you to add a hotspot for a tile on the application.
Select the application control.

Unassign Hotspot:
Removes the hotspot for the tile.

Edit:
Allows you to edit and configure the tile content.
Opens the Edit Content dialog box. See also Edit Dialog for a Help Topic.

Remove Tile:
Removes the tile from the carousel.

Discard Changes:
Discards the unsaved changes.
6.6.1.3 Edit Dialog for a Help Topic
The Edit Content dialog box for a tile has the following sections:
Tile
The Tile section contains the following parameters:

Tile Title:
Contains the title of the bubble and the carousel tile.

Tile Text:
Contains the text for the macro to be displayed in a tile of the carousel.

Change Sequence:
Specifies the position of the tile in the sequence of tiles.
Bubble (Help Tile)
The Bubble section contains the following parameters:

Bubble Text:
Contains the text of the bubble.
188
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing

Bubble Size:
Defines the size of the bubble. Select a size from the dropdown list.
Hotspot (Help Tile)
The Hotspot section contains the following parameters:

Hotspot Size:
Defines the size of the hotspot. Select a size from the dropdown list.

Use Click Offset:
Specifies if the hotspot is positioned on the click area. Deactivate the option to position the hotspot on the
control center.
Link (Link Tile)
The Link section contains the following parameters:

Link:
Specifies the link target. Enter a URL.

Open in Lightbox:
Specifies that the linked object shows up in an overlay on top of the application. Otherwise, it opens in a
new browser window or tab.

Lightbox Sizing:
Specifies the size of the lightbox. There are the following options:
○
Full Screen
○
Client Area
○
User-Defined
○
User-Defined (Overlay):
The option allows you to specify a lightbox with a custom size, which is displayed as an overlay of the
application and the carousel.

Lightbox Size:
Specifies the width and the height of the lightbox. The parameter is displayed for the option User-Defined.

Splash:
Specifies that the linked object is shown the first time in each session when the corresponding application
is opened. Only the first tile with splash screen is shown.
6.6.1.4 Help Topic Order
A new help topic is inserted at the last position. You can change the order of new help topics or available help
topics as follows:

Select a tile in the carousel.
At the bottom the number of the position in the order is displayed.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
189

With the controls next to the order number you can change the order:
○
Increase Help Topic Order
○
Decrease Help Topic Order
The help topic is moved in the carousel.
6.6.2 Guided Tour
You are able to add new tour steps and to edit available tour steps.
6.6.2.1 Adding a Tour Step
To add a tour step to a guided tour, proceed as follows:
1.
Select Edit a Guided Tour.
2.
Select a guided tour from the menu.
3.
Select Add Tour Step.
4.
Select Leave Tour Edit Mode.
Note
A new project is created if no project is available in the Manager workarea.
6.6.2.2 Editing a Tour Step
To edit a tour step of a guided tour, proceed as follows:
1.
Select Edit a Guided Tour.
2.
Select a guided tour from the menu.
3.
Select a step in the carousel.
4.
A menu with the following entries is displayed.
Select a menu entry.

Assign Hotspot:
Allows you to add a hotspot for the step on the application.
Select the application control.

Center on Screen:
Centers the bubble on the screen. No spike to show a control is shown.
190
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing

Unassign Hotspot:
Removes the hotspot for the step.

Edit:
Allows you to edit and configure the tile content.
Opens the Edit Content dialog box. See also Edit Dialog for a Tour Step.

Remove Tile:
Removes the tile from the carousel.

Discard Changes:
Discards the unsaved changes.
5.
After editing the content, select Leave Tour Edit Mode.
6.6.2.3 Edit Dialog for a Tour Step
The Edit Content dialog box for a tour step has the following sections:
Tile
The Tile section contains the following parameters:

Tile Title:
Contains the title of the bubble and the carousel tile.
Bubble
The Bubble section contains the following parameters:

Bubble Text:
Contains the text of the bubble.

Bubble Size:
Defines the size of the bubble. Select a size from the dropdown list.

Center Bubble:
Specifies that the bubble is shown in the center of the screen. If the setting is deactivated, the bubble is
shown on the object.
Hotspot
The Hotspot section contains the following parameters:

Use Click Offset:
Specifies if the hotspot is positioned on the click area. Deactivate the option to position the hotspot on the
control center.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
191
6.6.2.4 Tour Step Order
A new tour step is inserted at the last position. The assigned hotspot shows a number of the step order.
You can change the order of new tour step or available tour steps as follows:

Select a step in the carousel.
At the bottom the number of the position in the order is displayed.

With the controls next to the order number you can change the order:
○
Increase Help Topic Order
○
Decrease Help Topic Order
The step is moved in the carousel and the number of the hotspot is changed.
6.6.3 Controls of the Edit Mode
The edit mode of the web assistant has the following general controls:

Show / Hide Hotspots:
Shows or hides the hotspots on the application.

Show / Hide Search:
Displays a search field to search for specific tiles.

Add:
Allows you to add a tile or a tour step.

Edit a Guided Tour:
Opens the edit mode for the guided tour.

Leave Tour Edit Mode:
Leaves the edit mode for the guided tour.

Save Changes:
Allows you to save your changes.
The button is displayed if changes are available.

Discard Changes:
Allows you to discard your unsaved changes.
The button is displayed if changes are available.

Show / Hide Options:
Displays further options. Select a menu entry:
○
Open Context Information:
Opens a dialog box, which shows the current context of the application.
○
Open Shortcut Overview:
Opens a dialog box with an overview of shortcuts for using the web assistant.
192
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
○
Open Manager:
Opens the connected Manager with the current workarea.
○
Open Web Editor:
Opens the web editor of the Manager with the current web assistant project.
6.6.4 Context Information
The Context Information dialog box shows the current context of the application.
The following information is displayed:

Help Key:
Displays the saved key of the help content.

Help Scope:
Displays the saved content information, which are required to display the content.
The information of the Help Scope is divided into Requested and Available. The requested information is
required to show help content. The available information is the information that is available in the
application.

○
Language
○
Product
○
Product Version
○
System
○
Content Roles
Environment Information:
Displays information about the application environment.
Adding Help
If no is help available for an application or application screen, the dialog box is displayed automatically. An Add
Help button is displayed in the footer, to add a help tile for the application.
SAP Enable Now
Web Assistant - Recording and Editing
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
193
7
Quizzes
Quizzes help to focus on the users’ main tasks as well as evaluate their acquired knowledge and improve it. The
learning experience is enhanced by the high degree of interactivity and scope of multimedia enrichment in the
quiz items. Direct feedback and evaluation of responses maximize the learning effect and help to pinpoint and
plug existing gaps in knowledge in an entertaining way as well as confirm correct answers.
Quiz items
The Producer offers a wide range of quiz items, which can be used to create interesting, multi-layered and at the
same time comprehensive quizzes.
The quiz items must be created and edited individually. When using quiz items, the main focus is on learner
interaction – answering a quiz using text input boxes, drop-down lists or moving objects using drag & drop.
For further information, see the chapter Quiz Items.
7.1 Quizzes in Projects
The following section explains how to create a quiz in a project and how to integrate quiz items into a process
simulation.
A quiz can be created for a project with the type Simulation
. The individual quiz items in projects can contain
various media files including pictures, audio files and video files, thus allowing for a more interesting and more
layered design. The results can be analyzed automatically.
Presentation of a quiz
In the Producer, a quiz can be created and used in different ways:

Stand-alone project
Used to refresh knowledge or to examine a complete step

Help for process simulation
Used to examine the displayed process or parts of it
7.1.1 Central Settings for Quizzes
Several quiz settings can be adjusted in the central configuration dialog box which define the way the quiz is
presented and proceeds in projects.
194
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Open the dialog box via the menu Tools -> Settings...
and select Playback Settings -> General -> Quiz. The
settings will be defined for all projects, the settings can also be fine-tuned Project Overrides within a project.
General settings

Allow to Skip Quiz:
This setting lets you skip a quiz item without having to enter an answer. If this setting is deactivated, every
quiz item must be answered in order to proceed on to the next one.

In Mode:
If quiz items are to be integrated into a simulation, it is necessary to activate the view in the corresponding
mode. Activate the desired mode.

Page Size:
Specifies the width and height of the quiz page in pixel. The size is used for the quiz style of the trainer
style.

Time Limit for Complete Quiz (Seconds):
A time can be set in this parameter inside of which a full quiz must be answered. When a time limit has
been set, a clock appears showing the remaining time.
It is recommended to use this setting within a stand-alone quiz and it should not be used for quizzes
inserted into simulations. To read more on setting individual time limits for a quiz item, go to the Options
subcategory.
Feedback settings
After confirming a response the learner can be shown a notice stating whether or not the quiz was answered
correctly or incorrectly.

Show Feedback:
When this parameter is set, the following feedback entries are shown.

Show Feedback as Popup:
When this parameter is set, a corresponding feedback box is shown as a pop-up window in the foreground.

Show Correct Answers:
When this parameter is set, in addition to Quiz Failed being shown, the correct answer will also be shown
when an incorrect answer has been entered.

Quiz Passed:
The feedback text entered is shown when a quiz has been solved correctly.

Quiz Failed:
The feedback text entered is shown when a quiz has been solved incorrectly.

Quiz Timeout:
The feedback text entered is shown when the time limit for answering the quiz or quiz item has expired. A
value for this must be defined in the Time Limit for Complete Quiz (Seconds) or Time Limit (Seconds)
parameter.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
195
7.1.2
Creating a Quiz
To create a quiz project, proceed as follows:
1.
Create a New Project
in the Explorer.
Select the type Standard - Quiz.
2.
The project is opened in the project editor.
The macros Simulation Start and Simulation End are created by default. Both macros are required for the
playback.
The project hast the icon:
Note
The score parameters in the Simulation Start macro does not have any effect on the points of the
quiz items and can be ignored.
3.
To insert quiz items you need steps.
Add steps by using the menu Insert -> Add Step
. Place the steps between the steps of the Simulation
Start and Simulation End macros.
4.
Insert the quiz items.
These can be selected by using the menu Insert -> Insert Quiz Item or the toolbar.
You can insert one or more quiz items in each step. This enables the sorting of quizzes according to theme
or the insertion of a quiz selection for specific quiz items.
5.
Edit your quiz items.
More information on this can be found in the following sections and in the Quiz Items section.
Recommendation
By using a quiz in an LMS, you can stop the playback after a certain step and then restart it. In order to
ensure that the quiz works properly, you should create a separate step for each quiz item. If you add
several quiz items to one step, once the playback has been stopped, all of the quiz items must be
answered again.
Recommendation
Additionally, it is recommended that the Allow to Skip Quiz option is activated when editing quizzes in the
central configuration dialog box so that quiz items can be skipped without the user having to answer the
questions.
196
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
7.1.2.1
Integrating a Quiz in a Simulation
As well as being able to create a quiz, you can also integrate individual quiz items into available simulations. For
example, this can be useful if you want to ask questions relating to functions and processes directly after they
are shown, thereby improving user knowledge.
Note
First insert the quiz items into fully edited simulations for which rerecording is not planned or was already
carried out. This is necessary as the Producer goes through the individual steps macro by macro when
rerecording and the quiz items cannot be skipped.
To integrate a quiz into a simulation, proceed as follows:
1.
2.
Insert a new step:
1.
To do this, select the step after which the new step should be placed.
2.
Then go to the menu Insert -> Add Step
and insert the new step.
Now create your quiz items by selecting the corresponding quiz item from the menu Insert -> Insert Quiz
Item.
It is recommended that you insert multiple quiz items into a step. To finish, a Quiz Evaluation
can be
inserted into the step as the last macro. In doing so you also avoid unnecessary complexity from having
too many steps integrated into the existing simulation.
3.
Now insert the corresponding quiz items. More information on this can be found in the following sections
and in the Quiz Items section.
To display the quizzes in the trainer it is necessary to activate the corresponding mode in which the quizzes are
to be shown. For more on this, see the Central Settings for Quizzes section.
7.1.2.2 Quiz Section
By selecting the Quiz Section macro, the display of the quiz items can be modified individually for each step. This
makes sense in terms of depicting the quiz items incorporated in the quiz section in any desired sequence or
else displaying only one randomly selected quiz item.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
197
A requirement for a Quiz Section is that multiple quiz items be contained in a step. A Quiz Section that spans
multiple steps is not possible.
To create a Quiz Section, continue as follows:
1.
Select a step to create a Quiz Section for all of the quiz items contained in the step.
In order to set up the Quiz Section for particular quiz items only in a step, select the quiz item which is
located in front of the start point of the desired quiz items. All successive quiz items within the step are
then incorporated in the Quiz Section.
2.
Enter the Quiz Section macro via the menu Insert -> Insert Quiz Item. Following your selection, the Quiz
Section Begin
macro is now inserted and the following quiz items indented. The quiz section is
terminated by the Quiz Section End
3.
macro.
Making this selection lets you change the order and display of the quiz items contained within the Quiz
Section macro. You can choose from the two following types:
○
Random choice:
The effect of the Random choice option is that only one, randomly selected, quiz item is shown in
each case for the entire duration of the quiz section.
Points: Enter the point value on which the individual quiz items should be based.
○
Shuffle quizzes (all):
This will display all the quiz items that have been selected in random order.
○
Shuffle quizzes (number):
This will display a specific number of quiz items that have been selected in random order.
Number: This specifies the number of quiz items to display.
4.
Once you have set up a random choice you can define a general point value for it in the Points parameter of
the Quiz Section Begin macro. Each quiz item within the selection is then evaluated against this points
score.
Deleting the Quiz Section
If a quiz section is no longer required in a Quiz Section, you have the option of removing it should you wish to do
so. Here, only the start and end macros of the Quiz Section are deleted. The quiz items remain intact.
You should proceed as follows:
1.
Select the Quiz Section Begin or Quiz Section End macro.
2.
Then click on the Remove Quiz Section
button in the macro editor header or select the Remove Quiz
Section option in the macro's context menu.
7.1.2.3 Quiz Evaluation
198
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Once the tasks have been completed, the Quiz Evaluation macro is available for evaluating a quiz. As an option,
this can be inserted in the last step of the project or at any point within a step and thus be used for evaluating
completely autonomous quiz projects or quiz within simulations.
It should be borne in mind here that a Quiz Evaluation returns an evaluation of all the preceding quiz items. If a
number of Quiz Evaluation macros are located within a project, the current quiz evaluation provides an overview
of all the quiz items from the last Quiz Evaluation macro.
The following settings can be selected for the Quiz Evaluation:

Required Result:
The Required Result defines a value which must be reached in order to pass the quiz. This is denoted as a
percentage value.
Evaluation format
You can determine the degree of detail in the evaluation by means of the Format setting. The following options
are available:

Compact Detailed Feedback:
The table additionally shows the solutions to all of the quiz items. The detailed feedback can be opened
and closed to view all information.

Extended Detailed Feedback:
The table additionally shows the solutions to all of the quiz items.

Extended Short Feedback:
A table containing the title of the relevant quiz item, the result and the points score achieved is also
displayed.

Total Score Only:
An evaluation of the possible points achievable and the number of points actually achieved are displayed.
Feedback
Feedback can be put in place in each case to confirm the existence/non existence of the quiz item. This is shown
beneath the general points evaluation.
The following settings are available for this:

Show Feedback:
When this parameter is set, the following feedback entries are shown in the Quiz Evaluation.

Quiz Passed:
The inputted feedback text is displayed if the required result was achieved.

Quiz Failed:
The inputted feedback text is displayed if the required result was not achieved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
199
7.1.3
Quiz Templates
Quiz templates are a special type of book page, which define a layout and general objects for creating quiz
content. Templates are useful for saving time and for ensuring consistency when creating objects. Furthermore,
they provide flexibility when creating a quiz layout.
7.1.3.1
Customizing a Quiz Template
The workarea contains a default template, which can be used for creating a custom template. To do so, proceed
as follows:
Recommendation
Duplicate the default template before customizing it.
1.
Open the book page of the quiz template in the book page editor.
The book page uses the subtype Quiz Template
2.
.
Page
The Page uses the default Book Style
of the workarea. You can select another style in the Style setting.
The default page size is 1024x672.
3.
Objects
Customize the available objects which are used for the structure and the design of the template. It is
recommended that you change:
4.

the position of the objects

the text formatting of the objects

the design of the objects
Quiz Item Template
Customize the Quiz Item Template object. The settings of the object influence the design of the quiz item.
See also Adapting the Quiz Item Template.
5.
Save the book page.
Note
Do not change the object names. If you change a name, the quiz cannot be played back correctly. The
object names are used to assign functionality to an object.
Images
The images used for the objects are added as assets to the book page. You can replace the images. Make sure
that you adapt the assets in the controls afterwards.
200
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
7.1.3.2 Elements of a Quiz Template
The following elements and name values can be used for a quiz template:
Type / Name Value
Control Type
Description
General
Contains the quiz content.
Quiz Item Template
Quiz Item Template
quiz_element
Specifies the design of the quiz
items.
Title
Text
Contains the title text of the quiz.
Text
Contains the task text of the quiz.
title
Task
task
Next control: disabled
Shape
next_disabled
Disabled button for showing the
next quiz or feedback.
Enabled button for showing the next
quiz or feedback.
The button shows a Next tooltip.
Next control: enabled
Shape
next_enabled
This text is taken from the playback
dictionary Standard and will be
displayed in the current project
language.
Contains the evaluation of a quiz.
Note
The object is a placeholder
Quiz Evaluation
Text
quiz_evaluation
for the position and size of
the evaluation. The
evaluation style cannot be
changed in the template, as
it uses the default trainer
configurations.
Feedback
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
201
Type / Name Value
Control Type
Description
For quizzes there are two feedback
types:

displayed on page

displayed as popup
The template contains elements for
each feedback type. You can
remove feedback controls, if they
are not required.
Feedback on page:
Feedback text: correct
Text
feedback_correct
Feedback text: wrong
Text
Contains the feedback text for a
correct answer.
Contains the feedback text for a
feedback_wrong
wrong answer.
Feedback text: timeout
Contains the feedback text
Text
feedback_timeout
displayed if the time limit is
exceeded.
Feedback icon: correct
Image
feedback_passed_icon
Specifies an icon for displaying
feedback for a correct answer.
Specifies an icon for displaying
Feedback icon: wrong
Image
feedback_failed_icon
feedback for a correct answer or a
time out.
Feedback as popup:
Feedback popup: correct
Text
feedback_correct_popup
Feedback popup: wrong
Text
feedback_wrong_popup
Feedback popup: timeout
Text
feedback_timeout_popup
202
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Contains the feedback text for a
correct answer (popup).
Contains the feedback text for a
wrong answer (popup).
Contains the feedback text if
the time limit is exceeded (popup).
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Type / Name Value
Control Type
Description
Feedback icon: correct
Specifies an icon for displaying
Image
feedback for a correct answer.
feedback_correct_icon
Specifies an icon for displaying
Feedback icon: wrong
Image
feedback for a correct answer or a
feedback_wrong_icon
time out.
Media
Media popup
Text
Contains the media file of the quiz.
media
Media control: show
Specifies a button for showing the
Image
media popup.
media_open
Media control: hide
Specifies a button for hiding the
Shape
media popup.
media_close
Media preview
Specifies an image as preview for
Image
the media file.
media_preview
Status
Points
Text
Shows the points of the quiz.
Text
Shows the number of the quiz.
points
Number
number
Time limit
Shows the time limit for the current
Text
quiz item.
countdown
Global time limit
Shows the time limit for the current
Text
quiz items.
countdown_global
Customization

For Text objects you can customize the design of the content.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
203

For Image and Shape objects you can use other object types. Make sure that you use the corresponding
name values for the objects.
7.1.3.3 Adapting the Quiz Item Template
The Quiz Item Template is a book page object, which is used as placeholder for the quiz items in a quiz template.
In the object you can define the design of the quiz item controls.
The object contains the following setting subsections:

Design Controls:
Contains general settings for the controls of the quiz items.


The following subcategories contain additional settings specific for a quiz item.
○
Design Multiple Choice:
○
Design Fill in the Blanks:
○
Design Fill in the Fields:
○
Design Matching:
○
Design Connection:
○
Design Sorting:
○
Design Slide Control:
○
Design Grid:
Design:
Contains settings for the text and the general design of the object (for example background color).
Recommendation
Test your changes using an example quiz to see the settings. Create an example quiz with all required
quiz items.
7.1.3.4 Selecting a Quiz Template
A quiz item can be selected as follows:


204
In central configuration dialog box
1.
Open the central configuration dialog box using the Tools -> Settings
2.
Select the section Playback Settings -> General -> Quiz.
3.
Got ot the Template setting and select the customized Quiz Template.
4.
Confirm the dialog box with OK.
menu.
For each quiz item
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
5.
Open a project with a quiz.
6.
Select a quiz item.
7.
Open the macro editor.
8.
Go to the Template setting and select the customized quiz template.
7.1.4
Editing the Quiz Items
You can set additional properties of a quiz item individually. For an overview and description of the functionality
of quiz types, see the Quiz Items reference pages. The individual quiz items are described in more detail in their
corresponding chapters.
Pay attention to similarly described settings and approaches when creating quiz items so that the
corresponding functionality can be defined.
Note
In case the inputs of a quiz item are incomplete or faulty, an error message will be displayed when starting
the simulation. When closing the trainer appropriate corrections may be taken.
Incomplete or faulty quiz items will be skipped while playing the simulation.
There are a number of general settings for the quiz items which can be found in the setting subcategories of the
quiz items. These settings can be used to personally design your quizzes.
Further informations are available in the following chapters.
7.1.4.1
General Quiz Item Parameters
Once you have created a quiz item you will be able to edit or add content to it.
When setting up quiz items it is necessary to set a question as well as the number of points required. You can
also name the quiz item.

Template:
In the parameter you can select a quiz template for the quiz item.
See also the chapter Quiz Templates.
Note
If no template is selected, the active trainer Style is used.

Points:
This parameter allows you to set the point value required to have achieved a correctly answered quiz item.
1 is set as the minimum default value for this.
This way, you have the option of dividing your quiz items into different levels of difficulty.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
205

Title:
Enter a name for your quiz item. For example, it can be a subject area or a description of the quiz item. The
name is displayed during playback of the project in the top section of the tasks.

Task:
In the field enter a task for the quiz item.
Instead of entering a question, you can enter a media file as a question. For example, this can be a
PowerPoint slide. To read more on this, see the Show Instead of Task setting in the Subcategory Media.
7.1.4.2 Subcategory Media
In the subcategory Media the Media File parameter can be used to insert a file for visual or acoustic display or
support of task-setting. This can be a picture, video or audio file.
To the right of the tasks section there is a media area for the Media File where it is placed after being inserted.
Note
Note that for some media types a corresponding plug-ins is required on the user's workstation.
Note
Since video and audio files cannot be integrated into a Microsoft Word document, Media Files are not
produced with everything else when creating a documentation.
Advanced Settings

Width, Height:
Use the Width and Height settings to change the format of the Media File after inserting a picture file.
Note
For an image, enter the width and height to display the image with the correct size.

Show Instead of Task:
Upon activating the Show Instead of Task setting the inserted Media File is shown instead of the task. Use
this setting if you wish to have the quiz tasks shown as PowerPoint slides.
The Show Instead of Task setting cannot be adjusted in the Puzzle quiz items. This is because a media file in the
form of a picture file is already used for the display of the tasks for both of these quiz items.
7.1.4.3 Subcategory Options
In the Options subcategory you have the choice of setting a Time Limit (Seconds) for every quiz item. You can
use this parameter to set a specific time within which the quiz item is to be answered.
206
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
This can be done individually for each quiz item or for the entire project via the central configuration dialog box.
Note
If the Time Limit has been exceeded when answering a quiz item, the quiz item will be deemed to be
incorrectly answered on evaluation.
When a time limit has been set, a clock appears while a project is playing, showing the remaining time. If a time
limit has been defined in the central configuration dialog box for the entire project, an additional second clock
will appear.
Note
If you set a time in the central configuration dialog box for the entire project, then the combined individual
times of each of your quiz items should not surpass the value for the entire project.
There are additional individual quiz items settings available in the subcategory Options. See the corresponding
sections in the overview section for the quiz items.
7.1.4.4 Subcategory Feedback
After confirming an answer of a quiz item, you can have a dialog display whether or not the quiz was correctly
answered. In this case, the Show Feedback parameter must be selected.
When the feedback setting is activated the feedback texts defined in the central configuration dialog box are
shown accordingly.
However, you can also define individual feedback texts for a quiz item, which would be shown instead of the
general settings. The following text fields can be used for this and can be shown by making changes to the
advanced settings:

Quiz Passed:
This text is shown when the quiz has been answered correctly.

Quiz Failed:
This text is shown when the quiz has been answered incorrectly.

Quiz Timeout:
This text is shown when the time for answering the quiz has elapsed. In this case, a value for the Time Limit
(Seconds) parameter must be defined.
7.1.5
Quiz Playback
Playing back the quiz should be done via the Test mode
. This is necessary to hide the trainer bar and to
prevent navigating with the arrow keys so that a step is not skipped unintentionally.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
207
When displaying the mode in the library the other modes can be hidden or deactivated before the generation in
the Save settings.
If quiz items have been inserted into a simulation, then the modes in which the quizzes are to be shown should
be selected in the central configuration dialog box.
7.1.6
Quiz Documentation
Quiz items can also be generated as documentation, which can be a useful aid to your simulations. The quiz
items are mostly designed as tables, which should be filled out as required. In accordance with the document’s
format, drop-down lists and drag & drop objects are displayed as general lists. Therefore with the
documentation format, it is more convenient to fill information in on the computer or on a print-out.
For generating a quiz documentation see also the quiz settings in Documentation Settings.
Subcategory documentation
In quiz items there are the following settings for documentation:

Show Title in Documentation:
Specifies to show the title of a quiz in a generated documentation.
Documentation types
A quiz documentation can be generated for the single document types Standard Document, Training Document
and Work Document.
7.2 Quizzes on Book Pages
The following section explains how to create a quiz on a book page. Quiz items on book pages can be uniquely
customized, as each object can be edited individually. The quiz items can be combined with additional book
page objects and contents.
Use case
The main use case for quizzes on book pages is to provide questions for adaptive learning. The quizzes can help
learners to show a learning path for further lessons. There is no result tracking, as the quizzes are
general content objects.
Quiz items on book pages can be used as stand-alone book content or as additional book content.
Note
Quiz items on book pages do not support tracking (for example SCORM 2004). If you want to use quizzes
in combination with an LMS, then create quizzes in projects.
208
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Components of a quiz
Your quiz should have the following recommended quiz components:

Quiz item
This book page object specifies a particular quiz.
It is recommended that you use one quiz item per book page.

Task
A task explains to the user what needs to be done.

Confirmation button
A control confirms the quiz answer and shows feedback for the learner.

Feedback texts
The feedback texts are used to show how well the user performed the task.
7.2.1
Creating a Quiz
The chapter explains how to create a book page with a quiz item and insert general objects.
Recommendation
If you always want to use a specific structure and object types for your quizzes, then we recommend that
you insert them in a book page template. Further information is available in the section Templates for
Book Pages.
1. Creating a book page
To create a book page, proceed as follows:
1.
Create a book page in the Explorer
Select New Book Page
2.
entry in the toolbar.
1.
Enter a Name.
2.
Select a template using the Change… button.
3.
Select the Language for the book page.
Select OK.
The book page is opened in the book page editor.
2. Inserting a quiz item
To insert a quiz item, proceed as follows.
1.
Select a quiz item in the dropdown list in the toolbar.
The quiz item is inserted.
2.
Position the object on your book page.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
209
3.
Design your quiz item.
Adapt the parameters of the Design Control section.
4.
Now specify the question and answers as described in the section Quiz Items.
3. Inserting a task
Create a task for your quiz. A task provides an introduction or describes what the learner needs to do.
To insert a task, proceed as follows.
1.
Insert a Text Field. Select the object in the toolbar.
2.
Enter a task text.
You can also use an image or a media file to create a task.
4. Inserting feedback
Define the feedback for the learner as described in the section Configuring Feedback.
Further Information
Detailed information about book pages and book page objects is available in the section Books and Book Pages.
7.2.2 Configuring the Feedback
You can create feedback for your quiz. This feedback is shown after a quiz item has been answered. The
feedback informs the learner whether the quiz item was correctly answered and can be a text field, an image or a
media file.
Recommendation
If you always want to use specific feedback, then we recommend that you insert the feedback in a book
page template for your quizzes. Further information is available in the section Creating a Book Page
Template.
Feedback is used as follows:
1.
Learner solves a quiz.
2.
Learner selects a confirmation control to check the quiz
3.
Quiz shows feedback for the learner.
To create feedback for your quiz, proceed as follows:
1. Creating a confirmation button
210
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Create an object to confirm the quiz:
1.
Insert a Shape or Active Area object. Select the object in the toolbar.
2.
Design the object by using the object parameters.
3.
Define a Check action for the confirmation click:
1.
Open the Actions subcategory in the object editor.
2.
Activate the On Click action
3.
Select your quiz item.
4.
Select the Check action for the quiz item.
After confirming a quiz, the user sees feedback.
2. Creating feedback information
Feedback tells your learners if an answer is right or wrong.
Create Text Fields for the feedback information:
1.
Insert two Text Field objects for the feedback. Select the object in the toolbar.
1.
Insert a Text Field for the correct answer.
Enter a feedback text.
2.
Insert a Text Field for the wrong answer.
Enter a feedback text.
2.
Select Hide parameter for each object.
This allows you to display the corresponding text.
3.
Design the quiz objects by using the object parameters.
3. Assigning feedback actions
Now define actions to show the required feedback text:
1.
Select your quiz item.
2.
Open the Actions subcategory in the object editor.
3.
Correct answer
4.
1.
Activate the On Correct Answer action
2.
Select the Text Field for the correct answer.
3.
Select the Show action.
Wrong answer
1.
Activate the On Wrong Answer action
2.
Select the Text Field for the wrong answer.
3.
Select the Show action.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
211
Further Information
Detailed information about actions for book page objects is available in the section Object Actions.
7.2.3 Actions and Behaviors of Quiz Items
Quiz item actions
Actions allow you to show information for the learner based on the status of the quiz. Select a quiz item and
open the subcategory Actions of the object editor, to edit the actions.
The following actions are available:
Action
Description
Specifies the action to be executed when the quiz is
On Ready
ready.
You can use this action to display a message that the
quiz was answered by the user.
Specifies the action to be executed when the quiz is
On Not Ready
not ready.
You can use this action to display a message that the
quiz was not answered by the user.
Specifies the action to be executed when the quiz is
On Correct Answer
answered correctly.
You can use this action to display feedback for the
correct answer.
Specifies the action to be executed when the quiz is
On Wrong Answer
answered incorrectly.
You can use this action to display feedback for the
wrong answer.
Specifies the action to be executed when the quiz is
On Skip
skipped.
You can use this action to display a message that the
quiz was skipped by the user.
Quiz item behaviors
If a quiz item is selected by an action (for example, in a confirmation button), the following behaviors are
available:
212
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Action
Description
Checks the answer of the quiz item.
Check
You can use this behavior to check the answer of the
user and to display feedback.
Resets an answered quiz item to the default status.
Reset
You can use this behavior, if a quiz was answered
incorrectly and needs to be answered again.
Enables the quiz to allow changes.
Enable
You can use this behavior to allow the user to change
the answer.
Disables a quiz to prevent changes.
Disable
You can use this behavior to prevent the user from
changing the answer.
7.3 Quiz Items
Quiz items are an optional group of items to be input manually. The following quiz items are available:
Icon
Name
Multiple Choice
Fill in the Fields
Fill in the Blanks
Matching
Connection
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
213
Icon
Name
Sorting
Slide Control
Grid
Puzzle
Hotspot
Quiz Section
Quiz Evaluation
In the following chapters, you will find further information about the quiz items.
7.3.1
Multiple Choice
Using the Multiple Choice quiz item you have the option of creating a question with one answer or multiple
answers. The quiz can be solved by selecting the correct answer.
Here, you have a number of design options available, for example, whether or not to create a question that is
answerable with just one correct answer, with multiple answers or with apparent multiple answers.
To create a Multiple Choice quiz item, proceed as follows:
1.
First enter the individual answering options into the Answer x parameter.
2.
Then specify the correct answer using the Answer Correct parameter. You can activate this parameter for a
number of answers as well.
214
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
If you flag more than one answer as being correct, the possible selections are displayed as checkboxes or
alternatively as radio buttons.
Settings
Further settings can be chosen for this quiz item in the Options subcategory.

Shuffle Solutions:
When the Shuffle Solutions setting has been activated the answers entered are mixed individually.

Force Multiple Choice:
Enable this parameter if you do not immediately want to show the user that there is only one correct
answer for a question for which there is only one possible response. This converts the input fields manually
from radio button type to the checkbox type.
Quiz item on book page
For a Multiple Choice quiz item on a book page there are further settings available:

Design Controls and Design (Subcategories):
The subcategories contain parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
7.3.2 Fill in the Fields
With the Fill in the Fields quiz item you can define a question with multiple answers. These answers should be
entered as text inputs.
The answer has to exactly match the string entered by the author as being the correct answer - if so much as
one character is wrong then the answer is deemed to have been incorrectly answered.
To create the quiz item, continue as follows:
1.
You can use the Answer x parameter to set one or more answers for this quiz item.
2.
The Input Type parameter allows the display type to be defined with which the answers are to be input.
Overview of the types with descriptions and examples:
Type
Description
Text
The answer can be entered in any way desired.
Text (case sensitive)
Integer
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
The answer must be entered with the same
capitalization as in the predefined answer.
The answer must be entered as a whole number. Here,
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
215
Type
Description
mathematical characters may also be used.
E.g.: 1,1-3,<4
The answer must be entered as a floating point number
where the dots can be defined as commas or dots.
Floating point number
Mathematical signs may also be used here.
E.g.: 1.1;1-3.4;<4,2
Regular Expression
The answer must be entered as a mathematical string.
E.g.: (^term$)
The answer must be entered as a list separated with
commas.
E.g.: Answer1,Answer2,Answer3
Comma separated list
The answer can be entered in any way desired.
Only one answer can be selected from the list. If
identical answers are contained in the list, each answer
may only be entered once.
Comma separated list (case sensitive)
The answer must be entered with the same
capitalization as in the predefined answer.
Note
When creating the quiz item the answers entered and the type selection should match functionally in
order to allow an error-free entry.
Quiz item on book page
For a Fill in the Fields quiz item on a book page there are further settings available:

Design Controls and Design (Subcategories):
The subcategories contain parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
7.3.3 Fill in the Blanks
With the Fill in the Blanks quiz item you can set a quiz which has text containing gaps to be filled in where words
should be.
216
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
To create one of these gap texts, proceed as follows:
1.
Enter a text you wish to create as a gap text.
2.
Define the gaps. Here you should enter 3 underscores as placeholders for the text that is to be entered.
Corresponding to the Type selected (see Point 3) the necessary input and selection options will be
created at this position in the text.
Note
Make sure that number of defined gaps matches the number of answers.
3.
4.
Select a interaction in which the answers are to be entered:
○
Text Input
○
Text Input (case sensitive)
○
Drop Down List
○
Drag & Drop
Then define the answers. The order of the answers must correspond to the order of the defined gaps in the
text. Accordingly, Answer 1 refers to the first gap, Answer 2 to the second and so on.
5.
There are differences when entering answers depending on the type selected:
○
When working with a Text Input, insert an answer in the answer field.
You can also add a number of possible values. You have to mark all answers with an asterisk (*)
before it:
e.g.: *Answer1,*Answer2
○
For Drop Down Lists and Drag & Drop options it is necessary to define alternative answers for
selection. That is why a number of possible answers are to be inserted in the response field. The
answers are separated using a comma and the correct answer should be marked with an asterisk (*)
before it.
Settings

Shuffle Solutions:
Activate this setting to mix answers for the drag & drop and drop-down list types into the corresponding
selection for a gap.

Use Answer 1 Only:
The use of just one answer list is possible in connection with the drop-down list and drag & drop types if
only one list with possible answers is to be made available for the entire Fill in the Blanks, to which the
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
217
answers must be allocated accordingly. The correct answers are marked with an asterisk (*). Each answer
can only be used once for a gap.
Quiz item on book page
For a Fill in the Blanks quiz item on a book page there are further settings available:

Design Controls and Design (Subcategories):
The subcategories contain parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
7.3.4 Matching
You can create a quiz item in which texts or pictures must be matched to one another using the Matching quiz
item.
To create this quiz item, proceed as follows:
1.
First set up how the answers are to be matched. Here the drop-down list and the drag & drop settings can
be used under Type.
○
In the drop-down list all available answers are listed out and must be chosen according to the
question.
○
With drag&drop all answers are available as fields in any order and are to be matched to the
questions.
2.
Now define the matches. Here, a Question must be entered and the matching answer must be defined in
the Answer field.
To do this, you must enter the corresponding question / answer text into the text fields.
Note
Make sure that the number of questions is equal to the number of answers and that an answer has been
allocated to each question.
Matching pictures
Alternatively, you can add pictures to texts. This means that either the question and answer both contain
pictures or only one of the two do. This can be done by inserting pictures using the HTML editor. You should
proceed as follows:
1.
You may only use the drag & drop function for matching up pictures. Set up this functionality in the Type
section.
2.
In the HTML editor of one of the questions or answers go to Insert Object
3.
Open the folder containing the picture you wish to insert and select the picture file. Confirm this with Open.
218
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
-> Insert Image File...
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
4.
In addition to the inserted picture you can also add text.
5.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 accordingly for the next questions / answers of the quiz item.
Note
Do not use picture files that are too large (height, width) for Matching so that they display correctly and do
not have to be cropped.
Recommendation
Where there is an association between an image question and text response, the height of the text field in
question aligns with that of the associated image. With images of different height, this results in different
text field heights, which betrays the correct allocation of the answers.
To align the text fields, you can modify the height of the text fields by using spaces (Return key).
Quiz item on book page
For a Matching quiz item on a book page there are further settings available:

Design Controls and Design (Subcategories):
The subcategories contain parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
7.3.5 Connection
This quiz item allows you to establish connections between questions and answers in text or image form. This
involves creating a line to highlight the assignment of a selected answer to a question.
To create a connection, select a question by clicking on it with the mouse. Then use the mouse again to specify
the appropriate answer.
The following is required to create a quiz item Connection:

Define the content to be connected. You can use both texts and images for this purpose.
Enter a Question in the appropriate field and it a corresponding Answer.
Note
Ensure that the number of questions matches the number of answers and that an answer is assigned to
each question.
When playing back the project, questions are presented in sequence and the answers out of sequence.
Inserting images
To define images as a question or answer, proceed as follows:
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
219
1.
In the HTML editor corresponding to a question or answer, go to the function Insert Object
-> Insert
Image File...
2.
Call up the folder containing the image to be inserted and select the image file. Confirm this by clicking on
Open.
3.
You can now insert an additional text in the text box to accompany the inserted image.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other questions and answers in the quiz item.
Note
Take care when Inserting images that you do not use image files that are too big (height, width) so that
they can be displayed correctly when arranging the objects and do not have to be wrapped.
Quiz item on book page
For a Connection quiz item on a book page there are further settings available:

Design Controls and Design (Subcategories):
The subcategories contain parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
7.3.6 Sorting
Text responses can be sorted into the correct order using the Sorting quiz item. This quiz item can be used, for
example, to ask questions about the order in which a process must be carried out where the individual steps
must be sorted.
To create a quiz item for sorting answers, proceed as follows:
1.
Use the Interaction option to select how the possible answers are to be displayed. Both the Drop Down List
and Drag & Drop options are available.
○
All of the defined answers are displayed in the Drop Down List and should be selected accordingly.
○
With Drag & Drop the answers are positioned as fields in any order and are to be sorted into the
correct order.
2.
Select an Alignment in which the answer fields are to be sorted. Vertical and Horizontal can be chosen here.
3.
Set the answers. Enter these into the answer fields in the correct order. These answers will be mixed up on
generation of the quiz.
Depending on the number of answers, a corresponding drop down list or drag & drop field is created.
Quiz item on book page
For a Sorting quiz item on a book page there are further settings available:
220
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes

Design Controls and Design (Subcategories):
The subcategories contain parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
7.3.7 Slide Control
In a Slide Control quiz, you can define a range of numbers and answer value within this range. During playback,
the learner has to choose an answer using the slide control.
To create a slide control quiz, proceed as follows:
1.
Define a numerical range for your slider in the Range parameter. Enter the start and end values as whole
numbers separated by a hyphen.
Only one start and one end value can be defined. Additional values, for example, 2-5-9 are not permitted.
2.
Now set the answer as a whole number.
You can only define one number as the Answer. It is not possible to select more than one number or define
a number range for the answer.
Note
Make sure that you only use integers. Using alternative numerical values or words is not permitted.
Quiz item on book page
For a Slide Control quiz item on a book page there are further settings available:

Start Value:
Specifies a value, which is used as start position for the slider.

Design Controls and Design (Subcategories):
The subcategories contain parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
7.3.8 Grid
You can create tables in which questions and answers are placed opposite one another using the Grid quiz item.
The questions can be answered by ticking one of the possible answer options.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
221
To create a Grid quiz item you must create a table with rows and columns. To do so, proceed as follows:
1.
Set the possible answers in the Possible Answers section. The number of answers defines the number of
columns. These are then displayed horizontally in the head of the table.
When entering the answers, they must be separated by commas.
E.g.: File,Edit,View,Insert
2.
Formulate the questions for the quiz item in the Question x parameter. These are then ordered vertically in
the left rows.
3.
You can define the answers in the Position of Correct Answer field. Here, a number value must be entered,
which refers back to an answer from the Possible Answers parameter.
For example, if you defined three answers and want one of your questions to have Answer 2 as the correct
answer, then enter 2 into the answer field of the corresponding question.
Settings

Shuffle Solutions:
Activate this parameter to show the Possible Answers in any order. If this setting has been deactivated, the
entries made under possible responses are shown in the same order in which they were input in the text
field.
Quiz item on book page
For a Grid quiz item on a book page there are further settings available:

Design Controls and Design (Subcategories):
The subcategories contain parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
7.3.9 Puzzle
The Puzzle quiz item lets you create a puzzle from a picture file. The task is to reassemble the original picture
correctly.
Here, an uploaded picture is divided and the separate parts are mixed randomly. The degree of fragmentation
can be set individually. The user can then use drag&drop to arrange the image components in the correct layout
and thus generate the original image.
The following shows you how to go about creating a Puzzle quiz item:
1.
Insert a picture file via the Image parameter.
The file can be inserted using the Replace Image
command.
Note
222
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Note that quiz puzzles do not contain Media File parameters. The Media File area is used to display
the Help Image and is therefore not available for use in other media files.
2.
After inserting the picture, the puzzle must be fragmented:
○
Pieces Horizontal:
The numerical value entered defines the number of parts into which the original image is subdivided
horizontally.
○
Pieces Vertical:
The numerical value entered defines the number of parts into which the original image is subdivided
vertically.
Note
If, when fragmenting the puzzle, two optically identical fields are found, it may be the case that it
cannot be recognized which picture belongs to which field. For this reason, the different puzzle
parts should be fragmented in such a way as no identical parts appear.
Alternatively, it is possible to use an image processing program prior to this to change an optically
identical picture by inserting a different-colored point, the size of a single pixel, into the picture.
3.
The composition of the puzzle can be set using the Interaction selection. A difference is discerned between
the following two modes:
4.
○
Arrange in One Field
○
Arrange in Second Field
This selection allows you to determine whether the user works directly within the parts of the puzzle shown
or is shown a second, empty field into which he drags the parts of the puzzle.
Note
Note that the Puzzle quiz item is not produced as well on generation of the documentation as the option
of doing puzzles is not possible in the corresponding document format.
Further options

Show Help Image:
The original picture can be shown next to the puzzle by using the Show Help Image parameter. This
parameter is activated in the initial setup.
Quiz item on book page
For a Puzzle quiz item on a book page there are further settings available:

Fields Side by Side (Options subcategory):
Specifies, the source field and the answer field are positioned side by side instead of below each other. The
parameter is used for the Interaction type Arrange in Second Field.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
223

Design (Subcategory):
The subcategory contains parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
Help Image
For a Puzzle on a book page you can insert a help image as additional book page object. Use the Image object, to
insert an image.
7.3.10 Hotspot
With the Hotspot quiz item, a quiz can be created in which a pre-defined area on a picture must be specified by
selecting it.
To create Hotspot quiz item in a project, proceed as follows:
1.
Use the Image parameter to insert the corresponding picture file within whose area a section must be
selected by the user.
The file can be inserted using the Replace Image
2.
command.
After inserting the picture, it is necessary to define an area for selection. This area can only be defined in
the shape of a rectangle.
Select the Define Hotspot
3.
function in the header of the macro editor.
After selecting the Define Hotspot button a window will open in which the inserted picture will display. In it,
you will find a red selection box whose size and position can be changed so that the picture section can be
set.
4.
Now close the window with the Confirm Selection
button.
Quiz item on book page
To create a Hotspot quiz item on a book page, proceed as follows:
1.
Use the Image parameter to insert the required picture file.
You can insert the file by using the Replace Image
2.
command.
Define an area for the hotspot selection.
The highlight in the image box shows the current hotspot area. You can move the hotspot by drag and drop
to another position and change the size by using the pointers on the highlighted border.
For a Hotspot on a book page, there are further settings available:

Hotspot: Left, Top:
Specifies the position of the hotspot area.
224
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes

Hotspot: Width, Height
Specifies the size of the hotspot area.

Pin (Subcategory):
The subcategory Pin offers parameters to define an individual pin to select the hotspot. You can insert an
image.
The image can also be a sprite image. This is an image file that combines many icons into one file. Using
the Sprite parameters, you can define the image area of the pin on the file so that only this selection is
shown.

Design (Subcategory):
The subcategory contains parameters to specify the appearance of the quiz item.
SAP Enable Now
Quizzes
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
225
8
Books and Book Pages
Books and book pages are used to provide information, helps, tutorials and more by using multimedia elements.
They make it possible to incorporate simulations and different media files, but also conventional documents and
links to further information.
Using different objects and media presents you with many and various opportunities for presenting and
communicating information. Moreover, the book page design as well can be individually edited and customized
to the content to be communicated.
8.1 General
A book page is an HTML page on which different content can be filed in different forms and accessed.
It can accommodate various buttons for launching simulations and opening documents that can then be linked
within a workarea. Media files for audio and video formats can also be integrated and can be presented using
appropriate playback applications. But information in traditional form, as an image or text, can also be created
on a book page.
A number of book pages can be combined in a book. A book can thus be understood as a type of group. Once a
book has been created, it can be displayed in the book reader, which the learner can use to flick through the
pages and launch and work through content.
Easy to create, diverse applications
Book pages make it possible to create courses on a particular step quickly by inserting objects on the book page
and linking them to content.
In this way you can amalgamate the content of a number of simulations by combining different modes and
documents. However, because of the diverse ways of presenting information on book pages, it is not absolutely
necessary to integrate simulations into a book page. You can also design a book page using simple texts or video
files and thus provide these to the learner in addition to the individual simulations or else integrate them entirely
independently as an extension of the step.
Didactic benefit
Books and book pages promote independent learning and a stronger engagement with the facts as learners are
able to use and discover the content individually. They allow the student to work with the content that is relevant
to him and ensure variety due to different information formats.
226
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.2 Creating a Book
You can use the Explorer to insert a book in your course structure. Proceed as follows:
1.
Select the New Book
button in the toolbar.
2.
Enter a name in the open dialog box and confirm this by clicking on OK to insert the book.
3.
The Template parameter allows an existing book to be used as a template for the new book. The Change...
function allows a book to be determined from the project structure.
4.
You can now insert the desired book pages in the book or create new book pages.
To organize steps you can insert a book or group in a book in the Explorer. This displays the book pages as a
subchapter in the book reader.
For a correct tracking of books it is recommended to use groups for subchapters.
Note
Only insert book pages and books or groups in a book for structural purposes. Projects or documents are
not displayed in the book reader as you can link to this learning content directly via the book pages.
Book style
Defines the style of the book and book pages. The dropdown list box contains the Book Style resources.
Deactivate the style setting. This is where you can define an individual design for each book.
Note
Changing a skin for the book reader doesn’t changes the style for the book pages located within the book.
You can customize the style for each individual book page in the book page editor.
8.2.1 Defining a Book Page as Content Page
You can create a page containing introductory information or a table of contents for a book. So that the student
can access the page at any time in the book reader, the page can be defined as a content page for the book. The
book page can then be launched directly in the book reader using a button in the control bar.
To define the Content Page select your book in the Explorer. Then go to Content Page in the object editor's
subcategory book reader and select the Edit Link...
option. You can now specify your book page in the open
dialog. Confirm this by clicking on OK.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
227
8.2.2 Subcategory book reader
Various parameters are itemized in the book reader (Explorer) sub category which you can use to define the
functionality in the book reader control bar. This allows you to customize them to your book's individual
requirements and hide any functions you do not want.
The following settings are available:

Hide Book Panel:
Activating this option hides the book panel.

Open Book Directly:
If this option is activated, the book will open as soon as it is selected in the tree structure in the library in
the book reader. If the option is deactivated, the book reader is started by double clicking or selecting the
button in the right hand view of the library.

Hide Audio Controls:
Activating this option hides the audio file and effects control functions.

Hide Navigation Controls:
Activating this option hides the buttons for scrolling through the book pages.

Hide Index Page Control:
Activating this option hides the button for calling a specific start page.

Hide Search Button:
Activating this option hides the button for calling the search dialog box.

Hide Table of Contents Control:
Activating this option hides the book page option menu.

Hide Progress Control:
Activating this option hides the progress bar for displaying how the student is progressing with the learning
material in the book.
8.2.3 Alternative Navigations on Book Pages
Actions can be used to allow navigation on book pages independently of the control bar of the book reader.
These are universal properties and allow the user to jump between book pages and units.
If you would like to use such navigations, it is recommended that the objects be inserted into a book page
template. By doing so, they can be used for the entire book and ensure consistency.
Actions as link targets
To enter a link target, proceed as follows:
1.
Insert a book page object.
For example: Image, Active Area.
2.
228
Select the parameter Link -> Link to...
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
3.
Select Edit Link...
. The editing dialog box appears.
4.
Select Actions button.
5.
Select the desired action from the Actions drop-down list.
For example: Next book page, Play audio
More information about link actions can be found under Link Actions for trainer and book reader.
Object actions of the page object
To specify an object action for a page object, proceed as follows:
1.
Insert a book page object, for example Image or Active Area.
2.
Under subcategory Actions, choose an action.
For example: On Click, On Show
3.
Select the page object from the first drop-down list.
4.
Select a behavior from the second drop-down list.
For example: Next, Share.
More information about actions can be found under Object Actions.
Disabling the book navigation
For a book page you can specify, that the book reader control bar is deactivated. This allows you, to specify
required content. After completing the content, navigation can be enabled.
When selecting the page object for an object action, the following behaviors are available:

Disable Book Navigation:
Disables the navigation of the control bar and other navigation controls on the book page.

Enable Book Navigation:
Enables the navigation of the control bar and navigation controls.
8.3 Creating a Book Page
Create a book page in the Explorer in the following steps:
1.
Select the appropriate book or location within the tree structure where the book page is to be inserted. You
can either insert a book page in a book or on a standalone basis.
2.
Click on the New Book Page
in the toolbar.
3.
Give the book page a name in the open dialog.
4.
The Template parameter allows an existing book page to be used as a template for the new book page.
That means that once a background design has been created, it can be retained for additional book pages.
This requires the template to be selected before creating the new book page.
The Change... function allows a book page to be determined from the project structure.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
229
5.
Confirm the data you have entered by clicking on OK.
6.
The book page is then automatically opened in the book page editor where you can now edit it and insert
objects.
Editing the book pages
The inserted book pages are edited using the book page editor. You can use this to define the design and to
create objects.
The book page editor view port is a WYSIWYG editor: that means that the book page is subsequently displayed
in the book reader or in the library exactly as it is displayed when being edited.
Recommendation
To maintain clarity with a complex course structure, it is recommended that books and book pages be
inserted at the beginning or end of the structure or of a group. You should maintain consistency of the
positions to make it easier for the user to find his bearings within the library.
8.3.1 Defining the Design
After creating the book page, it is opened in the book page editor using the Default style. You can use the Style
parameter to select the design you want in the object editor and customize it accordingly.
A style defines the background design, the design of the buttons for the linked learning content as well as the
appearance of the text box. Selecting a different skin therefore changes all of these objects. Before you select a
skin, it is advisable to insert some objects to be able to assess the overall design.
Customizing the background
You can customize the chosen background design as you like. You can use an available skin as a template which
can then be edited once it has been selected.
Various settings are available to you in the book page editor for displaying the book page:

Image:
This parameter can be used to define an individual background image which replaces the image of the skin
that has been set.

Width and Height:
These values determine the book page's width and height. The values are stated in pixels.

Page Color (Design):
This value will determine the book page's background color. It is recommended that you enter a value in
this field if you choose not to use an image for the book page's background or if you use an image that does
not cover the entire book page itself.
When using the Page Color, activate the Image setting without selecting an image. This is necessary to hide
the page image or color of the book page style.
230
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages

Background Color (Design):
Changing this value customizes the color of the outer surface surrounding the book page.
You can use Choose Color...
to define the desired color value. This can be defined in the RGB or HSV
color space or as a hexadecimal value.
You can also make the background transparent if you do not want any color to be displayed. This is done
using the Transparent

button.
Border Width (Design):
Defines the width of the border for the book page. The value is defined in pixels. If no border is to be
displayed, the value is to be set to 0.

Border Color (Design):
This parameter can be used to define the color of the book page border. The Choose Color...
function
can be used to define a corresponding value in the RGB or HSV color space or as a hexadecimal value.
Ensure that you have previously specified a width for the border so that it is actually displayed.

Border Style (Design):
Determines the style of the border that you can select from the drop-down list.
You can call up the design parameters at any time while a book page is being created and amend them by
clicking on the background.
8.3.2 Inserting Objects
The principle behind book pages is embedding buttons on them for linking to learning content as well as
interactive objects and media files. Learners can subsequently select objects at will and work through their
learning content or use the information they contain to advance their learning.
How they arrange the objects on the book page is left to their creativity. They can arrange them symmetrically
or lay them out as they see fit. In the process, they should however take care not to integrate too many objects
on a book page to avoid overloading the page with objects and information.
Proceed as follows when inserting and editing objects:
1.
In the toolbar, click on the button corresponding to the object type you would like to insert. This creates a
button or element for the selected object which allows the user to call up the learning content.
2.
Select the object to edit it.
3.
You can position the object on the book page using drag&drop. A red border appears when you select the
object. Click on it and keep the mouse key depressed during the positioning maneuver.
Additional functionality for positioning objects is available to you in the toolbar.
4.
Further editing of the object is by means of the object editor, which offers you the associated parameters.
For each object, proceed in accordance with the explanations in the relevant sections.
Once you have edited your book page, save it using the Save Book Page
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
button in the toolbar.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
231
8.3.3 Table of Contents for Book Pages
A book page can have a table of contents faded in, which is displayed on the book page background
independently of the book reader.
The table of contents is constructed from a bar displaying the groups or book pages belonging to the first sub
level. The other groups and book pages can be launched from an option menu that is faded in using the button
on the right-hand side of the book page. Clicking on a group name opens a menu displaying the group content.
The table of contents on the book pages can be used as an alternative to the table of contents in the book
reader. This is accomplished by deactivating the book reader table of contents.
Recommendation
The width of the table of contents is restricted to the width of the book page. That is why when setting up
the groups it is recommended that short names or chapter numbers be issued, so that as many groups as
possible can be displayed on the bar.
Settings
A book page's table of contents can be defined using the Table of Contents subcategory. This offers you the
following functionality:

Show:
This function can be used to activate the table of contents for the book page.
Note
The table of contents must be defined for each individual book page. If all of the book pages of a book are
to receive a table of contents, then it is advisable to define the table of contents for one book page and
then use this book page as a copy template when creating new book pages.

Position:
The table of contents bar can be faded in directly above the book page or in the window header. Use this
parameter to select the appropriate position.

Menu Structure:
These options can be used to define the way in which the content is displayed in the menu.
○
Flat structure:
The groups and book pages are displayed in a flat structure such that all groups and book pages are
displayed on one level.
○
Indented contents:
The contents of a group are shown indented relative to the group itself. This improves clarity within a
complex content structure.
232
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.3.4 Hiding a Book Page in Table of Contents
You can hide a book page in the table of contents of the control bar. This allows you to show only the main pages
in the table of contents and to hide additional information.
The book page is not numbered in the table of contents and is not counted in the book page progress bar. The
user can navigate to the book page. Afterwards, the book page is shown in the table of contents.
Proceed as follows:
1.
Select a book page in Explorer.
2.
Activate the option Hide in Table of Contents in object editor.
8.3.5 Further Properties of a Book Page
Show Navigation Arrows
Instead of using the command bar to scroll through the book pages, you can do so using the buttons either side
of the book page. This makes it possible to work more intuitively with the book.
To display the buttons, activate the Show Navigation Arrows option for the book page in the book page editor.
Display Duration
This option allows you to determine the duration that a book page should be displayed in the book reader. Once
the time has elapsed, the book reader will automatically jump to the next book page. This feature allows you to
play books as a slide show or an automatic presentation. The value can be set in seconds.
8.3.6 Merging Book Pages
Merging book pages allows content from a different book page to be added to the content of the currently
selected book page. This is sensible, for example, when applying recurring elements or to have a structure
available created using construction lines.
When merging book pages, the desired objects are inserted on the book page, but with the added book page
continuing to have its own separate existence.
This is how you add the content of a one book page to another book page:
1.
In the book page editor, open the book page to which the content is to be added.
2.
Select the Merge Book Pages
3.
A dialog will now be displayed with the overview of the Workarea structure in which you can determine the
option in the toolbar.
book page of your choice. The book page currently open will be shown grayed out in this structure.
Click on the book page and then on OK to confirm.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
233
4.
In the next step, you will be presented with a dialog displaying the objects belonging to the chosen book
page. By making a selection in the selection boxes you can determine which objects you would like to apply
to the open book page. Confirm your selection by clicking on OK.
The objects are now inserted on the book page in the place in which they were located in the selected book page.
The objects also receive the book page style of the book page to which they were added.
8.3.7 Page Sound
The Page Sound parameter enables background music or an audio commentary to be inserted in a book page.
The learner can start the audio file in the book reader in the control bar.
For information on how to add and edit an audio file, refer to the section on Editing Audio.
8.3.7.1 Adding Audio to Book Pages
You can insert audio as Page Sound to your book pages by using the Add Audio dialog box. See also Add Audio
Dialog Box.
To record audio for your book pages, proceed as follows:
1.
Click on the Add Audio
toolbar button to open the Add Audio dialog box.
2.
Select a book page from the page list.
3.
Click on Start Recording
4.
Speak your audio text.
5.
Click on End Recording
6.
Select the next book page and record your next audio text.
7.
Once you have recorded all your audio texts, click on OK to close the dialog box.
.
.
Alternatively, you can insert text to speech in the Add Audio dialog box. Open the Text to Speech dialog box by
clicking on Edit Text to Speech...
.
8.3.7.2 Importing Audio
Importing audio files allows you to easily integrate audio files into a simulation.
Note
By importing an audio file, the existing audio of a step will be overwritten.
Proceed as follows to import an audio file:
234
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Note
During import the audio files are converted into the editing format WAV with the default audio format.
1.
Select the book page for which you want to import an audio file.
2.
In Page Sound parameter, click the button Import Audio File...
.
There are two options:

Insert Audio File...

Insert Audio from Workarea...
3.
A dialog box opens. Select the file.
4.
Click OK to insert the file.
8.3.7.3 Recording Audio
Audio recording allows you to narrate your own texts with the microphone.
Requirement
For audio recording, a microphone is necessary. Connect this first before starting to record.
Recording audio
Proceed as follows to execute the recording:
1.
Click on the Record Audio...
2.
Click on Start Recording
3.
Read out your text.
button. The audio editor and the recording dialog box opens.
.
During the recording, a sound level meter shows the volume. You also see the spoken text as an audio
track.
4.
Click on End Recording
.
5.
Click on Ok to close recording dialog box.
For more information, refer to the Recording Dialog Box chapter.
Note
During the recording of an audio file, the existing audio of a book page will be overwritten.
Read out the full text for your recording because it is not possible to record the text in sections. Any unwanted
parts can be cut out afterwards. If you are not satisfied with the outcome, record the text again.
Recommendation
If the recording contains background noise, then it is recommended that you edit the audio file with the
dynamic editor to improve the sound.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
235
8.3.7.4 Generating Text to Speech
We recommend that you convert text to speech after a project has been edited. Steps should be converted
individually. If a step contains several macros (for example, several steps are connected), then the texts will be
read out one after the other in the order in which the macros are arranged.
If the bubble texts of a simulation are already converted into text to speech, they are available when you open
the editor.
Proceed as follows to create a text to speech:
1.
Open the text to speech editor using the Edit Text to Speech...
button in the audio editor or Audio menu.
Refer to the chapter Text to Speech Dialog Box.
2.
Insert a text in the text field or edit the available text.
3.
Define the duration of the silence to be inserted at the beginning of the audio file.
4.
Confirm the input with OK. The dialog box is closed and the audio file generated.
Note
If a step contains several macros, the individual actions and associated spoken texts will run
asynchronously in relation to one another. This is because the texts are converted into an audio file and
are not linked to the actions. It is therefore advisable to only use one macro per step.
8.3.7.5 Subtitles for Text to Speech
For the text to speech audio of your book pages, you are able to display subtitles. The subtitle is displayed in the
footer of the book reader and shows your text to speech text.
Subtitle settings
The following settings are available in Settings

under Playback Settings -> book reader -> Visual properties:
Show subtitles:
Activate the option to show subtitles for text to speech.

Design of the subtitles
For the subtitle textbox you can specify the design with the following settings:
236
○
Font family
○
Font size
○
Text color
○
Alignment
○
Background color
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.3.8 Templates for Book Pages
Book page templates are special types of book pages, which define a layout and general objects for creating
book page content. Templates are useful for saving time and for ensuring uniformity for newly created objects in
a complex book and to support the content creation of many authors.
8.3.8.1 Creating a Book Page Template
You should create a template before creating a book. This ensures consistency and avoids the need to make
changes afterwards.
To create a book page template, proceed as follows:
1.
Click on the New Book Page
2.
In the New Book Page dialog box, proceed as follows:
1.
Enter a name.
2.
Select a language.
3.
Click OK.
in the toolbar.
3.
The book page is opened in the book editor.
4.
Select a style and create your standard elements of the template.
5.
Click Save and close the book page.
6.
Open the Explorer.
7.
Select Book Page Template
as the Subtype for the created book page.
The icon of the object changes and displays the template type.
Note
An existing template cannot be used to create a new template. Always create a template without using
other templates.
Tips for creating templates

Create a group for your templates. Set the group to hidden, in order to hide it during content playback.

Lock the position of your objects, if you want to prevent objects from being changed accidentally.

Use guides to create a layout grid.

Define Text Styles for the content, to ensure consistency and straightforward adaptation.

Insert the layout and design relevant objects.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
237
8.3.8.2 Defining a Book Page Template
You can use a book page template to create your book page content. There are different ways to activate a
template for a book page:

Define a default template for creating new book pages

Select a template when creating a new book page

Set a template in an existing book page
Define a default template
You can define a default template, which is always used for creating new book pages. This can be done as
follows:
1.
Open the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
2.
In the property Book Page, click on Edit Link...
) in the area Producer -> Templates.
The object selection dialog box opens.
3.
Select the Book Page Template
and click OK.
4.
Confirm your changes in the central configuration dialog box with Apply.
5.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
When creating a new book page, the template is set by default. Further information is available in the chapter
Templates for Content Objects.
Select a template for a new book page
When creating a book page, you can set a template in the corresponding dialog box. If a template has been
defined as standard, you can select an alternative template for an individual page. Further information is
available in the chapter New Book Page.
Set a template in a book page
The Page object of a book page contains the setting Template, which displays the activated template. If you want
to use another template, select the book page from the drop-down list.The property only displays book pages
with the subtype Book Page Template.
8.3.8.3 Using a Book Page Template
The objects of an active book page template have the following characteristics:

they are inherited from the template

they use the properties as default (green button deactivated)

they are highlighted in blue in the objects list
238
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages

they are positioned on the layers behind the objects of the created book page

they cannot be deleted - the objects are hidden automatically
Changing and resetting objects
The template objects use the defined properties by default, if the template is used for a general book page. You
can change the template objects for your content as required.
To change an object, you have to select the specific property by activating the green control in front of the
property name.
If you have changed objects, you can reset your changes by choosing the Reset Template Objects in the Edit
menu. Once reset, the parameters are unspecified (green control deactivated) and the default template is used.
Note
Changed objects keep their status even when objects are changed in the template. Click on Reset
Template Objects to change the objects in the book page to the current status of the template.
Tips for using templates

If you do not need an object on a book page, hide the object by using the Hide property in the object editor.

We recommend that you keep the template objects when the template is used as a book page because the
objects define a layout.
8.4 Book Page Objects
The following section will give you an overview on the variety of objects available for enhancing your book pages.
The properties and editing options are described here in detail.
Different objects offer the opportunity to provide the learner with information. You can insert these using the
toolbar and edit them accordingly.
They offer you the following objects:
Icon
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Name
Icon
Name
Arrow
Demo Mode Link
Shape
Practice Mode Links
Bubble
Test Mode Link
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
239
Icon
Name
Icon
Image
Text Box
Placeholder
Name
Concurrent Mode Link
Guided Presentation Mode
Link
Free Presentation Mode
Link
Active Area
Quiz Link
Text Pop-Up
Book Page Link
BPM Object
Book Link
Connection
Document Link
Time Control
Flash Animation
Object Visibility
Video Object
Animation
Audio Object
Counter
HTML Document
Collector
QR Code
For further information to the objects, read the corresponding sections.
240
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.4.1 Arrow
The Arrow object is customizable. It creates a path for which you can choose from a variety of arrow heads. The
arrow's length, position and direction can be modified as desired.
Positioning a path point
There are path points at the beginning and end of an arrow that allow you to adjust its length and direction. Click
on one of the points and drag and drop it to the desired position on the book page.
Defining an arrow
An arrow object can be customized as follows:

Color:
This value defines the arrow's color. The Choose Color...
option can be used to define an appropriate
value.

Thickness:
This value allows you to define the arrow's thickness. The value is given in pixels.

Arrow Head 1 & 2:
This value defines the arrow head for each side of the arrow.
There are several types:
Design
Name
None
Standard
Triangle - Hollow
Triangle - Filled
Diamond – Hollow
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
241
Design
Name
Diamond – Filled
Circle - Hollow
Circle - Filled


Advanced (Advanced Layout):
Defines the width and the length of the arrow heads in relation to the arrow’s thickness. Enter a value
between 2 and 20.
The value defines how many times the length of the thickness should be expanded (e.g., value 3 = 3x the
arrow’s thickness).
8.4.2 Shape
The Shape object displays a variety of shapes to choose from for the purpose of enhancing the visualization of
learning content, process flows and sequences. Shape objects can be used in a variety of ways and can contain
text.
To select and insert a shape, click on Insert Shape.
Type and orientation
A drop-down list will appear in which you can select what kind of shape you would like to insert. For some
shapes, you can also define its orientation. For more information, refer to the section on Shapes Overview.
Design

Shape Color:
Here you can select a color for the shape. If you would like to define a value, click on Choose Color…

Shape Value:
This setting defines the shape's character. Values between 0 and 100 can be entered here. The outcome
will vary depending on the type of shape selected. For example, you can change the width of an arrow or
smooth the corners of a square.
242
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Note that this setting is not available for all shapes. For more information, refer to the section on Shapes
Overview.
You will find descriptions on additional settings under the section on Editing Parameters.
Effects
Under Effects, there is a variety of settings that allow you to define the behavior and design of a shape.



Gradient
○
Shape Color (Gradient)
○
Border Color (Gradient)
Design Roll-Over
○
Shape color
○
Shape Color (Gradient)
○
Border color
○
Border Color (Gradient)
Design Click
○
Shape color
○
Shape Color (Gradient)
○
Border color
○
Border Color (Gradient)
8.4.3 Shapes Overview
This section will give you an overview of the shapes that are available in the Producer and includes a list of
shapes for which the Orientation and/or Shape Value can be defined.
Shape
Direction / Shape Value
Basic Shapes
Ellipse
Triangle
Left, Right, Up, Down
Isosceles Triangle
Left, Right, Up, Down
Rectangle
Rounded Rectangle
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Corner radius
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
243
Shape
Direction / Shape Value
Diamond
Left, Right, Up, Down
Parallelogram
Shape thickness
Left, Right, Up, Down
Trapezoid
Shape thickness
Pentagon
Left, Right, Up, Down
Regular Pentagon
Left, Right, Up, Down
Heptagon
Octagon
Decagon
Dodecagon
Chevron
Left, Right, Up, Down
Arrows
Left, Right, Up, Down
Arrow (one direction)
Arrow thickness
Left Right
Arrow
Up Down
(two directions)
Shape thickness
Left Up
Right Up
Arrow
Left Down
(two directions kinked)
Right Down
Shape thickness
244
Triple Arrow
Shape thickness
Quad Arrow
Shape thickness
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Shape
Direction / Shape Value
Left, Right, Up, Down
Notched Arrow
Shape thickness
Stars
4-Point Star
Shape thickness
5-Point Star
Shape thickness
6-Point Star
Shape thickness
7-Point Star
Shape thickness
8-Point Star
Shape thickness
9-Point Star
Shape thickness
10-Point Star
Shape thickness
12-Point Star
Shape thickness
Plus
Shape thickness
Further Shapes
8.4.4 Bubble
Bubbles are ideal for adding visually-appealing textual content to your projects. Similar to those used in the
simulations, these bubbles also have a tip on them to point to a specific item on the page.
Creating bubbles
To create a bubble, click on the option Insert Bubble. The following options will appear:

Text:
Click on the text field to open the HTML editor, where you can enter and format your text for the bubble.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
245

Style:
Here you can choose which bubble style you would like to use. To edit your bubble, go to the menu Tools
and open the editing dialog box for your bubble style.

Alignment:
Here you can specify in which direction the tip of your bubble should be pointing. If you choose the option
Center – the bubble will have no point and it will be positions in the middle of the chosen area.

Title:
This text field allows you to enter a title for the bubble. When using titles, it is recommended that you also
enable the option Movable, which inserts a title bar at the top of your object.

Movable:
When this option is enabled, the bubble can be repositioned on the book page during playback. An
additional title bar will appear in the object that allows you to move the bubble per Drag & Drop. After it’s
been repositioned, the bubble will be displayed normally with no arrow markers.

Closable:
When this option is enabled, the bubble can be closed while the book page is playing. An X icon will appear
in the corner of the bubble for you to click on.
Under Actions, you can also manually add the icon Restore so you can quickly redisplay the bubble.
Manually changing text bubble alignments
A square will appear at the top of the bubble, which you can use to manually turn the object. With centrallyaligned bubbles that do not have a tip, the square will appear in the middle of the bubble. Click on the square and
hold the mouse button down. With the mouse button still pressed, pull the dot away from the bubble and to the
desired position. Release the mouse button to set the new position.
8.4.5 Image
This object allows you to insert an image file to your book page.
Inserting an image
To insert an image, proceed as follows:
1.
Select Insert Image in toolbar.
The Insert Image from Workarea dialog box opens.
2.
Select an image in your workarea structure.
or
Use Insert File... to import an image.
3.
246
Select Ok.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
You can use Replace Image
to change the image file.
See the chapter Supported File Formats on Book Pages for supported file formats.
Parameters of the object
The following parameters are available:

Image Roll-Over:
You can use the Image Roll-Over option to insert an image that is shown when the mouse is moved over it.

Image Click:
You can use the Image Click option to insert an image that is shown when the image is clicked on.

Keep Aspect Ratio:
If this parameter is activated, the aspect ratio is retained when scaling an image. Deactivate this parameter
if you want to be free to change the size of an image.

Zoom:
The Zoom option allows you to zoom in and out of images on the book page. An icon will be inserted onto
the image. By clicking on the icon, the image will be shown in its original size. This allows you to insert an
image into the book page and save space when scaling it.
8.4.6 Text Box
Clicking on the Insert Text Box button inserts a field in which you can enter pure text. The size of this field can be
varied to accommodate longer texts.
Example, you can use the text field to provide general or introductory information about a step.
8.4.7 Placeholder
The Placeholder inserts a variable in order to dynamically allocate content to a specific location. For example:
book page title, descriptions, page number, etc. The placeholder object makes it easier to keep the layout
consistent throughout the project.
To use placeholders, it is recommended that you insert them into templates so that they will be available in all of
your book pages. For example, the page number can be integrated into all of the book pages in the same
position.
Once an object has been inserted, choose the desired option from the Placeholder selection list. The respective
content will then be displayed in the text field.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
247
You can choose from the following placeholders:

Book title

Book description

Book page title

Book page description

Chapter title

Chapter description

Page number

Page count

Text to Speech text
Recommendation
A Text to Speech text placeholder can be used, to provide a closed caption for an audio with text to
speech.
8.4.8 Active Area
The Active Area is a text field in which you can insert a text or image. The entire area constitutes a button that
can be linked with an external web page or object from the Workarea. This allows further information, for
example, to be shown.
To create a link, go to the Link to...
function. A dialog will then open in which you can specify a link or select an
object from the Workarea. A link to a web page or similar is to be entered in the text field under Available. This
should be in the format http://www... Confirm your entry by clicking on OK.
When launched, the linked page is automatically opened in a new browser window. If you would like to open the
page in the same window, you need to deactivate the setting Open in a new window.
If the linked page or object from the Workarea is opened in a new window, you can define properties for
displaying the browser window that has been opened.
Effects for active areas
Under Effects, you will find a list of settings that allow you to add dynamic effects to active surfaces in order to
improve its usability. The following actions can be defined:

Design Roll-Over

Design Click
Once one of these options has been enabled, additional settings will appear. The following settings can be
defined to change the object’s properties:
248
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages

Background color

Font color

Border color
8.4.9 Text Pop-Up
This function inserts a text pop-up which can be opened by a button. You can insert any text you like in this box
as well as an image.
The text pop-up can be formatted using the Text Pop-Up Position subcategory to adjust its size and position.
Defining type and title

Type:
Different types, differentiated by a corresponding icon, can be defined for displaying the textbox. Using
different types enables you to highlight the text box content and present it more clearly to the user.
The following types are available and can be selected using the parameter Type:

○
Standard
○
More Info
○
Tip
Title:
You can use the parameter Title to specify a title for the text box. If you do not want to display a title, you
should leave the field blank. The default setting for the Standard type is no title whereas placeholders are
displayed for the other types.
Further options

Show on Roll-Over:
This option allows you to define whether a text pop-up should appear when the mouse cursor rolls over the
icon. When the mouse cursor rolls out of the icon, the text pop-up will hide again. The text pop-up behaves
in the same way as a tooltip.

Fade In/Out:
This parameter defines whether the text pop-up is displayed or hidden with a fading in effect when being
opened or closed. Deactivate the setting if you wish to avoid this effect.

Hide Text Pop-Up in Editor:
The default setting is for the text pop-up to be displayed in the book page editor. Activate the parameter to
hide it for editing. If you would like to reinstate the text pop-up in the view, deactivate the setting.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
249
8.4.10 Linking Content from the Workarea
You can link simulation modes, books and book pages you have created from your workarea on your book page.
You also can integrate different documents. For example, these can be Word or PowerPoint documents you
have generated or else files in Excel or PDF format inserted in the workarea.
For a quiz any simulation mode containing only quiz items can be selected. As a rule, the recommended mode is
Test mode as it does not allow the user to influence the process in any way.
Linking the content
Proceed as follows, to insert a link:
1.
In the toolbar, select the relevant type which you would like to link to content. A button is then created on
your book page.
2.
Select the Edit Link...
button (subcategory Link) adjacent to the Link to parameter in the object editor.
3.
A dialog displaying the Workarea structure will then open. Only the learning content corresponding to the
type of button you have inserted can be selected from this dialog. Specify the learning content you want by
clicking on it and click on OK to confirm.
The object is now linked to the button and can be selected and opened when viewing the book page.
Note
If a button is not linked, a note icon will appear on the button. Create the link as desired. This icon is only
visible from the book page editor screen.
Customizing an icon
Icons for inserted objects automatically have the same Style appearance that was defined for the book page
itself. It is, however, possible to customize an icon with your own image. To do so, click on the option Image. This
can be an existing image file or a screenshot that has not yet been created.
You can also define an object's icon to be used as default on all the book pages. To do so, go to Book Page
Initialization and insert the icon.
8.4.11 Flash Animation
The Flash Animation object displays Flash files (SWF) on a book page.
250
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Note
To insert and view Flash animations, authors and users need a Flash Player installed on their
workstations. This can be downloaded from the websites of the relevant manufacturers. Consult your
administrator if required.
Inserting a flash animation
To insert a flash animation in your book page, proceed as follows:
1.
Click on Insert Flash Animation in the toolbar.
2.
Click on Edit Link...
3.
Click on Insert File... in the dialog box.
4.
Select the file from your directory and click on Open.
5.
Confirm the dialog box with OK.
for the Source parameter in the object editor.
The flash animation is now displayed on your book page and can be played back. The file is copied into the book
page folder.
Note
A page with the current settings is displayed by default for inserted media objects. This is only visible for
editing and is hidden during playback.
Further settings

Quality:
The playback quality of the inserted film can be defined for flash files. This allows you to reduce file loading
times. Use the drop-down list to select the required quality.

Window Mode:
Window mode affects the display of the background and the performance when playing a Flash animation.
Note
In Window Mode (Flash) tooltips are only displayed for the options Opaque Windowless and Transparent
Windowless. Tooltips are not displayed for the other options during playback.

Start automatically:
Activate this parameter if you want file playback to be started automatically after the book page has been
opened. If this setting is deactivated, the learner needs to start the media file manually.

Repeat:
Activate this parameter if you want the object to start again after playback.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
251
8.4.12 Video Object
The Video object displays inserted video files on a book page in an embedded player window. The object
supports common video formats (see chapter Supported File Formats on Book Pages).
Note
To insert and view videos, authors and users need the relevant playback applications for the required
formats to be installed on their workstations. These applications can be downloaded from the websites of
the relevant manufacturers. Consult your administrator if required.
Further information on formats is available in the chapter Requirements for Video Formats.
Inserting a video
To insert a video in your book page, proceed as follows:
1.
Click on Insert Video in the toolbar.
2.
Click on Edit Link...
3.
Click on Insert File... in the dialog box.
4.
Select the file from your directory and click on Open.
5.
Confirm the dialog with OK.
for the Source parameter in the object editor.
The video is now displayed on your book page and can be played back. The file has been copied into the book
page folder.
Note
A page with the current settings is displayed by default for inserted media objects. This is only visible for
editing and is hidden during playback.
Alternative source
The object supports a wide range of video formats within HTML 5 as well as further video plugins. The Alternative
Source parameters allow you to insert additional files in different formats for a Video object. The alternatives are
used to display a video, if a format cannot be played back due to a missing plugin or unsupported browser.
Further settings

Show Control:
Displays the control bar.

Start automatically:
Activate this parameter if you want file playback to be started automatically after the book page has been
opened. If this setting has been deactivated, the learner needs to start the media file manually.
252
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages

Repeat:
Activate this parameter if you want the object to start again after playback.
8.4.13 Audio Object
The Audio object plays back audio files on a book page.
Note
The Audio object itself does not have a control option; it is only responsible for playing audio files. It is an
empty object that is not visible on the book page. You can learn how to create controls for the Audio
object in the relevant chapter.
Inserting an audio
To insert an audio file in your book page, proceed as follows:
1.
Click on Insert Audio in the toolbar.
2.
Click on Edit Link...
3.
Click on Insert File... in the dialog box.
4.
Select the file from your directory and click on Open.
5.
Confirm the dialog box with OK.
for the Source parameter in the object editor.
The audio file is now displayed on your book page and can be played back. The file is copied into the book page
folder.
Note
A page with the current settings is displayed by default for inserted media objects. This is only visible for
editing and is hidden during playback.
Further settings

Sound channel:
This parameter determines which channel is used for sound.

Volume:
This parameter defines the default value of the volume (0-100).

Start automatically:
Activate this parameter if you want file playback to be started automatically after the book page has been
opened. If this setting is deactivated, the learner needs to start the media file manually.

Repeat:
Activate this parameter if you want the object to start again after playback.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
253
8.4.14 HTML Document
The object embeds HTML documents in an IFrame on the book page.
Insert a HTML document in your book page as follows:
1.
Click on the Insert HTML Document button in the toolbar.
2.
Click on Edit Link...
3.
Insert the Link of the desired HTML document.
4.
Click on OK.
of the Source parameter in the object editor.
The HTML document is now displayed on your book page.
Note
It is not possible to link to a local page, because of browser restrictions.
For linking a HTML Document object with a project of the workarea use the following link form:
e.g.: project!PR_B9F988F508BF12AA:standard.html
8.4.15 QR Code
The object allows you to generate a QR code for a text or a URL and to display the QR code on the book page.
This can be used to start specific content on a mobile device or to open a web page with further information.
The object has the following specific parameters:

QR Code Data:
Enter your data to generate the QR code. The data can be a text or a URL.

Open Link on Click:
Opens the link when clicking the QR code. You can use the option if you entered a URL as QR Code Data.

Open in New Window:
Opens the link in a new browser window. The option is shown if Open Link on Click has been activated.
8.5 Object Parameters
Various parameters are available for the inserted objects, which you can use to edit the design and positioning
of individual and multiple objects. The parameters can be edited in the object editor for a selected object.
254
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Note
Not all parameters are supported for each object. These chapters give you a general overview of the
available parameters.
8.5.1 Editing Parameters
There are various parameters available in the object editor for editing objects. These depend on the object in
question:
General

Name:
A name is automatically allocated to each object when it is inserted into the book. The name is
customizable and its purpose is for internal use. The name will appear in the list of objects and when
actions are assigned to it.

Text:
Enter a text that should be displayed for the object.
Design

Background Color:
This value can be used to define an object's background color. The Choose Color...
option can be used
to define an appropriate value.

Border:
Defines the width of the border. The value is defined in pixels. If no border is to be displayed, the value is to
be set to "0".

Border Color:
This parameter determines the color of an object's border. The Choose Color...
function can be used to
define a corresponding value in the RGB or HSV color space or as a hexadecimal value. Ensure that you
have previously specified a width for the border so that it is actually displayed.

Padding:
The parameter Padding defines the internal spacing between the border and the text or image. The value is
defined in pixels.

Scrolling Text (text field, active area):
When this setting is enabled, text that is inserted will be displayed as scrolling text on the book page. The
scroll movement goes from right to left.
Formatting texts (Area: Design)

Font:
The Parameter identifies the text font. The default setting for this is Arial.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
255

Font Size:
This parameter defines the font size. The value is defined in pixels.

Font Color:
This value can be used to define an object's text color. The Choose Color...
option can be used to define
a corresponding value in the RGB or HSV color space or as a hexadecimal value.

Alignment:
This parameter determines the alignment of the text in the text field. The default setting for this is Start.

Vertical Orientation:
This setting defines the vertical orientation of text. The text orientation is set by default to Top.
8.5.2 Size and Position
The subcategory Size and Position offers various functions for positioning an object, modifying its size and
defining its behavior:

Left / Top:
Defines the position, measured from the lefthand edge of the book page to the lefthand edge of the object
as well as from the upper edge of the book page to the upper edge of the object.
An object can be precisely positioned on the book page by altering the values. The values are defined in
pixels.

Width / Height:
These values specify the selected object's dimensions and can be customized accordingly. The values are
defined in pixels.

Lock Position:
This setting can be used to prevent objects from being dragged and dropped on the book page. This
requires the setting to be activated.

Hide:
The parameter defines whether an object is to be displayed or not. Should you not wish to display an object
on the page then the parameter is to be deactivated. The parameter can also be used, to hide an object and
to show it by using actions.
A hidden object is displayed transparently in the editing view.

Layer:
This parameter specifies the level on which an object is located on the book page. The background
constitutes level 0, all succeeding objects increase incrementally from one. The assignment of a level to an
object is determined by the sequence in which the objects were inserted on the page.
If objects are overlapping in the book page view, you can determine which of these objects should be
located in the topmost position. Do so by entering a value that is higher than that of the superimposed
object.
Alternatively, you can move an object in the object list to the desired level. This depicts how the objects are
arranged on the layers.
256
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.5.3 Object Shadow
To give your objects an additional effect and contrast you can insert a shadow. Shadows are supported for a
large number of objects (for example: Image, Text Box, Active Area) and can be defined in the object editor.
The following parameters are available in the subcategory Shadow:

Show Shadow:
Activates the shadow for the object. Then you can edit the shadow properties below:

Shadow Color:
Defines the color of the shadow. The Choose Color...

option can be used to define an appropriate value.
Shadow Opacity:
Defines the opacity of the shadow in percent.

Shadow Blur:
Defines the blur radius of the shadow in pixels. If the value is set to 0, no blur is displayed.

Shadow Spread:
Extends the size of the shadow in pixels. The default value is 0.

Shadow Horizontal / Shadow Vertical:
Defines the horizontal and vertical position of the shadow. The position is defined in pixels.
8.5.4 Link Parameters
Link properties
In the subcategory Link there are the following parameters:

Link to:
Use this parameter to link an object with an object from the workarea or an external webpage or to add
actions.
To create a link, go to the Edit Link...
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
function. A dialog box will then open in which you can specify a link
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
257
or select an object from the workarea. A link to a web page or similar is to be entered in the text field under
Free.

Tooltip:
In the parameter you can enter a tooltip for the object. It is displayed when the object will be touched with
the mouse.

Open in New Window:
Use this parameter to open a link target in a new browser window.
If the linked page or object from the workarea is opened in a new window then you can define properties
dictating the appearance of the open browser window.
New window properties
If the link destination is opened in a new window, you can define the way it is displayed in subcategory New
Window Properties. The following parameters can be set:

Position
The values Top and Left are used to determine the distance of the new window from the top and left hand
margin of the screen area. The values are stated in pixels.

Size
The values Width and Height are used to define the size of the new window. The values are stated in pixels.
The parameter Full screen defines whether the window is to be opened in full screen view. This requires the
setting to be activated.
The parameter Resizable defines whether the window can be scaled or whether the defined size is to be
retained. Scaling requires the parameter to be activated.

Layout
You can have the following elements of the browser window displayed in the new window. To do so,
activate the relevant setting:
○
Location bar
○
Menu bar
○
Scroll bars
○
Status bar
○
Tool bar
8.5.5 Show in Documentation
The subcategory Documentation allows you to export your book pages as documentation.

Show in Documentation:
Specifies if the object is displayed in the documentation. Deactivate the option to hide an object in the
documentation.
This option is activated by default.
258
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Hidden objects with this activated option are also displayed in the documentation. Deactive the option, if
required.
8.5.6 Status Bar of Control Objects
Some book page objects are used to control media files or other objects and do not have an influence on the
design. The controls are placed outside of the book page in the status bar. The control objects are placed in a
row with the icons.
The following objects are placed outside of the book page:

Audio Object

Time Control

Object Visibility

Counter

Collector
Position of the status bar
The position of the status bar in the book page editor can be defined in the object editor of the page object.
Using the parameter Status Bar Position, you can choose either Top or Bottom.
8.6 Editing Objects
Various functions are available for the inserted objects, which you can use to edit the design and position of
individual objects and multiple objects.
8.6.1 Inserting an Image
The option Replace Image
of an Image parameter allows you to insert images in an Image or Page object. The
following options are available:

Replace with screenshot of window:
By moving the mouse over the screen display, specific areas will be recognized and outlined in red. Click on
the mouse button to select the desired outlined area.

Replace with screenshot of object:
By moving the mouse over the screen display, specific objects will be recognized and outlined in red. Click
on the mouse button to select the outlined object.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
259

Replace with screenshot of area:
With the mouse, pull the red frame over the desired area and release the mouse button.
After selecting the area, an editing window will appear where you can make adjustments as needed. To complete
the process, click on Confirm Selection
. The dialog box will close and the screenshot will be inserted into the
HTML editor.

Replace with image file...
A dialog box will open from which you can select an image from a data medium of your choice. Select the
desired image and click on Open (in the Editor) to insert the image.

Replace with image from workarea...
A dialog box will open, displaying the contents of the workarea. Select the desired image and click on OK
(in the Editor).
8.6.2 Grouping Objects
The grouping of objects allows you to group multiple objects. A Group object is created, which can be used for
animations or to move multiple objects as one object. The group object is also displayed in the object list.
The following buttons are in the toolbar:
Group Objects
Ungroup Objects
To group objects, proceed as follows:
1.
Select all required objects for the group.
You can use the Ctrl key to select multiple objects.
2.
Click on Group Objects.
To ungroup objects, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the group object.
2.
Click on Ungroup Objects.
8.6.3 Duplicating an Object
You can use the Duplicate
function to duplicate an inserted object. Settings and shortcuts activated in this
object are retained and can be reused.
Select the object and click on the Duplicate button in the toolbar. The duplicate is placed directly above the
object and can then be positioned and edited on the book page.
260
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.6.4 Using Guides
Guides can be used to allow elements to be positioned and aligned with precision. You can use them, for
example, to create design grids by drawing the guides on an empty book page then using this as a template for
creating the remaining book pages of your book.
Guides can be drawn both horizontally and vertically. The following buttons are available in the tool bar for
inserting the guides
Insert Vertical Guide
Insert Horizontal Guide
Once a guide has been inserted, the sizing handle can be used to move it on the book page using drag&drop.
Clicking on the sizing handle displays the guide. If another object is selected, the guide is deselected.
An object is aligned with the guide by moving it on the book page. When it is on a level with the guide, the line
appears gray and the object is automatically positioned level with it.
Note
In order to ensure that objects are properly aligned when dragging & dropping, you can activate the Snapin-place options for objects from the central configuration dialog. The settings can be found under
Application -> Book Page Editor.
8.6.5 Aligning Objects
If you have positioned a number of objects on your book page, you can arrange these on one line. The following
functions are available to you here as a result of which the objects can be arranged on the edge in question:
Left Align
Top Align
Right Align
Bottom Align
These functions require a reference object to be selected on which the other objects will align themselves.
Select the reference object and then click on the objects to be aligned while holding the Ctrl key depressed.
You can then select the desired action in the toolbar.
8.6.6 Resizing Objects
To obtain uniform objects, you can align their dimensions with those of a reference object:
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
261
Same Width
Same Height
Same Size
To this end, select a reference object with which the other objects will align themselves. Select the reference
object and then click on the objects to be aligned while holding the Ctrl key depressed. You can then select the
desired action in the toolbar.
8.6.7 Arranging Objects
The same spacing can be assigned to objects to arrange them in a consistent horizontal or vertical plane. To do
so you must first align the objects horizontally or vertically on one line.
Select at least three objects to be arranged. This is required as two reference objects define a spacing with
which other objects align themselves.
Select the objects by clicking on them or draw a selection mask by clicking and holding the mouse button. Then
click on the button of the function you want.
Arrange objects horizontally
Equal Horizontal Distribution:
The spacing between the first object and the second is used as a template for subsequent objects and
customized.
Distribute Horizontally:
The first and last object retain their position. The objects in between share the space so as to maintain equal
horizontal spacing.
Arrange objects vertically
Equal Vertical Distribution:
The spacing between the first object and the second is used as a template for subsequent objects and
customized.
Distribute Vertically:
The first and last object retain their position. The objects in between share the space so as to maintain equal
vertical spacing.
262
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.6.8 Changing the Level of Objects
If an object is concealed by another object in the view, you can modify the level of the object in question. Select
the desired object and then click on one of the options.
If you would like to change an object's level by one position, select the following functions:
Forward One Level
Backward One Level
If you would like to place the object on the first or last level of all of the objects, then select the following
function:
In the Foreground
In the Background
Alternatively, you can move an object in the object list to the desired level. This depicts how the objects are
arranged on the layers.
8.6.9 Creating a Flash Button
Flash buttons are inserted to increase the design options available for book page controls. This is done using the
Flash Animation object. You can do this both by inserting Flash files containing predefined links as well as Flash
files to which a link in the book page has been assigned.
This is how you create a Flash button:
1.
Insert a Flash object using Insert Flash Animation and select a Flash file. Also note the section on
integrating media files.
2.
Then select the Edit Link...
button in the parameter Link to.
3.
You can now use the dialog box to select an item of content in your workarea or specify an external link in
the Available area. Confirm the dialog by clicking on OK.
Flash buttons can only be inserted in a book page and linked to one at a time.
8.7 Actions and Effects on Book Pages
Incorporating multimedia and interactive elements by adding actions and effects will turn your book pages into a
didactically enhanced learning environment. You can choose from a wide variety of special effects to highlight
specific steps and objects that are sure to capture and retain the learner’s attention. By doing so, you will help
your users better focus on the important items that should be learned, and you will simultaneously promote
sustainable learning by creating and fostering an enjoyable, interactive learning environment in which the user
can explore, discover and retain new information.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
263
Object actions can be used to add interactive effects to individual objects. These actions can be triggered
manually by the user or can be configured to run automatically. In addition, with special object actions, you can
use actions to define and control certain effects.
8.7.1
Object Actions
You can define actions for book page objects in order to trigger the behavior of an entire book's or a book page’s
display, such as having objects automatically appear on the book page or jumping to the next page. Object
actions give authors greater flexibility in creating interactive content.
The actions can be defined in the object editor, in which you will find an area that is also called Actions. Specific
actions are displayed for each object that can be used in conjunction with them in book pages.
The components of an object action
An object action consists of an executable action, an object that should be affected via this action, and the
behavior to be triggered. The available actions and behaviors depend on the type of object and can be used in a
variety of ways. You will find more information on this step below (see Overview of the Actions and Behaviors).
The following is an example of how to insert an action into an Image object:
On Click > Text > Show
When the user clicks on the image, the Text object that was selected will appear.
Multiple behaviors assigned to one action
You can assign as many behaviors to one individual action as you would like. To trigger multiple behaviors,
simply click on the plus icon next to the dropdown box. This allows you, for example, to fade objects in and out.
You can remove a behavior by clicking on the minus icon next to the dropdown box.
The following section will give you an overview of the variety of object actions that are available for enhancing
your book pages and will describe specific use cases.
8.7.1.1
Fading Objects In and Out
A fade over effect can be used to naturally and smoothly fade objects in and out. The following actions can be
assigned to certain types of objects, in order to obtain the desired effect:

Animate In

Animate Out

Animate Toggle
or

264
Fade In
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages

Fade Out

Fade Toggle
Depending on the object the subcategory Animation or Fade In / Fade Out might also be available.
Note
For Animate In or Fade In actions the assigned object has to be set to Hide.
Subcategory Animation
The subcategory Animation contains the following parameters:

Show Effect:
Defines the effect type for showing the object.

○
Fade In
○
Fly In - From Left
○
Fly In - From Right
○
Fly In - From Top
○
Fly In - From Bottom
○
Zoom In
○
Bounce In
Hide Effect:
Defines the effect type for hiding the object.

○
Fade Out
○
Fly Out - To Left
○
Fly Out - To Right
○
Fly Out - To Top
○
Fly Out - To Bottom
○
Zoom Out
○
Bounce Out
Duration: Show Effect:
Determines the length of the show effect. The value is defined in seconds.

Duration: Hide Effect:
Determines the length of the hide effect. The value is defined in seconds.
Subcategory Fade In / Fade Out
The subcategory Fade In / Fade Out contains the following parameters:

Fade In/Out:
Specifies that a fade-in effect is displayed for fade-in/out. The effect is not displayed when the setting is
deactivated.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
265

Fade In Duration:
Determines the length of the fade-in. The value is defined in seconds.

Fade Out Duration:
Determines the length of the fade-out. The value is defined in seconds.
8.7.1.2 Controlling Audio with Actions
Actions can be assigned to individual buttons in order to control an Audio object. You can customize the
functions to suit your specific needs. For example, you can define objects, e.g., an image or a text field, to be
used as a button. When the user clicks on the image or text button, you can define the button in such a way so
that the corresponding audio file will automatically play.
Recommendation
In the case where an Audio object should be controlled via a button, we recommend that you disable the
Audio object’s setting Start automatically. This will allow the user to interact with the learning content and
start the audio at the appropriate/desired time (e.g., by clicking on a play button). Moreover, you should
give your objects unique names upon inserting them into your book pages in order to create transparency
and facilitate selecting and assigning them when creating your learning content.
For more information, refer to the sections Overview of the Actions and Behaviors.
Control actions
To create an object to control an audio file, such as an image, proceed as follows:
1.
Insert and position your Image object to be used for the button. (More detailed information on objects is
provided in a further section in this document.)
2.
From the subcategory Actions, you can define the specific actions that your Image object should execute.
1.
From the first dropdown list, select the Audio object that should be used for the action, e.g., On Click.
This will automatically create a link to the Audio object.
2.
From the second dropdown list, you can define the behavior, e.g., Play. You will find a variety of audio
behaviors listed here.
3.
You can now repeat these steps for any additional buttons that you would like to add.
Actions in an Audio object
Under the subcategory Actions, Audio objects can be used in combination with various object actions to control
the audio file.
For example, a button can be defined to switch back and forth between two different actions by clicking on it in
order to control the audio file, just like with the standard mute/unmute or play/pause buttons. This changeover
can be defined by inserting a second Image object and positioning this on top of the original image and then
266
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
defining the image to fade in and out accordingly. The following is an example of how to create an Audio object
for play/pause:

On play
> image “pause” > show
> image “play” > fade out

On pause
> image “play” > show
> image “Pause” > fade out
To display or minimize the full list of behaviors to choose from for an action, click on the plus and minus icons
and the list will appear.
8.7.1.3 Overview of the Actions and Behaviors
The list gives you an overview about common used types of actions and behaviors. The available types and also
further types depend on the used and linked elements.
Actions
Action
On Click
On Mouse Roll-Over
On Mouse Roll-Out
On Show
On Hide
On Visible
On Hidden
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Description
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the object is clicked on.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the object is moused over.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the mouse rolls out of the object.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the object appears.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the object disappears.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the object is visible after fade in.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the object is hidden after fade out.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
267
Action
On Play
On Pause
On Stop
On Finish
On Mute
On Unmute
On Volume Change
Description
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the object is playing.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the object is paused.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the object is stopped.
Describes the action that should be carried out after
the object has played.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the sound is deactivated.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the sound is activated.
Describes the action that should be carried out when
the volume is changed.
Behaviors
Behavior
Object
Show
Shows the specified object after an action is executed.
Hide
Hides the specified object after an action is executed.
Toggle
Fade In
Fade Out
Fade Toggle
View Link
268
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Shows/hides the specified object after an action is
executed.
Fades in the specified object after an action is
executed.
Fades out the specified elemobject ent after an action
is executed.
Toggles the fade in/ fade out of the the specified
object after an action is executed.
Views the link target of the specified object after an
action is executed.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.7.2 Animation Objects
Action objects can be used to add special effects and animation to your learning content to create motivating
and interactive presentations for the learners. The action objects are found in the book page editor. Besides the
basic actions that are available, you can define more complex actions for an object. You can influence an
action’s behavior by configuring its settings to suit your individual needs. The objects in this case are “blank”,
only serving as a definition for the actions and do not contain any content, such as text or images.
Recommendation
Before creating an action object, you should become familiar with how actions work so that you can take
advantage of their versatility.
Modifying objects and their behaviors
The following action objects are available in the book page editor:

Animation

Time Control

Object Visibility

Counter

Collector
8.7.2.1 Use Cases
Action objects can be used in combination with additional book page objects, giving you a wide variety of use
cases and plenty of room for your own creativity. The following examples will give you an idea of how action
objects can be used:
Animation
Animations can be used to creatively highlight specific pieces of information. For example:

To attract the learner’s focus to a certain image, this image can be defined so that its size automatically
increases when the book page is displayed.

Several objects can be grouped together and displayed in a smaller format to save space. The user can
then individually click on the images to zoom in on them. In this way, the user can concentrate more on
each individual image and the respective learning material as needed.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
269

Mouse rollovers and rollouts can be used to add effects to text and important information to enhance the
learning experience. The original state of the text will then be automatically restored.
Time Control
The Time Control allows you to define how long the action should take place:

You can use the Time control with images to create an automatic slide show in which the images
automatically fade in and out.

You can sequentially start various animations to create complex processes and visualizations.

The gradual fading in and out of text allows you to optimally visualize a sequence of information. Such
animated text is perfect for accompanying audio text, for example.
Object Visibility
The Object Visibility is ideal for sequentially selecting multiple objects. For example:

To create image galleries on book pages - the user can then click through the gallery at his own pace.

For visualizing process workflows in which individual steps can be selected.
8.7.2.2 Considerations for the Creation
When working with action objects, we recommend that you take the following guidelines into consideration prior
to starting the creation process in order to be able to fully take advantage of their versatile functionality:

Before you begin, we suggest creating a storyboard to help you optimally plan which behaviors should be
assigned to which actions and how the users should interact with them.

Do not go overboard with the number of effects per page. Try to limit the number so that the important
information is highlighted, while simultaneously ensuring a transparent and user-friendly look and feel to
each page. Simple effects, such as clicking on objects and automatically having content fade in and out can
prove to be quite useful enhancements to your learning content as long as the page is not cluttered with so
many animations and interactive elements that it would overwhelm the user.

Always make sure you assign unique names to your objects (under the setting Name). This will make it
easier for you when selecting objects and actions so that you can quickly find the one you are looking for.

When inserting animations, make sure you know which level the objects are on in order to avoid
accidentally hiding them. On the other hand, when this technique is intentionally used, you can easily hide
specific objects.

Animations that are used repeatedly throughout your book can be predefined on a book page template to
save you time when creating a new book page with the same animation.
270
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.7.2.3 Animation
Animation objects allow you to change the position and size of your animations. The Animation object actually
defines the final size and position for the animation. To adjust the animation's size, the Animation object can be
proportionally scaled in height.
Structure of an animation
The following explains how an animation works:

Initial State
The object to be animated (e.g., an Image) is created with the same size and position as its initial state.

Final State
When the animation is activated, the object will change to the size and position of the Animation object (red
rectangle).
Creating an animation
The following is an example of how to create an animation:
1.
Create an Image object and position it as desired to serve as the initial position.
2.
Insert an Animation object (from the toolbar) and define its properties:
1.
Move the Animation object to the desired final position and adjust the frame size. If the object should
be the same size as the image, you can enter the exact dimensions under Position.
2.
Name:
Enter a unique name for the object to facilitate allocating actions at a later time.
3.
Target Object:
Select the Image object as the Target Object.
4.
Duration:
Here you can define how long the animation should run. The value is calculated in seconds.
3.
The animation can be interactively triggered by the user or defined to run automatically by assigning
actions to the animation. For example:
○
Action on Click – the user clicks on an Image or Text object to start the animation
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
271
○
Action after Loading – the animation automatically plays when a book page is opened
○
Action after Timeout – a Time control object can be used so that the animation will automatically play
after a defined period of time For each action, you have to select the Animation object from the first
dropdown list, and the behavior Start from the second dropdown list.
Once you have created your animation, you can test it out by clicking on the Preview button in the book page
editor.
Stopping an animation
In addition to the behavior Start, you can also define the animation to automatically stop. Simply select the
behavior Stop from the list. For example, you can add start and stop buttons to your animation by inserting and
defining Image objects.
Additional options

Easing:
Easing effects the time duration of an object, allowing the animation a more effective and smoother
transition. Easing can take place at the beginning, at the end or both. There are three types to distinguish
between:

○
Quadratic
○
Cubic
○
Sine
Show Debug Information:
This setting allows an object’s status information to be displayed while the book page is playing. This will
display additional information on the object’s action while it is being executed in test mode to give you
more control over the action.

On Start (under Actions):
When an animation starts, another action can be triggered simultaneously. For example, an additional
animation can start, an audio file can play or a Text object can be displayed. This allows you to create
relationships between the objects and learning content can be sequentially structured if desired.

On Stop (under Actions):
An action can be defined to be executed when an animation stops. In contrast to the option Action after
animation, this allows you to stop the animation at any time, thereby changing a button’s behavior, e.g., a
button can be defined to continue the animation.

On Finish (under Actions):
Once an action has been completed, another action can be triggered, such as other animations or
automatically jumping to the next page.
To do so, select the desired object and the action to be allocated to it under Settings.
272
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Note
When using images with transparency, clicking on the transparent area will trigger the animation. To
prevent undesired actions from being performed by the user, we recommend using images without any
transparency.
Recommendation
If you would like to re-use an animation that you have already created, you can copy and insert the
respective objects collectively in groups. The objects are automatically recreated and allocated without
requiring any additional post-editing work required.
8.7.2.4 Time Control
A Time Control object allows you to precisely time your actions. Images can automatically fade in and out or
animations can be combined to create sequences.
To set up a Time Control:
1.
First create the object that you would like to start off with. This could be an animation, an Image object or a
similar object.
2.
From the toolbar, insert the Time Control object.
3.
Next, define the time intervals and the corresponding actions.
To obtain a clear overview of your animation projects, we recommend that you arrange your objects and
actions according to their time control settings in chronological order.
1.
Time:
In this field, you can enter the length of time during which the action should be carried out. The value
is calculated in seconds.
Note
Time values are not automatically combined. If you would like to have multiple actions begin
simultaneously, you have to manually summarize and enter the time values, e.g., 20, 40, 60,...
2.
On Timeout:
In this field, you can select the action that should be triggered once the defined period of time has run
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
273
out.
For example: Image -> Show, Animation -> Start
4.
In order to start a Time control, an action has to be triggered by the user. This can be a button, for
example, that starts a series of images. For this example: Actions -> Action on Click -> Time Control ->
Action Start.
8.7.2.5 Object Visibility
With the help of the Object Visibility, you can fade objects in and out, one following another, which can be
triggered by user actions. This allows the user, for example, to click through a series of images in any preferred
order.
To create an Object Visibility:
1.
Create your Image objects and position them as desired.
2.
Set all images to hidden except for the first one that should appear. This allows images to fade in one by
one.
3.
From the toolbar, insert the Object Visibility and define its properties:
1.
Name:
Enter a unique name here so that you can easily identify your Object Visibility when selecting it from
the list at a later time.
2.
Object 1-10:
Select the objects in the order in which they should appear, from 1-10.
4.
Next, successively select the Image objects in order to assign the Object Visibility to the images. Under
Actions, you have to define an action for each individual image in order for it to be able to switch to the next
image, e.g., Action on Click. From the first dropdown list, choose the Object Visibility and from the second
dropdown list, select Activate 1-10 for each object.
Once you have created your Object Visibility, you can test it out by clicking on the Preview button from the book
page editor.
Additional options
274
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages

Fade In/Out:
This setting allows you to define a smooth transition effect for objects when they fade in and out.

Show Debug Information:
This setting allows an object’s status information to be displayed while the book page is playing. This will
display additional information on the object’s action while it is being executed in test mode to give you
more control over the action.
8.7.2.6 Counter
The Counter object allows you to specify a sequence of different actions. One or more objects can be used to
trigger the actions of the Counter. With each action on an triggering object the Counter counts up and executes
the specified actions. For the triggering object you can specify, how many actions are required.
For example, you can use the object to display a different image everytime you click on a button.
To create a Counter, proceed as follows:
Note
The following instructions are only an example of how to use of the Counter object.
1. Insert Image objects
1.
Create your Image objects.
See also Image.
2.
Position the images as required.
3.
Set all images to hidden. This allows the images to fade in.
2. Insert the Counter object
1.
Insert the Counter object from the toolbar.
The object is inserted in the status bar.
2.
Specify the parameters for each count:
1.
Count:
Enter the number of clicks required to show the object.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
275
2.
On Count:
Select an Image object from the first drop-down list.
Select a behavior from the second drop-down list, for example, Animate In.
Recommendation
To hide the previously shown Image object, you can specify also an Animate Out behavior for the object in
the On Count parameter.
3. Start the Counter
1.
Insert an object from the toolbar, for example, a Shape.
2.
Design and position the object as required.
3.
Open the Actions subcategory.
4.
Specify an action parameter, e.g. On Click.
1.
Select the Counter object from the first drop-down list.
2.
Select Count Up from the second drop-down list.
Recommendation
You can assign the Count Up action to one or more objects.
Resetting the counter
You can allow the user to reset the current status of the Counter to the initial status. First, create a reset control
and then specify which objects are hidden for the used Images objects.
To create a reset control and a behavior for all required objects, proceed as follows:
1.
Insert an object as a reset control.
2.
Select the object.
Specify the Reset action:
3.
1.
Open the Actions subcategory.
2.
Activate the On Click parameter.
3.
Select the Counter object from the first drop-down list.
4.
Select Reset from the second drop-down list.
Select the Counter object.
Specify the Reset behavior:
276
1.
Activate the On Reset parameter.
2.
Select the Image object from the first drop-down list.
3.
Select Animate Out from the second drop-down list.
4.
Repeat this for all required objects.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.7.2.7 Collector
The Collector object allows you to specify a sequence of different actions. You can use different objects to
trigger the actions of the Collector. When executing an action on an triggering object the Collector executes the
specified actions. One object can only be used once to trigger specified actions of the Collector. Afterwards,
another object can be used to trigger the next actions.
For example, you can use the object to display an image when you click on an assigned control.
To create a Collector, proceed as follows:
Note
The following instructions are only an example of how to use of the Collector object.
1. Insert Image objects
1.
Create your Image objects.
See also Image.
2.
Position the images as required.
3.
Set all images to hidden. This allows the images to fade in.
2. Insert the Collector object
1.
Insert the Collector object from the toolbar.
The object is inserted in the status bar.
2.
Specify the parameters for each count:
1.
Count:
Enter the number of clicks required to show the object.
2.
On Count:
Select an Image object from the first drop-down list.
Select a behavior from the second drop-down list., for example, Animate In.
Recommendation
To hide the previously shown Image object, you can specify also an Animate Out behavior for object in the
On Count parameter.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
277
3. Insert a button
1.
Insert an object from the toolbar, for example, a Shape.
2.
Design and position the object as desired.
3.
Open the Actions subcategory.
4.
Specify an action parameter, for example, On Click.
1.
Select the Collector object from the first drop-down list.
2.
Select Flag 1 - 10 from the second drop-down list.
Using Flags
The Flag specifies, that the Collector is started for a specific action. Specify for a different Flag from 1 to 10 each
On Click action.
Please note, that the number of the Flag does not indicate a specific On Count action. The On Click action of the
objects can be executed in any order.
If you click on an object, the On Count action with the specified number of clicks (for example, first click) is
executed. Afterwards the object with the specific Flag is deactivated. Click on another object to execute the next
On Count action (for example, second click).
You can use the same Flag (for example, Flag 1) for different objects. If an action has been used for a Flag, the
other objects with the same Flag are deactivated.
The use of the Flags allow you to create complex combinations and conditions to show or hide objects.
Resetting the collector
You can create a reset control, to allow the user to reset the current status of the Collector to the initial status.
To create a reset control and a behavior for all required objects, proceed as follows:
1.
Insert an object as a reset control.
2.
Select the object.
Specify the Reset behavior:
3.
1.
Open the Actions subcategory.
2.
Activate the On Click parameter.
3.
Select the Collector object from the first drop-down list.
4.
Select Reset from the second drop-down list.
Select the Collector object.
Specify the Reset behavior:
278
1.
Activate the On Reset parameter.
2.
Select the Image object from the first drop-down list.
3.
Select Animate Out from the second drop-down list.
4.
Repeat this for all required objects.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Additional options

Show Debug Information:
This setting allows an object’s status information to be displayed while the book page is playing. This will
display additional information on the object’s action while it is being executed in test mode to give you
more control over the action.
8.8 Templates for Text Units and Projects
The Producer allows you to insert the content of objects into a book page template, in order to use text units and
projects in books. This supports a separation between content and design. During playback, the properties of
the text units or projects with modes are inserted automatically by the book reader. Each object is displayed as a
single book page, which shows the defined content.
Proceed as follows to insert text units or projects into a book page:
1.
Create a book using the New Book
toolbar entry.
2.
Insert the text units or projects into the book with the required structure. You can also use both types in a
book.
3.
Create a book page using the New Book Page
toolbar entry. To use it as a template, we recommend that
you save the book page in a separate template group in the workarea structure.
4.
Open the book page in the book page editor.
5.
Insert empty text boxes as placeholders for the content properties of the objects. The property displayed
by each text box must be defined in the Name parameter of the text box.
6.
For projects, you can also insert a Mode Link in the template to use a specific project mode by default.
Insert the Mode Link for the required mode and define the use of the mode in the Name parameter of the
object.
7.
Save the book page.
8.
Open the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
) in the section Playback Settings ->
book reader. Define the settings and confirm with OK.
Playback settings
Setting
Description
Text Units
Show text unit properties
Template for text units
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Activate this setting to display text units in the book
reader.
Select your created book page template for the text
units.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
279
Setting
Description
Projects
Activate this setting to display projects in the book
Show project properties
reader .
Select your created book page template for the
Template for project pages
projects.
Name entries
Value
Description
caption
Name
shortdesc
Short Description
description
Description
demo_link
Demo Mode
uebung_link
Practice Mode
test_link
Test Mode
praxis_link
Concurrent Mode
Example
8.9 Modeling Business Processes
You can create models for business processes using the BPM Object. The versatility of creation supports
complex models at several process levels.
280
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
A BPM Object represents a process step here while the combination of several BPM Objects represents the
entire process. You can use the Connection object to combine process steps in the form of arrows and visualize
their sequence.
8.9.1 Creating Processes
If you want to create a process manually, proceed as follows:
Structure of a process step
A process is comprised of BPM Objects that are connected with arrows. You can use text boxes to insert the
actions and information necessary for a process step via the arrows.

Process step:
Indicates the name of the process step and is displayed in the main field of the object.

Role:
Indicates the role or function for the process step and is displayed in the lower field of the object.

Annotation:
Additional Annotations for a process step can be entered in the respective field. The annotation is
displayed by clicking the icon in the object.
Icon: Bubble

Link to:
A link to another book page to access more in-depth information. For example, a process can be created as
an overview with more in-depth process steps on other book pages.
Icon: Arrow

Attachment:
Documents, projects, book pages or files can be linked by the attachment. Up to 10 attachments can be
defined. When opened via the icon, a menu is displayed with all attachments and the selected attachment
then opened in a new window.
Icon: Paper clip
The option Open link in new window allows you to define whether the attachment should open in the same
or in a new window. The window’s appearance can be defined under New Window Properties.
The content that is displayed via an icon can be accessed by clicking the icon.
Recommendation
The icons used for the BPM Object are found in the respective book page style. If you want to use icons
other than the standard icons, they are to be replaced in the respective folder. Make sure to keep the
names and size of the icons.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
281
Design of a process step

Text Style Role:
The design of the text and background for the role can be set in the Text Style Role area.

Design:
The background color of the field for the process name and the border of the entire object can be changed
in the area Design.
8.9.2 Connecting Objects
The inserted BPM Objects can be connected using a Connection object and the process direction shown using
arrows. A path can be created with an arrow here. This can be either a simple line or a complex structure with
several path items.
Defining an arrow
An arrow object can be customized as follows:

Color:
This value defines the arrow's color. The Choose Color...
option can be used to define an appropriate
value.

Thickness:
This value allows you to define the arrow's thickness. The value is given in pixels.

Arrow Head 1 & 2:
There are several different types of arrow heads to choose from.
Positioning a path point
There are path points at the beginning and end of an arrow that allow you to adjust its length and direction. Click
on one of the points and drag and drop it to the desired position on the book page.
Creating complex paths
Process structures do not usually just go in a straight line but are much more complex. You can use the
Connection object to create paths with several path points and corners. Keep in mind that the paths can only be
aligned horizontally or vertically here. The number of path points is also limited to 10.
Inserting a path point:
1.
Press and hold the Shift key.
2.
Then click the mouse on the point where you want to add the new point.
3.
Drag this point to the position you want.
Removing a path point:
1.
282
Press and hold the Alt key.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
2.
Then click the mouse on the point where you want to remove the point.
Keep in mind that only points at the end or beginning may be removed.
8.10Global Settings for Book Pages
The standard settings for creating and editing book pages can be defined from the central configuration dialog
box (menu Tools -> Settings...

). There are three main global setting categories:
Templates (Producer):
Templates can be defined for books and book pages and can be used when inserting new objects. Once the
template has been created, you can define its settings here under Templates.

Book Page Editor (Authoring Settings):
Here you can define the settings for the grid and grid lines in the book page editor as well as its behavior
when positioning objects.

Book Page Initialization (Authoring Settings):
Default settings can be defined here for book page objects. In this way, the book page objects are assigned
values that are automatically allocated to them upon creation.

Book Page Fallback Defaults (Playback Settings):
The fallback default settings can be configured here for book page objects. The Producer uses these values
when the respective setting is deactivated for a particular object.
Recommendation
To only snap-in objects when necessary, you can temporarily activate this snap-in behavior by holding
down the Ctrl key. The snap-in function overall is to be deactivated in the settings beforehand and the
desired snap-in options activated.
Furthermore, you can define settings for the playback of books and book pages with the book reader:

book reader (Playback Settings)
8.11 Books and Book Page View
For the book pages view it is necessary to distinguish whether these pages were inserted in a book or placed
individually. An individual book page is opened in the library view whereas a book is presented in the book
reader.
After they are selected, modes linked on a book page are opened in the trainer.
Note
If you have inserted media files in a book page, then the corresponding playback application needs to be
installed on the users' workstations so that these files can be displayed.
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
283
Books view
Books that have been created are displayed in the book reader. This enables selection of, and scrolling within,
pages. Once a book page has been called, objects in it can then be launched or opened so that they can be
worked through.
When a book is called in the library it is launched directly in the book reader.
Book pages view
Individual book pages are not viewed in the book reader as this is intended for scrolling through a number of
pages.
If you select an individual book page in the library it will be displayed directly in the learning content view.
8.11.1 Preview in the Book Page Editor
The Preview function exists in order to be able to view and use a book page during editing in the book page editor
in the same way it is displayed to the student. If you select this in the toolbar, you will be able to test your book
page's objects. These will then behave in the same way as they do when being presented in the library or book
reader.
In order to be able then to resume editing the objects, deactivate the button.
8.12 Supported File Formats on Book Pages
Media plug-in
Supported file formats
Audio, Page Sound
*.mp3, *wav
Flash
*.swf
*.avi, *.m4v, *.mov, *.mp4, *.mpeg, *.mpg, *.qt,
Video
*.rm, *.wmv
Image
*.gif, *.jpg, *.png, *.bmp, *.jpeg, *.svg
Document
284
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
*.doc, *.docx, *.rtf, *.ppt, *.pptx, *.xls, *.xlsx, *.pdf,
*.html, *.htm
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
8.12.1 Requirements for Video Formats
The table gives an overview of the supported video formats of the SAP Enable Now and the possible operating
systems and browsers:
Formats
Windows 7
Format
Codec
mp4
h264
IE 11
Windows 8 / 10
Firefox
Safari
Desktop
Mobile
Apple
Safari /
Webkit
Android
Webkit
mpeg4
avi
xvid
h264
mpg
mpeg2
wmv
wmv3
vc1
mov
qt
Supported
Plugin / Codec required
Unsupported
SAP Enable Now
Books and Book Pages
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
285
9
Text Units
The Text Unit structure object makes it possible for you to integrate text components into your structure. Using
different typifications, a text unit offers various options for incorporating additional information and content into
your structure and using them for various output formats.
In its structure, the text unit object is slightly based on the topic object of the DITA method for representing
information structures. It provides a set of types to primarily target possible needs in structural creation and
administration of didactic content. Nevertheless it can be used as well to store project related or procedural
information within the workarea.
Types of the text unit
Changing the type of a text unit changes the symbol the object is displayed by in the tree view of the Explorer.
The following types are available.
Icon
Type
General
Concept
Task
Reference
Problem
Job
Defect
286
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Text Units
Icon
Type
Subsystem
Component
Function
Requirement
Glossary
See also Glossary of Terms.
Integration in the explorer
The text unit object can be integrated anywhere in the tree structure, keeping in mind the possibilities of other
structure objects. Similar to the Group object, any structure object can be stored below a text unit.
9.1 Structure
Unlike, for example, projects, a text unit does not have any individual object content. Information is displayed
solely in the areas shown in the Project Editor: Title (1), Short description (2) and Description (3) and structurally
by selecting a document type. The functions of the HTML editor are available for making entries in the areas
Short description (2) and Description (3).
SAP Enable Now
Text Units
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
287
You can structure you information more systematically because there is a distinction made between the input
areas Short description (2) and Description (3). If you use the optional Short description box, you can improve
user orientation within the information structure with much shorter texts that summarize the topic. The short
description can be used here exclusively for orientation purposes (example A) or simultaneously function as a
thematic introduction with a smooth transition to the detailed description (example B).
Title
Example A
Example B
Formatting in documents
Formatting in documents
It's happened to everyone.
An important document has to be
read quickly and its content
captured. However, the document is
Short description
This chapter shows you how
poorly formatted or not formatted
formatting is applied to document
at all - logical correlations disappear
areas and paragraphs.
because there are no paragraphs or
headings while a lack of visual
information in the body text makes
comprehension difficult for the
brain.
288
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Text Units
Example A
Example B
You can use formatting to
systematically highlight the main
Description
content of your document for the
reader and structure the document
so that it is easier to read and
capture.....
Well-formatted documents are
easier to read and their message is
clearer for the reader. But what do
you need to keep in mind if you
want to format and structure a
document so that it is easy to read?
The projects shown in this area...
9.2 Content-Based Separation Through Typification
The advantage of differentiating among different types of text units is that contents can be represented flexible
but consistent by the content-based logic of the available types. However, you may freely determine the content
specifications for a type different than the type name proposes but you should ensure to maintain a logic that
you applied once for a type to each object of that type in the workarea. This allows you to combine several types
in each structure level achieving parallel information layers to be added for example to a project.
Example
A group "Formatting documents" might have the following types providing different information layers for
different use cases.
Type
Input field
Text
General
Title
Formatting in documents
It's happened to everyone.
An important document has to be
read quickly and its content
captured. However, the document is
poorly formatted or not formatted
Short description
at all - logical correlations disappear
because there are no paragraphs or
headings while a lack of visual
information in the body text makes
comprehension difficult for the
brain.
Description
Well-formatted documents are
easier to read and their message is
SAP Enable Now
Text Units
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
289
Type
Input field
Text
clearer for the reader. But what do
you need to keep in mind if you
want to format and structure a
document so that it is easy to read?
The projects shown in this area...
Task
Title
Short description
Formatting in documents
Create a formatted, easy to read
document.
Create a document that uses the
formatting described and is thus
very easy to read. The document
Description
has to be at least 20 pages long
with 30 chapters. Pay special
attention to creating header levels
to maintain a well-structured
content overview.
Concept
Title
Short description
Formatting in documents
On today's job market, being able to
format documents is a must.
In an increasingly digitalized
working world, employees who were
not previously affected are now
being required to create structured
Description
documents This affects the building
superintendent who has to design
notices for the bulletin board as well
as the carpenter who wants to
present his work.
Reference
290
Title
Formatting in documents
Short description
A lot of information has already
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Text Units
Type
Input field
Text
been published about formatting.
Formatting documents has already
been discussed and analyzed in
many places. In the following
Description
section, you can find a selection of
recommended books and websites:

...

...
9.3 Sample Applications
You may adapt the use of text units and their types individually to your structure and your content model. Here
are some examples of using text units:
Additional information levels
You can use text units to provide your learners with additional extensive information in the form of comments
(2) or several chapters of extended documentation (1) for the structure display in the trainer. This makes it
possible for you to convey processes and process-relevant knowledge/understanding without having to make
extensive changes to project contents.
Separating information levels
SAP Enable Now
Text Units
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
291
You can create an additional level in your structure of dynamic learning content that, even though it follows the
structural model, is independent content-wise and displays different information for another target group. This
way, your structure can contain, for example, the didactic content for your learners as well as instructions and
information for other groups of people. After all content is complete, you can publish the learning content as
usual but also simultaneously generate a document about the steps to be followed, send it to all department
heads in your organization, thus making it possible for them to answer individual questions.
Combining information levels
The two previous examples can also be combined to show or update additional information for learners (2) and
other target groups (1) in a structure.
Customizing referenced content
Referencing makes it possible for you to always use the same object in different branch structures. The
advantage here is that content only has to be updated once. If you now, however, want to address different
292
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Text Units
learning groups using different branch structures, you have to clear the previous reference to import different
descriptions or instructions into the original references. Using text units makes it possible to add branchspecific instructions and problems without having to dispense with the convenient added value of object
referencing.
Object/topic-related display of information
Text units can also be used for additional object or branch-related information by means of additional
documentation types when creating the learning content. You can find three examples of how to use text units
as "notes" in the following section.
1.
Exact definition of requirements for the recording at the respective location
2.
Instructions for dealing with the respective component
3.
Goals agreed in the curriculum
SAP Enable Now
Text Units
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
293
10 Documentation
Documentation are used to provide the content of simulations, quizzes, books / book pages and text units in a
printable format. There are different formats and document types.
The supported formats for the generation are:
Microsoft Word
PDF
Microsoft PowerPoint
HTML
10.1 Requirements for Documentation
The following requirements are necessary for creating documentation in these formats: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft PowerPoint format and PDF.
Microsoft Office version
The following versions of Microsoft Office are supported: 2007, 2010, 2013 and 2016.
Note
In some situations, the generation of a Microsoft Word document leads to the error message: You have
modified styles, building blocks, or other content that is stored in template.dot. This message is caused by
a COM Add-In. Deactivate your Add-Ins in Microsoft Word and generate the document again.
File formats
The default file formats for generating documentation are docx and pptx.
If you want to create the documents in the doc and ppt format, then activate the option Use old Office formats.
The setting is available in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
) under Producer ->
General.
The templates have the format dot and pot. See also Documentation Templates.
294
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Prerequisites for PDF documents
PDF documents are generated by using Microsoft Word.
In Microsoft Word 2010 / 2013 / 2016 the Save as PDF function is integrated by default. In Microsoft Word 2007,
you must first install the add-in Microsoft Save as PDF to generate PDFs. This add-in can be downloaded from
Microsoft's official website.
10.2 Documentation Settings
The structure of a document follows a predefined model. To individually customize a document, you can define
the structure and content to be inserted. There are numerous configuration parameters that influence the
appearance of documents specific for each type and format (based on fragments).
Managing documentation settings
The documentation settings are a resource type. This means you can manage individual settings and use them
in different workareas.
The documentation settings are summarized in the area Documentation Settings of the central configuration
dialog. Alternatively the settings can be configured by choosing Resources -> Documentation Settings
in the
Explorer menu.
In addition to the standard settings, you can create further settings by duplicating an existing setting and using
it as a base type:
1.
Open the Documentation Settings
section of the resource tree.
2.
Select a documentation type to be used as a base type. For example:
3.
Click Duplicate...
4.
A settings dialog box opens. Enter a name for the setting.
5.
Confirm the dialog with OK to create the new setting.
- Standard Document.
in the object editor.
Note
The Standard Documentation setting cannot be deleted because it is the basic setting resource of the
Producer.
10.2.1 Basic Settings
The main settings for documentation are:

Base Type:
Defines the base type for the selected settings. This is defined when the documentation is created and
cannot be changed afterwards.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
295

Name:
Defines the name of the selected settings.

Template:
Defines the documentation template used to generate the document. Choose Edit Link...
template from the Documentation Style

to select a
resource.
Style:
Defines the documentation style used to generate the document. Select a style resource from the list.

Text Style:
Defines the text style used to generate the document. Select a style resource from the list.
Recommendation
The workarea contains one default text style for all content types. You can duplicate the default text style
and optimize the style configurations for the documentation. Afterwards, activate the text style in the
Text Style setting.
See also Text Style Editor.
Note
Text styles are not supported for Microsoft PowerPoint documents. The text can be formatted in the
template.
See also Editing a PowerPoint Template.
10.2.2 Fragments
The fragments specify the basic structure of the document. There are different fragments for single documents
and compound document:

Title (Single Document):
Inserts the title of the project.
○
Show Cover Page (PowerPoint):
Inserts a cover page with the title of the project.

Description (Single Document):
Inserts the description of the project.

Short Description (Single Document):
Inserts the short description of the project.

Process Flow (Single Document):
Inserts the process flow for the project.

Table of Contents:
Inserts a table of content. A drop-down list appears here where you can specify the depth of the table of
contents.

296
Content
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
○
Project Content (Single Document):
This fragment inserts the content of the project.
○
Content (Compound Document):
This fragment inserts the content of the selected structure.

Book Page:
This function inserts a book page in the documentation. Choose Edit Link...

Text Unit:
This function inserts a text unit in the documentation. Choose Edit Link...

to select a book page.
to select a text unit.
Revision History (Single Document):
This selection defines where the content from the Revision Entry macro is placed. The relevant macro has
to be inserted into the project beforehand.

Input Values (Single Document):
This selection defines where the content from the Input Values macro is placed. The relevant macro has to
be inserted into the project beforehand.

Blank Line & Break:
This fragment makes it possible to separate fragments using spacing and thus provide considerably more
structure.

○
Page Break
○
Small Blank Line
○
Medium Blank Line
○
Large Blank Line
Glossary:
This fragment inserts a table of glossary descriptions of all used glossary entries of the content.
For creating glossaries, see the chapter Glossary of Terms.

None:
Defines an empty fragment.
Note
For Microsoft PowerPoint only the fragments Description, Title, Project Content, Book Page and Text Unit
can be inserted.
10.2.3 Settings of the Subcategories
Settings for specifying the selected content can be made in the various areas. Not all areas are available for all
documentation types.

Action Table:
Includes settings for the structure of the action table. See the relevant chapter.
Only BPP Document, Audit & Compliance Document
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
297

Screenshots:
Includes settings for the size, style and quality of screenshots.

Markers:
Includes settings for the style of highlights and arrows.

Numbering:
Includes settings for the structure and style of numberings.

Project Content:
Includes settings for specifying project content.

Included Objects:
Includes settings for specifying content included as fragments.

Quiz:
Includes settings for the display of quiz items.
Only Standard Document, Training, Document, Work Document

Revision History:
Includes settings for specifying Revision Entry macros as revision history.

Input Values:
Includes display settings for input values of interactions.
10.2.4 Subcategory: Quiz
The quiz settings are available for the documentation types Standard Document, Training Document and Work
Document.

Show Quiz:
The setting specifies if quiz items are displayed in a documentation.

Include Solutions:
This setting allows you to generate the solutions for the quiz items. This means you can differentiate
between a document intended for the examiner with all the correct answers and a document for the person
being examined without any of the answers.
10.2.5 Subcategory: Action Table
Specific settings can be defined for the documentation types BPP and Audit & Compliance document. There is
an additional subcategory called Action Table available with the relevant settings.
Defining the action table
The structure and content of the table can be defined to insert the explanations of the actions. A total of 5
columns can be defined as follows:
298
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation

Hide Screens:hots
The Hide Screenshots option allows you to set up the screenshots display in the Screen
macros.
If the option is activated you are provided with a screenshot and a table below containing all available
actions of the step.
If the option is deactivated, a serial table containing the actions is displayed. The single steps are
numbered consecutively.

Action Table:
This option specifies whether the actions are displayed as a table or as text only using a step by step
approach.

Table Width:
Defines the width of the action table in pixels.

Column 1 - 5: Content:
Defines the column for the information extracted from the macro and displayed in the documentation.
When a table is generated, the column name will be displayed in the relevant project language based on the
content dictionary.
The column can also have a title allocated to it, which can be entered manually in the document.
Content
Explanation
Hide Column
Hides the column.
Numbering
Creates sequential numbering for the actions.
Text from Demo Bubble / Practice Bubble
Texts from the Demo or Practice bubbles of the actions
Object name
Contains the object names of the actions.
Value
Contains the entered value from the macros.
ROC
Contains the ROC value defined for the entry macros.
Description
Contains the description defined for the entry macros.
Result, OK, Comment, Reference
Empty columns for manual creation of contents.


Column 1 - 5: Width (%):
Defines the width of the column as a percentage of the total width of the table.
10.2.6 Compound Document Settings
For the compound document you can specify the content types that has to be considered for the document
generation. There are the following settings:
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
299
Groups

Include Groups:
Specifies that the group content is displayed in the document.

Show Description:
Specifies that the groups description are displayed in the document.
Text Units

Include Text Units:
Specifies that the text unit content is displayed in the document.

Show Title:
Specifies that the group titles are displayed in the document.
Projects

Include Projects:
Specifies that the project content is displayed in the document.

Documentation Type:
Specifies the used documentation type. The content and structure for single documents corresponds to
the specified Documentation Settings for a document type.
Books

Include Books:
Specifies that the book content is displayed in the document.

Show Book Description:
Specifies that the book descriptions are displayed in the document.
Book Pages

Include Book Pages:
Specifies that the book page content is displayed in the document.

Show Book Page Description:
Specifies that the book page descriptions are displayed in the document.

Book Page Format:
Specifies the format for displaying the book pages:
○
Book Page as Image:
Includes the images of the book pages into the document.
○
Book Page as Text:
Includes the texts of the book pages into the document.

Maximum Image Width:
Specifies the maximum width of the images if the book pages are included as images. By default the the
images are scaled to the width of the template layout.
300
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation

Links:
Specifies that links of book pages objects are inserted into the document.

Background Image:
Specifies that the background images of book pages objects are displayed on the book page image.

Refresh Preview Images:
Specifies that the book pages images will be refreshed before including the images into the document. This
is helpful to display the latest changes of the book pages on the images.
Output Options

Include Hidden Objects:
When this option is enabled, hidden documents will be added to the compound document. When this
option is disabled, hidden documents will be ignored and will not appear in the documentation.

Show Short Description:
Shows the short description for groups, book, book pages and text units. For projects, the short
description will be activated in the documentation settings of a document type.
10.2.7 Customizing Documentation Naming
The object names of generated documents are by default the names of the relevant document types. Duplicated
documentation settings use the defined name of the resource and do not have different content languages.
You can change document naming and add different languages. This can be done in the entity file of a
documentation setting resource. The entity file is an xml file that is available for each object in the workarea
folder structure. It contains general attributes for object administration.
Adapting the entity.xml
Proceed as follows to adapt the file:
Note
To customize naming in the entity.xml, you should have basic knowledge of editing XML files.
1.
Open the Documentation Settings tree in the Resources -> Adaptable Resources
in the Explorer.
2.
Select the required resources or duplicated resources; click the right mouse button to open the context
menu.
3.
Click on the menu entry Open Folder
.
4.
Open entity.xml in an editing program, for example notepad.
5.
Edit the file and enter your new naming.
6.
Save and close the file.
7.
Restart the Producer.
Now you can generate your documents with the new naming.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
301
XML structure
Example of the XML structure:
Note
Only change the attributes mentioned here; otherwise errors may occur in resource administration.
Syntax
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<doc_settings created_by="author_name" creation_time="date_time"
caption="work_doc" version="resource_version" sub_type="document_type"
cwa_recommended_sync_mode="synchronization">
<Language name="1031">
<Text name="work_doc">Arbeitsdokument</Text>
</Language>
<Language name="1033">
<Text name="work_doc">Work Document</Text>
</Language>
...
</doc_setting>
For each language, insert these attributes:
<Language name="language code">
<Text name="caption name">Document name</Text>
</Language>
An overview of the content languages and required language codes is available in the chapter Content
Languages Overview.
10.2.8 Documentation for Right-to-Left Languages
An additional Documentation Style (Right-to-Left) resource is available for creating documentation for content
with right-to-left languages. The resource is similar to the standard Documentation Style
but includes right-
to-left adaptations in the templates. Further adaptations to templates can be performed individually. The
resource is located in the Adaptable Resources
tree of the Explorer.
The following documentation formats are supported for right-to-left languages:

Microsoft Word

PDF

Microsoft PowerPoint

HTML
302
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Requirements
To edit documentation in Microsoft Word / PowerPoint, you need to activate a right-to-left language under
Editing Language and Keyboard Layout in Microsoft Office.
Note that in some situations, the activated right-to-left editing language can influence the direction of the table
of contents. If this is the case, you need to change the table of contents manually. Alternatively, remove the
right-to-left editing language and generate the documentation again.
Activation
The resource Documentation Style (Right-to-Left) can be set individually for each document in the
Documentation Settings. The documentation settings are available in the Documentation Settings area of the
central configuration dialog box and in the Resources -> Documentation Settings
area of the Explorer. Further
information is available in the chapter Managing Templates.
10.3 Editing Single Documents
As preparation for generating a single document the simulation project can be edited on different ways. Read
the following chapters for further information.
10.3.1 Subcategory: Documentation
The macro parameters required for documentation creation are found in the subcategory Documentation.

Show In Documentation:
Defines, whether this macro is to be taken into consideration during the creation of documentation.
Disabling this parameter makes it possible to hide certain, specific actions described by macros in the
documentation.
Screen macro
For the Screen

macro there are the following parameters:
Show in Process:
Specifies to show the step in the process flow of a documentation.

As Heading in Documentation:
Specifies to use the Screen Title as heading in the documentation.

Image Size:
Defines the size of the screenshot in percentage.

Screenshot Position / Size:
Shows the position and size of the screenshot.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
303

Border Width:
Puts a border at your defined pixel width around the screenshot. The standard color is white and can be
changed in Documentation Settings.
Interaction macros
For the interaction macros there are the following parameters:

Highlight Position / Size:
Shows the position and size of the highlight.
Recommendation
Use the Document Highlight function to change the marker position.

Marker Orientation:
Specifies the orientation of the marker on the screenshot. It is recommended to adapt the markers, if the
screenshot displays more than one marker.
10.3.2 Cropping Screenshots
The upper portion of the macro editor provides additional commands for the Screen
macro to edit the
screenshot.

Manual Crop (Documentation)
:
This command makes it possible to define a section of the screenshot for use in the documentation
instead of using the entire screenshot. This entails opening a dialog window in which the section can be
defined using a selection frame.

Auto Crop (Documentation)
:
This command can be used to crop a screenshot automatically for the documentation. This entails setting
up the range of the selected control as a crop with a defined distance separating it from the associated
highlight.
This distance can be set up in the central configuration dialog under Authoring Settings -> Auto Crop.
You have the option to retain this crop when ReRecording an application. Be mindful of the setting Keep
Crop in the Parameter dialog for ReRecording.
Note
While ReRecording a project, you can retain the crop you have applied. To do so, activate the Keep Crop
option when starting the ReRecording. Pay attention in this regard to the section ReRecording.

Uncrop (Documentation)
:
If a section of the screenshot was manually or automatically cropped, this function allows the crop to be
removed again.
304
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Recommendation
If you would like to automatically crop all of the screenshots in a project or remove the crops that have
been applied, then note the Auto Crop all Screens
and Uncrop all Screens
functions in the Tools ->
Automation menu.
10.3.3 Documentation Macros
Documentation macros enable the compilation of extensive process documentation in addition to the
recorded simulation. These macros are available to document the recorded project accordingly and to
supplement the content relevant to the documentation, as well as to structure the content.
Icon
Name
Header Information
Partial Screenshot
Note
Description
Heading
Highlight
Arrow
Page Break
Document Properties
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
305
Icon
Name
Revision Entry
Input Values
Logon Values
HPQC Header
In the following chapters, you will find further information about the documentation macros.
10.3.3.1 Header Information
The Header Information macro allows you to insert a title as well as a description in the documentation.
The macro can be used for single documents to create a document title without numbering. It is recommended
to hide the project title in the documentation settings.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Title:
You can enter a title. The title uses the text style Title in the Microsoft Word document.

Description:
You can enter a description. The description can contain a subtitle or additional text and is formatted with
the text style Paragraph in Microsoft Word.
10.3.3.2 HPQC Header
306
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
The HPQC Header macro is used to define the folder to be created in the HP Quality Center when importing the
data of a HPQC Document. Insert the macro at the beginning of a project.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

HPQC Directory/Path:
Defines the folder of the HP Quality Center.

Status:
The option allows you to define the current status of a process. Select a status from the dropdown list.

Description:
The field allows you to add information or comments on the process. They are inserted into the HPQC
document below the title.
10.3.3.3 Transaction Code
The Transaction Code refers specifically to recording SAP applications and is created when you select a
transaction in SAP.
When you generate documentation, a table with details of the transaction code and the menu path is created.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Transaction Code:
Contains the recorded transaction code.

SAP Menu Path:
You can enter a SAP menu path for the transaction to be able to find it in the SAP system menu.
10.3.3.4 Partial Screenshot
The Partial Screenshot macro allows you to create a screenshot of a specific area of the current screenshot. The
partial screenshot can be used, to show an area of an application page in detail.
Parameters of the macro
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
307
The following parameters are available:

Title:
You can enter a title for the partial screenshot.
When no caption has been entered, a consecutive image numbering system will be used in the
documentation.

Screenshot:
Contains the partial screenshot image.

Show Actions:
Allows you to show the recorded actions as highlights on the screenshot. The parameter hides the actions
on the screenshot of the Screen macro.
With activated parameter you can use the partial screenshot instead of the Page macro for your
documentation.
Creating a partial screenshot
To create a partial screenshot, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a Screen
macro in the thumbnail view.
2.
Insert the Partial Screenshot macro using the Insert Documentation Macro toolbar.
An editing window with the screenshot is opened.
3.
Define the screenshot area.
Adjust the selection border by moving the anchor points.
4.
Select Confirm Selection
to insert the screenshot.
Editing the partial screenshot
To edit a partial screenshot select Manual Crop
in the object editor. Afterwards, the editing window with the
screenshot of the Screen macro will be opened. You can change the selection border in the editor window.
10.3.3.5 Note
The Note macro allows you to insert important information with an highlighting icon in the documentation.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Text:
Contains the note text for the macro.
Type icon
308
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
A Type (Icon) can be assigned to the note, which can be selected from four different types. Each type is
represented by an icon:
Type
Icon
Info
Remark
Tip
Warning
The images of the icons are located in the resources trainer Style and Documentation Style. You can replace
these with your own images.
Creating a note
To create a note, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a macro in the thumbnail view.
The Note will be inserted after the selected macro
2.
Insert the Note macro using the Insert Documentation Macro toolbar.
A dialog box is opened.
3.
Select a Type (Icon) and enter a Text.
4.
Select Ok to insert the macro.
10.3.3.6 Description
The Description macro allows you to insert additional information in the documentation.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
309

Text:
Contains the description text for the macro.

Reset Global Index Counter:
Defines, that the numbering of the text start with '1'. Deactivate the option to use the numbering of all
macros in the step consecutive.
Creating a description
To create a description, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a macro in the thumbnail view.
The Description will be inserted after the selected macro.
2.
Insert the Description macro using the Insert Documentation Macro toolbar.
A dialog box is opened.
3.
Enter a Text.
4.
Select Ok to insert the macro.
10.3.3.7 Heading
The Heading macro allows you to insert a heading in the documentation.
The macro can be used for single documents to create an individual document title or to insert an additional title
in the project structure.
Recommendation
Use this macro for single documents to create an additional heading. The macro is not recommended for
compound document as the headings are based on the complete content structure.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Title:
You can enter a title.

Format Template:
Defines format template and heading level of the title. You can enter a value between 'h1' - 'h9'.
Creating a heading
To create a description, proceed as follows:
310
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
1.
Select a macro in the thumbnail view.
The Heading will be inserted after the selected macro.
2.
Insert the Description macro using the Insert Documentation Macro toolbar.
A dialog box is opened.
3.
Enter a Text.
4.
Select Ok to insert the macro.
10.3.3.8 Highlight
The Highlight macro allows to highlight a specific area on the screenshot.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Text:
You can enter additional information to the highlight. The text is sequential numbered in the step.
Creating a highlight
To create a highlight, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a Screen macro in the thumbnail view.
2.
Insert the Highlight macro using the Insert Documentation Macro toolbar.
An editing window with the screenshot is opened.
3.
Define the highlight area.
Adjust the selection border by moving the anchor points.
4.
Select Confirm Selection
to insert the highlight.
Editing the highlight
To edit a highlight select Edit in the object editor. Afterwards, the editing window with the screenshot of the Page
macro will be opened. You can change the selection border in the editor window.
10.3.3.9 Arrow
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
311
The arrow macro allows to mark a specific point on the screenshot.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Text:
You can enter additional information to the arrow. An arrow icon is inserted in front of the text in the
document.

Arrow Color:
Specifies the color of the arrow.

Orientation:
Specifies the orientation of the arrow. You can select an orientation from the drop-down list.
Creating an arrow
To create an arrow, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a Screen macro in the thumbnail view.
2.
Insert the Arrow macro using the Insert Documentation Macro toolbar.
An editing window with the screenshot is opened.
3.
4.
Define the position and size of the arrow:
1.
Move the arrow by using drag&drop.
2.
Change the orientation by using the R key
3.
Adjust the selection border by moving the anchor points.
Select Confirm Selection
to insert the arrow.
Editing the arrow
To edit an arrow select Edit in the object editor. Afterwards, the editing window with the screenshot of the Page
macro will be opened. You can change the selection border as well as the orientation in the editor window.
10.3.3.10
Page Break
The Page Break macro inserts a page break in the documentation. This allows you to specify a page break at a
specific position in the project structure.
312
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
10.3.3.11Document Properties
The Document Properties macro assigns contents to field functions of a Microsoft Word document. This involves
defining document properties and inserting these as field functions in the template.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Name:
Contains the field function of the template.

Value:
Contains the content for the field function to be displayed in the document.
Defining a field function in Microsoft Word
A field function in Microsoft Word is defined as follows:
1.
Open the template where you want to insert the field function.
2.
Open the File -> Info page.
3.
Click on Properties -> Advanced Properties to open the properties dialog box.
1.
Navigate to the Custom tab.
2.
Insert the property into the Name field and the corresponding content into the Value field. You can
use the same entry.
The content will be replaced by the macro.
4.
5.
3.
Click on Add.
4.
Confirm the dialog box with OK.
Then insert the field function into the template under Insert -> Quick Parts -> Field...
1.
Select the entry DocProperty as the Object Name.
2.
Select your defined field function as the Field Property.
Now save your template.
Note
If you insert the Document Properties macro for a BPP or Audit & Compliance document in your project,
the field functions which are contained in the particular templates are read automatically and displayed in
the macro editor.
See also the chapter Process Documents.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
313
10.3.3.12
Revision Entry
The Revision Entry macro allows you to document modifications in processes. For each modification a macro
can be created and grouped below one another.
All revision entries are created as revision history table in the documentation.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

Revision Date:
Indicates the date of the revision.

Change:
Contains a description of the revision.

Changed by:
Indicates the author of the revision.

Revision ID:
Contains a reference number of the revision.
Documentation settings
The revision history can be activated as fragment in Documentation Settings
. In the subcategory Revision
History there are further settings:

Hide in Project Content:
Defines, that the revision history only inserted as fragment.
Deactivate the setting to display the revision history at the position as it is inserted in the project.

Sorting:
Defines the sort order of the table, if several revision entries have been created.
10.3.3.13
Input Values
The Input Values macro creates a table including all available entries of the Input Text macros in a project. As a
result, they can e.g. be clearly subdivided at the beginning of a document to make them directly available in a
work process.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:
314
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation

Show Object Name:
Inserts the content of the object name parameters as column in the table.

Show Value:
Inserts the content of the value parameters as column in the table.

Show Bubble Text:
Inserts the content of the bubble text parameters as column in the table.

Show ROC:
Inserts the content of the ROC parameters as column in the table.

Show Description:
Inserts the content of the description parameters as column in the table.
Input values as fragment
Instead of this macro, you can also insert the input values as fragment in Documentation Settings
. In the
subcategory Input Values you can specify the content.
10.3.3.14
Logon Values
The Logon Values macro allows creating a table including the necessary data requested by a process to log on to
the particular system.
Parameters of the macro
The following parameters are available:

User ID:
Defines the ID of the user.

Role:
Defines the role of the user, e.g. administrator, learner.

Application:
Defines the application or system to log on to.

View:
Defines the corresponding application page or view, which has to be selected for the process.
10.3.4 Process Flow
The process flow provides a visualized overview of the recorded project, its steps and sequence. It clearly shows
the most important components of a step in a brief overview.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
315
The process flow helps orient learners about which action steps take place at what point in the process when
working with a document.
The process flow can be generated for Word documentation and, if needs be, can also be edited at a later date. A
process flow is not generated for the Job Help Word file because this already contains a tabular overview of the
working steps.
Design of the process flow
Each step is shown in its own individual field in the process flow. These show the step name, the screenshot of
the Screen
macro as well as the Object Name of the action.
If a action does not have a Object Name, the Producer will automatically insert the relevant Object Image.
The individual fields of the steps are linked to one another with arrows, which make clear the progression.
Should there be a page break, a bending arrow is inserted instead of a straight one.
Note
The picture files in the Object Image are not scaled when being shown in the process flow. For this reason
you should make sure that these pictures are not too large. Here, it is recommended that you enter
a Object Name so that it is shown in place of the Object Images in the process flow.
The start and end macro of the Form Structure
Simulation End
or from Branches
as well as the Simulation Start
and
macros are not shown, but only the steps.
Documentation macros contained within a project are also not inserted into the process flow, as they are only
used in the design of the documentation and are not relevant to the process as a whole.
Settings for the process flow
The process flow can be shown individually for the documentation of a project. The setting is made in the central
configuration dialog as a Basic Settings and Fragments for the respective documentation type. You can
determine the position for the process flow here.
Every step of a project is shown in a process flow. Steps can also be individually deactivated for output if they
are not to be displayed in the process flow.
In this case, select the corresponding Screen macro. Then deactivate the Show in Process setting in the
subcategory Documentation of the macro editor.
Picture files of the arrows
The arrows of the process flow can be found in the resource Documentation Style
. Both the straight arrow
(arrow.bmp) and the curved arrow (arrow-long.bmp) are located here.
These graphics can also be replaced with own pictures. You should ensure that the names and sizes of the
picture files remain the same.
316
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
10.3.5 Heading Levels
When generating a master document, the project and group structure in the Explorer is transferred to the
document and displayed as headings and a table of contents.
In order to render the numbering of the various headings correctly, the outline level of the project and step titles
is to be defined for each project before being generated as a single document. To this end, a Heading Level is
defined. The required level is to be decided from the level of the project in the Explorer’s tree structure.
This value needs to be stipulated as the Producer does not differentiate the level at which the project resides nor
whether it is located in a main or sub folder when issuing single documents. Moreover, it is possible that only
certain projects are issued and that the heading levels vary as a result. This may be the case, for example, if only
the projects in a subordinate group folder are considered. The Heading Levels can make this explicit.
Depending on the Heading Level, the project and step titles are assigned to the relevant heading template in the
Microsoft Word template when a document is issued. These are predefined for the various numberings and
outline levels.
Note
When generating a compound document the heading level is set automically based on the content
structure.
10.3.5.1 Setting the Heading Level
Heading levels for a single document
The Heading Level is to be defined in the Documentation Settings
in the area Project Content with the Heading
Level parameter.
In a single document the structure is created with the project title and its steps. This yields a two-tier outline
structure.
To define a structure with the project title on the first heading level and its steps on the second level requires the
heading setting to be set to 1. The value 1 is to be used as a matter of course if a single document is not intended
for inclusion in a master document.
Example
1 Project name
1.1 Step name
1.2 Step name
1.3 ...
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
317
Recommendation
If the project title should use the Title formating of Microsoft Word without a numbering, then change the
Heading Level to 0.
Heading levels for a master document
When generating a master document, the Producer issues the group and project structure from Explorer. A
three-tier outline structure is formed comprising the group, project and step titles.
Before work can be begun on generating the master document, the group and project structure needs to be
defined in the Explorer. This is crucial for the layout of the master document.
The heading levels given to the single documents can be inferred from the structure.
Example
1 Group name
1.1 Project name
1.1.1 Step name
1.1.2 Step name
1.1.3 ...
1.2 Project name
1.2.1 Step name
1.2.2 ...
Each project envisaged for the master document is then issued as a single document. Define the relevant
Heading Level for each project before proceeding with generation.

A project that is assigned to a group located on the first level is to be found on the second level. So that the
headings in the single document began at that level, the setting must be set to 2.

If a project that resides within a subgroup in the Explorer is to be issued, then the Heading Level should be
set to 3. The numbering then starts on level 3.

For greater project or group depth, the Heading Level setting needs to be increased accordingly by the
appropriate depth.

If a project is not assigned to any group or if it resides at main folder level, then the Heading Level is to be
set to 1.
Note
The headings are capped at 9 in the document templates as only nine levels of numbering can be set up in
Word.
The highest setting for a Heading Level should therefore be 8. That means that the project titles receive a
level 8 number and the steps, level 9. Therefore ensure that your project structure has a depth not
exceeding eight levels.
318
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
10.3.6 Process Documents
In the Producer different documentation types are available for process documents according to certain
criteria. These documents are:

BPP document
The BPP document (Business Process Procedure) allows generating files of recorded projects for a more
detailed description and demonstration of business processes.

Audit and Compliance document
The document supports the verification and compliance of certified working processes.
Generating documentations
The documentation types BPP and Audit & Compliance documents can be generated in Word, PDF and HTML
formats. In order to create one of these documents a certain procedure is required. This should be done as
follows:
1.
Set up configurations in the documentation settings for the type.
2.
Insert macros for the documentation type.
3.
Edit inserted documentation macros.
4.
Define ROC value and Description in the interactions.
5.
Generate the documentation.
Documentation macros
Predefined documentation macros can be inserted for the documentation types BPP and Audit & Compliance
documentation. This is done in the Insert -> Insert Documentation Macro -> Insert BPP Macros or Insert Audit and
Compliance Macros menu. The macros are inserted automatically during the first and last step.
The documentation macros are predefined default settings and can be customized after insertion.
10.3.6.1 BPP Macros Structure
In order to create a BPP document the particular BPP macros can be inserted in the project via the Insert ->
Insert Documentation Macro -> Insert BPP Macros
function.
The structure of the BPP macros is as follows:

Macro Document Properties

Macro Revision Entry

Macros Description
1.
with titles.
Overview (1st level title)
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
319
2.
Purpose (2nd level title)
3.
Business process overview (2nd level title)
4.
Input data (2nd level title)

Macro Input Values

Macro Description
with title Procedural Steps (1st level) for the actual cycle.
The process follows afterwards.

Title and text for scenarios associated with the process: Results / Related Scenarios
(in the last step)
In the macros with titles the titles and texts can be modified or texts can be added.
10.3.6.2 Audit and Compliance Macros Structure
In order to create an Audit and Compliance document the particular Audit and Compliance macros can be
inserted in the project via the Insert -> Insert Documentation Macro-> Insert Audit and Compliance
Macros
function.
The structure of the Audit and Compliance macros is as follows:

Macro Document Properties

Macro Revision Entry

Macro Page Break

Macros Description
with titles (1st level title). Explanations can be inserted.
1.
Purpose
2.
Scope
3.
References
4.
Definitions
5.
Document contents
6.
Steps
In the macros with titles the titles and texts can be modified or texts can be added.
10.3.6.3 Predefined Document Properties
The Document Properties
macro allows allocating predefined variables of a document template to a
particular content.
The predefined variables define the macro when the BPP or Audit & Compliance macros are inserted
automatically.
320
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
The template for the particular document type within the Producer contains the following variables:
BPP document properties
Name
Value
_bpp_id
ID
_bpp_owner
Author
_bpp_status
State
_bpp_description
Description
Audit and Compliance document properties
Name
Value
_ac_title
Title
_ac_docnumber
Document number
_ac_versionnumber
Version number
_ac_effectivedate
Effective date
_ac_requestedby
Requesting person requested by
_ac_approvedby
Approving person approved by
Assigning contents to variables
In the Document Properties macro the field Name and the field Value are available for a variable. Insert the
content that is to be generated into the Value field.
Note
Note when generating a HTML document the variables of the Document Properties macro cannot be
executed in HTML as these field functions are Word specific.
Note
The Document Properties can only be output for single documents as they relate to the corresponding
document templates. Avoid the use of this macro in a master document for this reason.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
321
10.3.6.4 Settings in Interaction Macros
For some simulation macros which require an entry or a selection from the user additional information for the
action tables of the BPP and Audit and Compliance documents can be added. These settings can be found in the
Documentation subcategory of the macro editor for the Input Text
, Select Single
and Radio/Checkbox
macros.
In order to display the Description and the ROC value in the action table a column has to be defined for it in the
central settings.
The following settings are available:

ROC (Required/Optional/Conditional):
The value defines the necessity of an action, whether it is required (R), optional (O) or conditioned by
something (C). The particular type can be selected in the choice box of the option and the character R, O or
C is displayed accordingly in the table.

Description:
Additional information about a macro can be provided in the description field.
10.4Generating Single Documents
After a process has been recorded and the project edited, documentation can be generated. At least one Screen
macro and one interaction should be available for this purpose for capturing a result in the document.
You also have the option of designing your documentation using documentation macros. This allows you to
incorporate additional information.
To create a single document, proceed as follows:
1.
In the Project Editor, open the project for which you would like to create a single document.
2.
If you want to generate a Word document, you should first define a Headings Level for organizing the
headings. This is to be set up in the documentation settings under Documentation Settings
-> Project
Content.
3.
Commence generation by means of the Documentation menu or in the toolbar by means of the
corresponding document type button:
○
Generate Word Document
:
There are various document types available for Word documents. Select from the menu the type you
would like to create.
○
Generate PDF Document
:
There are various document types available for PDF documents. Select from the menu the type you
would like to create.
322
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Generate HTML Document
○
:
There are various document types available for HTML documents. Select from the menu the type you
would like to create.
Generate PowerPoint Document
○
The generated document is now displayed in the corresponding project in the Explorer and can be launched
from that location.
Recommendation
Various settings can be made which affect the document display when the individual document is
created. You can find more information in the section on configuring the individual document.
Note
In some situations the generation of a Microsoft Word document leads to the error message: You have
modified styles, building blocks, or other content that is stored in template.dot. This message is caused by
a COM Add-In. Deactivate your Add-Ins in Word and generate the document again.
10.4.1 Types of Single Documents
There are different document types available for Word, PDF and HTML documents. The types are:
Standard
This document is not intended for a special use case and shows all project information incl. documentation
macros (i.e. such as step names, actions, advice, screenshots) that are not special prepared.
Job-Help
The document supplies a short and clearly structured project overview with step names and actions to be
carried out. The document does not contain any screenshots, documentation or Explanation macros and is thus
ideally suited for practical use of an application.
Training Document
When generating a training manual, all relevant project information, including documentation macros (e.g., step
name, actions, notes, screenshots…), will be automatically exported and formatted accordingly. This type of
documentation is ideal for supplementing training materials for learning processes.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
323
Test Sheet
This document adds a table that is suitable for testing the user's experience. It is possible to make an inquiry
about actions, inputs and the expected results of the respective step. Also, the tutor has additional fields for
evaluation of the deliverables.
Work Document
This document supports the editing of projects and gives an overview about project details, its execution and
content. To do so, steps, screenshots, scores, task description, notes and the project language are read out.
HPQC Document
The Producer allows you to create documentation for the HP quality center. Recorded processes can be defined
as a quality standard and imported into the HP quality center.
The macro for the HPQC Header can be inserted into the document, which contains a directory path and a
description. The document contains a table with the individual actions listed as well as a column for manually
editing the results.
Process Guide
This document explains processes in a clear and simplified manner. Its user-friendly and visually appealing
layout makes it easy for the users to follow. There are three columns which display the following information:
○
What to do – Text in demo bubble
○
What to see – screenshot with highlights
○
What to say – explanations, macros for notes and tips, etc.
Hands-On Guide
This document explains processes with a focus on the screenshots. It allows the users to follow the instructions
on the screen. There are two columns which display the following information:

Explanation – texts of bubbles and explanations

Screenshot – images of screen macro
324
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
BPP Document
The BPP document (Business Process Procedure) allows you to use recorded projects for describing and
illustrating business processes in greater detail. A unique macro structure is created with specific instructions
for the documentation’s properties, modifications, headings, and descriptions. It is also possible to create a
customized table to illustrate the process steps.
Audit & Compliance Document
The purpose of this document is to verify and ensure compliancy with certifications and audits. Its “generic”
format can be customized to meet your specific requirements. A unique macro structure is created with specific
instructions for the documentation’s properties, modifications, headings and descriptions. It is also possible to
create a customized table to illustrate the process steps.
10.5 Compound Document
A compound document summarizes all of the content from one workarea into one document. Whereas a
centralized document only contains content from projects and groups, a compound document also includes the
following possibilities:

Groups

Text units

Projects

Books

Book pages
Note
When generating documentation, note that not all types of objects can be exported into the
documentation. Audio, video and animated objects cannot be used in this case.
10.5.1 Generating the Compound Document
To create a compound document, proceed as follows:
1.
Make any adjustments in the documentation settings of the Compound Document Settings for your
documentation.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
325
2.
Select the start object of the content structure - group or book.
3.
Go to Documentation -> Generate Compound Document...
4.
A dialog box with the following settings will appear.
○
Start from:
This defines the starting point for generating the document. The selected object will be displayed
here. You can select a different object by clicking on Edit Link...
○
.
Use Settings:
This defines the resource of the documentation settings.
○
Generate as:
This defines the format for your document: HTML Document, Word Document or PDF Document
5.
Confirm your changes by clicking on Ok. The documentation will now be generated automatically.
Note
The heading level is automatically set in the document based on the structure level and the single
documents for projects are generated independently. The heading level option therefore does not have
any effect.
10.6Master Document
The various documents in the entire workarea or a specific selection of them can be merged into a master
document. This document is generated from within the Explorer and can be created in Word or PDF format.
Preparations for creating a master document
The following preparations must be made for creating a master document:

Before you generate the master document, make sure you have created your individual documents with
the right header level so that the outline of the documents in the master document can be properly
displayed.

If you want to insert the documents into the master document without descriptions and titles, this
information must be deactivated already when you generate the individual documents.

You can deactivate documents that you do not want to include in the master document using filters or the
Hide function.
10.6.1 Generating the Master Document
To create a master document, proceed as follows:
326
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
1.
You can create a master document for either the entire workarea or an individual selection. To do this, the
respective group is to be selected in the tree structure or defined in the dialog for creating the master
document
○
To create a master document for the entire workarea, the Content
group at the top of the tree
structure of the Explorer must be selected.
○
To create a master document for a special group, this is to be selected in the tree structure. Then
only the individual documents within the group are included.
2.
Select the Documentation -> Generate Master Document...
menu.
3.
A dialog opens where you can define your master document. Make the settings you want.
You can find explanations about the dialog in the section on settings for the master document.
4.
Click the Ok button to confirm the dialog. The document is generated.
After creation, the master document is inserted at the bottom of the tree structure and can be opened
from there.
See the respective section for information on displaying the master document in Word.
10.6.2 Settings for the Master Document
The following settings can be made in the dialog for generating a master document.

Starts from:
This selection determines the point in the tree structure starting at which the documents are to be output
to the master document. This lets you create a master document for a specific group. The object selected
in the tree structure is automatically displayed in the setting.
If another starting point is to be selected, this can be done using Edit link...
A dialog opens where an
object can be defined in the tree structure. Confirm this by clicking Ok.

Type:
This selection determines the documentation type for the master document.

Format:
This selection defines the format the master document is to be created in: Word, PDF or both formats

Insert individual documents:
Which content is to be output to the master document can be defined in this area.
○
Projects
○
Other Documents:
The setting adds Word documents imported to the workarea to the master document.
○
Insert Hidden Objects:
The setting adds documents from hidden objects.

Include Titles and Descriptions:
Whether titles and descriptions are to be output for the content can be defined in this area. They are not
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
327
included if this option is deactivated. With the exception of the project, the title and the description are
always inserted together for other objects because fragments can be defined for projects.
○
Project title
○
Project description
○
Group
○
Book
○
Book Page
○
Text Unit
Note
If you do not want to insert Titles and Descriptions, these must be deactivated already when the individual
documents are created. For more information, see also the sections on Basic Settings and Fragments.
10.6.3 Displaying the Master Document in Word
Once the master document has been opened in Word, it is displayed with its cover page, table of contents and
linked single documents.
Displaying single documents
When generating the master document, the single documents are not attached directly but shown as a link. You
can have these shown in the master document:
1.
To do so, select the Outline view to be able to continue editing the document. The Show Document option is
also to be activated for Word version 2007 and higher.
2.
Then click on the Collapse Subdocuments button in the toolbar.
Attaching single documents
The presentation of displayed single documents is not stored in the master document. You will get the links back
when you reopen the document. Further editing steps are required in order to obtain a complete document
incorporating the single documents.
Note
It is recommended that you only proceed with incorporation once the editing of your master document
has been fully completed and it is ready for publication. This will avoid duplication of effort in the event of
any additions where you will have to repeat these steps.
1.
Activate the Outline view and click the Collapse Subdocuments button (see above).
2.
You will find a document icon in front of each single document. Click on it to select the associated single
document. This process will only ever allow you to select one document.
3.
328
Now click on the Remove sub document button in the toolbar. The document has now been incorporated.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
4.
Repeat items 2 and 3 for each additional single document. You can then switch to the Print preview (or
another view).
Note
After adding the subdocuments, update the table of contents.
After the single documents have been incorporated, you should resave the document so that the original Master
Document is still available.
10.7 Documentation Templates
Documentation templates are used to generate Microsoft Word, PDF and Microsoft PowerPoint documents. The
templates are stored in the Documentation Style
resource in the Adaptable Resources
section of the
Explorer. The resource Documentation Style (Right-to-Left) contains the same templates with support for rightto-left languages.
The following file formats are supported:

.dot (default) and .dotx for Microsoft Word and PDF documents

.pot (default) and .potx for Microsoft PowerPoint documents
A workarea includes the following standard templates:
File Format
Document Name
Microsoft Word / PDF
Standard Document
Compound Document
Master Document
BPP Document
A&C Document
Microsoft PowerPoint
Power Point (4:3)
Power Point (16:9)
10.7.1 Managing Templates
Selecting a documentation template
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
329

Single document, Compound document
The templates can be individually set for every documentation type on the relevant settings page.
To select the documentation templates, proceed as follows:
1.
Click on the Edit Link...
button next to the Template setting.
2.
A dialog appears that shows the workarea structure. Select a template from the Documentation Style
resource.
3.

Confirm the dialog by clicking on OK.
Master document
You can configure the template for a master document in the settings dialog box when generating a master
document.
Integrating a template
To insert a documentation template into a workarea, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the Documentation Style
resource in the Explorer.
2.
Click on the Insert File...
3.
This will open the file selection dialog box. Select the required file.
4.
Click on Open.
button in the object editor.
The template will now be integrated in the Documentation Style and can be used for generating documentation.
Copying a template
If you want to create your own template, it is recommended that you use an existing standard template as a
preset. To do so, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the context menu of a Documentation Style
resource.
2.
Click Open Folder
3.
Open the dot folder.
4.
Copy the needed template to a separate folder and rename it.
to open the docstyle folder.
Once you have adapted a template, import the file by using the Insert File...
function in Explorer.
Note
Do not paste the file directly into the dot folder, because the file will not be recognized by the resource
structure.
10.7.2 Editing a Microsoft Word Template
For Microsoft Word templates you can edit the layout and the text styles.
Go in to the folder of your copied .dotx file. Open the template in Word by right-clicking the file and clicking
Open
330
in the context menu.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Note that changes in the page setup could affect the complete layout. We recommend that you test templates
after creating them.
Edit background
The background of a template is defined using the Header & Footer view. Double click the header or footer area
to change the view. You can then change the images and texts of the header and footer area.
Edit text styles
Text styles of the content use the same style defined in the text style editor. In the document templates, we
recommend that you only adapt the template-specific styles, for example, header and footer texts.
Note
For the headings there are parameter, which are used from the template: numbering of heading, page
break of heading 1.
You are able to change this in the template.
The used default text styles are:

Numberings of headings

_Cover_Subtitle

_Cover_Title

_Title_Header

Footer
Recommendation
If you want to adapt a Word template for a document type, it is recommended that you adapt all
templates to have a consistent design in all documentation.
10.7.3 Editing a Microsoft PowerPoint Template
PowerPoint templates are generally used to create documentation for simulations. When a document is
generated, the content is inserted with the project title on the top, the bubble texts on one side and the
screenshot on the other side of a slide.
Customizing a template
Open your template in Microsoft PowerPoint. A PowerPoint template can be adapted in the Slide Master view.
Select the view in the View tab.
You can customize the following parts of the template:

design slide master
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
331

layout pages
Note
The layouts in the template are supported with version 9.5 of the Producer. If you are using a customized
template of an older version, replace it with a newer template.
Design slide master
The design slide master contains the basic design of the template used for all layouts. It is the first page in the
structure.
You can adapt:

Background

Footer
Layout pages
The layouts contain different placeholders, which define the position and the size of the included content as well
as the formatting of the text. They are subpages of the design slide master.
You can adapt:

Cover page background:
You can change the position and formatting of the title as well as the background.

Position and size of placeholders:
You can change the position and formatting of the placeholders for title, text and image.
To change a text formatting highlight the texts in the text field. You can then change the Font settings in the
Home tab.
Note
Do not delete a layout or placeholders of a layout to insert the content correctly.
10.7.4 Explanation Icons
The explanation icons are used for explanation macro types in a simulation. To customize images, replace the
default images with your own images.
The images have the size 80x80 pixels and are in BMP format.
You can adapt the explanation icons of the simulation playback in the trainer Style
Type
332
additionally.
Icon
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Type
Icon
Info
Remark
Tip
Warning
Replacing an image
This is necessary to assign the correct image file to the active explanation type.
To replace an explanation image in a workarea, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the icon file in the Documentation Style
resource of the Explorer.
2.
Click on the Replace File...
3.
This opens the file selection dialog box. Select the required file.
4.
Click on Open.
button in the object editor.
The icon is now integrated into the Documentation Style and can be used for generating documentation.
SAP Enable Now
Documentation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
333
11 Content Languages and Translation
The learning content is often used across locations in different countries and language regions and therefore
consists of multiple language versions. Therefore, consistent training material must be available in the relevant
languages. The following chapters explain how the content can be used in different languages and how to handle
translations.
11.1 Content Languages and Dictionaries
Each object in the workarea has an active content language. It is used to specify the included content's language
and to define the language for the interfaces of the trainer, library and book reader. For projects, the language
attribute defines the language of the text modules. Furthermore, when using filters you can define a language in
your search criteria. Each content language of the Producer is defined in the dictionaries.
You can select a content language when creating a content object using the Language parameter. The active
language of an object is displayed in the object editor.
Dictionary resources
The dictionaries are text resources of the workarea containing the content languages. The resource files are
located in the resource structure in the Explorer. There are two main dictionary types:

Playback Dictionary
The dictionary contains runtime texts for playback. These texts are the start & stop pages, the user
interface texts for the trainer bar, the book reader bar, the library and for the Desktop Assistant.

○
Desktop Assistant - includes the texts for desktop assistant projects
○
Standard (Simulation) - includes the texts for simulation projects and books
Recording Dictionary
The dictionary contains the text modules of the content languages for the projects and documentation.
○
Simulation - simulation projects and documentation
○
Desktop Assistant - desktop assistant projects
For the information on adapting dictionary texts, refer to the Dictionary Editor section.
View content language in tree
In the tree structure of the Explorer, you can show the content language of each object. This allows you to see
the language and sort the objects. There are two functions in the View menu:

Show Language - displays the language code

Show Language Icons - displays the flag icon of the language
334
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
11.1.1 Generating Texts in Projects
During the recording or rerecording (only simulation) of a project, texts modules in different content languages
are inserted into the projects and thereby generate project content automatically.The text modules are part of
the content glossaries for simulation and desktop assistant.
For simulation projects there are different texts for the Demo mode and the Practice mode. The texts in Demo
mode contain explanations to complement the simulation being demonstrated. The texts in Practice mode
contain clear instructions for users on what they should do to continue with the simulation.
For desktop assistant projects there are one basic text type.
Translating text modules
When text modules are translated, the texts of a content language are replaced by those of the new language.
Text modules can be translated as follows:

Automated translation
With this function, you can change the content language of a project.
For further information, see the Automated Translation... (Project Editor) section.

Rerecording (only simulations)
With this function, you can change the content language and also record the application with the
appropriate language automatically.
For further information, see the ReRecording a Simulation section.
Translate manually option
The Translate Manually option indicates if the texts of macros with text modules have been changed. These texts
will not be replaced with another language during rerecording or automatic translation. When you export a
translation template, the texts are also exported.
The setting is available in interactions (Demo Bubble and Practice Bubble subcategory of the macro editor).
If a text needs to be translated, you can set the option Translate Manually.
11.1.2 Content Languages Overview
The following table gives an overview about the available content languages:
Language Code
Decimal Value
Language
AR-SA
1025
Arabic
BG
1026
Bulgarian
CS
1029
Czech
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
335
Language Code
Decimal Value
Language
DA
1030
Danish
DE-CH
2055
German (Swiss)
DE-DE
1031
German
EL
1032
Greek
EN-GB
2057
English (United Kingdom)
EN-US
1033
English (United States)
ES-ES
1034
Spanish
ES-CO
9226
Spanish (Colombian)
ET
1061
Estonian
FI
1035
Finnish
FR-CA
3084
French (Canada)
FR-FR
1036
French
HE
1037
Hebrew
HI
1081
Hindi
HR-HR
1050
Croatian
HU
1038
Hungarian
ID
1057
Indonesian
IT-IT
1040
Italian
JA
1041
Japanese
KK
1087
Kazakh
KO
1042
Korean
LT
1063
Lithuanian
336
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
Language Code
Decimal Value
Language
LV
1062
Latvian
MS-MY
1086
Malay
NB
1044
Norwegian
NL-NL
1043
Dutch
PL
1045
Polish
PT-BR
1046
Portuguese (Brazil)
PT-PT
2070
Portuguese
RO
1048
Romanian
RU
1049
Russian
SK
1051
Slovak
SL
1060
Slovenian
SR-SP
2074
Serbian
SV-SE
1053
Swedish
TH
1054
Thai
TR
1055
Turkish
UK
1058
Ukrainian
VI
1066
Vietnamese
ZH-CN
2052
Chinese (Simplified)
ZH-TW
1028
Chinese (Traditional)
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
337
11.2 Translating Learning Contents
The Producer offers different possibilities for translating content. The main difference is between the translation
of text modules and the translation of manually created texts:

Translation templates – used for manually created texts of all content types

Automated translation – used for the translation of text modules in simulation and desktop
assistant projects

Rerecording – used for the translation of text modules in simulation projects and to record the interface in
the new target language
For further information, see the relevant sections.
Preparing for translation
The following steps are recommended as preparation for translation:

Translation should be done after creating and editing the source content, to ensure that all of the texts that
need to be translated can be edited fully.

Duplicate a content object before translating it, to ensure that the original content is not overwritten.

If you want to translate a project, first use the Automated Translation
function to translate the text
modules.
11.3 Translating Using Translation Templates
The Producer provides the option of creating translation templates, to enable you to translate individual texts of
a project. All translatable texts are exported in a suitable format for translation. After translation the texts can
be imported into the Producer.
The translatable texts in the exported translation files are all manually created texts. In addition, it is possible to
export the text modules of the projects.
Translation templates
Translation templates simplify the translation process, as all texts can be accessed and edited directly. There
are two translation templates that can be used:

Microsoft Word
Translation can take place in the Word documents without any problems since the texts can be edited
directly without a translation program.
The translation file contains the texts as well as the identifying descriptions of the content objects. The
identifying descriptions are formatted in red and allocate a text to the corresponding content object. This
should not be changed.
338
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
The available texts can be replaced using the translated texts. Delete the original text and replace it with
the required translation.

XLIFF 1.2
XLIFF (XML Localization Interchange File Format) is an XML-based format developed for generating texts
for translation from an application. This format is used especially for translation with the help of translation
programs.
The translation file contains the texts as well as the identifying descriptions of the content objects. To
translate texts using an XLIFF file, import the file into a suitable translation program.
Translation content
The following content can be exported for translation:

Title

Description

Short description

Keywords

Texts of the project macros

Texts of the book page objects
11.3.1 Exporting a Translation File
The file can be exported from the Explorer, as well as for an individual content in the project editor or book
editor.
To export a translation file, proceed as follows:
1.
Duplicate the source object and define the new language in the language parameter.
2.
Export the translation template by choosing Export Translation File… in the menu Tools -> Localization.
3.
Modify the settings in the Export Translation File dialog box.
Note that the Producer uses the ID of the object or group as the file name.
4.
Confirm the settings with OK to start the export.
5.
A dialog shows the export process. Confirm with OK once the export is finished.
6.
Afterwards a dialog box appears where you can open the exported translatable files or the destination
folder.
The texts in the translation template can now be translated by the translators into the required languages.
Settings of the export dialog box
For exporting translatable files, the following settings are available:
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
339

Format:
The settings define the format of the translatable text:

○
XLIFF 1.2
○
Microsoft Word
Structure:
The setting defines the export starting point in the tree. The objects below this point are exported.

○
All
○
Subtree
○
Current object
Export as One File:
If you want to export several translatable files with this setting, you can combine them into one file. This
means you can reduce the number of translation files.

Only Object Information:
If you select this option, only the name, description and short description of the objects are exported.

Include Object Names:
This option also exports the object names of the action macros. This allows you to translate the object
names, if no rerecording will be used.

Include Generated Project Texts:
This option also exports the generated project texts. This is useful for translators because the context of
the complete text is available.

Target Folder:
Specifies the folder for storing translatable files.
11.3.2 Importing a Translation File
Once translation is completed, you can now import the translated texts into the designated object or structure.
To import a translation file, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the project editor or the specific project in the project editor.
2.
Click on Import Translation File… in the Menu Tools -> Localization.
3.
A dialog box opens. Choose your document and confirm it with Open.
The texts are imported and replace the original content.
Note
With Producer 9.1 exported translations files in Word format cannot be imported into Producer 9.2 or
higher, because of changes in the ID format. Import the translation files by using a Producer 9.1 or export
the translation files with Producer 9.2 - 9.x again.
340
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
11.4 Dictionary Editor
You can customize predefined bubble text modules and the texts used in the trainer; the Producer allows you
opportunity to edit these text files individually. That means that you can use terminology or sentences specific
to your own texts, which conform to your company's corporate language, or you can set up an additional project
language, which is not included as standard in the Producer.
The Edit Dictionary dialog box is available to you for editing the texts. That means that direct access to the text
files is not necessary.
You can use the dialog box to edit the following texts:

Playback texts
These are the texts for the user interface of the trainer bar, the book reader bar and the library as well as
for the Desktop Assistant.
Resource: Playback Dictionaries

Recording texts
These are the content languages for the texts of the projects and documentation.
Resource: Recording Dictionaries
Open dialog
You can open the Edit Dictionary dialog box using the resources in the Explorer and thereby access the required
text files directly. To do this, select the corresponding dictionary and then click on the Open Dictionary button in
the object editor.
Once the dialog box has been opened, the texts are automatically loaded from the relevant text file. By default,
the dialog box is opened with the dictionary in the active Producer language.
11.4.1 Structure and Functions
The basic parts of the dictionary editor are:

Toolbar
The toolbar includes the functions for editing the dictionary texts.

Text list
The text list displays the dictionary texts with IDs, states and values.
The dictionary editor includes several functions for managing texts:

New:
Creates a new dictionary entry.

Save:
Saves the changes of an edited dictionary.
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
341

Import as Excel File:
Imports an Excel file of the texts into the dictionary.

Export as Excel File:
Exports the texts of a dictionary into an Excel file for external translation. All languages are exported.

Cut, Copy, Paste:
With these functions, you can edit the texts of a dictionary.

Undo, Redo:
With these functions, you can switch between editing states.

Search:
With this function, you can search for an entry in the dictionary.
Clicking the button opens a dialog box where you can enter a search value and search criteria.

Filter:
With the function, you can filter the entries of a dictionary.
Clicking the button opens a dialog box where you can enter filter values and criteria.
To display the complete list again, remove the entries in the filter dialog box.

New Language:
Creates a new dictionary language.

Language List:
With the language list, you can switch between the languages of a dictionary. The selected language is
shown in the text list.
11.4.2 Setting up a Dictionary
To edit the texts, first create a new dictionary. This involves copying the standard dictionary, which you use as a
template for editing the texts and IDs.
Note
Do not change the texts in the Standard dictionary so that you always have the original version available
at all times. Always set up a new dictionary.
1.
Select the appropriate dictionary group in the Explorer resources.
2.
Click on the New Dictionary button in the object editor.
3.
Enter a name in the dialog box. Click OK to confirm.
The Standard dictionary will now be copied automatically.
4.
To use the dictionary you have created for your trainer or as a content language, select the dictionary and
click on the Set as default function in the object editor. The entry is now shown in bold.
342
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
11.4.3 Editing an Entry
To customize the existing texts, open your dictionary in the Edit Dictionary dialog box. You can edit the text in
the dialog as follows:
Note
The text IDs cannot be changed as they are used to assign the texts in the content or user interface.
Caution
Do not change any variables or scripts contained in texts. These are used for allocating or formatting
applicable content. Changes can cause implementation errors.
Placeholders for assigning object names and object images can be found in square brackets [] in the text
modules. The variables are indicated by an @ sign or in curly brackets {...}. HTML / CSS scripts have
diamond brackets <...>.
1.
Double-click on the line of the text you want to edit.
2.
The editing dialog opens and contains the following areas:
○
Language of translation template:
The upper field displays the original text.
You can view this text in another language by clicking on the Other... button.
○
Target language (Value):
Enter your text in the Target language field.
○
State:
Specify the State of your text using the drop-down list. This allows you to manage texts and editing
statuses. The following statuses are possible: new, needs-translation, translated, needs-review, needsfix, final
As a rule, the texts are given the status final. The status of an amended text is automatically set to
new.
○
Comment:
Enter a comment needed for editing a particular text.
3.
Click on Close to incorporate the text into your text document.
11.4.4 Creating a New Entry
In addition to using existing texts, you can also add further IDs for new texts, thus enlarging the recording
dictionary. These entries allow you to insert the texts using placeholders in your content. For further
information, refer to the chapter Inserting a placeholder in the Producer manual.
Set up new IDs as follows:
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
343
1.
Select the New button in the toolbar to open the editing dialog box. Alternatively, you can open it using the
New... list entry.
2.
Enter a name in the ID field. You can only enter an ID that does not already exist.
3.
Use the setting Add to all languages to specify whether you want to add the new entry only in the chosen
content language or in all content languages to the dictionaries.
To ensure consistency between content languages, the setting should be retained.
4.
Confirm the dialog box by clicking on OK.
Once the dialog box has been closed, the editing dialog box for the text opens. Now enter your text. Read the
section on editing texts.
For the IDs, you can then enter the texts in the other content languages you are using. To do so, select the
language you want from the drop-down list.
11.4.5 Creating a New Language
If you would like to add an additional language to those provided by the Producer, you can do so using the New
Language function.
Creating a new language
1.
Click on the New Language button in the toolbar of the editor.
2.
A dialog box opens. Enter the following values:
○
Language:
Select the new language you would like to set up from the list. In this list you will find an overview of
different languages with their associated flags.
○
Copy from:
Select which project language you want to use as a template for your new language. This is required
to assign the texts to the corresponding IDs.
3.
Confirm your selection by clicking on OK. This will create a text file in the Dictionary for the new language
you have set up.
Translating a new language
You can now amend the texts or export them as an Excel file to have them translated into the corresponding
language by a translator. Once the Excel file has been translated, you can reimport it. The Export Excel and
Import Excel functions in the toolbar to allow you to do this.
11.4.6 Activating a Dictionary
The dictionary resources for simulation and books can be activated as follows:
344
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
Activating the Playback Dictionary
The created Playback Dictionary can be activated using the Playback Settings in the Producer.
1.
Open the central configuration dialog box using the Tools -> Settings menu.
2.
Select the section Playback Settings -> trainer - Global -> Visual properties.
3.
In the Playback Dictionary setting, select the created dictionary resource.
4.
Confirm the dialog box with OK.
The trainer - Global section activates the dictionary for the whole trainer. It is also possible to select an individual
dictionary for the book reader, library or a simulation mode on the relevant settings page.
Activating the Recording Dictionary
The created Recording Dictionary can be activated using the Playback Settings in the Producer.
1.
Select the dictionary resource in the resource tree of the Explorer.
2.
Click Set as Default in the object editor.
The resource name is now displayed in bold.
11.5 Spell Checker
The spell checker enables automatic correction of the texts contained in the HTML editor. The text is checked
according to which project language is set. This requires a spell checker, accessed by the Producer, to be
installed in Microsoft Word in the relevant language.
In the same way as is familiar from Microsoft Word, a misspelled word is underlined with a red wavy line. You can
now either correct the spelling or else select the correct spelling by right clicking to call up the context menu.
Activating spell checker
There is an option available to you in the Central Configuration Dialog for activating the spell checker. This
option is located in the Application -> General category.
The Default language for spell checking option can be used to define a language to be used if there is no language
package available in Microsoft Office for a language being used in a project.
SAP Enable Now
Content Languages and Translation
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
345
12 Publication
You can publish a workarea to give your learners the files required for playing back the course content.
Besides the content to be published, a workarea contains files, which are not required for playing back after
publication and which unnecessarily increase the size of the published workarea. For this reason, a copy
containing only the files required for playing is created in a target directory that you need to specify whenever
you publish a workarea.
Publishing can be in different formats and be stored directly on a server or a file share. In addition to this, you
can specify rules for publication to avoid the need to reenter details when republishing.
Note
For learning content to be played in the browser, the PC concerned must be capable of certain settings.
For information on these, read Learner Settings in this manual.
12.1 Publication Types
A variety of publication types are available for publishing workarea or individual objects. These are:
Type
Description
This is the standard format for publishing workarea.
This creates HTML and JavaScript files in a folder
structure, which can be played back using the trainer.
Incremental publishing is available for the Standard
Standard
format; this enables adding, removing and updating of
objects in the published content.
The formats are for executable files and support direct
EXE (Executable)
execution of content. The whole workarea is stored in a
file and this facilitates an exchange of files.
You can additionally define a filename for this format.
SLC (SAP Learning Content)
346
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Type
Description
The type lets you export all the documents available in
a workarea to a folder and thus deposit directly on a file
system. You can publish the documents into a folder
structure or all files in one folder with the names of the
Documents
content objects as file names.
See the chapter Publishing SCORM/AICC.
SCORM
See the chapter Publishing SCORM/AICC.
SAP Learning Solution (SCORM)
See the chapter Publishing SCORM/AICC.
SuccessFactors Learning (SCORM)
See the chapter Publishing SCORM/AICC.
AICC
Note
For the playback of published content in SLC format an installation of the SLC Player is required. The SLC
Player is the playback component for SLC files.
12.2 Publishing a Workarea
This is how to publish a workarea:
1.
Launch the Publish Content...
function via the Workarea -> Publish menu.
2.
When you execute the function, a dialog box appears and you can configure the following settings:
1.
Select the publication Type - Standard, Executable or SLC
2.
Enter the Target Folder for the workarea to be published. You can use the Browse for folder
function to change this.
If you select the EXE or SLC format, you can additionally specify a Target File.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
347
3.
Enter a desktop assistant prefix (see also Publishing Desktop Assistant Content), when publishing
desktop assistant content.
3.
Click OK to return to the overview of objects in the workarea.
1.
Now select the objects you want to publish.
2.
If you selected the Standard type, you can publish objects incrementally. In other words you can add
objects to a published workarea, remove or update objects. Refer to the corresponding section for
more details.
3.
The Root object defines the root for the publication. This is important in order to be able to define the
very first object when publishing sub-trees.
4.
Additionally, you can define a Start object for your publication. This is the first object displayed when
the publication is accessed; it could be an introductory page in a book, for example.
4.
Click Ok to complete the publication.
Publishing references
Referenced resources and objects can be verified so that only files that are really necessary are exported for
publishing purposes. This significantly optimizes the file size of a publication and also prevents necessary
references from being forgotten. When publishing an existing publication, references that are no longer used are
removed.
Before checking your references, you must first enable all the content to be published and disable all the
resources. Once this has been done, click on Check References in order to activate all the necessary references
in the tree structure.
Caution
Never publish a Workarea in an existing or currently opened Workarea. The files will be overwritten by the
publishing process. Always create a new folder for publishing. Publish only in an existing Workarea if you
are updating and make sure the folder is not in use.
12.2.1 Incremental Publishing in Standard Format
Incremental publishing in Standard
format gives you the option of adding, updating or removing objects to or
in a workarea. Functions for identifying and manipulating the status of objects in the published workarea are
available in the Publish Content...
dialog box.
To the left of an object you will see a button that lets you set the action for the publication event. Clicking the
button changes the setting. The current icon setting defines the action for the object when you publish the
workarea. Additionally, you can select the status in the context menu.
Icons states
Icon
348
Setting
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Explanation
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Icon
Setting
Explanation
Adds an object to the published
Add
workarea on publication.
Updates an object available in a
Update
published workarea.
Removes an object from the
Remove
published workarea.
Omits the objects in the object
Omit
group for this publication.
Indicates that the object in the
Equals
workarea is identical to the object in
the published workarea.
The icon shows that the object
Different states
group contains objects with
different states.
This option lets you choose to keep
an object. This is the case if with
Keep
update candidates that you do not
wish to overwrite.
When you select an object, the following information is available for it:

Status – Gives you the current status of the objects in the workspace compared to the published workarea.

Suggestion – Proposes a possible course of action for publishing the object.

Setting – Shows the currently selected action for publishing the object.
Note
Note that incremental publishing can only be performed for the Standard
format. The reason for this is
that this process creates a folder structure which can be modified, whereas the individual files are created
from scratch when publishing EXE
or SLC
format.
12.3 Publishing Individual Objects
It is not always necessary to publish the entire workarea. You can also output individual objects. To publish an
object, proceed as follows:
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
349
1.
Select an object in the tree structure.
2.
Click on Publish Object...
3.
A dialog box now opens where you can specify the Type and the Target folder/Target File.
in the object editor.
More information on the settings is available in the chapter Publishing Settings.
Other functions in the dialog box:
○
Show Objects for Publishing:
Shows all dependent content and resource objects. After you click the button, all objects are listed in
the box above.
○
Save as Publishing Rule:
Select this option to save the defined settings for further publishing. The settings are stored as a
Publishing Rule
4.
resource.
Click OK to confirm the dialog box.
After publishing is completed, a dialog box opens, where you can Start the publication or Open the target folder.
Click on Close to finish publishing.
12.4 Preparations for the Publishing
The following chapters give you an overview about preparations for the publishing.
12.4.1 Tree Structure for Publishing
Before publishing a workarea, the content's tree structure must be defined in the same way as it should be used
for the publication. Besides the ability to move and categorize objects within the structure, you can also use the
Filter and the function Hide to more precisely define the content to be published. This will allow you to hide any
content that should not be published.
To read more on how to use the Filter, refer to the section on Filters and Search in the Workarea.
Note
Make sure that the filtered and hidden objects will not be needed for displaying your learning content. For
example, linked projects or a group for managing image objects should be made visible before publishing
your content.
12.4.2 Defining a Start Link
The Start Link function provides you with an easy way of generating a link to learning content or the library. The
Start Link can then be attached to a webpage, for example, which can be used to launch learning content. This is
350
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
necessary if a workarea was published on a web server or file share.
The Start Link can be defined for all objects available in the Explorer. If you link a group, the library is opened
when the group is launched to display the associated content. An object's Start Link is displayed in the object
editor's Start Link parameter when an object is selected.
Note
Use the Desktop Assistant Prefix setting in the publishing settings to publish desktop assistant content to
a web server. This option assigns the workarea storage location to the content so that the Desktop
Assistant can find and launch the content when called.
General settings
When selecting the Workarea in the Explorer tree structure, a general rule can be defined in the Start Links
subcategory which is then used for creating all start links.

Prefix:
The prefix defines a general URL or path preceding the Start Link. This can be the link to a web page, for
example.

Use Prefix:
Activating this option uses the defined prefix to generate the start link.

Use Dialog Box:
With this option activated, a dialog box for defining the link is opened when you select Copy Start Link
function in an object's context menu. If the option is deactivated, the link is copied directly and generated
using the general criteria previously defined.
Selecting an Object's Start Link
To copy the Start Link for an object, right click in the Explorer tree structure to open the context menu for this
object. Now select the Copy Start Link… function.

If prior to this the Use Dialog Box option was deactivated, the Start Link will be copied directly.

If prior to this the Use Dialog Box option was activated, a dialog box will open in which you can define the
prefix. The link is then copied by clicking on Copy.
The copy of the Start Link can now be inserted in the desired file and made available to users.
12.5 Publishing Rules
Publishing rules make it easier to publish a workaround multiple times because you only need to make entries
once. The rules can be created and edited in the Edit Publishing Rules
dialog box.
For publishing SCORM or AICC see also the chapter Publishing SCORM/AICC.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
351
12.5.1 Creating Publishing Rules
To create publishing rules, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the Edit Publishing Rules dialog box by choosing Workarea -> Publish -> Edit Publishing Rules...
in
the menu.
The dialog box lists all the existing publishing rules of the workarea.
2.
To create a publication rule, use one of the following buttons:
○
Add:
Creates a new publishing rule.
A new publishing rule has a standard name in the Name field. After you click OK, the name is changed
for the resource.
○
Duplicate:
Creates a publishing rule using an existing resource.
3.
When selecting a publishing rule from the list, you see the parameters on the right-hand side of the dialog
box. Now you can edit the publishing parameters explained in the chapter Publishing Settings.
○
Name:
Defines the name of the publishing rule. The name is used as the display name of the resource.
○
Generate Rule Name:
Generates a name. The name includes the defined root object and target folder/target file.
4.
After you have finished your modifications, click one of the following buttons:
○
Publish:
Saves the created publishing rule and executes publishing.
○
Close:
Saves the created publishing rule and closes the dialog box.
The publishing rules created can be executed by selecting the rule set name in the Workarea -> Publish menu.
Alternatively select the resource and click on Publish
in the object editor.
12.5.2 Publishing Settings
The following settings are available for publishing a workarea or specific content:

Type:
The option menu allows you to select a publication format for the workarea.
See the chapter Publication Types.

Start from:
Defines the starting point in the content tree structure from which you want to publish content. This
enables you to publish a specific group or the whole content.
Use the Edit link...
to change the root object. A dialog box opens where you can specify an object in the
tree structure. Confirm this by clicking OK.
352
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication

Use Filter:
This option menu allows you to select an existing filter to be applied to the publication.
See the chapter Filters and Search in the Workarea.

Include Dependent Objects:
Specifies, that all dependent content and resource objects are published.

Target Folder / Target File:
Specifies the storage location where you want the workarea to be published, or specifies the folder and file
name for an EXE / SLC file. Use the Search for folder

button to select a folder as the storage location.
Clean Up Target Folder:
If this setting is activated, the target folder is always cleaned up before publishing. This setting is only
available for the type Standard

.
Desktop Assistant Prefix:
The option allows you to define the location of the workarea for desktop assistant content. The prefix is
necessary for playback from a webserver or a file share.
See the chapter Publishing Desktop Assistant Content.
Note
The settings Include Dependent Objects and Clean Up Target Folder are mandatory for creating a
publishing rule.
Settings and Styles
In the subcategory you are able to define setting and style resources for the content playback:

Playback Settings:
Defines the playback settings for playing back simulations and books/book pages. If you are using
different settings, you can activate the required resource.

Desktop-Assistant: Playback Settings:
Defines the playback settings for playing back desktop assistant content. If you are using different
settings, you can activate the required resource.

Text Styles:
Defines the text styles of the created content. If you are using different styles, you can activate the
required resource.
12.5.3 Publishing Desktop Assistant Content
The ability to launch desktop assistant content from a web server or file-share requires you to specify the
location where the workarea is held when publishing. The Desktop Assistant Prefix text field is available to you
when publishing content. Enter the URL and workarea name in this field.
Web server example: http://yourwebserver/[...]/Workarea
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
353
File-Share example: …\Workarea\index.html
Note
Note that following publication the workarea storage location is to be retained with the desktop assistant
content as otherwise the defined prefix will no longer match the storage location. If you would like to file a
workarea in a different location then it needs to be republished with a modified prefix.
12.5.4 Publishing Documents
Publishing documents allows you to store all the documentation files from your workarea in a folder. To do this,
select Documents
as the publishing type in the publishing rules.
Besides the general Publishing Settings, there are further settings available:

Include External Documents:
In general, only generated documents are published. Activate the setting if you also want to publish
imported documents.

Flat Structure:
Specifies that all documents are stored in the main folder. A content object name and the content type is
generated for each document. The document name starts with the content name, for example projectname
- documenttype.docx.
HTML documents and master documents cannot be published in a flat structure.
○
Sort by Type:
Specifies that the generated document name starts with the document type when publishing a flat
structure, for example documenttype - projectname.docx

Include Formats:
Activate the required document format to publish all available documents with the format:
○
Word / PowerPoint Documents
○
HTML Documents
○
PDF Documents
12.5.5 Multifile for Optimized Playback
A multifile can be created when publishing content. The multifile collects all relevant playback files from the
published content and resources, and stored in the publication. This allows the content to be started faster and
is recommended when storing content on a Web server or a file share.
The generated multifile depends on the content you want to publish and can be used for the publishing types
Standard
354
, Executable
and SLC
. Select the required multifile setting:
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication

Pack Structure:
Includes the workarea structure information in the multifile.

Pack Resources:
Includes the resource information in the multifile.

Pack Projects:
Includes the project information in the multifile.

Pack Book Pages:
Includes the book page information in the multifile.
The required multifile information depends on your content. In general, you can use all the settings. The
following overview shows you different use cases for activating or deactivating a setting:
Note
Desktop assistant projects
In some cases, a multifile for a large workarea with desktop assistant projects cannot be loaded.
Deactivate the Pack Projects setting, to not generate the multifile.
Setting
Status
Content

Pack Projects
Activate
Simulation projects are
published.

Desktop assistant projects are
published.

Pack Projects
Deactivate
Simulation projects are not
published.

Projects are started from
another workarea.
Pack Book Pages
Activate
Pack Book Pages
Deactivate
Pack Structure
Activate

Book pages are published.

Book pages are not published.

A complex structure is
published.
Pack Structure
Deactivate

Only one object or a small
number of objects are
published.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
355
Setting
Status
Pack Resources
Activate
Content

A large number of resources
are used for the content.
Pack Resources
Deactivate

Fewer resources are used for
the content.
12.5.6 Publishing Rules Resource
Created publication rules are stored as resources in the resource tree. This allows you to create general rules for
a content project and use the resources in an authoring environment. You can also export the resources as an
archive, which can be imported into another workarea.
Functions in the object editor
The following functions are available in the object editor for a selected resource:

Edit Publishing Rule
:
Opens the Edit Publishing Rules dialog to change the rule settings.

Publish
:
Executes the publishing with the defined rule settings.

Open Target Folder
:
Opens the folder with the publicated content.
356
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
12.5.7 Publishing by Using Command Line
You can use the command line to publish your content directly by using predefined publishing rules. This allows
you to publish content in an automated process.
Prerequisite
Create publishing rules to specify the content structure, the publishing format and the publishing location. For
further information, see chapter Publishing Rules.
Command
The command for the command line is as follows:
Syntax
producer.exe -wa <wa_path> -deploy:<deploy_id_list> -migrate:enforce
or
producer.exe /wa <wa_path> /deploy:<deploy_id_list> /migrate:enforce
Example
producer.exe -wa C:\Producer Workarea\Workarea Name deploy:5428446A6D128082,5B4BEA8BF1A43EBA12 -migrate:enforce

wa
Specifies the folder of your local workarea with the content and publishing rules for your publishing.

deploy
Specifies the ID of the publishing rule. You are able to define a number of publishing rules separated by a
comma or a semicolon.
The ID can be read out from the object or the folder of the publishing rule:
○
Object
Select menu View -> Show UIDs to display the UID next to the name of the publishing rule resource.
○
Folder
The workarea folder has the UID as name. Select a publishing rule in the resource tree, open the
context menu and click on Open Folder.

migrate:enforce (optional)
Specifies, that a workarea of an outdated version will be migrated automatically. This is required, if the
workarea was used in an older Producer version.
Note
When using a workarea with a Manager connection, the write permissions of the resources are required
for the migration. For further information, see chapter Manager Workarea.
Usage
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
357

If no Producer is running, the Producer will be opened and closed automatically.

If Producer is running, the workarea cannot be changed by the command. Open the workarea of your
command.
If Producer is closed, the workarea is selected automatically.
12.6 Publishing SCORM/AICC
Producer supports the publishing of workareas to SCORM and AICC for the import into a corresponding
Learning Management System (LMS). To find out which standard your LMS supports and which conditions must
be met, ask the person in your IT department who is responsible for administering your system.
SCORM Publishing
To import learning contents into LMS with SCORM, a compliant IMS manifest can be produced or exported from
Producer. In addition to the SCORM file, a ZIP archive of the contents and the corresponding resources for
direct import into the LMS is created.
The following formats are supported:

SCORM 1.2

SCORM 2004 3rd Edition

SCORM 2004 4rd Edition

SAVE 1.0 (SCORM 1.2)
AICC Publishing
To import learning contents into LMS with AICC, the files lms.au, lms.crs, lms.cst and lms.des are all stored in the
parent directory of the workarea. Under certain circumstances, they need to be adapted to the target system.
The Producer supports the AICC HACP format - the format AICC PENS is not supported.
Publishing process
The following process is recommended for the publishing of SCORM or AICC:
1.
Create and structure the content.
2.
Adapt settings in the central configuration dialog.
3.
Adapt the settings in the publishing rule.
4.
Publish the workarea.
After the publishing, the ZIP file or the workarea folder with the included format-specific files can be imported
into LMS.
358
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Note
Note that desktop assistant content cannot be used in LMS.
12.6.1 Preparation
To make the export possible, some preparations have to be made.
Content Structure
To export a SCORM file, the output structure of the contents needs to be defined in exactly the way it is
supposed to be displayed in LMS later on. It is possible to export multiple groups and projects, books with book
pages and projects, as well as single projects.
The workarea content exports depend on the group selection. If you want to export all the content in a workarea,
select the Content
group and then start the export. If you only want to export a specific group, only select this
group. Furthermore the structure can be influenced by filter or with the Hide option to filter or hide content
objects that are not wanted.
Note
Note that correct tracking is only possible, if unused contents and modes are set to hidden.
Recommendations
Make sure that a text for the Task Description is entered for the Test mode. It can be edited in the macro
Simulation Start
of the project.
12.6.2 Central Configuration
The settings can be found in the Playback Settings of the central configuration dialog. Open the dialog about the
Tools -> Settings...
menu. The settings can be set globally for the trainer and individually for each simulation
mode.
The following setting areas are relevant for the export:

Tracking (General)

Tracking (SCORM)

Tracking (AICC)

New window properties
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
359
12.6.2.1 Tracking (General)
The Tracking (General) area contains general settings for tracking. The activation of the SCORM or AICC
backend for the communication interface can be done in the option Tracking backend. The following entries
define the tracking backend and have to be set globally in the trainer settings:

SCORM (automatic)

SCORM 1.2

SCORM 2004

AICC
12.6.2.2 Tracking (SCORM)
The Tracking (SCORM) area contains detailed settings for SCORM tracking:

Progress and result tracking:
Activates tracking of the status of the learning progress to calculate the results. Specify whether you want
to keep progress or calculated results only or both values.

○
none
○
only progress
○
progress as result
○
result and progress
○
result and progress - incomplete when failed
Send success status:
Specifies when the information about a successful performed action is sent to LMS.

○
never
○
based on score
○
when completed
Resume simulation:
Defines whether a simulation can be resumed after closing. Optionally a warning can be displayed when
the user tries to resume a completed simulation since this might reset the result.
○
Yes
○
No
○
Show warning, if completed
Note
The option Show warning, if completed is only supported for SCORM 1.2. When using SCORM 2004 no
message is displayed.
360
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication

Result type:
Specifies the form in which the result is transferred to LMS. Decide whether your LMS expects point-based
or percentage-based results.

○
Points
○
Percentage
Score precision:
Specifies the decimal places for the result. The standard value is two decimal places (e.g. 0.95).

Commit data only once:
Transfers the results to LMS only when a simulation is exited. Use this setting to reduce the network
traffic.

Track objective data:
Generates SCORM objectives for the subunits of the library or a book.

Allow restart of simulations:
Defines whether a restart button is shown on the stop page of a simulation.
The option should be deactivated if LMS does not support internal content playback.
Note
Note that the display of objective data differs from the used LMS and cannot be shown in every system.
12.6.2.3 Tracking (AICC)
The Tracking (AICC) area contains detailed settings for AICC tracking:

Progress and result tracking:
Activates tracking of the status of the learning progress to calculate the results. Specify whether you want
to keep progress or calculated results only or both values.

○
none
○
only progress
○
progress as result
○
result and progress
Send success status:
Specifies when the information about a successful performed action is sent to the LMS.

○
never
○
based on score
○
when completed
Resume simulation:
Defines whether a simulation can be resumed after closing. Optionally a warning can be displayed when
the user tries to resume a completed simulation since this might reset the result.
○
Yes
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
361

○
No
○
Show warning, if completed
Cross-domain support:
Defines the support for cross-domains for AICC tracking.

○
disabled
○
Flash
Allow restart of simulation:
Defines whether a restart button is shown on the stop page of a simulation.
The option should be deactivated if LMS does not support internal content playback.
12.6.2.4 New Window Properties
The option Fullscreen in the New Window Properties must be always deactivated and disabled to prevent the
preview of a separate window. The browser window is regulated by the corresponding LMS. This selection
ensures smooth communication between the content and LMS.
The deactivation of the fullscreen should be done for the project modes and the book reader individually about
the appropriate setting pages.
Note
Note that the Fullscreen parameter should always be deactivated for the SCORM export to enable
trouble-free communication with LMS.
12.6.2.5 Tracking Settings Recommendations (SCORM)
For tracking of learning content in LMS, the SCORM specification uses a learning object as a sharable content
object (SCO). Only the SCO communicates with LMS, which means it sends status and score information and
requests data.
The following learning contents are distinguished for the SCO of a Producer workarea:

project mode

book with book pages

book with book pages including links to the project modes
To define the tracking of the content's completion there are different settings necessary for the learning
contents:
362
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Note
The following settings are recommendations for the use of learning contents in a LMS. Depending on the
LMS in use, other setting combinations may achieve the expected tracking result.

Global settings - trainer
The following settings should be defined in the global settings of the trainer:
○
Tracking backend
○
Commit data only once The other settings can be set globally or individually for the specific project
mode.

Completion of content
A book is completed if all contained book pages and project modes have been completed.
To exclude a project mode from tracking, set the option Progress and result tracking to none in the specific
mode settings. The setting also allows you to define whether the result or completion should be tracked.

Start linked mode in new window
The modes of a project can be linked on a book page with the book page object Mode Link. For the object,
the option Open Link in new Window needs to be activated. During playback, the mode starts in a new
window and not in the window of the book page.

Tracking of objective datas
With the in the central configuration dialog activated option Track objective datas detailed tracking
information will be send to the LMS additionally to the SCO tracking data. The setting can be used for
groups and books with included contents.
Note
Note that the objective data cannot be displayed in every LMS.
12.6.3 Publishing Rules for SCORM/AICC
After the preparation of the content and the adaptation of the settings in the central configuration dialog, the
workarea and the LMS files can be published - see the chapters Publishing Rules. For SCORM
and AICC
there are further settings in the publishing rules.
12.6.3.1 SCORM Settings
The subcategory SCORM includes the following settings for the SCORM
publishing:
Version
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
363
Various format versions are available for the output of a SCORM file; you can select them from the Version
dropdown menu for the export process. When you select a version, the IMS manifest of the corresponding
format is generated to reflect the requirements. The versions are:

SCORM 1.2

SCORM 2004 3rd Edition

SCORM 2004 4rd Edition

SAVE 1.0 (SCORM 1.2)
SAVE 1.0 settings
Activate the version SAVE 1.0 (SCORM 1.2) to produce meta information in the IMS Manifest in accordance with
the SAVE 1.0 specifications. See also the chapter Using SAVE 1.0.
Further options for SAVE 1.0 are:

Copyright:
Indicates in the IMS Manifest's meta information whether the learning content is covered by copyright.

Version:
Indicates in the IMS Manifest's meta information the version of the issued content.
XML schema files
In some cases, LMS may need XML schema definitions, to be integrated into the SCORM packet. These contain
SCORM-specific structure definitions for XML documents and require correctly formatted files to work properly.

Include XML schema files:
All XML schema files are added to the SCORM packet.

Insert schemaLocations:
Attributes are integrated into the IMS Manifest file as a reference to the XML schema files.
Start Parameters
In the generated manifest file, each simulation is given its own URL from which it can then be accessed.
In LMS, a simulation is sometimes opened using the query string of the URL. Here, corresponding attributes are
necessary. The selected Start parameters can be used to set which attributes are to be considered when
entering the starting URL. These are entered in the IMS manifest according to the selection.

Only"href“ attribute:
Standard setting for SCORM export.
One of the following settings should be used if a simulation cannot be accessed with the standard setting.

"href“"and "parameters" attributes:
A parameter attribute is also inserted which contains the query string. This starts with a question mark "?".

"href" and "parameters" (no ‘?’ delimiter):
A parameter attribute is also inserted which contains the query string.
Book Display
364
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
The option allows you to enable the publishing of books and book pages.
The available options define the structure for representation in LMS. This gives you the ability to reduce
complex books to a specific structural level, or display the whole book as an object. This setting has no influence
on the book structure in the book reader.

Ignore books:
This selection does not export the books available in the workarea into the SCORM manifest.

Show only books:
This section displays the books as book objects in LMS.

Show books and direct sub objects:
This option displays the books in LMS on two levels, namely a book and its subordinate objects on the first
level.

Show books and all sub objects:
This selection displays the complete structure of the books with all subordinate objects.

Include documentation:
This option allows you to export the generated documentation. Imported documents are always exported.
Do not deactivate the setting, if a documentation is linked in your content. The link will be broken.
Note
Note that documentation and imported files cannot be tracked in LMS.
12.6.3.2 SCORM for SAP Learning Solution
The settings in the subcategory SAP Learning Solution of the publishing rule for SAP Learning Solution
are
used for the connection and login with the LSO system.
General Settings

Learning Net Type:
Defines an ID for the publication. The ID is used in the SAP Learning Solution backend for the identification
of the learning net and different versions.
○
Generate:
The button allows you to generate a new ID for the learning net type. The ID has to be added after the
publishing in the LSO backend.

Repository URL:
Defines the URL of the master repository of the SAP Learning Solution system.

Content Path:
Defines the path for the content upload, relative to the repository URL. If it does not exist the path will be
created automatically.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
365
Without Load Balancing
With deactivated parameter Load Balancing the following parameter for connecting the LSO are available:

Application Server

System Number

Router
With Load Balancing
With activated parameter Load Balancing the following parameter for connecting the LSO are available:

Message Server

System ID

Group

Router
Secure Network Communication (SNC)
For the use of the Secure Network Communication there are the following settings:

Secure Network Communication:
Defines, if the Secure Network Communication is used.

No Single Sign-On:
Defines, that the Secure Network Communication is used without Single Sign-On. It is required to specify a
user and a password during the publishing.

SNC Name:
Defines the identification prefix for the backend system.

Quality of Protection (QoP): Defines the protection level for the Secure Network Communication.
○
Authentication only
○
Integrity protection
○
Privacy protection
○
Default of backend system
○
Maximum security settings available
Further information about the Secure Network Communication is available in the SAP Help Portal.
12.6.3.3 SCORM for SuccessFactors Learning
Note
For publishing content to SuccessFactors Learning the version Q3 2015 is required.
366
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
The settings in the subcategory SuccessFactors Learning of the publishing rule for SuccessFactors Learning
are used for the connection and login with the SuccessFactors LMS.

LMS URL:
Defines the URL of the SuccessFactors Learning Management System.

Launch URL Prefix:
Defines the launch URL prefix for the course content.

Company ID:
Defines the company ID for the OAuth authorization to the SuccessFactors Learning Management System.
12.6.3.4 AICC Settings
The subcategory AICC includes the following settings for the AICC

publishing:
File Prefix:
Defines the prefix of the server for the AICC package that is inserted into the lms.au file.

AICC Creator:
Defines the creator of the AICC package.
The information about whether a file name prefix or an AICC Creator needs to be specified should be requested
from the responsible system administrator of the target LMS.
12.6.4 Using SAVE 1.0
SAVE 1.0 (SCORM-Anwendung in der Versicherungswirtschaft - Using SCORM in the Insurance Industry) is a
recommendation for defining universal meta information and variables in the IMS Manifest. These specifications
are an extension of the SCORM 1.2 standard.
Note
Note that SAVE 1.0 can only be used for the SCORM 1.2 standard and not for SCORM 2004.
The purpose of meta information defined using SAVE 1.0 is to define learning content issued in a SCORM
package in greater detail. The following parameters can be defined in the Producer:
Meta information
Description
title
Object name.
description
Object description - also used for associated modes.
keyword
Defined object search words - these are also used for
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
367
Meta information
Description
associated modes.
Version of the resources issued - the value can be
version
amended manually.
copyright
Definition of a copyright for the issued content. The
required information in the IMS Manifest is Yes or No.
The meta information title, description, keyword for an object can be defined in Explorer; the meta
information version and copyright are available as options in the publishing rules for SCORM.
Note
When using the SAVE 1.0 standard you need to make sure that this is supported by the LMS you are
using.
12.7 Generating a Simulation Video
Video is an additional format for simulation playback in demo mode. This allows you to use the simulation in a
portable format and to publish it on media platforms.
Videos can be created for simulation projects with or without audio in the AVI and MP4 format. The video
includes all playback resources.
A video does not display the trainer bar because the video can be controlled by using the player’s playback
window.
Generating a video
To generate a video, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a simulation project in the tree of the Explorer.
OR
Open a simulation project in the project editor.
2.
Click on Tools -> Generate Video...
The Generate Video dialog box opens.
3.
Change the settings in the dialog box as required.
See also the chapter Generate Video Dialog Box.
4.
Click on Start to generate the video.
Video generation starts and a progress bar displays the status.
5.
After the generation has been finished, a dialog box is displayed. The dialog box allows you, to playback the
video or to open the folder.
6.
368
Click on Finish to close the dialog box.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
The video is stored in the project structure as demo.avi/mp4. You can open the project folder by using the Open
Folder
button in the object editor.
12.7.1 Generate Video Dialog Box
The Generate Video dialog box is used to generate video for simulation projects. The dialog box contains settings
and commands for video generation and video preview and can be opened by using the Tools -> Generate
Video...
menu.
The dialog box has the following areas:
Project Settings
This area displays a preview of the current frame for video generation. When the dialog box is opened, the image
displays the first frame.
Video Settings
The area contains the following settings for video generation:

Presets:
Contains different formats to allow a video generation regarding specific use cases.

Video Codec:
Displays the active codec for video generation. The codec defines the format of the video.
○
Settings...:
Opens a dialog box to configure the active codec. The drop-down list displays all installed codecs.
Only compatible codecs are displayed.

Crop Size:
Defines the size of the displayed image are of the simulation pages in pixels. Select a percentage value to
change the size.
○
Custom Size:
The option allows you to enter an individual crop size. The text fields are activated.
○
Show... / Hide:
Opens a window for resizing the video manually.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
369
Changing the size of the window also changes the image. Once you have finished resized, close the
window to apply the changes.

Video Size:
Defines the size of the video in pixels and scales the images. Select a percentage value to change the size.
○
Custom Size:
The option allows you to enter an individual size of the video. The text fields are activated.

Frame Rate (Frames per seconds):
Defines the number of images displayed in one second. The initial value is 24.
Note that a high frame rate leads to a longer generation time and a larger file size.

Audio Format:
Displays the active output format of the audio. The active audio format can be changed in the Change
Audio Format dialog box.
Video Output
The area contains information about the generation process.
Buttons
The bottom of the dialog box contains the following buttons and button statuses:
Icon
Description
Reload:
Reloads the project after video generation was
canceled. This allows you to change the settings and
start generation again.
A reload can be necessary, if changed settings are not
applied correctly.
Generate:
Starts video generation.
Pause:
Pauses video generation.
Continue:
Continue video generation from the paused status with
the current settings.
370
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Icon
Description
Close:
Closes the Generate Video dialog box after video
generation was canceled.
Cancel:
Cancels video generation. You can reload the project
afterwards.
Finish:
Closes the Generate Video dialog box after video
generation was finished successfully.
12.7.2 Crop Size and Video Size
The image shows you the use of the Crop Size and the Video Size for the video generation:
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
371
The full image is kept in the generated video. During playback of the video the focus moves to the position of the
current highlight and bubble.
The video size can be smaller as the crop size - the image is scaled.
372
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
12.8 Creating a Context-Sensitive Help File
In order to use the context-sensitive help file, you first have to define which specific information you would like
to add to the help file. Linking information according to its contents allows users to quickly and easily search for
and find the specific information they need for any given situation within the application. e.g. , the current
“transaction” (TCODE) or the “mandant” (MANDT).
Once the context-sensitive help file has been created, it can be integrated directly into the help menu in your
SAP system. The learners can then access this help file and its contents at any time.
Supported applications
The following applications are supported for the implementation of a context-sensitive help:
Application
SAP GUI for HTML
SAP GUI for Windows
NW Enterprise Portal
(Ajax Framework Page)
NW Enterprise Portal
(Classic Framework Page)
Version
Parameter
Dependent on specific SAP kernel
versions
Client, Dynpro, Transaction
Dependent on specific SAP kernel
TCODE, DBSYS, DYNPRO,
versions
PROGRAM
Version 7.3
COMPONENT, VIEW
Version 7.3
PAGEINDEX
Further informations about the implementation of the context-sensitive help in the applications are available in
the accordant installation guides.
12.8.1 Context Configuration
During the recording, the Producer analyzes the existing SAP environment and extracts the relevant context
information from the system. This information is then displayed in the Context setting.
Note
For the use of further context parameters contact your SAP consultant.
The contextual information is entered under the Context setting which can be opened by clicking on the button
Advanced Layout of the object editor in Explorer. The individual pieces of information contain a description of the
type and its corresponding value, linked via an equal sign (PARAMETER=VALUE).
Editing the context
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
373
Additional information can be entered in the field, separated with a comma. For example:
TCODE=SBWP,MANDT=906,DYNPRO=SAPLSINWP
Multiple context parameters will be separated with a vertical bar:
TCODE=SU01|SE80|SE63
Wild cards can also be defined for any contextual information. Wildcards accelerate and facilitate searching for
specific content within the help file. Example of a wildcard:
TCODE=SU*
Note
The language of the context information depends on the language of learning content and is defined
automatically.
12.8.2 Exporting a Context File
Once the contextual information has been defined and the workarea has been published, the context file can be
generated in the Producer. All the object information used for the help file content is entered into a context.html
file.
To export a context file, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the root group of the content or a specific sub-group in the Explorer.
2.
Choose Workarea -> Publish -> Export Context File...
3.
The settings dialog box opens:
○
Enter the Target Folder for storing the file.
○
Enter the URL of the published workarea with the included content,
for example http://server/workarea.
○
Select a mode or the complete project in the Mode setting. The selected mode is started with the
relevant context-sensitive information.
4.
Click on OK.
5.
The parameter dialog box opens and displays the available context parameters.
Select the parameters that you want to include in the context file.
6.
Click on OK to export the file.
Note
If a Webserver requires administrator permissions, then it is not possible to write directly to the target
folder. Export the context.html to a local folder and then copy the file to the target folder.
Manager workarea of a Manager
374
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
The context.html can also be exported for the Manager workarea of a Manager. In the URL setting, enter the
workarea location in this format: http://server/manager/wa/workarea_name/~tag/published.Specify
published content of the workarea by adding ~tag/published .
To access the content of the Manager workarea, users need to log on. Activate the Anonymous user to allow
users to bypass the logon.
12.8.3 Testing a Context File
The function Test Context File allows you to test a created context file. To do so, proceed as follows:
1.
Start the function with the Tools -> Context Administration -> Test Context File… menu entry.
2.
Choose the context file in the opened dialog.
3.
Confirm with OK.
4.
The next dialog shows the available context information of the context file.
Enter the test values.
5.
Confirm the dialog with OK.
Afterwards, the preview page opens and shows the available contents for the defined values.
12.9 Use Cases for Publishing
There are different settings and requirements regarding your use cases for publishing and using content. See
the following chapters for further information.
12.9.1 Publication on a Server
To publish your content on a Web server (for example, Apache or IIS), the entire published workarea is copied to
the specified location on the server or the content is published directly into the target directory of the specified
server.
Opening the library
To open a library belonging to a particular workarea, call up the published content.
Example
http://<yourwebserver>/[...]/workarea/index.html
http://<yourwebserver>/[...]/deployment.exe
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
375
Starting an object
To start an individual content object, call the object directly.
Example
○
Simulation
http://<yourwebserver>/[...]/workarea/index.html?show=project!PR_6FFA2A8FC6E5A
AB5:demo
Use for a mode: demo, uebung (practice), test, praxis (concurrent), presentation or guided
Starts the simulation mode in the trainer.
○
Desktop Assistant
http://<yourwebserver>/[...]/workarea/project/PR_E6E2A661CC71AB92/project.dnt
Starts the desktop assistant content in the Desktop Assistant by using the dnt file.
○
Group
http://<yourwebserver>/[...]/workarea/index.html?library=library.txt&show=grou
p!GR_E503495E904892B4
Opens the group content in the library.
○
Book
http://<yourwebserver>/[...]/workarea/index.html?library=library.txt&show=book
!BO_329F30366A3DD19B
Opens the book in the book reader.
○
Book Page
http://<yourwebserver>/[...]/workarea/index.html?show=slide!SL_D41C25D36B3716A
2
Opens the book page in the book reader.
○
Text Unit
http://<yourwebserver>/[...]/workarea/index.html?library=library.txt&show=cdoc
!CD_553B6BB3C5C1A4A4
Opens the text unit content in the library.
Playback desktop assistant content by using HTTPS
If desktop assistant content is stored on a server, then these can be accessed using a Hypertext Transfer
Protocol Secure (HTTPS). Noted that HTTPS protocols use certificates to show their trustworthiness and are
stored in the browser so that applications can be opened correctly. If a certificate is not deposited as
trustworthy in the browser, with the call of a desktop assistant content a certificate error is displayed. Using this
note you can continue to load or close the desktop assistant content.
In order to avoid certificate errors from the outset, the specific certificate for the HTTPS protocol must be
installed as trustworthy in the browser. This can be done under Tools -> Internet Options -> Contents ->
Certificates in the tab Trusted Root Certification Authorities. The installation should be carried out by an
administrator.
376
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
12.9.2 Publication on an Intranet Share
When you publish your content on the file share of an Intranet server, the entire published workarea is copied
to a specified location on the server or the content is published directly into the target directory of the specified
server.
Opening the library
To open a library belonging to a particular workarea, open the published content.
Example
\\<yourserver>\<example_share>\[...]\workarea\index.html
\\<yourserver>\<example_share>\[...]\deployment.exe
Starting an object
To start an individual content object, call the object directly.
Example
○
Simulation
\\<yourserver>\<example_share>\[...]\workarea\index.html?show=project!PR_6FFA2
A8FC6E5AAB5:demo
Use for a mode: demo, uebung (practice), test, praxis (concurrent), presentation or guided
Starts the simulation mode in the trainer.
○
Desktop-Assistent
\\<yourserver>\<example_share>\[...]\workarea\project\PR_E6E2A661CC71AB92\proj
ect.dnt
Starts the desktop assistent content in the Desktop Assistant by using the dnt file.
○
Group
\\<yourserver>\<example_share>\[...]\workarea\index.html?library=library.txt&s
how=group!GR_E503495E904892B4
Opens the group content in the library.
○
Book
\\<yourserver>\<example_share>\[...]\workarea\index.html?library=library.txt&s
how=book!BO_329F30366A3DD19B
Opens the book in the book reader.
○
Book Page
\\<yourserver>\<example_share>\[...]\workarea\index.html?show=slide!SL_D41C25D
36B3716A2
Opens the book page in the book reader.
○
Text Unit
\\<yourserver>\<example_share>\[...]\workarea\index.html?library=library.txt&s
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
377
how=cdoc!CD_553B6BB3C5C1A4A4
Opens the text unit content in the library.
Note
If an anti-virus software is active when you access an Intranet share, scanning all the files required for
simulation playback (as the files are opened) can result in a considerable delay between opening a
simulation and the starting the simulation. It is therefore recommended that you always publish
simulations on a Web server, wherever possible.
12.9.3 Publishing for Mobile Devices
The following settings are recommended when publishing content for mobile devices:

trainer style
Use the trainer Style (Medium) for your content. The size of the style and buttons is optimized for mobile
devices.
Activate the style in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
): Playback Settings -
> trainer - Global / Content type -> Visual properties -> Style.

Publishing format
Use the Standard or SLC format for your publishing.
You can set the format in the publishing settings, when publishing content or creating a publishing rule.
○
Standard - Publish on a server and link to content.
○
SLC - Use SAP Mobile Documents for playback.
Note
Check the browser requirements when playing back content on mobile devices. See the chapter Browser
Requirements.
12.9.4 Publication on SAP Mobile Documents
Content published utilizing the SLC format can be opened and consumed directly on an iPad via the SAP Mobile
Documents App for Apple iOS.
To publish your content on SAP Mobile Documents you will need SAP Mobile Documents for Windows in latest
version 1.2 at minimum. Once you have installed the application publish your contents in format SLC
directly
to your local SAP Mobile Documents folder (by default: Mobile Docs > My Documents in your local user directory).
After publishing synchronization to server will start automatically, providing you with the ability to load, play and
share the published content within your SAP Mobile Documents App.
378
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Note
To set up your publishing rule for publication as SLC to be used in SAP Mobile Documents deactivate all
options for Multifile functionality.
SAP Enable Now
Publication
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
379
13 Workarea and Administration
The following chapters give an introduction to the workarea and the Manager workarea as well as to the editing
and administration of resources and contents.
13.1 Workarea
The workarea is the base directory for working with the Producer. It contains all the necessary files for creating
and playing back learning content as well as the actual files of the learning content that has been created.
Producing learning content always requires one workarea to be selected.
The Producer automatically creates all the relevant data and directories when a new workarea is set up. These
files deposited in the workarea are available via the Explorer's tree structure, which can be used to organize, edit
and replace them. The files for creating and playing back learning content are filed as resources. The learning
content is created as projects and book pages and organized in groups and books.
When selecting the workarea within the tree structure, the path to the relevant folder is displayed on the right in
the object editor. If a Manager workarea was set up on a server, then this path will be displayed there as well.
Note
So that contents can be created and played back free from errors, no alteration to files and the workarea
directory structure is permitted.
The following sections will give you an overview of the workarea, how it is presented and used in the Explorer and
with what objects and how it is set up in the folder structure.
Note
The workarea contains a mechanism that prevents multiple users in the same network from opening and
using the same workarea.
If multiple users are to use a common structure for their projects, the use of a Manager workarea should
be considered.
13.1.1 Structure and Objects
The objects contained within the workarea are displayed in the Producer in the Explorer tree structure. This is
broken down into the following areas and content:
380
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Main Level
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Workarea
The topmost entry in the
tree structure shows the
local and
Manager workarea
selection.
Resources
List of all of the resources
available in a workarea for
organization and editing.
Resource Group
Resource
Content
The Content group is the
base group with all of the
workarea's available
learning content.
Group
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
381
Main Level
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Subtype: Desktop
Assistant
Project: Standard
Simulation
Quiz
Modes
Documents
Project: Desktop
Assistant
Context Help
Guided Tour
Mode
Project: Web Assistant
382
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Main Level
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Context Help
Guided Tour
Book
Book Page
Subtype: Book Page
Template
Subtype: Quiz Template
Text Unit
Master Document,
Compound Document
Shortcuts
These objects are
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
383
Main Level
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
shortcuts to objects filed
in another location within
a tree structure which
allow these objects to be
launched directly.
Unsorted
Unsorted are where
workarea objects that are
not assigned to any base
group are filed.
Local Trash
Contains the locally
deleted objects.
13.1.2 Resources
The Resources
area is where you have access to all the workarea files and settings you need for creating and
playing back learning content. These are broken down into resource groups each with their own individual
resources.
You can use the structure to apply settings for individual resources and to save resources to a Manager
workarea.
Recommendation
You can hide the resource tree in Explorer with Hide Resources entry of the filter menu.
13.1.2.1 Resource Overview
The table provides you with an overview of the standard resources available in the workarea:
384
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Resource
Description
Contains adaptable resources of styles and settings.
See Adaptable Resources for further information.
Adaptable Resources
Contains the design of the background and
the controls for book pages.
Book Styles
Contains the various bubble designs.
The Edit Bubble Styles... button in the object editor can
Bubble Styles
be used to launch the bubble style editor for editing the
bubbles.
Contains the publishing rules for the publishing of
content. The resource type is visible after a publishing
rule is defined.
See also the chapter Publishing Rules Resource.
You will receive the following functions when you select
the resources:
Publishing Rules

Edit Publishing Rules - Opens the dialog for editing
the publishing rules.

Publish -

Open Target Folder -
Contains the settings for the generation of
documentation of all types.
You will receive the following functions when you select
a resource:
Documentation Settings

Open Settings - Opens the selected setting
resource in the central configuration dialog.
This resource contains text blocks that can be used in
a content’s playback. Here we differentiate between:
Playback Dictionaries

Standard - library, trainer and book reader

Desktop Assistant
You will receive the following functions when you select
the resource group:
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
385
Resource
Description

New Dictionary - Setting up a new dictionary. This
causes the original folder to be copied, as a result
of which the standard texts can be transferred
into the new ones.
You will receive the following functions when you select
the resources:

Open Dictionary - Opens the dialog for
customizing the texts.
This resource contains the help files for the library,
trainer and book reader in the available languages.
Help
Contains the macroset files. These are:
Macrosets

Desktop Assistant

Standard (Simulation and Quiz)

Web Assistant
The resource contains the application profiles for
recording the applications.
Application Profiles
The dictionary contains the bubble text modules for
the project types. These can be edited using the Edit
Dictionary dialog.
Here we differentiate between:

Simulation

Desktop Assistant
You will receive the following functions when you select
the resource group:
Recording Dictionaries

New Dictionary - Setting up a new dictionary. This
causes the original folder to be copied, as a result
of which the standard texts can be transferred
into the new ones.
If you select a resource, you will receive the following
functions:

386
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Open Dictionary - Opens the dialog for
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Resource
Description
customizing the texts.

Set as Default - If a number of resources are
available, this allows you to determine which one
is to be used.
The Scripts resource contains all the scripts that
activate special functions.
Scripts
This resource contains the configuration files for the
content authoring and playback.
Configurations
If additional resources were added, the resource to be
used can be defined via the Set as Default function.
Contains the trainer configuration files.
Which trainer version is to be used can be defined in
trainer
the object editor using the Set as Default function.
Contains the created filter definitions. The resource
type is visible after a filter is defined.
You will receive the following functions when you select
the resource group:

New Filter - Opens the Edit Filter dialog for the
creation of a new filter.
Filters
If you select a resource, you will receive the following
functions:

New Filter - Opens the Edit Filter dialog for the
editing of the selected filter.

Apply Filter - Activates the filter or search for the
content tree.
13.1.2.2 Adaptable Resources
The Adaptable Resources
are part of the workarea resource tree and are located on top of the resource
structure. They contain customizable resources such as styles, templates and settings.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
387
The standard resources of the Adaptable Resources including the following:

Authoring Settings

Playback Settings

Desktop Assistant: Authoring Settings

Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings

Text Style

Desktop Assistant Style

Desktop Assistant: Mini Icons

trainer Flat Style

trainer Style (small)

trainer Style (medium)

Documentation Style

Documentation Style (Right-to-Left)

Book Style Flat

Bubble Styles

Border Styles

Color Palette (if created)

Master Tags (if created)

Content Categories
Customizing adaptable resources
Resource
Customizing
Customize the resources in style editor. Open the style
Styles
editor by using the Edit Style Resources...
control.
See also Style Editor.
Customize the resources in text style editor. Open the
text style editor by using the Edit Text Styles...
Text Styles
control.
See also Text Style Editor.
Customize the resources in color palette editor. Open
Color Palette
the editor by using the Edit Color Palette...
control.
See also Color Palette.
Settings
Customize the resources in central configuration
dialog box. Open the dialog box by using the Open
388
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Resource
Customizing
Settings...
control.
See also Central Configuration Dialog Box.
Customize the resources in master tags dialog box.
Master Tags
Open the dialog box by using the Edit Master Tags...
control.
Customize the resources in content categories dialog
Content Categories
box. Open the dialog box by using the Edit Content
Categories...
control.
13.1.2.3 Managing Resources
You can import and update resources or manage them on the Manager workarea:
Importing resources
In addition to the already existing resources, you have the ability to import additional resources into the
workarea as an archive.
1.
To do so, click on the Import Archive... function in the Workarea -> Administration menu.
2.
Select your archive file in the open dialog box. Then click on Open.
3.
You will then see the files contained in the archive displayed in a dialog box. You can now select which
content is to be imported into your workarea. Click on OK to import the selected resources.
4.
The import is displayed by a progress dialog box. After completion, confirm this with OK.
The imported resource is now available in the relevant resource group in the resource overview. A number of
resources need to be activated for use. See also the Resource Overview.
Duplicating resources
In addition to the standard resources, you can create further resources by duplicating an existing resource and
using it as a base type:
1.
Open a resource section of the resource tree.
2.
Select a resource type to be used as a base type.
3.
Click Duplicate...
4.
A settings dialog box opens. Enter a name for the resource.
5.
Confirm the dialog with OK to create the new resource.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
in the object editor.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
389
Updating resources
If you have installed a new version of the Producer, you will need to migrate the standard installation resources.
Also pay attention here to the chapter Migrating a workarea.
Manager workarea
When using a Manager workarea, the resources can be managed via the tree structure to make them available
to all authors. Individual authors can then download the resources for their own local workarea. A local
workarea's resources can also be transferred to the Manager workarea and exchanged.
This is done using the context menu when selecting a corresponding resource group or by means of the
Manager Workarea menu.
13.1.2.4 Copy Over a Bubble Style
The Copy Over function for a bubble style can be used, to replace a used bubble style with another resource. A
case can be, to update an outdated bubble with a new created resource. Thus, not each bubble must be changed
in the whole content.
To copy over a bubble, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the source bubble in the resource tree, which should override the old bubble.
2.
Click on Copy Over... in object editor.
3.
In the opened dialog, adapt the following parameters:
○
Copy "Bubble Name" over:
Select the bubble style, that should be overridden.
○
Name:
Insert a name for the bubble.
The general name form is: Old Name (New Name)
4.
Click on Ok, to execute the override.
To restore a changed standard bubble style, use the Update Resources function.
13.1.3 Content
Various objects for creating content are available in the Producer. Each of these objects in the tree structure is a
reference to the actual object in the particular workarea folder. This enables individually specific organization
and use of the objects in the local and Manager workarea. You can refer to, or create a shortcut to, an object
multiple times as well as manage its structure accordingly in conjunction with a Manager workarea.
The Content
group is the highest learning content group and is created automatically when setting up a
workarea. This is where all the learning content is filed. Furthermore, the structure contained in the group is
390
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
used for presentation in the library.
This group can be amended via Group options in the context menu with each available group capable of being
defined as the root group. This is necessary when using a Manager workarea so that the corresponding root
group can be set up locally.
Note
Bear in mind that only objects contained in the root group are displayed in the library. Shortcuts and
unsorted objects are not available in the library.
Root group in the Manager workarea
The root group of a Manager workarea cannot be changed.
It is therefore necessary, when working with a Manager workarea, to define the root group locally:
1.
First of all select the Check out Object... function in the Manager Workarea menu. Define the workarea
contents in the open dialog and click on Ok.
The objects will then be filed as Unsorted
.
2.
Now select the topmost group.
3.
Open the context menu and go to Group options -> Set root.
The group is now set up as the root group, the previous group is filed under Unsorted and can be deleted.
13.1.3.1 Content Object Parameters
For the learning objects there are the following general parameters:
Parameter
Name
Language
Description
Contains the name under which an object is shown in
Explorer, the library and the documentation.
Specifies the language of the content. Defines the used
text modules for projects.
Allows a particular mode, book page or document to be
started or opened automatically when selecting an
object in the library. This function is useful, for
example, if only one mode is to be displayed in the
library Autostart
library for a simulation or else to highlight a particular
mode or particular document. When the mode has
been terminated or the document closed, the user is
free to select the project content as usual.
This function can also be defined for groups, for
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
391
Parameter
Description
example in order to display a document or book page
when selecting the group, the book page is hidden in
the library structure.
Allows you, to edit a short information for the content
object. The text is used in the library, for the desktop
Short Description
assistant or when generating a documentation.
For the editing the HTML editor is opened, when
clicking into the edit field.
Allows you, to edit a descriptive text for the content
object. The text is used in the library, for the desktop
Description
assistant or when generating a documentation.
For the editing the HTML editor is opened, when
clicking into the edit field.
Allows you, to hide an object in the library. It can also
Hide
be used to hide objects when generating a
documentation or when publishing a workarea.
Start Link
Contains a link, which can be used to start the
playback of the specific content object.
Allows you, to define tages used for the creation of
Tags
filters.
Allows you, to specify keywords for an object. The
learners can use these to search for specific learning
Keywords
content in the library or in the book reader.
To define a number of search terms separat them by a
semicolon (e.g.: search_term1;search_term2).
Contains the recorded context of an application and
Context
application page. The context is used for desktop
assistant content.
Allows you, to define roles used for the filtering of
Roles
content during playback
Duplication Source
392
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Contains a link to the source object used for the
duplication.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Parameter
Duplication Master
Imported UID
Description
Contains a link to the original duplicated object, if an
object has been duplicated from a duplicated object.
Contains the UID of the original object if the content
has been imported.
13.1.3.2 Templates for Content Objects
Templates can be made for objects that are created for workareas in the Explorer. The templates are useful for
saving time as well as for ensuring uniformity for newly created objects when more than one author is working
on a project.
Templates can be created for the following objects:

Projects

Groups

Book pages

Books

Text Units
Creating a template
To create a template, proceed as follows:
1.
First, create a new project by clicking on New Project
from the toolbar in the project editor. It is
recommended that you save this in a folder in your workarea that is specifically for templates.
2.
A dialog box will appear. Enter a name for the template, e.g. Standard template. Confirm by clicking on OK.
3.
Next, configure your project as desired. To do so, from the project editor, open the main configuration
dialog box and define all the project-specific settings.
For books and book pages, you can define the layout, the positioning grid and content.
4.
Save the project.
Choosing a template
If a template has already been created, you can use it to create a new object (group, book, page or project) or it
can be defined as a general template for creating new objects, which will then serve as the default settings for
the new objects.
To use an existing template, proceed as follows:
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
393

For an individual object
Create a new object. Then select your template from the dialog box under Template about the Change...
button. All the objects will then appear in the opened dialog box. Select your template and click on OK.

As a general template
If you would like to use a template for all the objects, open the central configuration dialog from the menu
Tools -> Settings...
in the area Producer -> Templates. Select the desired template to be used for the
object and click on OK.
13.1.3.3 Duplicating Objects
The Duplicate
function allows you to duplicate an object or an object structure. Through that, you can use the
available content for adaptations and variations and do not change the source object.
To duplicate an object, proceed as follows:
1.
Object in explorer
1.
Copy an object or a content tree in the Explorer.
2.
Select a group of the content tree.
3.
Paste the copied object.
4.
A dialog box opens.
Select As Duplicate...
2.
3.
Single project or book page
1.
Open a project in project editor or a book page in book editor.
2.
Select Edit -> Duplicate...
A dialog box opens.
Adapt the following settings:

Name:
With this setting, you can change the name of the duplicate.
Select an option from the dropdown box to edit the name:
○
Keep Original Name:
Uses the original name of the object and subobjects.
○
Add Sequential Number:
Adds a sequential number to the original object name of the object and subobjects. For
example: Name (2)
○
Enter New Name:
Allows you to enter a new name for the object or the root object of a content tree.
○
Transform Original Name:
Allows you to replace the name or parts of the name for a content tree.
Use replace by to enter a name value and a replace value.
Use Prefix or Suffix to add a name part in front or at the end of the name.
394
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration

Set Language:
With this setting, you can change the content language of an object.
The setting does not influence the content and no automatic translation is executed.

Duplicate subobjects:
With this setting, you can also duplicate the subobjects of a selected content tree. If the setting is
deactivated, the subobjects are created as a reference.
The setting is shown if you select a tree in the Explorer.
4.
Confirm the dialog box with OK to duplicate the object or content tree.
13.1.3.4 Using References
The physical object of a learning content can be referred to as often as necessary. If changes are made in a
reference, these are also contained in the other references.
The opportunity therefore exists to use a particular object for different parts in a project structure. This is the
case, for example, if an object is to be offered for different target groups in conjunction with different additional
content.
Creating a reference
Note
Bear in mind that only one reference can be created for an object within a group. Create object references
only in different groups.
1.
To create a reference, select the desired object in the tree structure.
2.
Then, with the right mouse button held down, move the object to the appropriate position using
drag&drop.
3.
A context menu is opened when you release the mouse button. Select the Reference menu option to create
the reference.
Note
If your references contain Word documents and you use them to create a central document, this central
document will include all the documents referred to. If you wish to block the publication of duplicate
documents, then you can hide them while the central document is being published or define the contents
by means of filters.
Recommendation
You can use filters to define the way objects are depicted for different users so that content is not
displayed to a user multiple times.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
395
13.1.3.5 Creating Shortcuts
Shortcuts allow you to access any string within a complex project structure. For example, a project can be filed
locally as a reference from the Manager workarea so that it can quickly be made available for editing.
Note
As shortcuts refer to an object and are therefore not contained in the base group, they are not displayed
in the library.
Creating a shortcut
To create a shortcut, select the desired object and right click on the context menu to open it. Then click on New
Shortcut
.
The shortcut is now placed beneath the base group and flagged with a shortcut symbol
. If the object is a
group or book then it will be displayed with the associated sub objects.
Deleting a shortcut
To remove a shortcut, select the object with the shortcut symbol and delete it using the Delete (Del) key or via
the Edit -> Delete
menu.
Linking a shortcut
To make it easy to link objects, up to five links are displayed in the Insert link dialog. This way, content used
multiple times can be selected quickly and directly.
13.1.3.6 Unsorted Objects
As the Workarea objects are references, objects may in certain circumstances be displayed in the Explorer as
being unsorted. This will be the case if an object is not assigned to the topmost or to a subordinate group.
Unsorted objects can arise for the following reasons:

by objects migrating

when importing archives

by downloading objects from a Manager workarea

by setting a new topmost group
The Unsorted
are arranged at the bottom of the tree structure.
Note
Unsorted objects are not displayed in the library. To display them, subordinate the objects to the topmost
group.
396
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Inserting unsorted objects in the topmost group
You can assign unsorted objects to the topmost group and thus relocate them to the desired position within the
tree structure. This is done by dragging and dropping the object in question.
If you want to assign an object to a specific group or book then you can do so using the Append Unsorted
. To
do so, select an object, open the context menu and click on Append Unsorted. All objects filed as being unsorted,
are then assigned to the group or book.
Unsorted objects when using the Manager workarea
Unsorted objects may appear in a Manager workarea for a variety of reasons. This is how you deal with a base
group in the Manager workarea:

Unsorted objects may occur when using a Manager workarea if an object is downloaded without the
referenced objects.
You can now also check out the referenced objects. These will then be located within the base group in
their actual position.

Unsorted objects can also occur if a Manager workarea has changed. This is then to be reallocated
accordingly.

It is not possible to use multiple topmost groups in a workarea. When downloading additional topmost
groups, these are set as unsorted objects.
When using a Manager workarea, always create a new workarea.
13.1.4 Using the Local Trash
The Producer uses a local trash to store locally deleted objects of the local workarea. This allows the author to
see all deleted objects and to restore objects, if required.
Consider the following:

Objects in the trash are read-only. The object parameters cannot be edited.

If you have multiple references of an object, then a deleted reference is not moved to the trash. Only the
last deleted reference of an object is displayed in trash.
Local Trash tree
The Local Trash tree is displayed in the Explorer after an object has been deleted. The tree contains all locally
deleted objects.
The tree displays the following function in object editor:
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
397

Empty Trash:
Use the control to delete all objects in the trash from the workarea permanently.
Recommendation
You can hide the trash tree in Explorer with Hide Trash entry of the filter menu.
Object in trash
A deleted object displays the following functions in object editor:

Restore:
Use the control to restore an object from the trash to the original position in the tree.
Note
If you restore an object without an parent object in the tree, then the object is moved to Unsorted

.
Delete:
Use the control to delete the object from the workarea permanently.
Working with the Manager
The trash is used for the local workarea only. When using a Manager workarea, deleted objects are displayed in
the Explorer of the Manager.
When deleting an object locally, the object is set to Unmanaged. In the Manager workarea the object is moved to
Unsorted. Select Delete on Server during deletion to move the object to the Trash in the Manager workarea.
13.2 Manager Workarea
A Manager workarea helps groups of authors to collect and manage workareas centrally. This allows uniform
resources to be made available to all authors. It also allows content to be set up centrally and assigned to the
respective authors for recording. A Manager workarea is created using the Manager, which is a server-based
productive environment.
Further information about the Manager is available in the manual and the guides of the product.
Note
For more information about migrating a Manager workarea, see the chapter Migration - Manager
Workarea.
398
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
13.2.1 Menus and Functions of the Manager Workarea
If you are connected with a Manager workarea, there are the following further settings and functions in the
Producer:
Menu Manager Workarea
In the Explorer there is an additional menu Manager Workarea display, which contains functions for managing
the objects in the local workarea and the Manager workarea. Specific functions are also available in the context
menu of an object as well as in the object editor.
Further information is available in the chapter Manager Workarea Menu.
Settings
In the central configuration dialog box there are settings, which influence how you work with the
Manager workarea. Open the dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
) in the Producer -> Manager Workarea
area.
Further information is available in the chapter Manager Workarea.
Object Icons
After a connection has been made to a Manager workarea, the objects in the tree structure will have the
following additional icons:
Icon
Description
Object is locked and cannot be edited.
Write permission is available and object is not edited.
Write permission is available and object is edited.
Synchronization
To upload and download content and resources, the Producer uses the synchronization between the local
workarea and the Manager workarea. The toolbar of the Explorer contains the button Synchronize Workarea
to start synchronization.
Further information is available in the chapter Synchronization of a Manager Workarea.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
399
13.3 Synchronization of a Manager Workarea
The synchronization supports the communication between the local workarea in the Producer and the
Manager workarea of an authoring environment in Manager. The contents and resources can be shared easily,
available changes and new objects can be checked out or saved to the server as well as the editing starts with
one click.
The following chapters give you an overview about the settings and use of the synchronization and show you use
cases for your daily work.
13.3.1 Synchronization Behavior of an Object
Each object, content and resource, in a local workarea has an individual synchronization behavior. The behavior
defines how the synchronization is executed on the object.
The following synchronization behavior are available:
Behavior
Description
Example Use Case
Upload / Download
Saves the object only
locally. Changes cannot be
uploaded to the
Unmanaged
Manager workarea.
Can be used to create an
When setting the
object and to save it to the
behavior, the write
server, if needed.
permission is stored to the
server.
Allows only to open an
Read-only
object, but not to start the
Can be used, to look into
editing.
projects and not to start
the editing. Through that,
When setting the
the content can be edited
Synchronize Workarea
behavior, the write
by another author in
permission is stored to the parallel.
server.
Edit and share
Allows the editing of the
Can be used to edit an
object and the sharing
object and save it
after the editing.
afterwards to the
The behavior is
Manager workarea.
Save to Server
Finish Editing
Synchronize Workarea
recommended, to finish
400
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Behavior
Description
Example Use Case
Upload / Download
the editing at every time.
When setting the
behavior, the write
permission is stored
locally.
Allows the editing and the
owing of the write
permission of the object.
The editing cannot be
finished.
Edit and own
The behavior is
Can be used to edit an
recommended, to keep
object and to keep the
the write token during
write permission during an Synchronize Workarea
editing process.
editing.
Save to Server
When setting the
behavior, the write
permission is stored
locally.
Synchronization parameters in object editor
The Protocol area of the object editor includes the following synchronization parameters for a selected object:

Synchronization Behavior:
Displays the current synchronization behavior of the object.

Recommended Synchronization Behavior:
Displays the synchronization behavior which is recommended for other authors. The behavior is set
automatically and depends on the synchronization behavior of the object.
The recommended synchronization behavior is also displayed in the Manager.
Example
○
Synchronization Behavior: Edit and own - author owns write permission
○
Recommended Synchronization Behavior: Read-only - other authors can read, but not edit
13.3.2 Setting the Synchronization Behavior
The synchronization behavior can be set for a new object or can be changed for available objects.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
401
Synchronization behavior of a new object
The creation dialog for a new object includes the setting Synchronization Behavior. About the setting you can set
one of the following behavior:

Inherit from parent - uses the behavior of the parent macro

Unmanaged

Edit and share

Edit and own
After the creation of a new object the workarea has to be synchronized for the upload of the object to the
Manager workarea.
Synchronization behavior of available objects
A synchronization behavior can be set for an object or an object structure. To set the behavior, proceed as
follows:
1.
Select an object in the tree of the Explorer.
2.
Click on the Manager Workarea menu. Alternatively use the context menu of an object.
3.
Click on one of the entries:
○
Set synchronization Behavior
- used for one object
○
Set synchronization Behavior for all Objects
- used for an object and the sub-objects.
A dialog opens, to select the objects. Confirm with OK.
4.
Afterwards, a dialog box opens.
In the drop-down box select the needed synchronization behavior.
5.
Click on OK, to change the behavior.
After setting a synchronization behavior the object or tree is synchronized to the Manager workarea.
13.3.3 Additional Synchronization Settings
For each object there are additional settings to specify, how the object is handled for other users. In general, the
master author uses the settings to provide predefined content or resources for the authors.
The settings are:

Must Have:
Activate this setting, if the object has to be downloaded by the users automatically.
The setting can be used for content objects and resources.
Note
The setting is only supported when using a Manager workarea with the HANA Edition.
402
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration

Create Shortcut:
Activate this setting, if the object has to be added as a shortcut to the workareas of the users.
This setting can be used for content objects.
13.3.4 Synchronizing a Workarea
The synchronization of a workarea can be done by using the toolbar button Synchronize Workarea
in the
Explorer. With click on the button, the Producer synchronizes the objects of the local workarea with the
Manager workarea regarding the synchronization behavior of the objects and the available changes. Through
that the objects are saved centrally and the local workarea is updated with central changes. This means, the
synchronization runs in both directions.
Recommendation
Depending on the number of objects and the available changes in a workarea the synchronization can
take a while. The synchronization should be done as preparation of the editing as well as after the editing
of a number of objects.
Note
After the synchronization your changes are visible on the Manager with some minutes delay. This
depends on the Default Caching Value in your server settings.
Locally changed objects
In a workarea edited objects are highlighted with a star icon . This gives you an overview, if changes are only
local available.
Synchronizing when closing Producer
When closing the Producer a dialog with the buttons Synchronize and Shut down is shown. With click on the
Synchronize button the synchronization is executed. This means, available changes are saved to the server and
the write permissions of the objects with the behavior Edit and share are returned.
With click on the Shut down button local changes and write permissions are kept.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
403
13.3.5 Samples for Using Synchronization
The following samples show you, how to use the synchronization in different situations.
Create a new object (book, book page, project, etc.) in content structure
Steps to do:
1.
Start editing
parent object (i.e. group or book for inserting the new object).
2.
Select parent group and create New Project
3.
Synchronize Workarea
4.
Finish editing
with synchronization behavior Edit and share.
.
parent object and new object.
Recommendation
When using a slow internet connection, use the following alternative steps:
1.
Start editing
parent object.
2.
Select parent group and create New Project
3.
Set synchronization behavior...
4.
Finish editing
with Unmanaged.
to Edit and share (or Edit and own).
parent object and new object.
Change existing content
Steps to do:
1.
Start editing
the object you want to change.
2.
Synchronize Workarea
OR
as alternative Finish Editing
or Save to Server
.
Download new objects from Manager which are not in local workarea
Steps to do:

Synchronize Workarea
(if your local workarea has only a subtree of all content, you will get new objects
only for your subtree but not outside your tree)
OR
as alternative Menu Manager Workarea -> Check out Objects…
(a dialog shows all new objects and you
can select the needed objects for download).
Retrieve all changed objects from Manager (changes of other authors)
Steps to do:

Synchronize Workarea
OR
as alternative Start editing all objects…
404
(and Finish editing all objects…
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
) for the desired subtree.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
13.3.6 Managing Manager Workarea without
Synchronization
The synchronization is the recommended function for the management of a local workarea with a
Manager workarea. To manage a local workarea without the synchronization, deactivate the option Use
Synchronization in the central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
). The setting is available in
the section Application -> Manager Workarea.
13.4 Refreshing Workarea and Objects
To reduce the loading time of the workarea the structure is not reloaded permanently. With the refresh
functions you are able to refresh the structure or individual objects manually to the current status. This can be
done before uploading a structure to the Manager workarea or after the checkout of sub-structures.
The following functions are available:
Function
Menu / Button
Description
Example Use Case
Button in toolbar
Refresh Workarea
or
Refreshes the workarea
structure.
After changes in structure.
Menu Workarea
Refresh Workarea and All
Objects
Menu Workarea
Refreshes the workarea
After changes in structure
structure and the object
and editing of many
references.
objects.
After change of
Refresh Object
Object -> Context Menu
Refreshes the object
screenshots in
references.
interactions of
simulations.
13.5 Adapting the Workarea Structure Externally
Independent to the editing and structuring of content objects in the Explorer you can edit the workarea structure
in an exported CSV file. This can be done for example as preparation for a content project to create a first
structure of the objects or to have an overview of a complex content structure for a cleanup.
The functions Export Structure and Import Structure are available in the menu Tools -> Workarea Structure.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
405
The editing in the CSV file can be done for all content objects:

Group

Project

Book

Book Page

Text Unit
The following actions can be executed for an object:

Update:
The action changes an available object.
Can be used, to insert further object information, e.g. Keywords, Tags, or to change the position of an
object in the structure.

Add:
The action creates a new object.
Can be used, to add further objects or object structure with initial attributes, e.g. name, language.

Delete:
The action deletes an object and moves it to Unsorted.
Can be used for an cleanup of a structure.
13.5.1 Editing a Structure
The export and import of a workarea structure can be done with the following steps.
Consider the following recommendations to allow a correct editing:

before editing, export a new workarea structure with the up-to-date objects

do not move any objects in the Explorer in the meantime

do not edit any object attributes in the Explorer in the meantime
1. Export of a workarea structure
To export a structure, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the root group of a structure or sub-structure.
2.
Click on the menu entry Tools -> Workarea Structure -> Export Structure...
A dialog opens.
3.
Select a folder as target directory.
4.
Insert a File Name.
5.
Click Save to export the structure.
2. Editing of the CSV file
406
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Edit the workarea structure and the object information in the CSV file as needed and update, delete or add your
objects.
For further information about the structure and attributes of the CSV file see the chapter Structure of the CSV
File.
3. Import of a workarea structure
To import or reimport a structure, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the root group of a structure or sub-structure.
2.
Click on the menu entry Tools -> Workarea Structure -> Import Structure...
A dialog opens.
3.
Select a CSV file with the needed structure.
4.
Click Open to import the structure.
5.
A dialog opens showing the actions to be executed.
Click Yes to import the file.
Click No to cancel and to change the CSV file.
Note
When adding new objects, do not enter a UID. The UID will be created during import.
Recommendation
When adding new objects, it is recommended to specifiy the object type, the name and the language.
13.5.2 Structure of the CSV File
The CSV file includes the following columns:

Action
Contains the action which is executed during import.
Possible values:

○
update - also default, if no value is set
○
add
○
delete
Template
Contains the UID of a template object.
When creating a new object, the UID for a template can be inserted.

UID
Contains the UID of an object.
Do not change the UID to avoid an incorrect assignment.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
407
When creating a new object, the field has to be empty. The UID will be generated during the creation of an
object.

Class
Contains the object type.
Possible values:

○
group (Group)
○
project (Project)
○
book (Book)
○
slide (Book Page)
○
cdoc (Text Unit)
Caption
Contains the name of an object. The position in the column visualizes the position in the structure.
Insert a further column to create deeper structure. Leave the column headers empty.

Description
Contains the description of an object in HTML format.

ShortDesc
Contains the short description of an object in HTML format.

Keywords
Contains the keywords of an object.

ContextID
Contains the context information of an object.

Hidden
Defines the visibility of an object.
Possible values:

○
FALSE (object is visible)
○
TRUE (object is hidden)
Language
Defines the language of an object.
For possible values see chapter Content Languages Overview.

Categorie (Tags)
Contains the tags of an object.

Roles
Contains the roles of an object.

DAContextId
Contains the context information of an object for the desktop assistant.

modification_time
Contains the modification time of an object.

creation_time
Contains the creation time of an object.
408
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
In the rows the objects are ordered as the position in the Explorer.
13.6 Filters in the Workarea
The ability to set up filters is offered to enable large workareas to be better administered. These can be applied
to the tree view in the Explorer, for publishing workareas or for the use in the library by the learners.
A filter is based on one or more properties that you can freely create using conditions and assign to the desired
learning content. These kinds of properties can be master tags or tags as well as language or type of objects. If a
filter is selected, only those objects are displayed in the tree view that correspond to the filter.
13.6.1 Master Tags and Tags
Tags are terms or strings that are defined by the authors and can be used to create filters. There are two types
of tag:

Master tags
The type is used for the complete workarea and can be selected for each object. A master tag only needs
to be created once. Master tags are managed as Adaptable Resources in the resource tree.
The type is recommended for globally used tags.
For more information, see Managing Master Tags.

Tags
The type is used for an individual object and has to be created each time it is assigned.
The type is recommended for object-specific tags.
For more information, see Assigning Tags.
13.6.1.1 Managing Master Tags
Master tags are managed in the Master Tags dialog box. Choose Tools -> Edit Master Tags...
in the menu to
open this dialog box.
Creating and deleting master tags
In the Master Tags dialog box, you can create, rename and delete master tags.
To create a master tag, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the Add button.
A dialog box opens.
2.
Enter the name of the master tag.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
409
3.
Confirm with OK.
To rename a master tag, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the Rename button.
A dialog box opens.
2.
Change the name of the master tag.
3.
Confirm with OK.
To remove a master tag, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the master tag in the list.
2.
Click on the Delete button.
Once you have edited your master tags, close the dialog box by using OK.
Master tag resource
When you create master tags, a Master Tags
resource is created in the Adaptable Resources
resource tree. This resource includes all master tags. Choose the Edit Master Tags...
of the
button in the object
editor to open the editing dialog box.
The resource allows you to use the master tags consistently in different workareas and you can also handle the
resource in an authoring environment with a Manager workarea.
13.6.1.2 Assigning Tags
If you have defined master tags, you can assign them to the objects within your tree structure:
1.
Select the object in the tree structure to which you would like to assign a master tag.
2.
Then click on the button Edit Tags...
next to the parameter Tags in the object editor to open the
assignment dialog.
3.
In this dialog you can now assign one or more master tags to the object. To do so, activate the
corresponding checkbox.
4.
Click on OK to confirm the dialog.
Creating a tag
You can create additional tags in the Edit Tags dialog. This allows you to provide a filter with more complex
criteria.
The tags created in this manner are not available in the Edit Master Tags...
dialog box and only used for the
object.
To do this, enter a tag in the text box and click on Add. You can then assign the tag to your object.
If you want to delete the tag from the object, deselect the tag in the dialog and confirm with OK.
410
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
13.6.2 Creating Filters
To create a filter for your workarea, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the Edit Filter dialog box. To do this, select New Filter... from the drop-down list above the tree
structure.
2.
Enter a Filter Name in the upper text box.
If you do not enter a name, the combination of the filter criteria is inserted for it.
3.
You can specify the filter using the drop-down list.
You can find examples in the following section:
○
Selecting properties
You can select properties which are used to define the filter from the drop-down list on the left:
○
Tag:
You can select an existing master tags or tags using the drop-down list on the right.
○
Name
○
Language:
You can select a language using the drop-down list on the right.
○
Description
○
Short Description
○
Context
○
Context: Desktop Assistant
○
Roles
○
Keywords
○
UID
○
Duplication Master
○
Duplication Source
○
Object Type
○
Creation Time:
You can select a date using the calender on the right.
○
Modification Time:
You can select a date using the calender on the right.
○
Selecting conditions
Conditions can be specified to further specify the filter in the drop-down list in the middle:
○
is (not for Description, Short Description)
○
contains
○
begins with (not for Description, Short Description)
○
ends with (not for Description, Short Description)
○
does not contain (not for Description, Short Description)
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
411
○
○
is not (only for Creation Time, Modification Time)
○
is lower (only for Creation Time, Modification Time)
○
is higher (only for Creation Time, Modification Time)
○
is between (only for Creation Time, Modification Time)
○
is not between (only for Creation Time, Modification Time)
Entries
Entries can be made (e.g. Name, Description) to describe the filter in accordance with the properties.
These are not saved and must be reentered if the filter is used again.
4.
After a filter definition is created, the and / or buttons are activated that you can use to include other
definitions to refine the filter.
○
and:
All definitions have to correspond to the objects to be displayed.
○
or:
One of the definitions has to correspond to the objects to be displayed. Definitions that have been
added can be removed again by clicking the Delete button.
5.
Once you have defined your filter, you can confirm the dialog by clicking OK.
The created filter is now available in the filter selection in the Explorer.
If you have selected a filter, you can use the buttons to the right of the drop-down list to select whether you want
to edit or delete this filter.
13.6.2.1 library Settings
The library Settings define how a filter affects the display of the library and whether the filter is to be displayed in
the library or is only intended for editing in the Explorer. The settings affect both the local as well as a published
workarea.

Generate prefiltered library with filter:
By this setting the library opens in a filtered structure matching the active filter in the Explorer. If the
setting is deactivated the library displays all content, independent from the active filter.

Use filter in unfiltered library:
By this setting the filter is displayed both in the Explorer and in the library. If the setting is deactivated, the
filter can only be used in the Explorer.

Use filter in prefiltered library:
By this setting the filter is also available for selection in a prefiltered library. In case the filter will not return
any matches it will not be available within selection. By deactivating the setting, only the filter necessary
for the prefiltered status can be used.
412
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
13.6.2.2 Examples of Filter Definitions
The filter definitions can be combined any way you want. Several typical uses are described in the following
section:

Language – is – en-US
Objects are filtered according to their language with this filter. The language code has to be entered in this
case.
You can find the language code for your objects in the Language field of the object editor.

Description – contains – description text
Objects that contain a specific word or text passage as a description can be filtered out with this filter.
(similar to Name and Short description)

Context – contains – context name
Objects can be filtered using their context information with this filter.

Keywords – is not – keyword
Objects can be filtered using their keywords with this filter. In this case, objects that contain this term are
filtered out.

Object type – is – project
Objects can be filtered using their type with this filter. The object types that can be used are:
○
group - Group
○
project - Project
○
book - Book
○
slide - Book Page
○
cdoc - Text Unit
13.6.3 Filter Resource
Filters are stored in the Filters resource type. This means you can use the filters consistently in different
workareas and you can also handle the resource in an authoring environment with a Manager workarea.
The Filters
resource is stored in the resource tree of the Explorer. The resource is available once a filter has
been created.
Functions in the object editor
The following functions are available when selecting the Filters resource or a filter definition in the resource tree:

New Filter... (Resource group)
Opens the Edit Filter dialog box, where you can create a new filter.

Edit Filter... (Single resource)
Opens the Edit Filter dialog box where you can edit the selected filter.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
413

Apply Filter (Single resource)
Activates the selected filter in the Explorer.

Deactivate Filter (Single resource)
Deactivates the selected filter in the Explorer.
13.7 Searching in the Tree Structure
The search function enables you to perform specific searches for content in the tree structure of the Explorer.
The relevant content is displayed as soon as a search term is entered. You can also start the search by clicking
the Search
button or by using the Enter key. When you select the Search button again, the tree selection
jumps to the next found entry in the tree.
A dropdown list allows you to select from your previous searches.
To clear a search, choose Clear in the text field or press the ESC key.
During the search the complete tree is displayed and the search hits are highlighted. You can use the Show Only
Search Hits option to display only the search hits of your search and to hide the other objects.
Search options
Select the Show Search Options
button to display settings that further specify the content you are searching
for. The list closes again when you click Hide Search Options
.
The following options are available:
Option
Search Properties
Description
Use these options to search in specific object
properties
Name
Description
Short description
Keywords
You can search for the following object types. Enter the
technical name for the search.
Object Type
414
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
○
group - Group
○
project - Project
○
book - Book
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Option
Description
○
slide - Book Page
○
cdoc - Text Unit
UID
Language
Enter the language code to search for a language. See
Content Languages Overview.
Context
Context: Desktop Assistant
Roles
Any Other Properties
Use this option to search in the other properties of the
objects.
Further options
Match Case
Match Whole Word Only
Include Resources
Include HTML Tags
Always Show Property Names
Restore Tree Status
Use this option to search a search term case sensitive.
Use this option to search for whole words and not for
parts of words.
Use this option to also search in the resource tree.
Use this option to also search in the HTML tags of the
content.
Use this option to show the property type for a search
hit.
Use this option to open and close the tree
automatically when jumping between search hits.
13.8 Glossary of Terms
A glossary of terms allows you to add term definitions to your content. During playback the learners have the
ability to select a specific term in a text and afterwards the glossary entry appears in a pop-up window.
The glossary of terms is a group with text units for the term definitions that are applied to the content.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
415
Additionally you can display the glossary entries in a glossary view in the library. See chapter Glossary View in
library.
13.8.1 Creating a Glossary
To create a glossary, proceed as follows:
1.
Create a group using the New Group
toolbar entry.
You can use several sub-groups to structure (e.g. alphabetic) the content in the Explorer or for the glossary
view in the library.
2.
Create the text units using the New Text Unit
3.
Define the glossary entries. Each text unit includes an own term definition:
4.
toolbar entry. Insert the text units into the group.
○
Name: Insert the term. A term can consist of up to four words.
○
Document Type: Select the type Glossary
○
Description: Insert the term definition.
.
Afterwards, apply the glossary group to the workarea:
1.
Click on the Tools -> Glossary -> Apply Glossary… menu.
A setting dialog box opens.
2.
Adapt the settings in the dialog according to your needs.
3.
Confirm the dialog with OK.
Settings of the apply glossary dialog box
The settings dialog box contains the following settings:

Use Glossary from Group:
Defines the glossary group containing the glossary text units.

Specific Language Only:
Defines, whether the glossary will only be applied to content with a specific content language.

Language:
Defines the content language for the setting Specific Language Only.

Apply Recursively:
Defines, whether the glossary is also used for the sub-objects of the selected content structure.

Apply to Descriptions / Short Descriptions:
Defines, whether the glossary will be applied to the respective object properties.

Apply inside Projects / Book Pages:
Defines, whether the glossary will be applied to the content of the respective objects.
416
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Note
Make sure to use a consistent spelling in your content. To display a glossary entry correctly, the spelling
of a term in a text has to be equal with the glossary entry.
13.8.2 Removing a Glossary
The applied links of a glossary can be removed from the content or a specific group, when no longer needed or
outdated.
To remove a glossary, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the group in the Explorer.
2.
Click on Tools -> Glossary -> Remove Glossary… menu.
A setting dialog opens.
3.
Adapt the settings in the dialog box according to your needs.
4.
Confirm the dialog with Ok.
Settings of the remove glossary dialog box
The settings dialog box contains the following settings:

Use Glossary from Group:
Defines the glossary group with the contained text units.

Specific Language Only:
Defines, that the glossary will only applied to content with a specific content language.

Language:
Defines the content language for the setting Specific Language Only.

Apply Recursively:
Defines, that the glossary is also used for the sub objects of the content structure.

Apply to Descriptions / Short Descriptions:
Defines, that the glossary will be applied to the parameters.

Apply inside Projects / Book Pages:
Defines, that the glossary will be applied to the content of this objects.
13.8.3 Importing a Glossary
For the easy creation of a glossary you can import a list (CSV file) of glossary entries. During the import the
Producer creates a text unit with the type Glossary
for each glossary entry and inserts the texts contained in
the CSV file. Thus, you do not have to create each text unit individually.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
417
The list of glossary texts should be a simple CSV file with the following structure:

first column: term
will be imported into the Name parameter

second column: term definition
will be imported into the Description parameter
To import the CSV file, proceed as follows:
1.
Create a group using the New Group
toolbar entry.
2.
Click on Tools -> Glossary -> Import Glossary… menu.
A setting dialog opens.
3.
Adapt the settings:
○
Import into Group:
Defines the glossary group in which to import the glossary.
○
Language:
Defines the content language for the text units.
4.
Confirm the dialog with Ok.
If you want to apply the glossary, see the chapter Creating a Glossary.
13.8.4 Using the Glossary
Glossary view in library
The created glossary can be displayed as glossary view in the library. Via a button in the header bar the learner
can open the view. The course structure displays the contained groups of a glossary and the content view
displays the content of all text units for a selected group. The glossary root group will not be shown in the
content tree of the library.
Learners can use the glossary view to look up specific terms and descriptions, which are part of the learning
content.
Activate the glossary view as follows:
1.
Open the central configuration dialog box using the Tools -> Settings...
2.
Select the section Playback Settings -> library -> Glossary.
3.
Select the created glossary in the Glossary group setting.
4.
Confirm the dialog with Ok.
menu.
Further settings

Use library language (Playback Settings -> library -> Glossary):
Defines, that only glossary entries with the language of the root group will be shown in the library.
Deactivate the option to show the glossary entries of all languages.
If the root group uses the language Multiple languages all glossary entries will be shown.
418
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Glossary in documentation
When you generate a documentation, you can define the glossary as fragment to include all used glossary
entries as table into the document. All glossary entries are linked in the document and the user can jump to the
definition in the glossary table.
See the chapter Fragments for further information.
13.8.5 Glossary Styles
A glossary uses different styles for text and bubbles during the playback of content. This is necessary to
distinguish this type of content from the general content and to make it clearer to read for the user.
Glossary link
A special text style is available for the display of a glossary link in a text. The style is used automatically after the
glossary is applied.
The text style Glossary Link can be edited in the text style editor (menu Tools -> Customization -> Edit Text
Styles...
) and is located in the section Inline Styles.
Glossary in trainer
When you play back the library, a simulation or a book, the trainer functionality displays a glossary entry in a
window. The style of the window is defined using the current trainer style.
Glossary in a desktop assistant
When you play back desktop assistant content, you can define an individual bubble in the settings to display a
term entry. The central configuration dialog box (menu Tools -> Settings...
) under Desktop
Assistant: Playback Settings -> Desktop Assistant -> Glossary Bubble contains the following settings:

Style:
Defines the appearance of the glossary bubble. Here you can select a bubble style resource from the dropdown list.

Size:
Defines the width and height of the glossary bubble in pixels.
13.9 BPM Import
To structure your business processes in the Producer, you can import BPM structures (built in Business
Process Model (BPM) applications) into the workarea. A group and project structure with relevant object names
is created in the Explorer. A tree based on the structure is available where you can create the required content.
The structures of the following BPM applications can be imported:
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
419

ViFlow

Nimbus

Symbio

Aris
Note
To import an Aris structure, you need to have installed Symbio Suite, which the Producer uses for the
import process.
13.9.1 Importing a BPM Structure
Import your BPM structure as follows. Note that the import process can differ depending on the BPM
application you are using.
1.
Create the required process model in your BPM application.
2.
Publish this:
○
ViFlow
Publish the process model under Edit -> Publish from ViFlow. The structure.xml is created here as part
of the ViFlow web model in the html folder.
○
Nimbus
Publish the process model as a simplified XML structure (Simplified XML) to add all the process
steps to a file.
○
Symbio
Publish the process model as an XML structure.
○
Aris
Publish the process model as an XML structure.
3.
Now change to the Producer.
4.
In the Explorer, open the Tools -> Business Process Models menu and select the corresponding import
command for the required structure. The import dialog opens.
○
Aris
The first time you import an Aris structure, a settings dialog opens. Enter the directories where the
executable file for the Symbio Suite and the temporary files are located. Confirm with OK.
See also chapter Settings for the Aris Import.
5.
Select the published structure file and click Open.
6.
A settings dialog opens. Modify the following settings and confirm with OK:
420
○
Import type: new structure, update structure
○
Create empty projects
○
Language (only Symbio)
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
The folder structure is then created in the Explorer, where you can edit it and start creating content.
13.9.2 Settings for Aris Import
The settings dialog for Aris import can be opened using the Tools -> Business Process Models -> Aris Import:
Settings… menu. The following settings are available:

Symbio CLA-EXE:
The setting specifies the location of the cla.exe file for Symbio Suite.Symbio Suite must be installed to
execute the import.

Directory for temporary files:
During the import process, temporary files are created. Use this setting to specify a directory to store the
files.
13.9.3 Updating a BPM Structure
Updating a BPM structure in the Producer allows you to insert modified or new content from a BPM application
into an existing structure. This can be done using the import function by importing the updated structure. See
the chapter Import of a BPM structure.
To perform the update, you need to select the import type Update Structure in the import settings dialog. Also
select the language of the imported structure for the Symbio import.
The update is recommended for unmodified structures of the Producer, because manually created objects will
be moved into Unsorted. In the structure changed objects will be resorted like in the import structure.
13.9.4 Exporting Symbio Links
The export Symbio links function allows you to export the content structure of a workarea to an XML file for use
in the Symbio Suite. The file includes the links of the modes and documentation, as well as the title and language
information of the content.
Symbio links can be exported as follows:
1.
Open the Tools -> Business Process Models -> Export Symbio Links… menu in the Explorer.
2.
Select the base path of the workarea for the links. Confirm with OK.
3.
Select the target directory and insert a file name.
4.
Click Save to execute the export.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
421
13.10
Inserting a File
In addition to the learning content and documentation that has been created, you can insert other files. The
Insert file...
function in the Producer is available to you for this purpose. For example, these files can be Word
or PDF files containing additional or general information but images and media files are also possible.
Inserting a file
This is how you insert a file:
1.
In Explorer, select an object in your tree structure.
2.
In the object editor header you will find the Insert file...
3.
Select the file that you want in the open dialog and click on Open.
function. Click on it.
The file is inserted in the last place within the object.
After they have been inserted, the files integrated in this way can be selected both in the Explorer and the library
and can also be inserted in book pages.
Note
If you insert a Word document, it is integrated along with everything else when a master document is
created. Therefore ensure that the document is hidden, if necessary, before a master document is
generated.
Recommendation
Instead of using the function to insert files, you can also drag and drop them to the Explorer. This inserts
the file in the currently selected object.
Updating a file
An imported file can be re-imported and updated by clicking on Update file
. The Producer accesses the
original file location – this is the path that was entered and saved upon importing the file under the setting
Original Path.
The setting Last Import displays the date and time that the file was last imported so that you can verify whether
the file is up-to-date.
Recommendation
This option is only displayed if the original file is available. Otherwise, you can import a new file by clicking
on the option Replace file...
422
.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
13.11 Reference Counter
The reference counter displays all existing object references from a workarea in the Explorer. This allows you to
find and manage references of your objects.
References are:

Referenced instances of an object

Links of an object by another object
Number of references
To enable the reference counter, select menu View -> Show References Counter. A number will appear in front of
an object in the tree structure to indicate how often it has been referenced.
Referenced by
The Referenced by parameter in the object editor shows you the existing references for each selected object. An
entry displays the tree path and is linked with the object. You can select a link to jump to the object in the tree.
The selected reference is bold marked.
Beside the parameter there are the following controls:

Show tree dependencies:
Displays the position of an object in the structure. If an object is referenced, then all positions are
displayed.

Show content dependencies:
Displays the objects, which are linking the selected object.

Show all dependencies:
Displays all tree and content dependencies.

Dependencies...
Opens a dialog box with a list of all existing dependencies for an object within a workarea. See also
Dependencies Dialog Box.
13.11.1 Dependencies Dialog Box
The Dependencies dialog box displays all existing dependencies for an object within a workarea. This could be
other objects, files and resources. Displaying dependencies will provide you with an overview of existing
references, which is useful for publishing purposes and for the object management.
The dialog box can be opened from the context menu entry Dependencies... for each object. With activated
menu entry View -> Show References Counter, a control Dependencies… is displayed in the object editor for the
Referenced by parameter.
Display type
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
423
The following settings allow you to specify the displayed dependencies:

Show Dependencies:
Displays the dependent objects and resources of the object.
For example: Macroset, Bubble Style, linked content.

Show Publishing Dependencies:
Displays the dependent objects and resources of the object for the publishing.
For example: Playback Settings, subobjects.

Show Referrers:
Displays the dependencies in accordance with the individual objects which refer a content or resource.
For example: All dependent projects which are using macroset Standard.

Show UIDs:
Displays the UIDs of the objects additionally to the name.

Show Advanced Options:
Displays further options to show or hide dependencies in the list.
Advanced options
With activated setting Show Advanced Options the following settings are displayed:

Use Options:
Allows you to specify the displayed information of the list. Further options are enabled.

Use Options and Rescan:
Allows you to specify the displayed information of the list and rescans the dependencies of the object.
Further options are enabled.
A rescan is recommended, if outdated dependencies are displayed.

Recursive:
Displays also the corresponding sub-objects for the selected object.

References in Structure:
Displays existing references that have been directly allocated to an object.

References by Parameter:
Displays existing references that exist due to certain settings that have been defined.

Resources Only:
Displays resources that have been referenced.

Resolve Fallback Values:
Displays resources which are specified as fallback.
Using the list
In the dependencies list of the dialog box you can use the following actions to show a specific object:

Jump to object in explorer
Double-click a list entry to show the object in Explorer.
The object is selected in Explorer tree.
424
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration

Jump to object in dependencies list
Press Ctrl and double-click a list entry to show a referred object in the list. Only possible, if Show Referrers
is activated.
The object is selected in the dependencies list.
13.12 Reducing the File Size of the Content
The table contains tips for reducing the file size of the content:
Recommendation
Explanation
Function
Central Configuration Dialog:
Reduce screen resolution
(Simulation)
Reduce the recording screen
Authoring Settings -> Recording -
resolution
General -> Size
(1024 x 768 is usually sufficient).
See also chapter Recording General
Project Editor:
Merge identical Screenshots
(Simulation,
Tools -> Bulk Changes -> Merge
Merge Screen macros in a project.
Documentation)
Screens
See also chapter Merge Screens
Explorer:
Publish content
(Simulation)
Publishing the content will
Menu Workarea -> Publish -> Publish
automatically remove all files not
Content...
required for playback.
See also chapter Publishing a
Workarea
Project Editor:
Cropping the screenshots for
documents
Tools -> Bulk Changes -> Auto Crop
Use auto crop to reduce the
all Screenshots
screenshot size for documents.
(Documentation)
See also chapter Auto Crop all
Screenshots
Central Configuration Dialog:
Reduce the color depth for
Reduce the color depth for
Documentation Settings ->
documents
documentation screenshots.
Documentation Type -> Screenshots
Besides RGB quality, you can also
(Documentation)

choose Indexed Color or Grayscale.
documentation

SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Quality in Word/PDF
Quality in HTML
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
425
Recommendation
Explanation
Function
documentation
See also chapter Settings of the
Subcategories
Create a media folder in a book. The
folder is published with the book but
should not be visible to the learner.
You can add media files to the
Use referenced content
(Books)
media folder at any time. If a large
quantity of media files is used, the
folder can be divided into images,
videos, audio and so on.
Insert any media file into a book
page by importing it directly from
the workarea media folder as a
reference to avoid redundant files.
Before importing media files into
Check media content size before
the content folder, check the size of
importing
each file and reduce the file size if
necessary (by compressing images
(Books)
or using a different video or audio
codec).
Central Configuration Dialog:
Application -> Templates
Use templates
(Books)
To avoid redundancies caused by
See also chapter Templates for
background images, create a
Content Objects
template for each book page.
Explorer:
New Book Page dialog -> Template
See also chapter New Book Page
Example
Steps to reduce the size of documents
Standard project with 20 recorded steps &
documentation
+ Merge Screens
426
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Result in KB
4850
4065
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Steps to reduce the size of documents
Result in KB
+ Merge Screens
2414
+ Auto Crop
+ Merge Screens
+ Auto Crop
1374
+ Grayscale
+ Merge Screens
+ Auto Crop
935
+ Indexed Color
SAP Enable Now
Workarea and Administration
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
427
14 Interface and Components
This chapter describes the structure of the Producer. This involves going into the Producer interface's different
areas and functions.
The interface of the Producer switches between three main views:

the Explorer, which is used to edit the currently selected workarea

the project editor, which is used to edit an open project

the book page editor, which is used to edit an open book page
14.1 Explorer
The Explorer serves to organize the content objects and resources in a workarea.
The Explorer window is divided into the areas:
A.
Menus
You will find more detailed information on the menus under the section Menu Overview.
428
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
B.
Toolbars
C.
Tree structure
Structures the resources and content objects.
D.
Object editor
Includes the object properties.
The structure built for the workarea within the Explorer is also the structure displayed later on in the library of
the published workarea.
14.1.1 Tree Structure
The tree structure displays and structures the resources and the content of a selected workarea.
View of the objects
The tree shows all objects with an icon and name.
You are able to show further information by using the View menu. The available information are:

Unknown References

UIDs

Language

Language Icons

References Counter
Administration of the objects
The individual objects in the workarea can be edited directly in the tree structure. The following actions are
possible:

Select an object to display the object parameters in object editor.

Context menu:
The context menu of an object provides object specific functions for editing the object.
There are the following ways to move or to create an object in the tree:

Drag&drop
Moves the object from one position in the tree to another.

Drag&drop + Shift key
Creates a duplicate of the object at the dropped position.

Drag&drop + Ctrl key + Shift key
Creates a reference of the object at the dropped position.

Drag&drop + right mouse button
Opens a context menu, which allows you to move, duplicate or reference an object.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
429
Note
The order of the resources cannot be changed.
The modes of a project cannot be moved to another project.
Using the second tree
Beside the general tree an additional second tree can be shown. It supports you to edit the structure of a
complex tree. You can use the second tree to compare parts of the tree or to move or create objects.
Note, that when selecting an object in the second tree, there are no parameters displayed in the object editor.
Always use the default tree.
On the top of the tree there are the following controls:

Second Tree - Horizontal

Second Tree - Vertical
Activate or deactivate the control to hide or to show the second tree.
14.1.2 Object Editor
The object editor allows you to edit the settings for an object selected in the Explorer. Information on the object
as well as the current settings are displayed in the editor. In addition, actions are displayed in the editor's
heading that can be used for the selected object.
14.2 Project Editor
The project editor can be used to record, create and edit projects. The project editor displays macros, settings
and screenshots as well as specific functions for the editing.
430
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
The project editor’s main components are:
A.
Menus
You will find more detailed information on the menus under the section Menu Overview
B.
Toolbars
C.
Thumbnail view
D.
Step view / documentation view
E.
Macro editor
Navigation in the project editor
An alternative and user-friendly way to navigate in the project editor is by using the mouse's scroll wheel and the
keyboard. This facilitates scrolling up and down in the workarea and alternating between objects from the step
view. In addition, the keyboard allows you to easily jump between steps and select macros. The following
shortcuts can be used:

Home: jumps to the first step

End: jumps to the last step

Page Up / Page Down: alternates between the steps or macros, depending on the currently selected
object.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
431
14.2.1 Thumbnail View
The thumbnail view sequentially displays the steps with their screenshots and corresponding macros. When
selecting a macro, the corresponding screenshot is displayed in the step view with its highlights and bubbles,
and the macros settings are displayed in the macro editor.
Changing the display size
The display size of the screenshots can be adjusted by changing the size of the thumbnail view of by using the
mouse wheel with pressed Ctrl key.
Changing the order
The order of the macros or the steps can be changed using drag & drop. You can even move one or more
macros within a step or all steps as a whole as well as assign new positions to one or more steps in the project.
Recommendation
Changing the order of steps or macros always results in a subsequent change to the project itself. For this
reason you should make sure the project is still a coherent unit.
14.2.2 Steps of a Project
A project uses steps to organize the content in sections. Generally, a step contains a screen and an interaction
macro and can contain further macros. All steps are numbered consecutively and have a step name.
Steps are automatically inserted into the project during recording for each new screenshot. You can add further
steps by using the menu entry Insert -> Add Step
or during recording.
The order of the steps can be changed in the thumbnail view. A step can be previewed in step view.
Basic attributes
A step has the following attributes:

Name:
Contains the name of the step. In general, the name of the application window is entered during recording.
You can change the name for your content.

Translate Manually:
Specifies, that the name will be used for translation when exporting a translation file. The parameter is
activated when a name has been changed.
You can activate the option manually to translate the name.
Steps in simulation projects
432
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
The step names are displayed in the progress display of the trainer during playback in demo mode. You can hide
the step names in Playback Settings.

Show in Progress Display:
Specifies, that the step is displayed as control in progress display of trainer bar.

Jump Target:
Specifies, that the step can be used as jump target for creating a branch.
Note
Within a recorded project, the first step has a special status. It generally includes only the Simulation Start
macro in order to properly initialize the project for playback. For this reason, it is never set as a Jump
Target.
The step names can also be used as chapter title in a generated documentation. Active the use of the step name
in Documentation Settings.
14.2.3 Step View
The step view displays the screenshot of the Screen macro and the content of the macros for a step. It allows
you to edit the size and the position of the highlights and the bubbles directly on the screenshot. You can also
add additional macros by using the toolbar.
Step view display
From the step view, different views can be activated to facilitate editing and positioning objects. A variety of
options are available from the toolbar:

The Modes button allows you to switch over to selected bubbles for editing purposes, allowing you to
preview the bubbles in each of the different modes. This setting will have an effect on the activated preview
mode.
○

Edit Mode (for each mode)
For steps with more than one macro, all bubbles can also be viewed simultaneously. This facilitates
positioning bubbles and ensures that other areas in the application are not hidden by the bubbles by
accident.
○
Show Bubbles for Step
○
Show Bubble for Macro
Position objects
There are two ways to position objects:

Via Drag & Drop

Via a keyboard using the arrow keys
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
433
14.2.4 Documentation View
The documentation view is a WYSIWYG editor for editing documentation in simulations. A document is
displayed in HTML format so that you can preview the content and structure. This editor allows you to quickly
and easily make any necessary changes to your documentation.
The documentation view only displays project content that can be inserted into documentation. Content that is
stored in another location other than in the project editor, such as description text, will not be displayed here.
Opening the documentation view
The Documentation View
can be enabled from the toolbar and used instead of the step view. Alternatively,
you can open this from the menu View -> Components -> Documentation View.
Editing documentation
The following editing options are available from the documentation view:

Hide macros for output into documentation
Click on Hide in Documentation so that the selected macro will not appear in the document. In order to
display a hidden macro, click on Show in Documentation.
Note that documentation macros cannot be hidden.

Adjusting highlights
Macro highlights can be changed individually. Such changes have only effect on documentation - the
highlights for the simulation remain unchanged.

Adjusting text
Text that can be edited is highlighted in yellow when the macro is selected. To make modifications to text,
double-click on the desired text from the HTML editor.
Note
Editing text in the documentation view can affect the different modes. Only make changes here when you
are sure that the changes should also be applied to the other modes.
14.2.5 Macro Editor
The parameters for a macro are displayed in the macro editor and can be directly edited there as well. At the top
of the editor, there are additional options for enhancing your macros. Select a macro in thumbnail view to
display the settings.
The parameters are divided into subcategories which you can open and close by clicking on the plus and minus
symbol. By selecting a parameter, a description will be displayed at the bottom of the macro editor.
Activating a paramter
434
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
The green button located in front of each setting indicates whether the setting is active
or inactive
. Select
the button to activate or deactivate the setting.
Layout selection
A Layout Selection in the title bar allows you to show and hide detailed settings for a macro. You can choose
between Standard Layout and Advanced Layout. The settings of the Advanced Layout are recommended for
advanced users, who need a detailed set of settings.
In macros that contain text the HTML editor is opened when selecting the text box.
Selecting multiple macros
If you would like to edit a specific setting for a type of macro, it is now possible to select several macros at one
time, which will display the common setting to be edited for all the macros at once.
If the settings vary for the selected macros, a note will automatically appear on the screen. From here, you can
save the setting, edit it for all the macros or deactivate it. To make changes to the setting, click on the button in
front of the name. This will open a menu with the options Determine joint value and Delete values. Select the
desired action and edit the value as desired.
14.2.6 History
The History can be viewed as the memory of the Producer. It chronologically documents all actions that are
taken, starting with the opening of the project. This allows the user to return to any stage in the editing of the
document, going back to the opening or creation of the project. With a click on the History list item, it is possible
to directly undo or redo one or more actions. To provide the user with a better overview, the actions taken since
the document was last saved are marked with a plus. The history is used as the basis for the Undo and Redo
commands in the Edit menu.
14.3 Book Editor
The book editor is where the book pages are edited. This is where you can define the book pages' design and
create the content.
After a book page has been created in the Explorer, it is opened in the book editor. You also have the option of
opening the book editor in the Explorer by double clicking on a book page.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
435
The book page editor is broken down into the following areas:
A.
Menus
B.
Toolbars
In the toolbar you will find a complete object overview from which you can insert the objects. Functionality
is also provided for editing the objects and book page.
C.
Object editor
The object editor is where you can define the individual objects' properties. To this end, when you select an
object you are offered corresponding parameters that are subdivided into various areas.
D.
Object overview
○
Book explorer
The book explorer depicts the content of a book, its book pages and groups.
○
Object list
The object list provides you with an overview of all the objects inserted on the book page.
E.
Book page view
The book view is where the book page is shown for editing. Select the inserted objects to edit them. You
can use drag and drop to place the objects in the desired position.
The book view operates on the “what you see is what you get” (WYSIWYG) principle. That means that your
book page will be displayed in the book reader or library in the same way you created it.
In order to be able to test the objects, select the Preview function in the toolbar. The Producer will then
activate the corresponding functionality, such as launching a mode.
436
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
14.3.1 Object List
The object list provides you with an overview of all the objects inserted on the book page. You will find the book
page's background in the topmost position. Select this entry to edit the background.
The objects that have been inserted are itemized in a list and appear in the same order as they do on the
respective level. Selecting an object from the list will highlight this object on the book page. It is now ready to be
edited.
Changing an object‘s level
To position an object on a different level in a book page, simply drag & drop it to the desired position and level.
Hiding objects
From the list of objects, you can define whether objects should be hidden or visible on the book page. This is an
important setting to remember to use with actions. An Eye icon is displayed for each object, indicating its
current status: Show or Hide. To change an object's status, click on the desired status icon.
14.3.2 Book Explorer
The book explorer is a component of the book page editor and displays the structure of a book with book pages
and substructures. This supports the editing of an book and be used for the following actions:

Selecting a book page
Selecting a book page in the structure shows it in the book page view and can be edited. You can scroll with
the mouse wheel through the structure to display the pages.

Creating a book page
Select a book to create a new book page. A command is displayed in the book page view. Click on it to open
the New Book Page dialog box.

Deleting a book page
A selected book page can be deleted by using the Del key.

Changing the structure
The order of book pages or substructures can be changed with drag & drop.

Saving a book
When the book is saved, all changes to all book pages in the book are saved and not just the currently
displayed book page.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
437
14.3.3 Add Audio Dialog Box
The Add Audio dialog box is part of the book page editor and can be used to record audio for book pages. The
audios will be inserted as Page Sound. The Add Audio dialog box can be opened using the Add Audio
toolbar
button.
The dialog box has the following settings and functions:

Toolbar:
The toolbar contains the following functions:
○
Previous Book Page / Next Book Page:
Use the buttons to navigate up and down in the page list for selecting a book page.
○
Play Audio / Stop Audio:
The Play Audio
button allows you to play back the text and then make changes afterwards.
With the Stop Audio
○
button, you can stop the playback.
Delete Audio:
Use the button to delete the audio for the current book page.
○
Edit Text to Speech...
Opens the Edit Text to Speech dialog box for creating audio with text to speech.
See also the chapter Text to Speech Dialog Box.
○
Start Recording / End Recording:
Click Start Recording
to begin recording and then click End Recording
to stop recording.
Once the recording is finished, the recording dialog is closed.
○
Volume Level:
The Volume Level displays the current volume of the spoken text during the recording.

Pages:
Displays a list of all book pages of the book. Select a book page to record audio or use the Previous Book
Page / Next Book Page buttons.

Preview:
Displays a preview of the selected book page.

Notes:
Allows you to insert notes for the selected book page. Text for text to speech will also be inserted into the
Notes field.
14.4 HTML Editor
The HTML editor allows you to create and to edit the text of your content. The text is created in HTML format.
By clicking on a text field the HTML editor is opened in a pop-up window.
438
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Note
The HTML editor is entirely HTML-based and does not support any additional integrated scripts. Scripts
will be automatically deleted during saving in order to avoid problems with displaying and using the
content.
14.4.1 Functions of the HTML Editor
The HTML editor offers the following functions:
Function / Icon
Description
Text styles
Paragraph Style
Character Style
Block Style
Table Style
Contains the paragraph and list styles. Select a style to
specify a style for the current paragraph.
Contains the character styles. Select a style to specify
a style for the current marked text.
Contains the block styles. Select a style to insert a
block.
Contains the table styles. Select a style to insert a
table.
Text formatting and structure
Font Type
Font Size
Contains a list with all the available fonts that are
installed on your PC.
Contains a list with predefined values for various font
sizes.
Changes the format of the text.
Bold / Italic / Underlined
Changes the color of the text.
Font Color
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
See chapter Color Selection Dialog Box.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
439
Function / Icon
Description
Resets the highlighted text back to its original format.
Remove Formatting
Creates a list of the selected type for a paragraph. The
list uses the default styles for bulleted and numbered
Numbered List / Bulleted List
lists.
Changes the alignment for a paragraph.
Align Left / Center / Align Right
Increases or decreases the indent for a paragraph.
Outdent / Indent
Edit and insert controls
Allows you to:
Edit Table

add a column or a row

delete a column or a row

delete a table
Allows you to insert:
Insert Object

a link

a placeholder

an image
Toggles the text direction for a corresponding
language.
Left to Right / Right to Left
Switches the background color from yellow to grey in
order to better view and edit text with lighter or darker
Toggle Background Color
font colors as needed.
Design and Source view
In the footer of the HTML editor you can switch between
440
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Design view and
Source view.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
The Design view shows the text and inserted objects in WYSIWYG mode. It is the default view of the HTML
editor.
The Source view shows the HTML tags of the text. It allows you to adapt the HTML of your text.
14.4.2 Inserting a Link
You can insert a link into your text or for an object in order to call up a website or an object from your workarea.
Inserting a link
To insert a link, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a text or a position in the HTML editor.
2.
Choose Insert Object
3.
Select the option Insert link...
.
The Insert Link dialog box is opened.
4.
Select one of the options:

Current Object

Workarea

Free
5.
Select an object or enter a link.
6.
Confirm with OK.
Editing a link
To edit a link, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a linked text in the HTML editor.
2.
Choose Insert Object
3.
Select the option Insert link...
.
The Insert Link dialog box is opened with the linked object or shows the entered link.
4.
Edit the link.
5.
Confirm with OK.
Inserting a link to a step
If you are working within a project, you can insert a link within the project to jump to another step:
1.
Choose Insert Object
.
2.
Select the option Insert step link...
A dialog box is opened.
3.
Select a step.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
441
4.
Confirm with OK.
14.4.3 Inserting a Placeholder
The placeholder inserts a variable that is dynamically assigned to specific content. This allows you to reuse
available content and to change information centrally. The inserted texts can be individually formatted.
The following placeholders can be inserted:

Macro: Object Image (inside of project)

Macro: Object Name (inside of project)

Macro: Hotkey (inside of project)

Macro: Input Text (inside of project)

Object Type: Name

Object Type: Description

Object Type: Short Description

Book Page: Text to Speech Text
You can only insert content from the objects themselves or the objects at the next higher level as placeholders
in this case.
Note
If no content can be assigned to a placeholder, it is displayed as a variable. In this case, check the selected
placeholder and the desired content.
Inserting a placeholder
To insert a placeholder, proceed as follows:
1.
Click Insert Placeholder... about the Insert Object
function.
A dialog box opens with the available placeholders.
2.
Select a placeholder.
3.
Click Insert.
Inserting dictionary texts
Dictionary texts can be inserted from the recording dictionary as placeholders. The texts are displayed in the
activated object language.
The placeholders are to be entered manually in the Placeholder dialog box. You can find the respective dictionary
ID in the dialog box for editing dictionary texts.
A placeholder should be written as follows

442
Pure text :
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components

HTML text:
Inserting individual content
In addition to the standard placeholders, you can also specify placeholders for specific objects. The respective
UID of the object and an exclamation mark are to be added to the displayed placeholder variables in the text box.
This should have the following form:

Standard:

Extended:
14.4.4 Inserting an Image
The option Insert Object

allows you to insert images. The following options are available:
Insert image file...:
Allows you to insert an image. The image will be imported in your workarea.
A dialog box opens, for importing the image. Select the location and the image.

Insert image from workarea...:
Allows you to insert an image, that is available in your workarea
The Insert Image dialog box opens, displaying the content of the workarea. Select the image and click on
OK.
14.4.5 Inserting a Screenshot
By clicking on the option Insert Object
, screenshots can be created from various views and then inserted into
a bubble. The following options are available for defining a screenshot:

Insert screenshot of window:
By moving the mouse over the screen display, specific areas will be recognized and outlined in red. Click on
the mouse button to select the desired outlined area.

Insert screenshot of object:
By moving the mouse over the screen display, specific objects will be recognized and outlined in red. Click
on the mouse button to select the outlined object.

Insert screenshot of area:
With the mouse, pull the red frame over the desired area and release the mouse button.
After selecting the area, an editing window will appear where you can make adjustments as needed. To complete
the process, click on Confirm Selection
. The dialog box will close and the screenshot will be inserted into the
HTML editor.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
443
14.4.6 Pasting Texts and Images
When pasting copied text or images into the HTML editor, in some cases it may be possible that the formatting
is displayed incorrectly. The HTML editor is equipped with several options to prevent this from happening. Copy
your text or image and click on the right mouse button in the HTML editor. The context menu option Paste in
format will appear with the following options:
For inserting text:

Formatted text – the formatting will be preserved

Unformatted text - removes any existing formatting
For inserting images:

Formatted text – the formatting will be preserved

Bitmap image – inserts the image as a bitmap
Recommendation
Since the HTML Editor displays text in HTML coding, a new paragraph (<p>...</p>) will be created by
clicking on the Enter key, which should normally give you larger line spacing. If, however, you would like
to create a line break (<br />), then click on the keys Shift + Enter.
14.4.7 Searching for Text Strings
If there are longer and more complex text strings in the HTML editor, there is a text search function to facilitate
finding specific text strings. Click on the option Search text. A dialog box will appear.
Dialog box for searching text
A text field appears where you can enter one or more words to search for. The search function has several
options to choose from to quicken the search:

Match whole word only:
If this option is deactivated, possible matches will be shown directly during the search. If this option is
activated, the results will be displayed only when the entire word is found in the text.

Highlight all matches:
If this option is activated, all the matches found will be highlighted. If this option is deactivated, only the
first match will be highlighted.

Match case:
This defines whether the search should be case sensitive. If this option is activated, the search function will
only find exact matches. If this option is deactivated, capital or lowercase letters are irrelevant for the
search.
444
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
The buttons Next and Previous allow you to switch between the displayed results. If no matches are found, a
message will appear at the bottom of the dialog box.
14.4.8 Overview of Supported HTML Tags
The following HTML tags are supported by the HTML editor:
Caution
If tags other than those listed here are used, they will be automatically deleted upon saving the changes in
your project. This is important because using tags that are not supported could cause problems when
displaying or using the learning content.
Description
Tags
Paragraph
<p>…</p>
Attributes
Alignment:
align=”left,center,right”
<h1>...</h1>
Headings
<h1> to <h6>
italic: <i>…</i>
Text markup
bold: <b>…</b>
underlined: <u>…</u>
Line break
<br />
Links
<a>…</a>
Link target: href=”…”
Images
<img />
Image source: src=”…”
unorder list: <ul>…</ul>
Lists
order list: <ol>…</ol>
list item: <li>…</li>
Border: border=”…”
Table
<table>…</table>
Cellspacing: cellspacing="..."
Cellpadding: cellpadding="..."
Table row
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
<tr>…</tr>
Height: height=”…”
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
445
Description
Tags
Attributes
Alignment: align=”…”
Vertical alignment: valign=”…”
Table cell
Width: width=”…”
<td>…</td>
Background color: backgroundcolor=”…”
Merge cells: colspan="..."
CSS styles
Inline-Element
Style attributes: style="..."
<span>...</span>
14.5 Audio Editor
The audio editor is used to create and edit audio files in the project editor or book page editor.
In the project editor, the audio editor can be opened using the menu: View -> Components.
In the book page editor, the audio editor can be opened using the Edit Audio...
button in the object editor of
the Page object.
Structure of the audio editor
Area / Icon
Toolbar
Description
In the toolbar of the audio editor, there are several
functions for creating and editing an audio file.
Import Audio File
Record Audio
Edit Text to Speech
Playback functions
Play, Pause, Stop, Repeat
Editing functions
Cut, Copy, Insert, Delete
446
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Area / Icon
Description
Insert Silence
Trim Audio
Fade In / Fade Out
Normalize Audio
Change Dynamics
Zoom functions
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Show Selection, Zoom to Fit
Audio track
The audio track is displayed below the toolbar.
14.5.1 Text to Speech Dialog Box
The Text to Speech dialog box allows you to create and convert texts into spoken audio files. The editor can be
opened using the Edit Text to Speech...
button.
The editor includes the following settings and functions:

Voice:
The setting defines the voice used for the generation of Text to Speech.

Text:
Here you enter the text that you want to generate as an audio file.
In simulation projects, the current bubble text of the step is available in the dialog and can be edited. When
a text is edited, the macro Text to Speech Override
is created automatically.
Choose OK to convert the text to audio.

Silence:
The setting defines a silence, which is inserted at the beginning of an audio file before the Text to Speech
starts. The value is defined in milliseconds. If you do not want any silence at the beginning, then enter the
value '0'.

Play/Stop:
The Play
button allows you to play back the text and then make changes afterwards.
With the Stop
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
button, you can stop the playback.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
447
14.5.2 Recording Dialog Box
The recording dialog for audio is used for recording spoken text. The dialog can be opened using the Record
Audio...
button.
The editor has the following settings and functions:

Volume Level:
The Volume Level displays the current volume of the spoken text during the recording.

Start Recording / End Recording:
Click Start Recording
to begin recording and then click End Recording
to stop recording.
Once the recording is finished, the recording dialog is closed.

Settings:
Click Hide Settings / Show Settings buttons to hide or show the options for configuring the recording
device.
Use the Recording Device dropdown menu to select an available device. Choose the Configure... button to
open a system dialog with further settings for the device.
The book page editor has additional settings for the recording audio in these formats:
○
Output Format
○
Editing Format
14.5.3 Dynamic Editor
The dynamic editor allows you to edit the sound and dynamic of an audio file. The dialog can be opened using
the Change Dynamics… button.
The editor has the following settings and functions:

Graph:
The graph is located on the left side of the editor and shows the amplitude level of the audio track. The
graph is structured as follows:
○
Path
○
Horizontal axis: input level
○
Vertical axis: output level

The axes are defined in decibels (dB).

Presets:
The presets enable you to easily set your required dynamic settings. There are default presets available
and you can also create your own presets.
○
Name:
The text field displays the name of the selected preset. A name can be defined for a new preset.
448
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
○
List:
The list displays the available presets. When you select a preset, the defined settings are used and
the amplitude is modified.
○
Add:
Click this button to add a new preset.
○
Delete:
Click this button to delete a preset.
○
Reload Preset:
Click this button to reload the primary settings of the preset, if the settings have been changed.

Performance Detector:
The performance detector modifies the performance of the amplitude. The values are defined in
milliseconds (ms).
○
Attack Time:
Defines the time needed to apply the filter to the amplitude.
○
Release Time:
Defines the time needed to remove the filter from the amplitude.

Gain Processor:
The Gain Processor modifies the gain of the amplitude. The values are defined in milliseconds (ms).
○
Attack Time:
Defines the time needed to apply the filter to the amplitude.
○
Release Time:
Defines the time needed to remove the filter from the amplitude.

Lookahead:
Specifies the time that elapses before a filter is used. This means the start area of a filter can be excluded.
The value is defined in milliseconds (ms).

Play / Stop:
The Play button allows you to play back the audio with the defined settings and make changes afterwards.
With the Stop button, you can stop the playback.
Editing the path
A linear path shows the primary level. The path can be edited as follows:

Add a path point by left-clicking on the path

Delete a path point by right-clicking on the point

Move a path point by drag and drop
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
449
14.5.3.1 Creating and Deleting Presets
In addition to the presets provided, you can create your own presets, to quickly apply frequently used settings.
The presets are available for the complete workarea.
To create a preset, proceed as follows:
1.
Enter a name in the relevant field.
2.
Change the path and enter the values as required.
3.
Click on the Add button.
The preset is created with the defined values and is available in the list.
To delete a preset, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a preset in the list.
2.
Click on the Delete button.
3.
Confirm the dialog that appears.
14.6 Insert Link Dialog Box
The Insert Link dialog box is shown, when inserting a link. You can select an object from the workarea or you can
enter a link. To open the dialog box, select Insert Object -> Insert link...
Link...
in the HTML Editor or Link to -> Edit
for an object parameter.
Note
If you have linked content from the workarea, then take care when publishing or issuing archives that you
issue the object you have linked to as well.
The dialog box contains the following buttons:

Current Object:
Displays the content of the current object. E.g. modes and documents of a project.

Workarea:
Displays the content of the workarea.

Free:
You can use this option to define a link to a web page.

Shortcut:
Shows linked content in the tree structure for direct selection. Up to five links are displayed here.

Actions:
You can select actions for controlling the trainer or book reader.

Insert File...
You can insert a file into the content which will be linked.
450
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
If you have selected learning content or a link, then confirm the dialog with OK. The link destination is now
displayed as a link in the bubble.
Importing files
When you select Current Object you are given access to the Insert File... button. Select this button to import a file
into your project. This can be a document or audio file, for example. A link with the file will be established
automatically after it has been imported.
You can remove a selected file from the workarea by clicking the Delete button.
Open in a new window
The option Open in new window allows you to determine whether the object is to be opened in the same project
window or a new one. Activating the option opens the link destination in a new window.
Selecting the option activates the Parameter button. This button displays a dialog box in which you can define
properties for the new window.
Searching and filtering
Performing a search or selecting a filter in the header of the dialog makes it easier to find content in a complex
tree structure. The respective content is displayed directly when a keyword is entered. You can also start the
search by clicking the Search button. The filter list contains filters that have been created for selection. If you
want to reset the filters, select (no filter).
14.6.1 New Window Options
If you have activated the option Open in new window you can use the Parameters... button to call a dialog
containing options for displaying the window. You have the following options at your disposal:
Position
The values Top and Left are used to determine the distance of the new window from the top and left hand margin
of the screen area. The values are stated in pixels.
Size
The values Width and Height are used to define the size of the new window. The values are stated in pixels.
The parameter Fullscreen defines whether the window is to be opened in full screen view. This requires the
setting to be activated.
The parameter Resizable defines whether the window can be scaled. This requires the parameter to be
activated.
Layout
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
451
You can have the following macros of the browser window displayed in the new window by activating the
relevant setting:

Titlebar

Menubar

Toolbar

Scrollbar

Statusbar
14.7 Style Editor
The style editor is the component for editing style resources in the Producer. The editor allows an individual
adaptation of interfaces for the playback functionalities, contents and bubbles based on style templates.
The dialog can be opened with the Tools -> Customization -> Edit Style Resources...
menu.
The customizable style types for the style editor are:

trainer Style
Includes trainer bar, library, popup window, task window, book reader bar and quiz.

Desktop Assistant Style
Includes windows of the desktop assistant and guided tour.

Book Styles
Adaptation of background, buttons and pop-up window.

Bubble Styles
Adaptation of bubbles based on different bubble styles.

Border Styles
Adaptation of borders based on different border styles.

Manager Style
User interface of the Manager – the style has to be implemented in the Manager after creation.

Desktop Assistant: Mini Icons
Adaptation of icons used for mini bubbles of a context help.

Avatars
In the style editor, adapted styles are stored in the Adaptable Resources
tree. Bubbles are also stored in the Bubble Styles
Styles
section of the Explorer’s resource
section and book styles are also stored in the Book
section.
The created styles are always used for the current workarea. To use the styles in other workareas, export the
resources as an archive file.
452
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
14.7.1 Structure and Functions
The basic parts of the style editor are:

Style list
The style list on the top left shows the created styles.

Settings page
The settings page on the bottom left shows the settings for the selected style.

Preview
The preview on the right shows the selected style and the executed changes.
The style editor includes several functions for style management:

New…:
Creates a new style based on a template.

Delete:
Deletes a style from the style list and the resources.

Update Preview:
Updates the style preview to make changed style attributes visible.

Save:
Saves the changes of the currently opened style.

Close:
Closes the style editor.
Style preview
The preview of the style editor shows the selected style in the final status. It allows you to see executed changes
directly in the style components. After changing a style attribute, you need to update the preview to make the
changes visible in the view.
14.7.2 Creating a New Style
Before you adapt a style, you first need to create a new style in the style editor. This can be done as follows:
1.
Click on the New… button. A dialog box opens with the following settings:
○
Template:
The setting shows the available style templates of the Producer.
○
Name:
The setting defines the name of the style.
○
Style ID:
The Style ID is used internally and cannot be changed afterwards.
2.
Confirm your settings with OK.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
453
Once you have created a new style, a style resource will be created in the Adaptable Resources section of the
resources. The style editor shows the style in the preview and in the style list.
14.7.3 Style Attributes
Style editing in the style editor is based on the structured attributes and behaviors that allow resources to be
adapted quickly and easily. The attributes are located under Style Definition.
Note
It is not possible to change the size of a complete style or for parts of a style. This is to avoid functional
errors.
Colors
The basic adaptable attributes for styles are colors. The colors can be defined as hexadecimal values or using
the color selection dialog box. This dialog box can be opened using the Choose Color...
button.
Connected colors
The color attributes with a star ( * ) are set and changed automatically, when a higher-ranking color is changed.
For this behavior, do not specify the attribute. The green button is set to inactive.
This practice allows you to create a well-balanced color style and to reduce the effort for adaptations. Therefore
it is recommended that you only change the colors without a star.
This means each color of a default style only needs to be changed once and this change is applied to all other
color instances. Other color instances can also be changed but this makes editing much more complex.
Images
In some cases, images are used (mostly for logos). To change an image, you need to consider the size of the
original image. The new image should have the same size to fit in the layout. The used image size appears after
the attribute name.
The typical file formats for images are GIF, JPG, PNG, BMP. The default images are in PNG format.
Layout types
The settings area has two layout types: Standard Layout and Advanced Layout. You can change the layout by
activating or deactivating the Advanced Layout option.
The standard layout shows the higher-ranking colors of the style. It is sufficient to only change these colors to
get a complete defined style.
In the advanced layout, there are a lot more colors visible that allow you to specify the used colors in greater
detail.
454
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Note
After adapting the settings, press the Update Preview button to see the changes.
14.7.4 trainer Style (including library and book reader)
The trainer is the playback component for simulations. The trainer style includes the following components:

trainer bar

library window

popup window

task window

book reader bar

quiz style

start, stop, load and error page
trainer style templates
The templates for trainer Style in style editor:

trainer Style (small)

trainer Style (medium)

trainer Style (big)
14.7.4.1 Attributes of the trainer Style
This chapter describes the basic settings and sections for adapting the trainer style.

Name:
The setting defines the name of the style.

Logo:
There are two different logo sizes used for the library, control bars and various dialog boxes.
Recommendation
You are able to hide the logo for the playback in the Playback Settings. The Show Logo setting is available
for the control bar of each playback component.
The first settings are the basic color settings for the trainer style. When these colors are changed, the other
colors are changed automatically in their gradation.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
455

Fill color:
The setting defines the basic fill color. The gradients will be set automatically.

Active / Selection:
The setting defines the basic color for active and selected controls and texts.

Background color:
The setting defines the background color of the library, book reader, trainer.
Recommendation
It is recommended that you change the basic color settings first, because the settings influence all other
colors of the style. All other settings can be changed afterwards, to adapt the details.
Standard layout
The standard settings sections allow you to specify the colors for basic components of the style.

Dialog windows section:
These settings define the colors inside of the dialog boxes.

Text colors section:
These settings define the colors for the texts and the different statuses.

Icon colors section:
These settings define the color of the button icons and the different statuses.

Buttons section:
These settings define the color of the buttons and the different statuses.
Advanced layout – additional sections
The advanced layout sections and settings allow you to define parts of the style in detail.

library color bar section:
These settings define the colors of the area under the top bar of the library.

Orientation icon section:
These settings define the colors of the orientation buttons in the trainer and book reader bar.

Buttons (library content) section:
These settings define the color of the content buttons in the content view of the library.

Dialog splitter section:
These settings define the color of the splitter between the tree and content view in the library.

trainer bar section:
These settings define the color of the top and bottom lines of the library and book reader bar.

Progress indicator section:
These settings define the color of the progress indicator of the trainer and book reader bar.
In addition to the advanced layout sections, there are further settings available in the standard layout sections.
Color overview
456
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
The color overview is HTML page that includes all options with the corresponding colors in a table. This provides
you with an overview for proof of design standards.
To use the color overview, go to the style folder and open the colors.html file.
14.7.4.2 Explanation Icons
The explanation icons are used for explanation macro types in a simulation. To customize images, replace the
default images with your own images.
The images have the size 32x32 pixels and are in GIF format.
You can adapt the explanation icons of the documentation in the Documentation Style additionally.
Type
Icon
Info
Remark
Tip
Warning
Replacing an image
This is necessary to assign the correct image file to the active explanation type.
To replace an explanation image in a workarea, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the icon file in the trainer Style resource of the Explorer.
2.
Click on the Replace file... button in the object editor.
3.
This opens the file selection dialog box. Select the required file.
4.
Click on Open.
The icon is now integrated into the trainer Style and can be used for simulations.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
457
14.7.4.3 Activating the trainer Style
The trainer uses the standard style of the workarea. A different style can be activated by using the Playback
Settings in the Producer:
1.
Open the central configuration dialog using the Tools -> Settings menu.
2.
Select the section Playback Settings -> trainer - Global -> Visual properties.
3.
In the Style setting, select the created style resource.
4.
Confirm the dialog with OK.
The trainer - Global section activates the style for the whole trainer. It is also possible to select an individual style
for the book reader, library or a simulation mode on the relevant settings page.
14.7.5 Desktop Assistant Style
The Desktop Assistant is the playback application for desktop assistant content. The desktop assistant style
includes the image files and colors for the desktop assistant and the guided tour windows as well as for the
sidebar.
14.7.5.1 Attributes of the Desktop Assistant Style
This chapter describes the basic settings and sections for adapting the desktop assistant style.

Name:
Specifies the name of the style.
The first settings are the basic color settings for the desktop assistant style. When these colors are changed, the
other colors are changed automatically in their gradation.

Main color:
The setting defines the basic fill color. The gradients are set automatically.

Text color:
The setting defines the basic color of the window texts.

Active / Selection:
The setting defines the basic color of active and selected controls and entries.
Standard layout
The standard settings allow you to define the components of the windows and sidebar.
458
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components

Sidebar section:
These settings define the size and the color of the status bar.
There are three sizes: Small, Medium (default) and Big

Sidebar Buttons section:
These settings define the colors of the sidebar's buttons.

External Search Icon section:
In the setting you can change the default icon of the external search with another icon. The icon size is 24 x
24 pixel.
It is recommended, to use a png file with transparent background.

Dialog Windows section:
These settings define the colors of the windows.

Menu Bar section:
These settings define the colors of the menu bar and buttons in the main window of the desktop assistant.

List section:
These settings define the colors of the object and step lists.
With the Inside Borders setting you can show or hide the borders between the objects and steps.

Dialog Buttons section:
These settings define the colors of the buttons.

Exception Window section:
These settings define the colors of the exception window.

Systray Info Popup section:
These settings define the colors of the info popup of the systray.
Advanced layout – additional sections
The advanced layout sections and settings allow you to define further parts of the style in detail.

Sidebar Grip section:
These settings define the colors of the sidebar's grip.

Scroll Bar:
These settings define the colors of the scroll bar.

Start Button section:
These settings define the colors of the button for starting content.
In addition to the advanced layout sections, there are further settings available in the standard layout sections.
14.7.5.2 Activating the Desktop Assistant Style
The Desktop Assistant uses the standard style of the workarea. A different style can be activated as follows:
Desktop Assistant
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
459
1.
Open the central configuration dialog box using the Tools -> Settings
menu.
2.
Select the section Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings -> Desktop Assistant -> Desktop Assistant - Style
and Windows.
3.
In the Style setting select the created style resource.
4.
Confirm the dialog box with OK.
Guided Tour
1.
Open the guided tour project.
2.
Select the Guided Tour Style macro in the first step.
3.
Open the subcategory Guided Tour Window in the macro editor.
4.
Select the style resource in the Window Style option.
If the setting is deactivated, click on the green button.
5.
Save the project.
You are able to define the style as default of the Guided Tour Style macro for each new guided tour project.
1.
Open the central configuration dialog box using the Tools -> Settings menu.
2.
Select the section Desktop Assistant: Authoring Settings -> Macro Initialization -> Guided Tour Style.
3.
In the Style setting select the created style resource.
4.
Confirm the dialog box with OK.
14.7.6 Book Page Style
You can define specific book page styles to customize books. This can reflect the topic of the content or can
have a company design.
The book style can be selected for a book page in the Style parameter in the book page editor.
The following components are included in the style:

background

buttons

pop-up window
Book style templates
The templates for books in style editor:

Standard

Flat
Book style resource
A book style is divided into two resource types:
460
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components

Adaptable Resources:
Contains the files used for the customizing of the book style.

Book Styles:
Contains the files used for the playback of content.
Note
When exporting an archive with the book style, make sure to export both resources.
14.7.6.1 Attributes of the Book Style
This chapter describes the basic settings and sections for adapting the book style.

Name:
Specifies the name of the style.
The first settings are the basic color settings for the book style. When these colors are changed, the other colors
will be changed automatically in their gradation.

Button border:
The setting defines the basic color for the borders of the buttons.

Button fill:
The setting define the fill color of the buttons.

Multi-color icons:
The setting defines the colors of the icons of the buttons. In general the icons are multi-color icons.
With deactivated setting further parameters are available to define icons with a single color.
The setting areas allow you to define the components of the book page.

Page background:
The settings define the image of the book page background.

Text pop-up - Window:
These settings define the colors of the window for the text pop-up.

Text pop-up - Button:
These settings define the colors of the buttons for the text pop-up.
14.7.7 Bubble Styles
You can define specific bubble styles for the individual customization of simulation or desktop assistant content
as well as book pages.
The general structure of bubbles is a text field with a spike and header bar for the feedback bubble.
Bubble templates
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
461
The templates for bubbles in the style editor:
Bubble
Preview
Edge Bar
Gloss Effect
Shadow
462
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Bubble
Preview
Gray
Sticky Note
Thick Border
Note
The style editor is used for editing new bubbles. Existing bubble styles should be edited in the bubble style
editor.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
463
Bubble resource
A bubble style is divided into two resource types:

Adaptable Resources:
Contains the files used for the customizing of the bubble style.

Bubble Styles:
Contains the files used for the playback of content.
Note
When exporting an archive with the bubble style, make sure to export both resources.
14.7.7.1 Attributes of the Bubble Styles
The available bubble settings depend on the bubble style and characteristics.
Typical bubble style attributes for defining the main characteristics:

Name:
This setting specifies the name of the style.

Border:
This setting defines the color of the bubble’s border.

Content fill:
This setting defines the color of the bubble including the content part.

Header fill:
This setting defines the color of the bubble’s header.
Advanced layout – additional sections
The advanced layout sections and settings allow you to define parts of the style in detail.

Title text section:
The settings define the text style for the text in the bubbles title bar.

Content text section:
The settings define the text style for the text of the bubble content.
14.7.8 Border Styles
You can define specific border styles for the objects Text Box, Placeholders and Active Area on book pages, in
order to highlight content or to use the boxes as design elements.
The border styles can be selected individually for each object by using the Border Style parameter.
464
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Border style templates
The templates for border styles in the style editor:
Border Style
Preview
Decor 1
Highlighter
Text Box Shadow
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
465
Border Style
Preview
Warning
14.7.8.1 Attributes of Border Styles
The available border settings depend on the border style and characteristics.
Typical border style attributes for defining the main characteristics:

Name:
This setting specifies the name of the style.

Background color:
This setting specifies the color of the text box.

Fill background:
This setting activates the specified Background color of the text box.
Decor
The style includes the following further parameters:

Line color:
This setting specifies the color of the text box border.
Highlighter
The style includes the following further parameters:

Color:
This setting specifies the color of the highlighter.
Text Box Shadow
The style includes the following further parameters:
466
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components

Shadow:
These settings specify the shadow of the text box and allow you to change the characteristic.

Shadow color:
This setting specifies the color of the defined Shadow.

Add Effects (Advanced Layout):
These settings activate and specify the color effects in the text box.
Warning
The style includes the following further parameters:

Border:
This setting specifies the color of the outer border (2px).

Inner border:
This setting specifies the color of the inner border (1px).

Stripe color 1:
This setting specifies the first color of the stripes in the top and bottom bar.

Stripe color 2:
This setting specifies the second color of the stripes in the top and bottom bar.

Content fill:
This setting specifies the color of the text area.
14.7.9 Manager Style
You can define a specific Manager style (based on your company design, for example) to customize the
Manager interface.
The Manager style must be copied manually into the Manager installation.
14.7.9.1 Attributes of the Manager Style
This chapter describes the basic settings and sections for adapting the Manager style.

Name:
This setting specifies the name of the style.

Logo:
This setting specifies the logo image that will be used in the header of the Manager. (300 x 47 Pixel)

Content Background:
The setting defines the background color of the application screen.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
467

Screen Title:
The setting defines the text color of the title of the application screen.

Active / Selection:
The setting defines the basic color for active and selected controls and texts.

Marked Text:
The setting defines the text color for an selected control, list entry or tree entry.
Standard layout
The standard settings sections allow you to specify the colors for basic components of the Manager style.

Application Icon section:
These settings define the color of the Manager icon.

Header section:
These settings define the color of the background and texts for the header.

Menu bar section:
These settings define the color of the buttons and texts of the menu bar with different statuses.

Submenu dropdown section:
These settings define the color of the menu and texts of the dropdown for the submenu.

Buttons section:
These settings define the color of the buttons and the different statuses.

Links and Tabs section:
These settings define the color of the links and tabs and the different statuses.
Advanced layout – additional sections
The advanced layout sections and settings allow you to define parts of the Manger style in detail.

Tree selection:
These settings define the color for the status of the tree entries.

Table selection:
These settings define the color for the status of the table entries.

Dialog windows:
These settings define the color of the bars and texts for the dialog boxes.
Color overview
The color overview is HTML page that includes all options with the corresponding colors in a table. This provides
you with an overview for proof of design standards.
To use the color overview, go to the style folder and open the colors.html file.
468
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
14.7.9.2 Implementing the Manager Style
The Manager styles that you create are stored in the Explorer under Resources -> Adaptable Resources. To
include the style in a Manager installation, proceed as follows:
1.
Right-click on your Manager Style resource.
2.
In the context menu, select Open Folder.
3.
Open the version-'number' folder of the resource.
4.
Open the Manager files in the webapps folder of your Tomcat installation, for example:
…\Apache Software Foundation\Tomcat6.0\webapps\Manager_Installation
5.
Copy the files from the resource folder into the folder of your Manager installation, replacing the existing
files. Keep the other files in the installation folder untouched.
The files and folders are: images, release, unprotected, webclient and index.htm
14.7.10 Desktop Assistant: Mini Icons
You can define a set of icons used for the mini bubbles of the object bubbles for desktop assistant projects. The
icons can be selected individually for each action macro by using the Mini Icon Type parameter.
The style contains the following icon types:

Help

Info

Warning

Maintenance

Update

New

Training

Attachment

Link

Tip

Note

Compliance
Mini icon templates
The templates for bubbles in the style editor:
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
469

Desktop Assistant: Mini Icons

Desktop Assistant: Mini Icons (Big)
14.7.10.1 Attributes of the Mini Icons
This chapter describes the basic settings and sections for adapting the Mini Icons style.

Name:
Specifies the name of the style.

Background color:
This setting specifies the background color of the preview.
Master colors 1 and 2
The master colors define the initial colors for the icons. There are two master color sections to define two
different icon types.
The master colors have the following parameters:

Symbol:
Defines the color of the symbol.

Background:
Defines the background color of the icon.

Symbol (mouse over):
Defines the color of the symbol in mouse over status.

Background (mouse over):
Defines the color of the background in mouse over status.

Symbol (pressed):
Defines the color of the symbol in pressed status.

Background (pressed):
Defines the color of the background in pressed status.
Icons types
The settings define the shape and the color of the icons.
Each icon has the following parameters:

Background Shape:
Defines the shape of the icon. The following shapes are available:
470
○
Square
○
Circle
○
Diamond
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components

○
Triangle
○
Note
○
Explanation
○
Symbol with Border
○
Plain Symbol
Colors:
You can adapt the symbol and background colors for each icon individually. Each icon uses a definition of
the master colors by default.
14.7.11 Avatars
You can create avatars for the use in your content. An avatar has different gestures and poses and is stored as
style resource in Adaptable Resources.
Adding avatars to the content provides different possibilities to enhance the learning experience. They can be
used to present content, to guide through a story, pose questions or to speak directly to the learner.
Avatar templates
The templates for avatars in the style editor:
Avatar
Preview
Comic Man
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
471
Avatar
Preview
Comic Woman
Using an avatar
To select an avatar in your content, proceed as follows:
1.
Insert an Image object or open the HTML editor.
2.
Select Insert image from workarea
.
A dialog box opens.
3.
Open the workarea tree Resources -> Adaptable Resources -> Comic Man / Comic Woman in the dialog box.
4.
Select the required image of the avatar.
5.
Select OK to insert the image.
14.7.11.1 Attributes of the Avatars
The available settings depend on the avatar and characteristics.
Typical avatar attributes for defining the main characteristics:

Name:
Specifies the name of the style.

Hair / Hat:
Specifies the type of head or hair. Select a type from the dropdown box.

472
Skin
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components

Hair

Eyes

Mouth

Clothes attributes

Shoes
You can change the colors of the settings to customize your avatar.
Logo / Details
The settings in the subcategory Logo / Details allow you to add images on the clothes of the avatar. For
examples: logo of a company.

Add Logo / Images:
Activate the setting, to display further image parameters.

Front:
Specifies the front image of the avatar. (60 x 60 pixel)

Back:
Specifies the back image of the avatar. (60 x 60 pixel)

More Images:
For the avatars which are looking left or right you can add further images. This is helpful to use an image
with the correct perspective of the avatar.
The recommended image rotation is 4 degree.
14.8 Text Style Editor
The text style editor is the component for editing text resources in the Producer. The editor allows you to
customize texts for consistent use in the content.
In the text style editor, adapted styles are stored in the Adaptable Resources section of the Explorer’s resource
tree. The created styles can be used in the HTML editor during content creation.
Opening the text style editor
The text style editor can be opened with the Tools -> Customization -> Edit Text Styles...
menu. The editor is
opened with the current default text style.
To edit a specific text style, choose the resource in the Adaptable Resources and select Edit Text Styles... in the
object editor.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
473
Note
The created text styles are always used for the current workarea. To use the styles in other workareas,
export the resources as an archive file.
Duplicating text styles
You are able to use more than one text style for different uses cases, e.g. to create an optimized text style for
documentation.
Duplicate a resource as follows:
1.
Select a resource in resource tree.
2.
Open the context menu.
3.
Click Duplicate...
.
A dialog box opens.
4.
Enter a Name and change the ID, if required.
5.
Click OK.
474
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
14.8.1 Structure and Functions
The style editor can be opened using the Tools -> Edit Text Styles… menu. The basic parts of the editor are:

Preview
The preview on the left of the screen shows the available styles and the executed changes.

Settings page
The settings page on the right of the screen shows the settings for the selected style.
The style editor includes several functions for managing styles:

New…:
Creates a new style based on an available style.

Duplicate:
The function duplicates the selected style. The duplicated style and the source style use the same base
style. A default style cannot be duplicated.

Inherit:
Inherits the selected style. The inherited style uses the source style as base style.

Delete:
Deletes a style from the style list and the resources.

Save:
Saves the changes of the currently opened style.

Close:
Closes the text style editor.
14.8.2 Text Style Categories
The text style editor has the following style categories in the preview view. Each section includes default styles
and can contain created or duplicated styles.

Default Style:
Includes the default text style for all style definitions. The default text style only includes the Font Family
and Font Size.

Paragraph Styles:
Includes the paragraph and heading styles.

List Styles:
Includes styles for lists and list level.

Character Styles:
Includes the character styles for formatting a text.

Block Styles:
Includes block styles for the definition of text boxes text box entries.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
475

Table Styles:
Includes table styles for the definition of tables and table entries.
14.8.3 Creating a Text Style
Before you can adapt a text style, you first need to create a new text style in the text style editor. This can be
done as follows:
1.
Click on the New… button.
2.
Adapt the following settings in the dialog box:
○
Style type:
The setting shows the available style types. Select the type that you want to use as a template.
○
Name:
Enter a name for the style.
3.
Confirm your settings with OK.
The new text style is added to the preview in the corresponding style category.
Duplicate or inherit a style
Alternatively, you can also duplicate or inherit an existing style in a style section.

Duplicate:
Use this function if you want the duplicated style and the source style to use the same base style.
Note that a default style cannot be duplicated.

Inherit:
Use this function if you want the inherited style to use the source style as the base style.
The functions can be used as follows:
1.
Select the source style in the preview.
2.
Click on the Duplicate or Inherit button.
The new text style is added to the preview under the source style.
14.8.4 Editing a Text Style
To edit a text style, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the style that you want to change.
To open a style category, click on the category name.
2.
Edit the settings in the settings page.
Each text style includes style relevant parameters that can be adapted. The main sections are:
476
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
3.
○
Text - general parameters
○
Paragraph
○
Margin
○
Padding
○
Border
○
List Level
After you have made your changes, click on Save to save the resource.
Recommendation
In some cases it is necessary to have a fallback font type, if the specified font cannot be displayed.
You can add a fallback font type to your specified font, separated by a comma. For Example: Standard
Font,Fallback Font
14.9 Using Colors
Colors can be used in various parts of the Producer, such as for texts in the HTML editor, or for objects in the
project editor or book page editor.
You can specify colors in the Custom Color Dialog Box.
To specify a set of colors you can use the Color Palette resource. The colors of the resource can be selected
from the Color Selection Dialog Box.
14.9.1 Custom Color Dialog Box
The custom color dialog box allows you to define and customize your colors. The dialog box can be opened by
selecting Choose Color... / Font Color...
or by selecting a color preview of a color parameter.
Note
If the workarea has a Color Palette resource, then the dialog box can be opened by selecting Choose
Color...
or Custom Color...
in the color selection dialog box.
See also Color Palette.
The following settings are available for defining the color values:

Color wheel:
The color wheel contains a wide variety of shades that can be selected by simply clicking on the required
color.

Brightness:
The brightness control allows you to define the brightness of the color wheel or the selected color.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
477

New / Current:
The two fields below the color wheel display the current and the selected color values. By clicking on
Current, the New color value will be removed and the value will be reset to its original state.

Color Picker:
The color picker allows you to choose a specific color shade on the screen.
Click on the button and with the mouse button held down, drag the picker icon onto the required color
shade. Release the mouse button to confirm the color value shown.

RGB color value:
The RGB color value allows you to define a color via an RGB color space.

HSV color value:
The HSV color value allows you to define a color using an HSV color space.

Hex color value:
The hexadecimal color value allows you to define a color using the RGB color space as a hexadecimal value.

Recently Used:
This fields display the last 16 colors that have been previously selected.

Standard Palette:
This fields display 16 predefined standard colors.

Add to Palette...:
Select the button to add a custom color to the color palette. The color palette dialog box is opened.
14.9.2 Color Palette
The color palette allows you to predefine a set of colors used for content creation. For example, you can specify
the colors of your corporate design. This helps the author to use the colors in the content consistently.
The color palette is a resource type of the Adaptable Resources.
Note
The color palette is not a default resource of the workarea. The resource is added after you specify and
save colors in the color palette editor.
Color palette editor
The editor can be opened with the Tools -> Customization -> Edit Color Palettes...
menu.
The editor is structured as follows:

Toolbar:
Contains functions for editing colors.
478
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
○
New Color:
Allows you to create a new color for the resource.
○
Edit Name and Description:
Allows you to edit the name and description of a color.
○
Reset Color:
Resets the color and dicards the last changes.
○
Move Color Up / Move Color Down:
Changes the order of the color in the list.
○
Delete Color:
Deletes a selected color from the resource.

Color list:
Show the colors of the resource with preview, name and description.

Color selection controls:
Contains controls for specifing a color. See also Color Selection Dialog Box.
14.9.2.1 Customizing a Color Palette
You can create a new color specification or you can change an available color.
Creating a new color
To create a new color, proceed as follows:
1.
Select New to create a new color. Select Edit to edit an available color.
2.
A dialog box is opened.
1.
Color preview:
The field shows a preview of the current color and the Hex value.
2.
Color Name:
Allows you to enter a name for the color.
3.
Description:
Allows you to enter a description for the color. The description can contain a use case or limitations
for the color.
3.
Select OK.
The new color is created and selected in the list.
4.
Specify the color by using the color wheel or enter a color value.
Changing an available color
To change an available color, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a color in the list.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
479
2.
3.
To edit the name and description select Edit in the toolbar or double-click the color.
1.
A dialog box is opened. Change the values.
2.
Select OK.
Specify the color by using the color wheel or enter a color value.
14.9.3 Color Selection Dialog Box
The color selection dialog box allows you to select the colors of a color palette. The dialog box can be opened by
selecting Font Color...
or by selecting a color preview of a color parameter.
Note
The dialog box is only available, if the workarea has a Color Palette resource.
See also Color Palette.

Recently Used:
This fields display the last 7 colors that have been previously selected.

Standard Palette:
This fields display the colors of the Color Palette.
You can display the colors or the colors and the descriptions. Select a button in the top of the dialog box to
change the view.

○
Show List View
○
Show Swatch View
Custom Colors...:
The control opens the custom color dialog box to specify a custom color.
14.10
Using an External Editor for Images
Images are one of the main contents in objects, especially in projects. In some cases, it may be necessary to
change, update or retouch an image. You can use an image editing editor, in order to make it easier to edit
images. When editing content, you can open a specific image from the Producer in the external editor. Once the
image has been edited and saved, the changes are visible in the Producer.
An external editor can be used for all types of images in:

projects - desktop assistant and simulation

book pages

style editor
Editing an image externally
480
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
To use an external editor, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the macro with the included image.
2.
Click on the Replace Image
button (macro editor) of the image parameter and choose External Editor...
from the menu.
The image is opened in the editor and a dialog box appears.
Note
Do not close the dialog box when editing the image. When you close the dialog box, the changes are
discarded.
3.
Edit the image in the editor.
4.
Save the image in the editor and close the image.
5.
Click on OK in the dialog box to confirm the changes.
Defining the external editor
The default editor for editing images is Microsoft Paint. To set a different editor, proceed as follows:
1.
Click on the Browse... button (see above) in the dialog box.
2.
Select the executable file of the editor.
3.
Confirm with Open.
4.
Click Cancel or OK and restart the function for editing in the selected editor.
14.11 Toolbars and Tabs
Toolbars of the Producer
The toolbars in Producer allow you to access the most common menu commands by clicking on the
corresponding icon. Depending on if you are working in the Explorer, the project editor or the book page editor,
the menus and tool bars change to provide the necessary tools, depending on the current context.
The various toolbars can be shown or hidden by clicking on Toolbars in the View menu and making a selection.
Tabs of the Producer
The Explorer and the open projects and book pages are arranged as tabs below the toolbars. The tab of the
Explorer is always located on the left. In case there are more tabs open than can be displayed in the tab bar, the
invisible tabs can be accessed using the pull-down menu on the right side of the tab bar.
In addition, the tabs can be accessed via the menu Window.
In the tabs you will find a button with an X which can be used to close the corresponding project. A context menu
is opened by right-clicking on one of the tabs. This can be useful when you wish to close one or more tabs.
SAP Enable Now
Interface and Components
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
481
15 Menu Overview
This chapter gives you an overview about the different functionalities of the Producer menus.
15.1 Workarea Menu
The Workarea menu includes all the functions related to the general selection and administration of Workareas
and projects. In addition to selecting and creating Workareas, it is possible to archive and import Workareas and
projects, as well as open folders of the projects most recently displayed in Windows Explorer.
15.1.1 Export Archive…
This function creates an archive in the form of a DKP file (*.dkp). This allows you to transport an entire workarea,
individual learning content or resources simply and compactly.
This is how you create an archive:
1.
Select the command Export Archive...
from the Workarea menu. This will open a dialog for selecting the
content for the archive you wish to create.
2.
In the area on the left you will find all of the content and resources located in the Workarea. These are
selected by default.
To deselect the entire workarea, you need to deactivate the Workarea option. To deselect the resources or
content, deselect the relevant resource folder or topmost group.
3.
Compression type:
This parameter determines whether the files are to be compressed or not. Compression is recommended
to reduce the file size.
4.
Max. size before splitting volumes:
The technical size limit for a DKP file is 4GB. The drop-down list allows you to define a maximum volume
size of the DKP files generated. Once an archive file's maximum size has been reached, a new one will be
created automatically. As many archive files will be generated as are required to store the entire Workarea.
This allows large Workareas to be broken into a number of parts for transport, which can then be spread
across a number of DVDs or CDs, for example.
5.
Select references:
With the options Select referenced resources and Select referenced content the referenced items are
automatically selected for the specific content.
6.
482
Click on OK to confirm the settings.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
7.
The dialog for specifying the destination path and filename will then open. Provide this information as
appropriate. Confirm the dialog by clicking on Save to create the archive.
15.1.2 Import Archive…
You can insert an archive in the current Workarea using the Import Archive... command in the Workarea ->
Administration menu. This may be individual projects or customized resources, for example.
Proceed as follows:
1.
Select the command Import Archive... from the Workarea menu.
2.
Clicking on the command will open a dialog for selecting the archive. Select the file and click on Open.
3.
The archive content is displayed to you in an overview. You can select whether you would like to import all
the archive content or only a part of it.
Confirm the dialog by clicking on OK to insert the files in your Workarea.
Learning content inserted by importing the archive are filed as unsorted objects and can then be assigned to the
project structure.
If the same resources or learning content already exist in the workarea, you are alerted to this and asked
whether they are to be overwritten or duplicated.
Older archive formats
In addition to the DKP archive format, you also have the option to import archives from older versions of the
Producer in CAB format (*.cab) for Workareas and resources as well as DPP format (*.dpp) for an object
archive. These files are migrated into the Workarea and customized to the workarea's structure and technical
implementation in such a way as not to conflict with current content.
Once learning content has been imported, it needs to be regenerated so that it can be played back by the
trainer.
15.1.3 Administration
The menu contains functions for the administration of the workarea.
15.1.3.1 Open Base Directory
This command opens the Workarea's base directory in Windows Explorer, which, in addition to the project
folders, contains the components of trainer needed to directly playback offline content.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
483
15.1.4 Publish
This menu contains the commands for publishing a Workarea. It also contains the publishing rules created by
the author, which can be executed directly from the menu.
When publishing a Workarea, only macros needed to playback content are copied to a target directory. Objects
which are not necessary or parts of the Workarea which have been masked by a filter are not copied to the
target directory. This reduces and optimizes the amount of files in the target Workarea.
15.1.4.1 Publish Content...
The Publish Content...
command allows you to publish a workarea or only specific parts of a workarea. The
overview displays the workarea in just the same way it is available in the Explorer. This also takes account of the
filter currently being applied to the workarea in the Explorer.
Also note the details in the section Publishing a Workarea.
15.1.4.2 Edit Publishing Rules...
The Edit Publishing Rules...
dialog box where you create and manage publishing rules. A publishing rule is a
fixed view of the currently selected workarea of which a copy will be created as the publishable workarea. The
dialog lets you define the Name, Destination, Filter, Prefix and Type for a rule. The rule then becomes available as
a directly selectable item in the Workarea -> Publish menu.
Also refer to the section Creating Publishing Rules.
15.1.5 New Group
This creates a new group in the Workarea under the item that is currently selected.
After clicking on New Group
from the Workarea menu or the toolbar, a dialog box will appear. You have the
following options:

Name:
Enter a name for your group in this field. The default setting is the type of object with an ID.

Template:
This option allows you to use an existing group as a template for a new group. Using predefined settings
from an existing group will save you loads of time when creating a new group.
You can select additional templates by clicking on Change... A dialog box will appear. Select template for
the current object or the entire workarea. Click on the option No template if you do not wish to use any
484
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
templates for your group.
If a template has already been used, this template will act as the default and will be automatically selected
upon creating a new group.
Recommendation
You can make templates your default setting from the main configuration dialog box. Refer to the section
on Templates for Content Objects for more detailed information.

Language:
Here you can select a content language.

Synchronization:
If you are using a Manager workarea, you can use this option to manage your group with this.
The following settings are available:
○
Inherit from parent:
Sets the synchronization of the parent object.
○
Unmanaged:
Saves the object only locally.
○
Edit and share:
Allows the editing and shares the object.
○
Edit and own:
Allows the editing and owns the object.
Confirm by clicking on OK and your group will be created.
15.1.6 New Project
The New Project
button will create a new project in the current workarea group that was selected from the
tree view in the Explorer.
After clicking on New Project from the Workarea menu or the toolbar, a dialog box will appear. You have the
following options:

Name:
Enter a name for your project in this field. The default setting is the type of object with an ID.

Template:
This option allows you to use an existing project as a template for a new project. Using predefined settings
from an existing project will save you loads of time when creating a new project.
You can select additional templates by clicking on Change... A dialog box will appear. Select template for
the current object or the entire workarea. Click on the option No template if you do not wish to use any
templates for your project.
If a template has already been used, this template will act as the default and will be automatically selected
upon creating a new project
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
485
Recommendation
You can make templates your default setting from the main configuration dialog box. Refer to the section
on Templates for Content Objects for more detailed information.

Language:
Here you can select a language for the automatically generated texts of the bubbles that are created
during the recording.

Project Type:
This option defines the content to be created.

Use Audio:
This option allows you to create an audio project. You can assign audio files as well as convert bubble text
to text-to-speech. When you activate this option, the following settings will appear:
○
Output format:
Defines the audio format for playing back a project.
○
Editing format:
Defines the audio format for editing a project. The format can be changed in the Change Audio
Format dialog box (menu Audio)
Note
It is also possible to convert a completed project into an audio project. To do so, go the Edit menu in the
project editor and choose the option Convert to audio project.

Synchronization:
If you are using a Manager workarea, you can use this option to manage your project with this.
The following settings are available:
○
Inherit from parent:
Sets the synchronization of the parent object.
○
Unmanaged:
Saves the object only locally.
○
Edit and share:
Allows the editing and shares the object.
○
Edit and own:
Allows the editing and owns the object.
Confirm by clicking on OK and your project will be created. The Producer will automatically switch to the project
editor.
15.1.7 New Book
This creates a new book in the Workarea under the item that is currently selected.
486
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
After clicking on New Book
from the Workarea menu or the toolbar, a dialog box will appear. You have the
following options:

Name:
Enter a name for your book in this field. The default setting is the type of object with an ID.

Template:
This option allows you to use an existing book as a template for a new book. Using predefined settings
from an existing book will save you loads of time when creating a new book.
You can select additional templates by clicking on Change... A dialog box will appear. Select template for
the current object or the entire workarea. Click on the option No template if you do not wish to use any
templates for your book.
If a template has already been used, this template will act as the default and will be automatically selected
upon creating a new book.
Recommendation
You can make templates your default setting from the main configuration dialog box. Refer to the section
on Templates for Content Objects for more detailed information.

Language:
Here you can select a content language.

Synchronization:
If you are using a Manager workarea, you can use this option to manage your book with this.
The following settings are available:
○
Inherit from parent:
Sets the synchronization of the parent object.
○
Unmanaged:
Saves the object only locally.
○
Edit and share:
Allows the editing and shares the object.
○
Edit and own:
Allows the editing and owns the object.
Confirm by clicking on OK and your book will be created.
15.1.8 New Book Page
This creates a new book page in the Workarea under the item that is currently selected.
After clicking on New Book Page
from the Workarea menu or the toolbar, a dialog box will appear. You have
the following options:

Name:
Enter a name for your book page in this field. The default setting is the type of object with an ID.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
487

Template:
This option allows you to use an existing book page as a template for a new book page. Using predefined
settings from an existing book page will save you loads of time when creating a new book page.
You can select additional templates by clicking on Change... A dialog box will appear. Select template for
the current object or the entire workarea. Click on the option No template if you do not wish to use any
templates for your book page.
If a template has already been used, this template will act as the default and will be automatically selected
upon creating a new book page.
Recommendation
You can make templates your default setting from the main configuration dialog box. Refer to the section
on Templates for Content Objects for more detailed information.

Language:
Here you can select a content language.

Synchronization:
If you are using a Manager workarea, you can use this option to manage your book page with this.
The following settings are available:
○
Inherit from parent:
Sets the synchronization of the parent object.
○
Unmanaged:
Saves the object only locally.
○
Edit and share:
Allows the editing and shares the object.
○
Edit and own:
Allows the editing and owns the object.
Confirm by clicking on OK and your book page will be created. The Producer will automatically switch to the
project editor.
15.1.9 New Text Unit
This creates a new text unit in the Workarea under the item that is currently selected.
After clicking on New Text Unit
from the Workarea menu or the toolbar, a dialog box will appear. You have the
following options:

Name:
Enter a name for your text unit in this field. The default setting is the type of object with an ID.

Template:
This option allows you to use an existing text unit as a template for a new text unit. Using predefined
settings from an existing text unit will save you loads of time when creating a new text unit.
You can select additional templates by clicking on Change... A dialog box will appear. Select template for
488
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
the current object or the entire workarea. Click on the option No template if you do not wish to use any
templates for your text unit.
If a template has already been used, this template will act as the default and will be automatically selected
upon creating a new text unit.
Recommendation
You can make templates your default setting from the main configuration dialog box. Refer to the section
on Templates for Content Objects for more detailed information.

Language:
Here you can select a content language.

Synchronization:
If you are using a Manager workarea, you can use this option to manage your text unit with this.
The following settings are available:
○
Inherit from parent:
Sets the synchronization of the parent object.
○
Stay unmanaged:
Saves the object only locally.
○
Edit and share:
Allows the editing and shares the object.
○
Edit and own:
Allows the editing and owns the object.
Confirm by clicking on OK and your text unit will be created.
15.1.10 Preview library
Running this function Preview library
generates a library of contents based on the structure set up in the
workarea and displays it in a new browser window. Only objects that have not been set to Hidden will be included
in the library. In the workarea defined filters are also used for the opened library.
15.1.11 Generate All Content...
The function generates all project modes and preview images of the book pages in the current workarea. This is
especially important for migrated workareas or for a large number of imported content objects.
Open the dialog in the Explorer from the Workarea -> Generate All Content... menu. The following settings can be
configured:

Structure:
Defines the structure for generating the content.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
489

○
Subtree – a selected subtree
○
Root Group – the complete content structure
○
All (including “Unsorted”) – the complete content structure and the unsorted objects
Content filter:
Defines specific content to be generated.

○
Project Modes
○
Book Page Previews
Update files for library:
Specifies that the library files are updated to include the generated modes for display in the content
structure.
Confirm the dialog with OK to generate the contents.
15.1.12 Exit
This command exits Producer.
15.2 Manager Workarea Menu
This menu is only available if the local workarea is connected with a Manager workarea. Use the menu Workarea
-> Administration -> Connect with Manager...
to connect with a Manager workarea.
The menu contains commands for the management of objects between the local and the Manager workarea.
15.2.1 Check Out Objects...
The Check Out Objects...
command allows all of the objects contained in a Manager workarea to be
downloaded to the local workarea. Selecting the command opens a list containing all the objects in the
Manager workarea. The objects that are not yet located in the local workarea are selected. Once the desired
objects have been selected, they can be copied to the local workarea using the Check Out Object function.
15.2.2 Check Out Assigned Objects
The Check Out Assigned Objects...
command allows you to download all objects contained in a
Manager workarea to the local workarea which are assigned to you. However, it is not necessary to check out the
complete structure.
490
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
15.2.3 Synchronize Workarea...
The Synchronize Workarea...
command synchronizes the objects of the local workarea with the
Manager workarea dependent on the synchronization status of the objects.
15.2.4 Save to Server
The Save to Server
command saves the object currently selected in the explorer to the Manager workarea.
15.2.5 Update from Server (without Synchronization)
The Update from Server
command updates the object that has just been selected in the explorer with an up-
to-date copy of the object from the Manager workarea.
15.2.6 Revert Object...
The Revert Object...
command replaces the local version of the object with the most recent version deposited
in the Manager workarea. This requires possession of the write permission for the object.
15.2.7 Start Editing
The Start Editing
command acquires the write permission for the object selected in the explorer from the
Manager workarea and updates the version available in the local workarea. The object can then be edited in the
local workarea.
An object for which no write permission is available is indicated by a red padlock
possess the write permission a green pencil
on the object icon. If you
appears on the object icon.
Note
You can only acquire the write permission for an object if it has not already been checked out by another
author from the Manager workarea into his local workarea.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
491
15.2.8 Finish Editing
The Finish Editing
command relinquishes the write permission for the object selected in the explorer to the
Manager workarea and saves the changes made in the local workarea within the Manager workarea.
The relinquished write permission is then symbolized on the object by a red padlock .
15.2.9 Change Workflow...
The Change Workflow...
command allows an object's workflow to be edited. It opens a dialog box which can
be used to enter a comment and assign the object to another user. It is still possible to amend the status, set
flags and publish the object.
15.2.10 Save All Objects to Server...
The Save All Objects to Server...
command saves a number of local workarea objects to the
Manager workarea. It does so by opening a dialog in which the available objects can be selected.
15.2.11 Update All Objects from Server... (without
Synchronization)
The Update All Objects from Server...
command updates the objects available in the local workarea with an
up-to-date copy from the Manager workarea. It does so by opening a dialog displaying the objects contained in
the Manager workarea which are to be updated. These objects can then be selected and copied to the local
workarea using the Update from Server button.
15.2.12 Start Editing All Objects...
The Start Editing All Objects...
command checks out the write permission for the objects available in the local
workarea. It does so by opening a dialog displaying the objects contained in the Manager workarea. These
objects can then be selected and the objects' write permission checked out using the Start Editing button. This
involves copying the current versions of the objects to the local workarea.
The objects for which write permission has been checked out are indicated by a green pencil
on the object
icon.
492
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Note
You can only acquire the write permission for an object if it has not already been checked out by another
author from the Manager workarea into his local workarea.
15.2.13 Finish Editing All Objects...
The Finish Editing All Objects...
command relinquishes the write permission for all objects in the local
workarea and saves the changes applied in the local workarea to the Manager workarea. It does so by opening a
dialog displaying the objects with locally available write permission. The write permission for the selected
objects can now be saved in the Manager workarea using Finish Editing.
The relinquished write permission is then symbolized on the object by a red padlock
.
15.2.14 Change Workflow for All Objects...
The Change Workflow for All Objects...
command allows editing of the workflow for all objects. It does so by
opening a dialog in which the objects available in the local workarea can be selected. Clicking on Ok opens a
dialog which can be used to enter a comment along with a user to whom the objects are to be assigned. It is still
possible to amend the status, set flags and publish the objects.
15.2.15 Manage
The menu contains commands for the advanced management of objects in connection with a
Manager workarea.
15.2.15.1 Set Synchronization Behavior...
The Set Synchronization Behavior...
command allows you to change the synchronization behavior for the
selected object.
15.2.15.2
Remove from Version Management
The Remove from Version Management command allows you to remove the version management for the
selected object and to use it only locally. The object in the Manager workarea is not changed.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
493
15.2.15.3
Set Synchronization Behavior for All
Objects...
The Set Synchronization Behavior for All Objects...
command allows you to change the synchronization
behavior for all objects or a selection of objects. Through that the synchronization can be set consistently.
15.2.15.4
Remove all Objects from Version
Management...
The Remove all Objects from Version Management... command allows you to remove the version management
for all objects or a selection of objects and to use the objects only locally. The objects in the Manager workarea
are not changed.
15.2.15.5
The Manage Tags...
Manage Tags...
command opens a dialog in which new flags can be created and existing flags can be
deleted.
15.2.16 Manage Tasks...
The Manage Tasks...
command opens a dialog displaying the object tasks. Double clicking on a task selects
the object in the explorer and closes the dialog box.
The Filter... button calls a dialog box in which various filter criteria by which the list can be filtered can be
selected. Remove Filter regenerates the original state.
15.2.17Work Offline
If the Manager is used to launch a Manager workarea the Work Offline
function allows the connection with the
Manager to be severed while work is in progress. The connection therefore only exists for downloading objects
and for saving objects on the server. While the connection is severed, entries in the Manager Workarea menu are
grayed out.
494
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
15.2.18 Open Manager
The Open Manager command opens the Manager in a browser window. You can then log onto the Manager via
the login area.
15.3 Project Menu (Project Editor)
The Project menu contains functions for the administration of a project.
15.3.1 Save
The Save
function saves the project currently open and displayed. In addition to the saving, the different
modes will be generated.
15.3.2 Export Archive...
You can use this feature to export an entire project folder from a Workarea to an archive file, allowing you to
easily move and integrate it into other Workareas. The archive file is saved in the *.dkp format.
15.3.3 Publish...
This command allows you to publish an individual project. That means that it is not necessary to issue numerous
resources and projects; projects can be distributed individually instead.
For further information, see the chapter Publishing Individual Objects.
15.3.4 Open Project Directory
This causes Windows Explorer to open the folder of the currently active project in the Workarea containing the
folders for the project files.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
495
15.3.5 Convert to Audio Project (Simulation)
Menu item Convert to audio project in the Projects menu creates an audio project out of a regular project. This
allows you to convert a project to an audio project at a later date if you have not done so when creating the
project. Consequently, this menu item is also only displayed in projects without audio.
Note
Once a project has been converted into an audio project, this step cannot be undone.
Selecting the function opens the Select output audio format menu. The settings to be applied there are required
to define the properties of the audio project or its audio files:

Editing format:
Defines the audio format in which the project is created and edited.

Output format:
Defines the audio format in which the project is generated.
After the dialog has been confirmed by clicking on the OK button, the project is converted into an audio project.
This saves the project file as a WRP file. You also have audio editing functions at your disposal.
15.3.6 Close
Closes the project, which is currently open and displayed.
If you do not save the project before closing it, a dialog box will appear, prompting you to do so.
15.4 Book Page Menu (Book Page Editor)
The Book Page menu combines the basic functions required for editing a book page file.
15.4.1 New Book Page
This creates a new book page in the Workarea under the item that is currently selected.
After clicking on New Book Page
from the Workarea menu or the toolbar, a dialog box will appear. You have
the following options:

Name:
Enter a name for your book page in this field. The default setting is the type of object with an ID.
496
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview

Template:
This option allows you to use an existing book page as a template for a new book page. Using predefined
settings from an existing book page will save you loads of time when creating a new book page.
You can select additional templates by clicking on Change... A dialog box will appear. Select template for
the current object or the entire workarea. Click on the option No template if you do not wish to use any
templates for your book page.
If a template has already been used, this template will act as the default and will be automatically selected
upon creating a new book page.
Recommendation
You can make templates your default setting from the main configuration dialog box. Refer to the section
on Templates for Content Objects for more detailed information.

Language:
Here you can select a content language.

Synchronization:
If you are using a Manager workarea, you can use this option to manage your book page with this.
The following settings are available:
○
Inherit from parent:
Sets the synchronization of the parent object.
○
Unmanaged:
Saves the object only locally.
○
Edit and share:
Allows the editing and shares the object.
○
Edit and own:
Allows the editing and owns the object.
Confirm by clicking on OK and your book page will be created. The Producer will automatically switch to the
project editor.
15.4.2 Add Audio...
Opens the Add Audio dialog box for recording audio for the book pages. See also the chapter Add Audio Dialog
Box.
15.4.3 Save Book Page
The Save
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
functions saves the book page opened and displayed at that time.
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
497
15.4.4 Duplicate...
The Duplicate... function allows you to duplicate the book page together with the content it contains. This retains
the objects' configuration.
Duplicating a book page supports the creation of a book page in another language, for example, with only the
links and inserted text for the new language having to be replaced. In similar fashion, this supports the design of
a basic layout with specific objects in which the book page can be duplicated and used at will.
1.
Select the Duplicate... function in the Book Page menu. The original book page will then be closed to avoid
duplication errors as a result of the open file.
2.
A dialog will open in which you can name the duplicate. Confirm this by clicking on OK to create the
duplicate.
15.4.5 Export Archive...
This function enables a book page to be exported from a workarea into an archive file to facilitate the transport
of this file and be able to integrate it into other workareas. The archive file is in the *.dkp format.
Select the Export Archive... function to create an archive. Then enter a name in the open dialog and select a
destination. Confirm the data you have entered by clicking on Save.
Note
Outputting an archive using this function excludes the workarea's linked modes and documents.
Therefore, only use the function for book pages in which you have not created any links.
Alternatively you can use the function Export Archive… in the explorer.
15.4.6 Publish...
This command allows you to publish an individual book page. That means that it is not necessary to issue
numerous resources and book pages; book pages can be distributed individually instead.
For further information, see the chapter Publishing Individual Objects.
15.4.7 Open Folder
This is used to open the directory of the currently active book page in the workarea, which contains the relevant
book page files.
498
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
15.4.8 Close
Closes the book page opened and displayed at that time in the book page editor.
If a book page has not been backed up before closing it, you will be alerted to the absence of a backup via a
dialog.
15.5 Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains all the general features that directly manipulate objects.
General functions
Function
Description
This command is used to undo, i.e. reverse, an action
Undo
and can be repeated until the first item in the history
has been reached.
This command is used to reverse the undo action, and
Redo
can be repeated until the last item in the history has
been reached.
The command cuts the selected macro or object and
Cut
places it in the Windows clipboard. This command can
be applied to almost all macros, objects and input
fields in explorer and project editor.
The command copies the selected macro or object to
Copy
the Windows clipboard. This command can be applied
to almost all macros, objects and input fields in
explorer and project editor.
Executing the Paste command inserts the clipboard
Paste
content at the insertion point in Producer. Note that
clipboard content must be compatible with the location
into which it is inserted.
This command deletes the object or macro which has
Delete
just been selected. It can be applied to almost all
macros, objects and input fields in explorer and project
editor.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
499
Function
Description
Select All highlights the largest possible selection in the
context of the currently active focus in Producer. It can
Select All
be applied to almost all macros, objects and input
fields in explorer, project editor or book page editor.
15.5.1 Select Macros by Type... (Project Editor)
This command gives you the ability to select all the objects of a specific macro type in the thumbnail view. The
dialog shows you all the macros available in the currently accessed course content and shows you a count.
When you select a macro type, all objects of this type are selected in the thumbnail view. This gives you the
ability to make settings for all macros of one type in the macro editor.
15.5.2 Search & Replace Bubble Content... (Project
Editor)
Words or passages of text in all the bubbles contained in a project can be replaced using the Search & Replace
function.
In the field Search the term or text string is entered which is to be found within the bubbles of the project; in the
field Replace by the text string is entered which is to replace the original one.
For more complex tasks, the Search & Replace functionality of Producer can also be used with a regular
expression. In order to do so, activate the option Search & Replace using Regular Expressions.
After triggering the function by clicking OK, an additional dialog informs you how many times the search string
was found and replaced.
Note
Searches performed by the search engine are case-sensitive.
If the content of a bubble has been modified by the command Search & Replace, it is considered to have been
edited manually, and the appropriate option is ticked in the subcategory Rerecord of the macro. This has an
effect on the automated translation and the export of a translatable.
500
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
15.6 Audio Menu (Simulation)
The Audio menu contains functions for the editing of an audio file. It is only available, if the opened project is an
audio project.
15.6.1 Play Audio
The Play Audio
command plays the audio of the current step.
15.6.2 Stop Audio
The Stop Audio
command stops the playback of an audio.
15.6.3 Record Audio
The Record Audio
command records an audio for the current step.
15.6.4 Pause Audio
The Pause Audio
command pauses the playback of an audio.
15.6.5 Repeat Audio
The Repeat Audio
command switches loop mode for the playback of an audio on and off.
15.6.6 Import Audio File...
Audio files can be imported into Producer by using the Import Audio File...
command. The audio file is
imported into the selected step. If no step is selected or no step exists in the project, a new step is created
automatically. Formats supported when importing audio files are WAV, AVI and MP3.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
501
Note
During import the audio files are converted into the editing format WAV with the default audio format.
If an audio file was imported into a step, this is indicated by an icon.
Note
Importing an audio file overwrites the existing audio of a step.
15.6.7 Import Audio Again
If an audio file is already imported into Producer, this action can be repeated without selecting the file in the
import dialog again. This is helpful if changes already made to the audio track did not work out as expected and
the audio track needs to be restored or the audio file was edited with an external editor and the changes need to
be applied to the project.
Note
Importing an audio file overwrites the existing audio of a step.
15.6.8 Export all Audio Files...
The audio track of a project can be exported from Producer as a file in WAV format for other purposes. All usual
sampling rates for audio files in this format are available.
15.6.9 Delete Audio
With the Delete Audio
command existing audio file of a step can be deleted.
15.6.10 Change Audio Format...
The Change Audio Format... command allows you to change the editing format and the output format of the
audio files for the current project. The standard format shows default in the entry and a changed format shows
current.
Editing Format
502
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
The internal audio format of a project which is used for editing can be changed at any time. All usual sampling
rates for work with digital audio in mono or stereo are available. Existing audio tracks are automatically
converted into the new format. This procedure is time intensive and can take several minutes.
Note
When changing the project from a higher to a lower sampling rate, the sound quality decreases. As soon
as the project is saved, the changes cannot be undone anymore.
Output Format
With the option the output format for generating a simulation can be defined.
15.6.11 Convert Text to Speech
With the Convert Text to Speech
command the bubble texts of a step can be converted in Text to Speech.
15.7 Recording Menu (Simulation)
The Recording menu contains the following basic features needed to record simulations:

Record Application

Rerecord Application

Rerecord Selected Steps

Rerecord from Current Step
15.7.1 Record Application...
The Record Application...
command activates the recording of simulation projects. A corresponding
recording bar is displayed at the top of the screen.
For further information on using the recording feature, see the Recording a Simulation chapter.
15.7.2 Rerecord Application...
The Rerecord Application...
command starts the ReRecording of applications for simulation projects. It can be
used to record a different language version of an existing project and all its steps which has already been
recorded using an application.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
503
For further information on using the rerecording feature, see the ReRecording a Simulation chapter.
15.8 Insert Menu
The Insert menu contains all functions to insert a macro into a project or an object into a book page.
15.8.1 Insert Special Macro
Special macros are macros which influence the playback of a simulation and are not recorded during an
automated recording, but are added later during the editing process.
Explanations regarding the special macros can be found in the chapter Special Macros.
15.8.2 Insert Interactions
Interactions can be inserted via the menu entry. These can also be explanations and highlights in addition to
actions. They can be used to support existing content or for process changes in a simulation.
Explanations regarding the interactions can be found in the chapter Interactions.
Note
Keep in mind that, when inserting actions, no object information is saved. If a new recording is to be
made, the object is to be manually defined in its sequence or skipped. These can also not be used for
desktop assistant projects. It is generally only recommend to create actions during a recording.
15.8.3 Insert Page Makro
Page macros can be inserted into simulations. This allows steps to be enriched with additional information.
Explanations regarding the page macros can be found in the section Page Macros.
15.8.4 Insert Quiz Item
Quiz items are stand-alone items used in the design of quizzes. These can be incorporated into a simulation or
function as an independent project.
504
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
From the menu Edit -> Insert Quiz Item you can select the quiz items and insert them into a project.
The descriptions of the quiz items can be found in the Quiz Items.
15.8.5 Insert Documentation Macro
Documentation macros can be added to the project via this menu. The macro will be always added directly
behind the selected macro in the project.
The documentation macros are explained in the chapter Documentation Macros.
15.8.6 Adding a Step
You are able to add new steps in your project. The steps can be used to add further macros.
The Add Step
function inserts a new empty step. The step is inserted behind the currently selected step in
the thumbnail view.
15.9 Documentation Menu
This menu contains all necessary functions for generating documentation with Producer.
Explorer

Generate Single Documents

Generate Compound Document

Generate Master Document
Project Editor

Generate Word Document

Generate PDF Document

Generate HTML Document

Generate PowerPoint Document
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
505
15.9.1 Generate Master Document
The Generate Master Document
command generates a Word or PDF master document from all existing Word
documents in the Workarea.
By clicking on the command, a dialog box opens in which the file name can be assigned and edited.
If a folder in the Workarea is selected, all existing Word documents that are located in this section of the
Workarea as part of a project will be merged into the master document. Documents that have been set under
object properties as being hidden will not, however, be included.
If the uppermost node, meaning the entire Workarea, is marked, a master document will be generated for the
whole of the Workarea.
15.9.2 Generate Word Document
The Generate Word Document
command generates the documentation of the recorded project as a MS
Word document. In this regard, the document template is the dot file specified in Documentation Settings.
The macros contained in the project are chronologically integrated into the documentation file, provided that
they are relevant to the documentation. In this case, data from documentation is always transferred to the
macro editor, or when documentation macros are used then their content is transferred.
The generated document is stored in the project directory folder and displayed accordingly in the library.
Note
The installation of Producer also contains a neutral template for generating documentation in MS Word
without a logo. It can be selected via the central configuration dialog.
15.9.3 Generate PDF Document
The Generate PDF Document
command generates a PDF format document of the recorded project. The
document is generated in the same way as for Word documents. The PDF is generated using the set document
template.
Note
Note that a PDF reader needs to be installed on the workstation to view the PDF documents.
506
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
15.9.4 Generate HTML Document
The Generate HTML Document
command works similarly to the command Generate Word Document, where
as in this case a HTML document is generated and no template is used for the creation of the document.
15.9.5 Generate PowerPoint Document
The Generate PowerPoint Document
command works in a similar way to the command Generate Word
Document. As in this case, a PowerPoint document is generated. It is also possible to change the basic template
in the main settings.
Note
Controls (Object Images) within bubbles are not displayed when creating PowerPoint documents.
Therefore, post processing of this bubble text fields is necessary.
15.10
View Menu
The View menu offers various options to configure the display of the program window. This makes it possible to
customize the general display of program parts, as well as the display of the various functions.
General

JavaScript Console
Explorer

Show Unknown References

Show UIDs

Show Language

Show Language Icons

Show Reference Counter
Project Editor

Layouts

Components

Floating Windows

Zoom

Set Preview Mode
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
507

Set Bubble View
15.10.1 JavaScript Console
This command opens the JavaScript Console of Producer. A significant portion of the mechanics for recording in
Producer is based on JavaScript. The console can help track down problems that may occur in the course of
working on a project. In the case of an inquiry, Support may ask you to open the JavaScript Console and describe
its contents. You can also easily copy the contents into a text file. Right-click in the console window and select
the command Copy all. The contents are now on the clipboard and can be pasted into a text document.
15.10.2 Layouts
You can choose a layout to organize your standard components in the project editor. Layout changes influence
the thumbnail view, the step view and the macro editor. The layouts make it possible for you to change the look
of your project editor to fit your needs.
The following layouts are available:

Horizontal Layout:
The components are aligned horizontally.

Vertical Layout:
The components are aligned vertically.

Divided Layout - 1:
The thumbnails and steps are aligned side by side, with the macro editor below it.

Divided Layout - 2:
The thumbnail view is displayed horizontally and the macro editor and the step view appear below next to
one another.

Divided Layout - 3:
The thumbnail view is displayed horizontally and the macro editor and the step view appear below next to
one another.
15.10.3 Components
From the View menu, you can define which components should be made visible in your layout. The following
components can be made visible or hidden:

Toolbars

Timeline
508
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview

Thumbnail view

The WYSIWYG view is subdivided into two views:
○
Step View
○
Documentation View

Macro Editor

History:
To display the list, the macro editor must also be made visible.
15.10.4 Floating Windows
The option Floating Windows makes it possible to position specific components from the project editor as
desired, independent of the main window on the screen, e.g., components can be repositioned onto a second
monitor. This function allows you to keep the main window free from too much clutter for your work comfort.
To enable this option, go to View -> Floating Windows and select the desired components. The selected
components will then be displayed in a new window that you can move freely or change its size. When the new
window is closed, the components will be automatically displayed in their original location.
The following components can be used in a floating window:

Audio Editor

Thumbnail View

Macro Editor

WYSIWYG View (step view, documentation view)
15.10.5 Zoom
The Zoom functions allow you to zoom into a screen or a page of the edit view. This makes it easier for you to
edit and to position objects.
The following functions are available in the editor toolbar:

Zoom In:
Zooms out of the screen.

Zoom Out:
Zooms in to the screen.

Show Selection:
Zooms to display the selected object in the editor view.

Zoom to Fit:
Zooms to display the full screen in the editor view.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
509

Zoom to 100%:
Zooms to display the screen with a size of 100% in the editor view.
15.10.6 Set Preview Mode
The Set Preview Mode menu determines in which mode the preview of your project starts in the trainer. The
following menu entries are available:

Edit Mode

Documentation View
15.10.7 Show Unknown References
Select this function to display a Workarea's Unknown References.
15.10.8 Show UIDs
Selecting this function displays the corresponding UIDs behind the name for the objects in the Workarea. With
projects that share the same name, this allows you to see whether these are references for one object or for
different objects.
15.10.9 Show Language
Selecting this function displays the project language abbreviation in the tree structure. This allows you to see at
a glance which project is in which project language.
15.10.10 Show Language Icons
Selecting this function displays the project flags in the tree structure. This allows you to see at a glance which
project is in which project language.
510
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
15.10.11 Show Reference Counter
When this option is enabled, the number of references will be displayed in the tree structure and an overview of
the references with links will appear in the object editor.
15.11 Tools Menu
This menu contains the Producer central configuration dialog box as well as tools providing general functionality
when working on a project.
15.11.1 Settings...
The Settings...
menu command opens the central configuration dialog box that includes various tabs for
configuring the basic settings of the Producer. The settings are made independent of projects and are therefore
available to every project that is processed using the Producer.
More information about the various settings available can be found in the chapter on the Central Configuration
Dialog Box.
15.11.2 Keyboard Settings...
Many functions in Producer may be executed using keyboard shortcuts (hotkeys). It is important to distinguish
between shortcuts that relate to the Producer menu commands and keyboard shortcuts that relate to particular
actions during the recording of a step. All actions can be assigned or reassigned from default settings to
individually selected keys using the command Tools -> Keyboard Settings... This is where you may also assign
hotkeys to actions that have not been assigned a default shortcut setting.
This function allows the user to freely assign shortcuts to the keys that seem the most logical or are the easiest
to remember.
On the left you will see a complete list of available actions. These are subdivided into groups which can be
selected via a drop-down list box. The list box contains the actions in that group. If an action has been selected,
its name and its current key assignment are displayed. The PC keyboard layout is displayed on the right side of
the screen. Under the keyboard graphic in the Action box the name of the selected action is displayed along with
the previous and new key assignment (if any new assignment has been made).
All keys are color-coded. Yellow indicates the key assigned to the action in question. Red indicates that a key
already has an assignment. Green indicates a free key. Blue indicates whether the Shift, Alt or Ctrl key
needs to be held for the particular action. White fields indicate keys that are not available for individual
assignments.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
511
The currently assigned keyboard shortcut for each of the different keys can be checked by moving the mouse
pointer over it. A small status line under the keyboard displays which action is using the key. Pressing the
Shift, Alt or Ctrl keys is simulated by simply clicking on the corresponding position on the keyboard
display. Clicking it again deactivates it.
To assign a new hotkey, simply click on the green key of your choice. When all changes have been made, click on
OK or Apply in order to activate all hotkeys. If you would like to return to the default settings, simply click on the
button System Default. Individual key assignments can be deactivated using the button Remove Hotkey. The key
will then be available for a new action assignment. Note that the corresponding action can no longer be carried
out with a keyboard shortcut until a new one is assigned.
In addition to default keyboard shortcuts, there are several actions that have no default keyboard shortcuts. You
may assign these shortcuts as you wish.
15.11.3 Localization
This menu contains tools for the import and export of translations as well as executing an automated language
and version change.
15.11.3.1 Export Translation File…
This command exports the manually altered content of all of a project's macros and the value in the field Step
name in the Screen macro to a translation template. This makes it simple for a translator to transfer the texts
into the desired language and then reimport them.
There are two translation template formats available for outputting:

Microsoft Word

XLIFF
The default output format for the translation template is Word. If you would like to create a translation template
in XLIFF then activate the setting Use XLIFF.
You will find additional information on outputting and how to work with translation templates in section
Translating Using Translation Templates. Follow the explanations it contains so as to avoid errors when working
with the translation templates.
Caution
Pictures placed in the bubbles will not be applied to the exported Microsoft Word file.
512
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
15.11.3.2 Import Translation File...
This function reimports a translation that was exported as a translatable and edited by a translator, using the
command Export Translation File... Producer automatically overwrites the contents in the appropriate objects.
15.11.3.3 Revise Input Values... (Project Editor)
The Revise Input Values...
function allows the text box entries or choices made in the project to be revised
prior to a project being automatically translated or rerecorded. The text stored in each Input Text
macro and
the selected entries from list boxes are all listed in a dialog and can be edited.
This function is useful if, because of the target language, entries need to be adapted or an existing piece of data
cannot be deleted after the original recording without additional effort.
Recommendation
For the ReRecording, the project values can be revised directly via the parameter dialog when starting
ReRecording.
15.11.3.4Automated Translation... (Project Editor)
In some cases it is not necessary to record the whole project again if only the contents of the bubbles need to be
translated into a different target language.
The command Automated Translation...
replaces the text modules inserted automatically into the bubbles of
the interactions with text modules of a different language offered by Producer.
In the dialog that appears the desired target language can be chosen.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
513
Clicking on OK replaces all text modules with the text modules of the new target language.
The Automated Translation does not replace the contents of a bubble if the options Interactive Translate
manually in the subcategory Bubble of the macro editor are activated. These options are activated automatically
if either the text of bubble was changed manually or was altered by the function Search & Replace Bubble
Content. However, it also can be activated or deactivated manually at any time.
15.11.3.5 Modify Project Language... (Project Editor)
The dialog Modify Project Language...
allows the project to be switched to another language or one supported
by the Producer. The project language determines in which language the text templates for the automatic
generation of the bubble texts will be used.
15.11.3.6Automated Translation All... (Explorer)
The Automated Translation All... allows you to translate one or more projects in a number of languages. The
projects are duplicated for each language, to keep the original project. The text modules of the
interaction bubbles are replaced with text modules for the selected languages.
Translate the projects as follows:
1.
Select a project or group with projects in the Explorer.
2.
Click on the menu Tools -> Localization -> Automated Translation All...
A dialog box opens.
3.
Select the languages for translation.
4.
Click on OK.
The projects are duplicated and translated.
The automated translation does not replace the contents of a bubble if the option Translate manually is
activated the subcategory Bubble of the macro editor. This option is activated automatically if the bubble
text was changed manually or was altered by the function Search & Replace Bubble Content. The Translate
manually option can also be activated or deactivated manually at any time.
15.11.4 Customization
This menu contains tools for the customization of the content and the playback functionalities:

Edit Style Resources... - Style Editor

Edit Text Styles... - Text Style Editor
514
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview

Edit Color Palette...
15.11.5 Edit Master Tags...
Objects in the explorer can belong to several master tags which can be used later on with filters in order to mask
the content of a workarea for different kinds of users.
You can manage these master tags in the dialog box Edit Master Tags...
.
15.11.6 Bulk Changes
The menu contains automated functions for the editing of a number of macros in a project.
15.11.6.1 Set Bubble Duration...
This command sets the display duration for all the bubbles to the value entered in the dialog using an adjustable
display duration. Prior changes made in the macro editor to the duration of bubbles will be overwritten.
Use the Include Explanation parameter to set whether or not the defined bubble duration should also be used for
inserted Explanation macros or just for the bubbles of the interactions. If this parameter is activated, the
Explanation macros will also be shown with the defined bubble duration.
This parameter should be deactivated if individual times are to be used for the Explanation macros. This is
necessary if the respective macros contain longer texts and thus require more time for processing.
15.11.6.2Auto Crop all Screenshots
The Auto Crop all Screenshots
function creates a crop for a screenshot around the Control selected during
the recording. This entails the crop being applied in accordance with the settings defined in the central
configuration dialog box in the Auto Crop section. These are located in the Authoring Settings area.
Note
While ReRecording a simulation, you can retain the crop you have applied. To do so, activate the Keep
Crop option before starting the ReRecording. Pay attention in this regard to the section Project-specific
settings for ReRecording.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
515
15.11.6.3Uncrop all Screenshots
The Uncrop all Screenshots
function removes all the cropping applied manually or automatically to the
screenshots in a project.
If you only want to remove the crop for individual screenshots, then this is achieved by selecting a Screen macro
or using the Uncrop
function in the macro editor.
15.11.6.4 Merge selected Screens
This command merges all selected macros of the type Screen. The first screenshot is kept and all other selected
Screen macros are deleted. All the related macros are merged in a single step.
It is necessary to amalgamate Screen macros so as to be able to create a form structure or branches.
15.11.6.5Merge Screens
The function allows you to merge a project's Screen macros automatically with a step. This involves merging
sequential steps with identical screenshots i.e. the same application page and it's status, into one step. The
initial Screen macro is retained and the following Screen macros deleted. Subsequent macros are inserted in the
project within the step according to the sequence in which they occur.
The merged Screen macros can now be used for a form structure, for preparing to generate desktop assistant
projects or other post-editing, for example.
Note
To merge specific Screen macros only, refer to the Merge selected Pages function.
Graphical matching and tolerance
The Screen macros are merged by graphically matching the screenshots. The Producer compares individual
screenshot pixels to recognize differences. This includes differences that are already small, such as for example
a drop-down menu that is open on one screenshot and not on another. This menu occupies a particular area on
the screenshot which differs from the one with which it is being compared by a certain percentage.
The degree of percentage match for merging screenshots is defined by the tolerance. This value can be
ascertained in the Central Configuration Dialog using the Merge Screen Tolerance which can be found under
Authoring Settings -> Recording. Increasing the value raises the tolerance threshold. The standard value is 0.4
%, resulting in screenshots that differ by 0.4% or less being merged.
516
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Note
After the function has been executed, check whether the Screen macros have been merged correctly and
that no necessary screenshots have been deleted. It may be necessary to undo the merge, using Undo or
History and repeating the merge with a different tolerance.
Defining a tolerance
The optimal tolerance may differ from one application to the next. We therefore recommend that you test
different application values for different projects. This can be carried out for example by a master author who
then communicates the value identified as being optimal to the authors. When testing you should now ensure
that screenshots that differ only slightly, for example an open drop-down menu, are not merged. The tolerance
threshold should therefore be modified one small step at a time. (Example: increase 0.4% to 0.5%).
We recommend selecting a value greater than 0.0%. With this tolerance, screenshots exhibiting only small
differences, such as small animations or rollover effects, which are typically ignored when comparing
screenshots, are not merged.
15.11.7 Update Dependency Cache
The function allows you to update the dependencies of your workarea. This can be necessary after the migration
of a workarea or the import of an archive with resources from an older version.
After selecting the menu entry, the update is executed.
15.11.8 Import
The menu contains functions for the import of content and files.
15.11.8.1 Import Images as Book Pages... (Explorer)
When creating backgrounds for your book pages, you can save time by importing images into the Producer to
use as a new book page. To import your images, proceed as follows:
1.
In the Explorer, select Tools -> Import-> Images as Book Pages...
2.
Next, select your desired images to import and click on Open. You can select more than one image at a
time. A separate book page will be created for each image selected.
3.
A configuration dialog box will then appear:
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
517
○
Insert as Image Object:
Here you can decide whether the image should be inserted as an image object on the book page or
directly as an image on the book page's background.
○
Orientation: Left/Top:
This defines the position of the image on the book page if you chose to insert the image as an object.
○
Size: Width/Height:
This defines the image’s size. If the image has not been defined as an object, then this setting can be
used to adjust the image's size on the book page’s background.
○
Resample Image:
This option will adjust the image file to the defined width and height. When this option is deactivated,
the file will be imported in its original size.
○
Keep Aspect Ratio:
This option will retain the image’s aspect ratio and adjusts itself to the width of the image
accordingly. This option ensures that the images are not proportionally distorted.
○
Add to Current Book:
If a book is selected to be imported from the Explorer, this option allows you to define whether the
new book page should be inserted into the book. When this option is deactivated, the book page will
be inserted as a stand-alone object at the end of the object tree.
4.
Once the desired values have been entered, confirm by clicking on OK.
The book page with the image will then be created and inserted into the Explorer. The book page’s name will be
the same as the image title.
15.11.8.2Import PowerPoint as Book... (Explorer)
In order to be able to use Microsoft PowerPoint presentations in a more versatile way, the slides can
be converted in book pages in the Producer. This will allow you to complement the slides with other objects,
such as media files. The conversion is performed using the PowerPoint as Book… function.
Importing a PowerPoint file
To import a PowerPoint as a book, proceed as follows:
1.
You can use the Explorer to import your PowerPoint slides as a book.
If you would like to incorporate these slides directly into an existing book, first select the book.
2.
Click on PowerPoint as Book... function in the Tools -> Import menu.
The settings dialog box appears.
3.
Select an Import Method and click on OK.
○
Import all slides from PowerPoint file:
Allows you to specify a PowerPoint file in the File Name parameter.
518
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
○
Import selected slides from PowerPoint file:
Allows you to select PowerPoint slides in an open file.
4.
Confirm the dialog box by clicking on OK.
5.
Open your presentation and select the slides to be imported. Then click on OK in the dialog box displayed
in the Producer.
The slides are now imported into the workarea and converted into image files. Each slide is created as an
individual book page. All the book pages are then consolidated into a book. The book is named using the name
of the PowerPoint file and the book pages are named using the name of the corresponding slide.
You can add additional book pages to the book after it has been created, add additional content to the book
pages or simply retain the presentation in its existing form.
Settings of the dialog box
The dialog box for the import contains the following settings:

Book Title:
Specifies the title of the book. The title of the PowerPoint file is used by default.

Slide Size:
Specifies the size of the PowerPoint slides. The original size of the slides is selected. You can select a
different size or enter a size by using the option User defined.

Language:
Specifies the language of the content. Select the language from the drop-down list.

Book Description:
Specifies the description of the book. You can enter a text.

Keywords:
Specifies keywords for the book. You can enter keywords.

Notes as Book Page Description:
Specifies whether the slide notes are inserted into the book page descriptions.

Notes as Text to Speech Text:
Specifies whether the slide notes are inserted as text for text to speech.

Record Audio After Import:
Once the PowerPoint slides have been imported the book is opened in the book page editor. The Add Audio
dialog box opens where you can record audio. See also the chapter Add Audio Dialog Box.

Add to Current Book:
This option is available, if you select a book from the tree structure. Select this option if you want to
incorporate the PowerPoint slides into the book.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
519
15.11.8.3Import Images... (Project Editor)
This function allows you to import images into a project. The images can be used, for example, to enhance your
project contents with visual information or as an introduction for various sections within a project.
When importing an image into the Producer, a step and the macro Imported Page are automatically created.
To import an image, proceed as follows:
1.
Select the step into which image should be inserted.
2.
Then select Tools -> Import-> Import Images...
3.
A dialog box will appear. Select the desired image or images. Then click on Open.
4.
You can now edit your image if desired.
○
Size: Width/Height:
Enter the desired Width and Height for your image.
○
Display Duration:
This option allows you to define how long an image is visible in the simulation. This image setting can
also be adjusted at a later time in the macro editor.
○
Import as Screen Macro:
When this option is activated, the image will be inserted as a Screen macro instead of an Imported
Page.
Note
This option must be activated if you would like to create branches for your step.
○
Resample Images:
This option will adjust the image file to the defined width and height. When this option is deactivated,
the file will be imported in its original size.
○
Insert Mouse Action:
When this optione is activated, a Mouse Action macro will be inserted in the step aditionally.
5.
Confirm the changes by clicking on OK, and the image will be imported.
Note
If you insert the images as Screen macro, the projects cannot be rerecorded. As the images cannot be
skipped during ReRecording, this leads to errors in the recording process. You should therefore perform a
ReRecording before importing the images.
520
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
15.11.8.4 PowerPoint Import... (Project Editor)
In addition to the regular steps, you can import slides from a PowerPoint document into a project. For example,
these can be used as supporting information for the content of a projector to introduce different sections of a
project.
Slides are converted into images when importing them into the Producer. One step and one Screen macro are
created for each slide and placed in it.
The following steps are necessary when importing PowerPoint slides:
1.
Open the PowerPoint file, from which you would like to import the slides into your project, in PowerPoint.
2.
Select the step after which the PowerPoint slides are to be placed.
3.
In the menu Tools -> Import click on the function PowerPoint Import...
4.
You can now apply settings for displaying the slides. Then click on the OK button to confirm the dialog.
1.
Specify the desired width and height of the slides.
2.
The Display duration defines for how long a slide is visible before the next one is displayed. You can
also subsequently amend this for each individual slide in the macro editor.
3.
Import as Screen macro:
When you activate this setting, the PowerPoint slides are inserted as Screen macro rather than as
Imported Pages. This is necessary if, for example, branches are to be created for an imported slide.
Note
If you insert the PowerPoint slides as Screen macro, the project cannot be rerecorded. As the slides
cannot be skipped during ReRecording, this leads to errors in the recording process. You should
therefore perform a ReRecording before importing the slides.
5.
The next step is to display a dialog requiring you to highlight the slides to be inserted. Switch to
PowerPoint and highlight the slides to be imported in your PowerPoint file's slide outline.
Note
Do not close the dialog until after the slides have been selected as it is the dialog that starts the import
process.
6.
Now confirm the dialog by clicking on OK.
15.11.8.5 Flash Page (Project Editor)
So that project can be made more varied and interesting, the Producer offers the facility for incorporating Flash
video clips. For example, these can display additional explanations or provide summary information about the
sections within a project.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
521
The special Flash Page macro is available for incorporating Flash movie clips (SWF). The inserted file is displayed
as a standalone page as the simulation progresses.
Note
Bear in mind when using the Flash Page macro that a Flash Player for playing back SWF has to be installed
on the workstation of the individual using the projects.
This is how you create a Flash Page macro:
1.
So that the simulation remains clear and easy to follow, it is a good idea to create a new step for the macro.
To do this, go to Add Step
2.
in the Edit menu.
Insert the Flash Page macro in the step using the menu Tools -> Import. You can then edit the macro in the
macro editor.
3.
The Flash video clip to be shown can be incorporated in the macro using the SWF file parameter. To do so,
click on Select file, choose your SWF file and then click on Open.
4.
You can then customize the size of the view using the Width and Height settings.
5.
The content of a Flash video clip is not always suitable for each mode. You can therefore use the Available
in mode parameter to select the mode in which this is to be shown. To do so, activate the relevant type.
Recommendation
For more complex settings and applications, we recommend inserting Flash films as book page objects
and integrating the respective book page into the project.
15.11.9 Workarea Structure
Using the Tools -> Workarea Structure functions, you can export the workarea layout and existing references to
have an overview of them and to edit the workarea structure outside of the Producer. When displaying
references, only groups, projects, books and book pages are taken into consideration.
For further information to the workarea structure import and export see the chapter Adapting the Workarea
Structure Externally.
15.11.9.1 Export Reference List...
Exports an overview of the existing references on the workarea into a CSV file. The objects are listed in the order
in which they appear on the workarea. In addition to this, the superordinate reference and the UID are displayed.
To export a reference list, proceed as follows:
1.
Click on the menu entry Tools -> Workarea Structure -> Export Reference List.
A dialog opens.
522
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
2.
Select a folder as target directory.
3.
Insert a File Name.
4.
Click Save to export the reference list.
Structure of the CSV file
The CSV file includes the following columns:

Referenced Entity:
Contains the objects of the workarea.

Referenced by:
Contains the referenced object.

UID:
Contains the UID for the objects.
15.11.10 Replace Bubble Styles...
The replacing of bubble styles allow you to change the bubbles of a project easily and not to edit each macro
individually. The function can be used for simulation and desktop assistant projects.
The replacing of the bubble style do not influence the content of a project.
To replace a bubble style, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a project or a content tree in the Explorer.
or
Open a project in the project editor.
2.
Click on Tools -> Replace Bubble Styles...
3.
A setting dialog box opens. Adapt the following settings:
○
Starts from (Explorer):
This selection determines the point in the tree structure starting at which the bubble styles should be
replaced. This lets you replace the bubble styles for a specific group. The object selected in the tree
structure is automatically displayed in the setting.
If another starting point is to be selected, this can be done using Edit link...
○
Only selected Macros (Project Editor):
With this setting only the bubble styles of the before selected macros will be replaced.
The setting will be displayed, if the dialog was opened in the project editor for a specific project.
○
Subcategories
The dialog contains subcategories for the project types and modes.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
○
Demo Mode (Simulation)
○
Practice Mode (Simulation)
○
Desktop Assistant
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
523
○
Settings
Each subcategory contains settings, to define the specific content.
○
Set Action Bubbles:
Select a bubble style from the drop-down box.
○
Set Explanation Bubbles:
Select a bubble style from the drop-down box.
○
Use Fallback:
Activate the setting, to use the fallback bubble style.
4.
Confirm the dialog with OK, to replace the bubble styles.
15.11.11 Context Administration
The Context Administration includes functions for the administration of the context information and context
files. The following functions are available about the Tools -> Context Administration menu in the Explorer:

Replace / Append Executables...

Replace Page Key Attributes...

Search and Replace Parameter...
15.11.11.1
Replace or Append Executables...
The function allows you to replace an executable with a different executable or to append an executable with an
additional name. This is required, if an application uses different executables or different applications need to be
supported for the desktop assistant content.
To do so, proceed as follows:
1.
Select a content structure or an object in the Explorer.
OR
Open a project in the project editor.
2.
Start the function by choosing the Replace or Append Executables... menu entry.
3.
A dialog box opens, which contains the following parameters:
1.
Executables:
The drop-down box displays the available executables of the selected contents.
Select the executable that you want to replace or append.
2.
New Executables:
Enter one or more executable names into the text field.
Use a semicolon ';' or a comma ',' (for example: name1.exe,name2.exe or
524
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
name1.exe;name2.exe) to separate multiple executables. Do not enter a space before or after
the semicolon or comma.
4.
Click on Append or Replace.
The executable names are replaced or appended. The dialog box opens again where you can adapt further
executables. Click on Close to close the dialog box.
To remove an executable leave the New Executable field empty and click on Replace.
15.11.11.2
Replace Page Key Attribute...
The function allows you to replace the information of the page keys by regular expressions in simulation or
desktop assistant projects.
For further information see the chapter Customizing Page Information.
15.11.11.3
Search and Replace Parameter...
The function Search and Replace allows you to replace a specific attribute in the context parameters of the
content.
To do so, proceed as follows:
1.
Start the function with the Search and Replace... menu entry.
2.
A dialog opens and includes the following parameters:
3.
○
Search: Specify the entry that should be searched.
○
Replace by: Specify the entry that should be replaced.
Confirm the dialog with Ok.
Afterwards, the search entry is replaced.
SAP Enable Now
Menu Overview
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
525
16 Central Configuration Dialog Box
The central configuration dialog box contains all the global settings for working with Producer as well as the
settings for recording and editing contents and settings for the trainer installed in the current workarea. The
central configuration dialog box is opened via the menu Tools -> Settings...
.
General usage of the central configuration dialog box
The functions and characteristics of the central configuration dialog box are:

Layouts
The most setting pages using different layouts, that can be switched about the title bar.

○
Standard Layout - contains the basic settings
○
Advanced Layout - contains the further settings for advanced users
Green Control
Some of the settings have a green control, that allows it to activate
or deactivate
a setting. A
deactivated setting uses the default settings of the Producer. To edit a deactivated setting, the green
control has to be activated per click.

Project Override
The Project Override subcategory provides specific settings for the currently opened project. The global
settings are not affected.

Default Settings
The Default Settings button allows it to reject executed changes.

Restart
Some of the settings require a Producer restart before they become active. In this case a dialog shows up
when the settings are applied or the dialog is closed.
16.1 Initialization and Fallback Default Parameters
Parameters defined in the central configuration dialog are differentiated in terms of how they are used into initial
and so-called fallback parameters. This involves differentiating according to whether they are supposed to
initiate a global default of the available parameters or overwrite non-individualized parameters.
Note
Parameters are saved for each workarea where they are filed under Resources -> Configurations
.
Particularly close attention is to be paid to this if individual parameter settings are also to be made
available to other authors or used as a Workarea standard when connecting to Manager.
526
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
16.1.1 Use in the Macro Settings
Macro Initialization and Macro Fallback Defaults allow you to define specific macro parameters across a
workarea. However, they do not apply in the case of individualized parameter definitions (with green lamp
activated).
Macro Initialization
You can use the Macro Initialization to define all of the relevant macros' parameters prior to the project creation
process, thus ensuring the greatest possible project consistency. Parameters that are predefined using Macro
Initialization are shown as being activated in the relevant macro settings (the green lamp preceding the
parameter is activated). That means they they are unaffected by changes in the Macro Fallback Defaults.
Note
Note that Project Initialization depict initial parameters. The parameter definitions they contain only apply
once they have been established and are not applied to already existing projects.
MacroFallback Defaults
The Macro Fallback Defaults allow you to determine parameters in all of the workarea's previously recorded
projects, thereby ensuring, for example, consistency within the workarea upon conclusion of the project
creation process. Unlike when defining Macro Initialization parameter settings made via the Macro Fallback
Defaults in the relevant macros are NOT shown as being activated (the green lamp preceding the parameter
remains inactive). The advantage of this is that settings specified using Macro Fallback Defaults can always be
changed globally again.
Note
Note that Macro Fallback Defaults only take effect in NON activated parameter data.
16.1.2 Application Example
The following case study is intended to explain the different Macro Initialization and Macro Fallback Defaults
application examples using the explanation bubble.
When creating the workarea prior to recording the projects, it needs to be stipulated that all explanatory bubbles
to be inserted should use the Info display type. The author can apply any necessary variances himself on a case
by case basis although as a matter of principle the explanatory bubble should be used for this type of
information.
To avoid inconsistencies as a result of omitting this parameter configuration and to free the author from having
to reapply this setting each time, this setting is defined as a Macro default.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
527
To this end, parameter type (2) is defined in the central configuration dialog under Authoring Settings -> Macro
Initialization (1) -> Explanation. It will then be placed in the explanatory bubble in all the projects that are to be
recorded.
Once all projects have finished recording, it is recognized in the workarea finalization process that most
explanatory bubble content contains excessively detailed additional information, thus distorting in Test mode
what the learner has actually learned. As this was not considered in the planning phase, the parameter In Test
mode was not activated in any of the recorded projects and consequently was not defined either. At this point,
the extra effort of rectifying all the projects manually can be avoided by amending the specific Macro alternate
parameter. Deactivating the parameter In Test mode (2) in the central configuration dialog in Playback Settings > Macro Fallback Defaults parameter (1) -> Explanation deactivates the parameter in all workarea projects.
Note
Note that Macro Fallback Defaults only take effect with default parameters, namely ones which have not
been changed. Activated parameters (green lamp) are unaffected when an alternate parameter is
changed.
16.2 Producer
The Producer area contains the basic settings for the administration of the Producer. Further there are
configurations of the tools and the functions for the creation and editing of content.

General
The settings page influences the appearance and the use of specific editing tools of the Producer.

Manager Workarea
The settings page influences the communication between the local and Manager workarea.

Directories
The settings page defines the auto save function and the automatic update of the Producer.

Save
The settings page defines the modes, which will be created when generating a project. All modes are
activated by default.

Templates
The settings page defines the templates for the creation of content objects.

Expert Features
The settings activate additional Producer functions. Note, that the functions are not covered by the
standard support package and do not represent standard guaranteed system properties.
528
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
16.2.1 General
Settings are located in this category which influence the appearance and the use of specific editing tools of
Producer.
Some of the settings require Producer to be restarted before they become active. In this case you will be
informed by a dialog as soon as the settings are applied or the dialog closes.

Primary Language:
Defines interface language of the Producer.

Secondary Language:
Defines the fallback user interface language of the Producer. In the primary language not available
translations will be shown in the secondary language.

Default Language for Spell Checking:
This option defines a default language to be used for spell checking. Typically the language used is the one
defined for an object. If no language package for Windows Office is installed, the Producer uses the defined
default language.

Spell Check:
Activates spell checking for the HTML editor. This requires an installed spell checker for Microsoft Word.

Drag&Drop Macro Editing:
Specifies, that macros can be moved with drag&drop in the project editor.

Advanced Accessibility Features:
Enables the advanced accessibility features (magnifiers) of the Producer.
If the features are not needed, deactivate the option to save memory.

Move Time with Macros:
The effect of this option is that when a macro is inserted or removed, the other macros are seamlessly
shifted along the timeline or any gaps arising are closed. Move time with macros enables the other macros
to seamlessly shift along the timeline when a macro is inserted or removed. When a macro is inserted, all
subsequent macros shift back along the timeline by the exact duration of the inserted macro. If a macro is
deleted within a step, the resulting gap is automatically closed.

Max. most recently used folders:
This allows you to define how many of the recently opened directories are to be displayed in file dialogs.

Show disabled warnings:
If dialogs were suppressed by selecting the option Don't show this message again, activating this parameter
can redisplay the dialogs.

Use old Office formats:
This option is used to generate documents in the 97-2003 Office format (doc/ppt). If the option is
deactivated, the docx/pptx formats are generated.

Generate trainer on closing Producer:
Specifies whether the library should be generated when closing the Producer.
It is recommended to deactivate the setting, if the workarea includes a large number of objects.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
529

Forbid Active Content:
With activated setting files of the type JS, HTM and HTML cannot be imported. This avoids it to import
active content, which can contain dangerous content.
16.2.2 Manager Workarea
The settings in this category influence the communication between the local and Manager workarea.
The main parts of the settings page are:

General:
The settings influence the creation and the handling of a Manager workarea.

Workflow Settings:
The settings define the behavior and the default values of the workflow dialog.

Recursive Operations:
The settings define, whether an operation is executed for an object and their sub-objects or only for the
object.

Show Tree Selection:
The settings define, whether the tree selection dialog is displayed when executing an operation.
16.2.3 Directories
The settings in this category affect the paths used by Producer for saving settings and other program
components, as well as the Autosave functionality.

Updates' path:
This allows automatic updates for associated resources to be configured. In the process, an administrator
creates a central folder in which the new resources are filed. When the path is specified, the new resources
are imported into the Workarea when the Producer is launched.

Autosave:
When this option is activated, projects are saved automatically at regular intervals with the time increment
entered under Autosave Interval.

Autosave Interval:
The value entered here specifies the frequency in minutes with which projects are automatically backed up
if the option Use Autosave is activated.
16.2.4 Save
Generate modes
530
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
In this area you can define which modes are to be created when saving a project. All modes are activated by
default. Deactivate a mode for a particular project type if you do not wish to generate that mode.

Desktop Assistant
○

Desktop Assistant
Standard (Simulation)
○
Demo
○
Practice
○
Test
○
Concurrent
○
Guided Presentation
○
Free Presentation
Generate HTML start page (only Simulation)
With this settings HTML pages with mode links are generated when saving a project. The HTML pages can be
used to start a mode from a web page. The files are stored in the project folders.

Generate HTML to start:
Generates a HTML page with links to start each generated mode of a project.

Generate HTML for each mode to start:
Generates a HTML page for each generated mode to start a mode directly.
16.2.5 Templates
Under Settings, you can configure standard templates for use when creating new objects in the workarea. A
template is an object that has been created with predefined settings and properties. For more detailed
information, refer to the section on Templates for objects in the workarea in this user guide.
Templates can be created for the following types of objects:

Group

Project

Book

Book page

Text unit
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
531
16.2.6 Expert Features
In this category you may activate additional Producer functions that have been reserved for special users. This
is accomplished by entering parameters in the list. The syntax used for an entry follows this example:
Feature=1;
One entry per line can be made. 1 activates a feature, 0 deactivates it without deleting the line.
Note that additional functionality created by entries made in this tab is not covered by the standard support
package offered by SAP SE and are not standard guaranteed system properties.
16.3 Authoring Settings
The Authoring Settings area contains settings for the creation, recording and editing of simulation projects as
soon as for the creation of book pages.
The Authoring Settings are a resource type of the Adaptable Resources.

Record - General
The settings on this page define the recording of projects and include settings for the object recognition
and the screenshot creation.

Audio (Simulation)
The settings on this page define the usage of audio in simulation projects.

Auto Crop (Documentation)
The settings on this page define the cropping area for the auto crop function of documentation.

Recording (Simulation)
The settings on this page include functions for the recording of controls as soon as automated editing
functions which will be executed during the recording.

ReRecording (Simulation)
The settings on this page include functions for the rerecording of controls and for the handling of conflict
situations.

Macro Initialization (Simulation)
The Macro Initialization area includes the initial settings for all editable parameters of the macros. The
settings should be set before the recording or the insert of a macro to take effect.

Book Page Editor (Book Page)
The settings define the grid lines of the book pages in the book page editor as well as the snapping
behavior when moving an object in relation to other objects.

Book Page Initialization (Book Page)
The Book Page Initialization area includes the default settings for all editable parameters of the book page
objects. The settings should be set before the recording or the insert of an object to take effect.
532
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
16.3.1 Recording - General
The settings in this category are used when recording simulation projects. They control the way screenshots are
made when recording an application and object recognition is performed.
If a project is opened, the additional subcategory Project Overrides is available. It provides specific settings,
which apply only to the currently open project.
Settings

Record Bar Position:
Specifies the position of the record bar during the recording. The positions are: Top, Bottom or Minimized.

Area:
Specifies the area for recording the screenshot and controls. There are two types:
Region:
○
Allows you to record a specified area of the screen. The area can be specified in the Size parameter.
Active Window:
○
Allows you to record the window currently in the foreground.

Size:
Specifies the size of the recording area for the selected Region option. Select a predefined size from the
dropdown box.
You can specify a size manually in the input field (top, left, width, height) or click on Edit Size
to
display a selection border.
Recommendation
If you would like to show the change of application in the task bar of the simulation, the recording area
needs to be enlarged for the task bar.

Fit Application Window:
Maximizes the application window to the recording area when you start recording and when you reposition
the window.

Fit Newly Opened Application Window:
Maximizes a newly opened application window to the recording size during the recording. The setting is
active, if the setting Fit Application Window has been activated.

Disable Path Building:
During recording path information is saved for the rerecognition of objects during rerecording. You can
deactivate path building, if the recording is very time intensive and no rerecoding is required.

Automatic Profile Change:
If application changes are performed during the recording process, the selected application profile might
need to be adapted. This option specifies for this situation whether the profile is changed automatically
during the recording process.
If the always change option is selected and no application profile is associated with the application window,
the standard profile will be used.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
533

Record Hot Keys:
Specifies that keyboard shortcuts used during the recording are recorded.

Generate Inspection Pages:
This option is used to save additional information that forms the basis for subsequent control recognition.
It can be used in a later process for additional control recognition. The process can be time intensive.

Control Recognition Method:
Specifies the method for the recognition of controls during recording.
○
Profound Recognition:
Recognizes controls by using interfaces to read page and object information. The method is
recommended for recording projects used for rerecording and desktop assistant conversion.
○
Simple Recognition:
Recognizes controls as graphical objects. This is required, for example, when recording using Citrix or
when using terminal applications.
An individual cursor is displayed for this setting if the Allow Rollover Effects option is deactivated.
Note
When recording using the Simple Recognition option, the mouse option In dialog fields automatically jump
to the standard button is deactivated in the Microsoft Windows settings. This mouse attribute impairs
control recognition functionality by preventing mouse movements.

Allow RollOver Effects:
Specifies whether rollover effects are suppressed during recording when moving the cursor over a control.
This prevents the menu from being accidentally changed, for example, with rollover effects not visible on
the screenshot.

Recording Mode:
Specifies the mode used for recording a simulation. The activated mode can be started by using the
Record Application toolbar button.
○
Quick Recording:
Allows you to record a project quickly without object recognition.
○
Profile-Based Recording:
Allows you to record a project using application profiles for object recognition.
This mode is recommended, when using projects for rerecording and desktop assistant.
○
Both Recording Modes:
The recording mode can be selected when you start recoding. This allows you to select a recording
mode that is specific for the use case.
Fallback method for object recognition

Fallback Method:
Specifies the method for recording controls, which are not correctly identified during recording:
○
Recognize Hotspot:
Creates a macro for the clicked position. The object name and field image are recorded and the
534
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
macro settings are defined using standard values.
Once the recording is complete, the macro can be edited in the macro editor.
16.3.2 ReRecording
A number of different settings can be made for ReRecording in the central configuration dialog box.
The following settings can be adjusted:
General

Response Time:
This value entered here defines how long the Producer waits during the ReRecording process for a new
screen to be rendered before performing and recording the next action in the application. The value is
entered in milliseconds. Should the default value of 2 seconds (2000ms) not be sufficient because your
application response time is longer, you should increase this value.

Keep Crop:
This setting specifies that a layout that was set up for a Screen macro is to be kept intact.
If this setting is deactivated, the layout will not be applied during ReRecording. This can be necessary if a
control is at a different position in the new version of an application and the layout has to be reset.

Keep bubble orientation:
Activating this setting retains the selected bubble orientation. If this option is deactivated the orientation
of the bubble may change relative to the original project according to the position and size of the object to
be rerecorded.

Language dependent type:
If this parameter has been activated, the name of the Control is a clue that can be used to recognize it
during ReRecording. This is useful in new versions of an application in which corresponding Controls
occupy a different position or are differently designed. A search then takes place for this Control via the
relevant interface using the associated name.
Automatic Mode

Hotspot Handling:
This setting defines how a click range is to be edited during automatic ReRecording of a project.
○
No Editing:
If this option is selected a Hotspot is recorded automatically by Producer. In the process the Producer
uses the recorded position to identify a control device at this position. If no control device is identified
a Hotspot is recorded at this point.
○
Interactive:
With this option the rerecording changes at a Hotspot from the automatic to the interactive mode. As
a result it is possible to edit the Hotspot. Refer to the chapter on interactive ReRecording for this.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
535

Drop down list interactive:
Activate this setting to rerecord the drop down lists of your project interactively during the automatic
ReRecording. Thus the particular choice can be influenced manually.
Interactive mode

Bubble Style:
This parameter defines which bubble is displayed in the editor during ReRecording when a control device is
edited.
16.3.3 Audio
The settings on this page define the usage of audio in simulation projects and for book pages.

Recording Device:
Specifies the audio device for recording. Click on Configure… to open a system dialog with further settings
for the device.

Bubble Text for Text to Speech:
Specifies the mode for the bubble text for converting text to speech.

Voice for Text to Speech:
Specifies a voice for generating text to speech. The dropdown list displays the installed voices.

Audio Format:
Sets the global audio format. The standard format shows default in the entry and a changed format shows
current.
○
Editing Format:
Sets the audio format used for content editing.
○
Output Format:
Sets the audio format used for content publishing.
16.3.4 Macro Initialization
The Macro Initialization area includes the initial settings for all editable parameters of the macros. The settings
override the default settings of the Producer and should be set before the recording or the insert of an element
to take effect. To initialize the parameters allow it to achieve consistency in the content creation and to reduce
the editing effort.
The area is separated into the macro groups:

Interactions

Special Macros

Page Macros
536
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box

Quiz Items

Documentation Macros
16.3.5 Book Page Editor
Here you can define the grid lines for the book pages in the book page editor as well as the snap-in-place
function with the ledger lines, which is a helpful tool when dragging an object to ensure that they are properly
aligned with other objects.
Configuring the grid
The grid is part of the background and assists you in precisely designing the layout of your objects on a book
page. You can define the space between the grid lines as well as the distance from the upper-left corner. The
settings for the grid are:

Grid Spacing Horizontal

Grid Spacing Vertical

Grid Offset Left

Grid Offset Top
Configuring the snap-in-place function
You can activate and deactivate the Snap-in-place option as well as define which objects should use this option
and how much distance there should be between the object and the grid area where it will be snapped into place.
If this option is activated, when dragging an object, it will automatically lock to the grid, which facilitates
positioning objects and helps to maintain conformity and accuracy throughout your project. The settings for the
snapping are:

Show Snap Positions

Enable Snapping

Snapping Distance

Snap to Objects

Snap to Centers

Snap to Guiders

Snap to Grid

Snap to inner Border

Snap to outer Border
Recommendation
You can activate the snapping of objects temporally with pressed Ctrl key. For that deactivate the
snapping in general and activate the snapping to specific objects.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
537
16.3.6 Book Page Initialization
The Book Page Initialization area includes the initial settings for all editable parameters of the book page objects.
The settings override the default settings of the Producer and should be set before the recording or the insert of
an object to take effect. To initialize the parameters allow it to achieve consistency in the content creation and
to reduce the editing effort.
The area is separated into the book page object groups:

Action Objects

Layout

Link Buttons

Media Objects

Book Page Objects
16.4 Playback Settings
The Playback Settings area contains settings for the playback of simulation projects and of book pages which,
will be interpreted at runtime of the trainer, book reader and library functionalities.
The Playback Settings are a resource type of the Adaptable Resources.

General (Simulation)
The settings on this page define the properties of simulation projects for the playback.
Specific settings for an opened project can be set on the Project Override subpage.

trainer (Simulation)
The settings on this page define the playback and tracking of content and the properties of the trainer
functionality.
The settings are the global settings for the use of the trainer functionality. Individual settings can be set on
the pages library, book reader or for each mode.

book reader
The settings on this page define the playback and tracking of content and the properties of the book reader
functionality.

library
The settings on this page define the playback of content and the properties of the library functionality.

Mode Settings
The settings on these pages define the playback and tracking for each mode.
Specific settings for an opened project can be set on the Project Override subpage.
There are the following modes:
538
○
Demo Mode
○
Practice Mode
○
Test Mode
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box

○
Concurrent Mode
○
Guided Presentation Mode
○
Free Presentation Mode
Macro Fallback Defaults
The Macro Fallback Defaults area includes the fallback settings for all and deactivated (green lamp
)
parameters of the macros.

Book Page Fallback Defaults
The Book Page Fallback Defaults area includes the fallback settings for all and deactivated (green lamp
)
parameters of the book page objects.
16.4.1 General
The settings here define how highlights and bubbles are displayed globally for all projects contained in the
current workarea. They are used as default settings for all recorded highlights and bubbles. For changed
settings to take effect, the modes of a project need to be generated again.
In the subcategory Project Overrides the same group of settings can also be applied specifically to the current
project only. The global settings for all projects are not affected.

Explanation Link (Forward):
In the parameter you can specify a link text or image, which will be used for continuing a simulation in the
displayed explanation bubble. The text may contain HTML attributes.

Show Note in Test Mode:
If this option is activated, a bubble is displayed in test mode which contains a link which opens an
additional window in demo mode showing the actual step and closing it again afterwards. The bubbles for
entry fields also show the explanation from practice mode.

Step-Based Demo Playback (Audio off):
Having deactivated the trainer bars audio button, this parameter will suppress automatic playback of
Demo mode. Instead every step has to be confirmed manually by clicking the automatically inserted Next
button within the action bubble. With activated audio, the playback will resume automatically when step
based audio has finished.

Show Mouse:
This option also shows the mouse pointer for actions that are performed in the application with the mouse.
By default the mouse pointer is hidden.
Setting subcategories
There are the following subcategories of the settings:

Highlights:
Contains settings for the style of highlights.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
539

Bubbles:
Contains settings for the style and the behavior of bubbles.

Quiz:
Contains settings for the display and the behavior of the quiz playback.
See also Central Settings for Quizzes.

Page Style:
Contains settings for the style of simulation pages.
See also Designing Simulation Pages.

Feedback:
Contains settings for the feedback during playback of the test mode or the practice mode.

Video:
Contains duration settings for content pages for the video generation.
16.4.2 Macro Fallback Defaults
The Macro Fallback Defaults area includes the fallback settings for all and deactivated (green lamp) parameters
of the macros. The settings take effect during the playback of the content and can always be changed. To set
fallback defaults allows it, to achieve consistency and to set parameters centrally.
The area is separated into the macro groups:

Interactions

Special Macros

Page Macros

Quiz Items

Documentation Macros
Note
Note that the Macro Fallback Defaults only take effect in non-activated parameter data.
16.4.3 Book Page Fallback Defaults
The Book Page Fallback Defaults area includes the fallback settings for all and deactivated (green lamp)
parameters of the book page objects. The settings take effect during the playback of the content and can always
be changed. To set fallback defaults allows it, to achieve consistency and to set parameters centrally.
The area is separated into the book page object groups:

Action Objects

Layout
540
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box

Link Buttons

Media Objects

Quiz Items

Book Page Objects
Note
Note that the Book Page Fallback Defaults only take effect in non-activated parameter data.
16.4.4 Settings of trainer, book reader, library and
Modes
The following chapters contain information about the setting areas and settings of:

trainer

book reader

library

Demo Mode

Practice Mode

Test Mode

Concurrent Mode

Guided Presentation Mode

Free Presentation Mode
16.4.4.1 Visual Properties
The Visual properties section contains the following settings:

Show Focus Layer:
Displays a gray layer to highlight the required control of the current step.
The focus layer is not supported in Enterprise Mode of the Internet Explorer 11.
Consider for each mode, when using the option:
○
Demo mode: Shows a focus layer for the current control.
○
Practice mode: Shows a focus layer for the required control if Show Help was selected for a wrong
action.
○
Test mode: Shows a focus layer for the required control if Show Help was selected for a wrong action.
○
Concurrent mode: Shows a focus layer for the current control.
○
Guided Presentation mode: No focus layer can be shown.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
541
○

Free Presentation mode: No focus layer can be shown.
Show start page / Show end page:
When playing back a simulation, for each mode a start page can be displayed which explains the mode and
what the user has to expect. When the simulation is over or was closed, a stop page is displayed in order to
indicate that the mode has been terminated. In test mode the stop page also informs the user if he passed
the test or not.
16.4.4.2 Audio
The trainer uses different audio channels to playback audio content. These channels allow authors to
preconfigure the volume of the audio and learners can change the volume during playback.
The following channels can be modified in the Audio subcategory for the Playback Settings of trainer Global, book reader and for each simulation mode:
Setting
Description
Specifies the initial general volume of audio files (0-
General
100). The volume of all other sound channels depends
on this setting.
Narrative
Book sound
Effects
Simulation sound
Specifies the initial volume (0-100) of the sound
channels Explanations and Page Sound.
Specifies the initial volume (0-100) of the sound
channel Book Sound.
Specifies the initial volume (0-100) of the sound
channel Effects.
Specifies the initial volume (0-100) of the sounds that
is played in simulations.
A volume slider is displayed for each audio channel in the control bar of the trainer bar or book reader bar.
16.4.4.3 Function Keys
Using the key functions, you can control the trainer via the keyboard. These correspond to the button
functionality.
The key functions are defined by default for Demo mode and Concurrent mode and the trainer, as it is possible to
542
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
manipulate the sequence of events in these modes. For the book reader and the library the hotkeys for Back,
Next and Feedback are used.
The following keys are assigned by default to their respective functions:
Function
Key
Play
Space
Pause
Space
Stop
Back
Left
Next
Right
Feedback
Ctrl + F1

Ignore Hotkeys for Browser:
Defines that the hotkeys of the browser cannot be used during content playback. The learner can use only
the navigations of the trainer and the specified hotkeys.
The following hotkeys will not be prevented:
Safari: CTRL+F, CTRL+P, CTRL+O
Internet Explorer: CTRL+P, CTRL+O, ALT+Home opens a new window
16.5 Desktop Assistant: Authoring Settings
The Desktop Assistant: Authoring Settings area contains settings for the creation, recording and editing of
desktop assistant content.
The Desktop Assistant: Authoring Settings are a resource type of the Adaptable Resources.

Macro Initialization
The Macro Initialization area includes the default settings for all editable parameters of the macros. The
settings should be set before the recording or the insert of a macro to take effect.
16.5.1 Macro Initialization
The Macro Initialization area includes the initial settings for all editable parameters of the macros. The settings
override the default settings of the Producer and should be set before the recording or the insert of a macro to
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
543
take effect. To initialize the parameters allow it to achieve consistency in the content creation and to reduce the
editing effort.
16.6 Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings
The Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings area contains settings for the playback of desktop assistant content,
which will be interpreted at runtime of the Desktop Assistant.
The Desktop Assistant: Playback Settings are a resource type of the Adaptable Resources.

General
The settings on this page define the properties of desktop assistant content for the playback.
Specific settings for an opened project can be set on the Project Override subpage.

Macro Fallback Defaults
The Macro Fallback Defaults area includes the fallback settings for all and deactivated (green lamp
)
parameters of the macros.

Desktop Assistant Settings
The Desktop Assistant area contains settings for the playback of desktop assistant content.
16.6.1 Macro Fallback Defaults
The Macro Fallback Defaults area includes the fallback settings for all and deactivated (green lamp) parameters
of the macros. The settings take effect during the playback of the content and can always be changed. To set
fallback defaults allows it, to achieve consistency and to set parameters centrally.
Note
Note that the Macro Fallback Defaults only take effect in non-activated parameter data.
16.6.2 Desktop Assistant - Style and Windows
The settings for the appearance of the windows and sidebar are:

Style:
Defines the appearance of the desktop assistant's components. You can select a style from the resources.

Show Only Sidebar on Start:
Specifies if only the sidebar is displayed instead of the main window when the desktop assistant is started.

Alignment:
Defines the alignment of the window on the screen. The option Free allows you to define a position in the
544
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
associated parameter.
Available for sidebar, main window and book window.

Position (Free):
Defines the window's position (left, top) for Free alignment on the screen. The values are given in pixels.
Available for main window and book window.

Size:
Defines the size (width, height) of the main window in pixels.
Available for main window and book window.
16.6.3 Desktop Assistant - Sidebar
You can specific the position of a control in the sidebar for the playback of the desktop assistant.
The settings for the sidebar are:

Position: 'Content' Control

Search
The following settings allow you, to configure the search of content:
○
Search Type:
Activates the search and specifies the search type. A control is displayed in the sidebar.
You can search in the library or in the desktop assistant content.
○
Search Group:
Allows you to define a group of the workarea for searching content in the library.
○

Position: 'Search' Control
External Search
The following settings allow you, to configure the external search of content:
○
URL
○
Provide Context Information
○
Context Information

Position: 'Instant Help' Control

Position: 'Add Sticky Note' Control

Request Content
The following settings allow you, to configure the request of content:
○
Request Content Type
○
Request Content E-Mail / URL:
Allows you to specify an e-mail address or a URL.
○
Request Content URL Params:
Allows you to specify the parameters for the author URL.
○
Position: 'Request Content' Control
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
545

Position: 'Recording' Control
Control Position
For each control you can specify a position in the sidebar. The controls can be positioned on the main level of
the sidebar, some controls can also be positioned in the submenu. For the submenu a control is displayed to
open the submenu.
Note
Make sure, to select for each control a unique position in the sidebar. For each position only one control is
displayed.
16.6.4 Desktop Assistant - Content and Behavior
The settings for the content and behavior are:

Use Text from:
Defines the text type for the desktop assistant. The default is Short Description.

Default Start Content:
Defines the mode or the document format to be started by default from the content list.

Default Start Document:
Defines the document type, if a document is set in the Default Start Content setting.

Show 'Info' Tab:
Displays an control in the main window to display an info text. The info text can be entered in the short
description of the desktop assistant group.

Show 'Share Content' Control

Consider Roles:
Activates the use of roles for the display of content during playback.
See also Using Roles.

Hide Instant Help in Guided Tour:
Defines, that all instant help information are hidden during playback of the guided tour. If the guided tour
has been finished, the instant help will be shown again.
16.7 Documentation Settings
The Documentation Settings area contains settings for the creation of documentation. The properties of each
documentation type can be specified individually.
The Documentation Settings are a resource type.
546
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Further information to the documentation settings is available in the chapter Documentation Settings.
SAP Enable Now
Central Configuration Dialog Box
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
547
17 Technical Support
Please use the SAP Incident Wizard on the SAP Support Portal to submit your incidents on the following
components:

KM-WPB // Enable Now

KM-WPB-PRO // Enable Now – Producer

KM-WPB-IPR // Enable Now – Instant Producer

KM-WPB-MGR // Enable Now – Manager

KM-WPB-NAV // Enable Now – Desktop Assistant

KM-WPB-CXH // Enable Now – Context Sensitive Help

KM-WPB-APR // Enable Now – Application Profiles

KM-WPB-SMI // Enable Now – Solution Manager Integration
Using the SAP Support Portal
If you are not familiar with the SAP Support Portal, read the following information:

To access the SAP Support Portal you need an S-user ID and password. You can request access data from
your SAP Super Administrator or register online on the SAP Support Portal page under Registration.

With this user, you have read-access to all the contents of the SAP Support Portal, you can use the SAP
Community Network and SAP Help Portal, and you can also book courses under SAP Education.

If you want to work with the support applications (Incident Wizard, license key request, system data
maintenance, manage remote connections, software download and so on), you need the corresponding
authorizations, which your SAP Super Administrator can give you.

You can find information for new users and about support applications on the Support Portal Homepage
under Learn More. There you can also register for a personal overview demonstration of the SAP Support
Portal.

In case of problems with SAP Support Portal contact your local Customer Interaction Center.
An online web form is available on http://support.sap.com/contactus. This web form should be used for
all written communication with your local customer interaction center. More Details about Incident
Processing, Support Addresses and Hotline Numbers can be found here:
http://service.sap.com/sap/support/notes/560499

Are you interested in a tour through the SAP Support Portal? Register for an online demo.
Diagnosis function in Producer
The Producer diagnosis function can also be used to check the technical data of the installation on your
computer (version, operating system, browser, etc.). Open Producer and select Diagnosis… by using the Help
548
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
SAP Enable Now
Technical Support
menu. The Producer transmits the required information automatically and lists this in a corresponding dialog
box. This information can also be saved as a text file and sent as an E-mail attachment to the SAP support staff.
SAP Enable Now
Technical Support
Customer
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
549
www.sap.com
© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE
or an SAP affiliate company. The information contained herein may
be changed without prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors. National product specifications may vary.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty
of any kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for
errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only
warranties for SAP or SAP affiliate company products and services
are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well
as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other
countries. All other product and service names mentioned are the
trademarks of their respective companies.
Please see http://www.sap.com/corporateen/legal/copyright/index.epx for additional trademark information
and notices.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement